0% found this document useful (0 votes)

35 views642 pages

Configuration Guide - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)

Uploaded by

thato69

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

35 views642 pages

Configuration Guide - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)

Uploaded by

thato69

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 642

HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router

V600R003C00

Configuration Guide - MPLS

Issue 02
Date 2011-09-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes related MPLS configurations supported by the NE80E/40E, including
the basic principle and configuration procedures of static LSPs, MPLS LDP, MPLS TE, MPLS
features, and MPLS OAM, and provides related configuration examples. The appendixes list
common glossary, and acronyms and abbreviations of MPLS.

NOTE

l This document takes interface numbers and link types of the NE40E-X8 as an example. In working
situations, the actual interface numbers and link types may be different from those used in this
document.
l On NE80E/40E series excluding NE40E-X1 and NE40E-X2, line processing boards are called Line
Processing Units (LPUs) and switching fabric boards are called Switching Fabric Units (SFUs). On
the NE40E-X1 and NE40E-X2, there are no LPUs and SFUs, and NPUs implement the same functions
of LPUs and SFUs to exchange and forward packets.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E V600R003C00

Router

Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is:

l Data Configuration Engineer

l Commissioning Engineer
l Network Monitoring Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if not avoided,

result in serious injury or death.
DANGER

Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that could, if

not avoided, result in moderate or minor injury.
WARNING

Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation that could,

if not avoided, result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
TIP Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points in the main text.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.

# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in previous issues.

Changes in Issue 02 (2011-09-10)

The second commercial release has the following updates.
l MPLS TE Configuration
– 3.17.3 (Optional) Configuring the Path Overlapping Function for Hot-standby
CR-LSPs is added in this chapter to describe how to configure the path overlapping
function. The path overlapping function can be configured for hot-standby CR-LSPs,
allowing a hot-standby CR-LSP to use links of a primary CR-LSP. After the hot-standby
CR-LSP is established, it can protect traffic on the primary CR-LSP.
– The section Configuring a Timer for LDP FRR Protection is deleted because the timer
for LDP FRR protection is not supported.

Changes in Issue 01 (2011-05-30)

Initial commercial release.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Static LSPs Configuration............................................................................................................1
1.1 Introduction to Static LSPs.................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Overview of Static LSPs............................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Static LSPs Features Supported by the NE80E/40E.................................................................................2
1.2 Configuring Static LSPs.....................................................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................2
1.2.2 Configuring the LSR ID............................................................................................................................3
1.2.3 Enabling MPLS.........................................................................................................................................4
1.2.4 Configuring the Ingress for a Static LSP...................................................................................................4
1.2.5 Configuring the Transit for a Static LSP...................................................................................................5
1.2.6 Configuring the Egress for a Static LSP....................................................................................................5
1.2.7 Checking the Configuration.......................................................................................................................6
1.3 Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP..............................................................................................................6
1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................7
1.3.2 Enable Global BFD Capability..................................................................................................................7
1.3.3 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Ingress............................................................................8
1.3.4 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Egress...........................................................................10
1.3.5 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................12
1.4 Maintaining Static LSPs...................................................................................................................................12
1.4.1 Clearing MPLS Statistics.........................................................................................................................12
1.4.2 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability..................................................................................13
1.4.3 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP.........................................................................................................13
1.5 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................13
1.5.1 Example for Configuring Static LSPs.....................................................................................................14
1.5.2 Example for Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP..............................................................................21

2 MPLS LDP Configuration..........................................................................................................28

2.1 Introduction to MPLS LDP..............................................................................................................................30
2.1.1 MPLS LDP Overview.............................................................................................................................30
2.1.2 MPLS LDP Features Supported by the NE80E/40E...............................................................................30
2.2 Configuring LDP Sessions...............................................................................................................................32
2.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................32

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

2.2.2 Configuring the LSR ID..........................................................................................................................34

2.2.3 Enabling MPLS.......................................................................................................................................35
2.2.4 Enable Global MPLS LDP......................................................................................................................35
2.2.5 (Optional) Configuring the LDP Dynamic Capability Announcement Function....................................36
2.2.6 Configuring LDP Sessions......................................................................................................................37
2.2.7 (Optional) Configuring LDP Transport Addresses.................................................................................38
2.2.8 (Optional) Configuring LDP Timers.......................................................................................................39
2.2.9 (Optional) Configuring LDP Authentication...........................................................................................44
2.2.10 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................46
2.3 Configuring LDP LSP......................................................................................................................................49
2.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................49
2.3.2 Configuring LDP LSP.............................................................................................................................50
2.3.3 (Optional) Configuring Label Advertisement Modes.............................................................................50
2.3.4 (Optional) Configuring LDP to Automatically Trigger the Request in DoD Mode................................51
2.3.5 (Optional) Configuring Loop Detection..................................................................................................52
2.3.6 (Optional) Configuring LDP MTU Signaling.........................................................................................53
2.3.7 (Optional) Configuring an Inbound LDP Policy.....................................................................................54
2.3.8 (Optional) Configuring an Outbound LDP Policy..................................................................................55
2.3.9 (Optional) Configuring the Policy of Triggering to Establish LSPs.......................................................57
2.3.10 (Optional) Configuring the Policy of Establishing Transit LSPs..........................................................58
2.3.11 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................58
2.4 Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP..............................................................................................59
2.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................59
2.4.2 Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP.....................................................................................60
2.4.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................61
2.5 Configuring the LDP Multi-Instance................................................................................................................61
2.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................61
2.5.2 Configuring the LDP Multi-Instance.......................................................................................................62
2.5.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................63
2.6 Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP..............................................................................................................63
2.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................63
2.6.2 Enabling Global BFD Capability............................................................................................................64
2.6.3 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Ingress..........................................................................64
2.6.4 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Egress...........................................................................66
2.6.5 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................68
2.7 Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP........................................................................................................69
2.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................69
2.7.2 Enabling Global BFD Capability............................................................................................................70
2.7.3 Enabling MPLS to Establish BFD Session Dynamically........................................................................70
2.7.4 Configuring the Triggering Policy of Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP........................................................71
2.7.5 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters....................................................................................................72
2.7.6 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................73

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

2.8 Configuring Manual LDP FRR........................................................................................................................74

2.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................75
2.8.2 Enabling Manual LDP FRR....................................................................................................................75
2.8.3 (Optional) Allowing BFD to Modify the PST.........................................................................................76
2.8.4 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................77
2.9 Configuring LDP Auto FRR.............................................................................................................................77
2.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................77
2.9.2 Enabling LDP Auto FRR.........................................................................................................................78
2.9.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................78
2.10 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and IGP....................................................................................79
2.10.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................79
2.10.2 Enabling Synchronization Between LDP and IGP................................................................................80
2.10.3 (Optional) Setting the Hold-down Timer Value....................................................................................81
2.10.4 (Optional) Setting the Hold-max-cost Timer Value..............................................................................82
2.10.5 (Optional) Setting the Delay Timer Value............................................................................................83
2.10.6 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................84
2.11 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes.....................................................................84
2.11.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................84
2.11.2 Enabling Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes.................................................................86
2.11.3 (Optional) Setting a Hold-down Timer.................................................................................................87
2.11.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................87
2.12 Configuring LDP GTSM................................................................................................................................88
2.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................88
2.12.2 Configuring LDP GTSM.......................................................................................................................89
2.12.3 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................89
2.13 Configuring LDP GR......................................................................................................................................90
2.13.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................90
2.13.2 Enabling LDP GR..................................................................................................................................91
2.13.3 (Optional) Configuring GR Restarter Timer.........................................................................................92
2.13.4 (Optional) Configuring the timer of GR Helper....................................................................................92
2.13.5 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................93
2.14 Maintaining MPLS LDP.................................................................................................................................93
2.14.1 Resetting LDP........................................................................................................................................94
2.14.2 Clearing MPLS Statistics.......................................................................................................................94
2.14.3 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability................................................................................95
2.14.4 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP.......................................................................................................95
2.15 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................95
2.15.1 Example for Configuring Local LDP Sessions.....................................................................................96
2.15.2 Example for Configuring Remote MPLS LDP Sessions.......................................................................99
2.15.3 Example for Configuring LSPs by Using LDP...................................................................................103
2.15.4 Example for Configuring LDP to Automatically Trigger a Request in DoD Mode...........................106
2.15.5 Example for Configuring an Inbound LDP Policy..............................................................................113

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

2.15.6 Example for Configuring an Outbound LDP Policy...........................................................................118

2.15.7 Example for Configuring Transit LSPs Through the Prefix List........................................................122
2.15.8 Example for Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP............................................................128
2.15.9 Example for Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP............................................................................135
2.15.10 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP....................................................................141
2.15.11 Example for Configuring Manual LDP FRR....................................................................................145
2.15.12 Example for Configuring LDP Auto FRR.........................................................................................151
2.15.13 Example for Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and IGP..................................................159
2.15.14 Example for Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes...................................166
2.15.15 Example for Configuring LDP GTSM..............................................................................................171
2.15.16 Example for Configuring LDP GR....................................................................................................174

3 MPLS TE Configuration...........................................................................................................180
3.1 Introduction to MPLS TE...............................................................................................................................183
3.1.1 MPLS TE Overview..............................................................................................................................183
3.1.2 MPLS TE Features Supported by the NE80E/40E................................................................................183
3.2 Configuring Static CR-LSP............................................................................................................................186
3.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................186
3.2.2 Enabling MPLS TE...............................................................................................................................187
3.2.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth...............................................................................................188
3.2.4 Configuring the MPLS TE Tunnel Interface.........................................................................................189
3.2.5 Configuring the Ingress of the Static CR-LSP......................................................................................190
3.2.6 Configuring the Transit of the Static CR-LSP.......................................................................................191
3.2.7 Configuring the Egress of the Static CR-LSP.......................................................................................191
3.2.8 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................192
3.3 Configuring a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP.........................................................................................193
3.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................193
3.3.2 Enabling MPLS TE...............................................................................................................................194
3.3.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth...............................................................................................195
3.3.4 Configuring a Tunnel Interface on the Ingress......................................................................................195
3.3.5 Configure the Ingress of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP............................................................197
3.3.6 Configure a Transit Node of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP......................................................197
3.3.7 Configure the Egress of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP.............................................................198
3.3.8 Configuring the Tunnel Interface on the Egress....................................................................................199
3.3.9 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................199
3.4 Configuring an RSVP-TE Tunnel..................................................................................................................200
3.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................200
3.4.2 Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP-TE.......................................................................................................201
3.4.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth...............................................................................................202
3.4.4 Configuring OSPF TE...........................................................................................................................203
3.4.5 Configuring IS-IS TE............................................................................................................................204
3.4.6 (Optional) Configuring an MPLS TE Explicit Path..............................................................................205
3.4.7 Configuring the MPLS TE Tunnel Interface.........................................................................................206

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.4.8 Configuring Constraints for an MPLS TE Tunnel................................................................................207

3.4.9 (Optional) Configuring RSVP Resource Reservation Style..................................................................208
3.4.10 Configuring CSPF...............................................................................................................................209
3.4.11 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................210
3.5 Referencing the CR-LSP Attribute Template to Set Up a CR-LSP...............................................................211
3.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................212
3.5.2 Configuring a CR-LSP Attribute Template...........................................................................................213
3.5.3 Setting Up a CR-LSP by Using a CR-LSP Attribute Template............................................................215
3.5.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................216
3.6 Adjusting RSVP Signaling Parameters..........................................................................................................217
3.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................217
3.6.2 Configuring RSVP Hello Extension......................................................................................................218
3.6.3 Configuring RSVP Timers....................................................................................................................219
3.6.4 Configuring RSVP Refresh Mechanism................................................................................................220
3.6.5 Enabling Reservation Confirmation Mechanism..................................................................................221
3.6.6 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................221
3.7 Configuring RSVP Authentication.................................................................................................................222
3.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................222
3.7.2 Configuring RSVP Key Authentication................................................................................................223
3.7.3 (Optional) Configuring the RSVP Authentication Lifetime..................................................................225
3.7.4 (Optional) Configuring the Handshake Function..................................................................................225
3.7.5 (Optional) Configuring the Message Window Function.......................................................................226
3.7.6 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................228
3.8 Adjusting the Path of CR-LSP........................................................................................................................228
3.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................228
3.8.2 Configuring Administrative Group and Affinity Property....................................................................230
3.8.3 Configuring SRLG................................................................................................................................231
3.8.4 Configuring CR-LSP Hop Limit...........................................................................................................232
3.8.5 Configuring Metrics for Path Calculation.............................................................................................232
3.8.6 Configuring Tie-Breaking of CSPF.......................................................................................................234
3.8.7 Configuring Failed Link Timer.............................................................................................................234
3.8.8 Configuring Loop Detection..................................................................................................................235
3.8.9 Configuring Route Pinning....................................................................................................................236
3.8.10 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................237
3.9 Adjusting the Establishment of MPLS TE Tunnels.......................................................................................237
3.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................238
3.9.2 Configuring the Tunnel Priority............................................................................................................238
3.9.3 Configuring Re-optimization for CR-LSP............................................................................................239
3.9.4 Configuring Tunnel Reestablishment Parameters.................................................................................240
3.9.5 Configuring Route Record and Label Record.......................................................................................241
3.9.6 Configuring the RSVP Signaling Delay-Trigger Function...................................................................241
3.9.7 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................242

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

3.10 Adjusting the Traffic Forwarding of an MPLS TE Tunnel..........................................................................242

3.10.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................242
3.10.2 Configuring IGP Shortcut....................................................................................................................243
3.10.3 Configuring Forwarding Adjacency....................................................................................................244
3.10.4 Configuring Switching Delay and Deletion Delay..............................................................................245
3.11 Adjusting Flooding Threshold of Bandwidth Change..................................................................................246
3.11.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................246
3.11.2 Configuring Flooding Threshold.........................................................................................................247
3.12 Configuring Automatic Adjustment of the Tunnel Bandwidth....................................................................248
3.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................248
3.12.2 Configuring Auto Bandwidth Adjustment..........................................................................................249
3.12.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................250
3.13 Configuring the Limit Rate of MPLS TE Traffic.........................................................................................251
3.13.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................251
3.13.2 Configuring the Limit Rate of MPLS TE Traffic................................................................................252
3.13.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................252
3.14 Configuring DS-TE Tunnel..........................................................................................................................253
3.14.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................253
3.14.2 Configuring DS-TE Mode...................................................................................................................254
3.14.3 Configuring DS-TE Bandwidth Constraints Model............................................................................256
3.14.4 (Optional) Configuring TE-Class Mapping Table...............................................................................256
3.14.5 Configuring Link Bandwidth...............................................................................................................258
3.14.6 Configuring the Tunnel Interface........................................................................................................259
3.14.7 Configuring the Static CR-LSP and the Bandwidth............................................................................261
3.14.8 Configuring the RSVP CR-LSP and Its Bandwidth............................................................................262
3.14.9 Configuring Mappings Between CTs and Flow Queues.....................................................................264
3.14.10 (Optional) Configuring the Interface Class Queue............................................................................266
3.14.11 Checking the Configuration...............................................................................................................267
3.15 Configuring MPLS TE FRR.........................................................................................................................268
3.15.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................268
3.15.2 Enabling TE Fast Reroute....................................................................................................................269
3.15.3 Configuring Bypass Tunnels...............................................................................................................270
3.15.4 (Optional) Configuring the Scanning Timer for FRR.........................................................................272
3.15.5 (Optional) Modifying PSB and RSB Timeout Multiplier...................................................................273
3.15.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................273
3.16 Configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR................................................................................................................274
3.16.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................274
3.16.2 Enabling the TE Auto FRR.................................................................................................................275
3.16.3 Enabling the TE FRR and Configuring the Auto Bypass Tunnel Attributes......................................276
3.16.4 (Optional) Configuring the Scanning Timer for FRR.........................................................................277
3.16.5 (Optional) Modifying PSB and RSB Timeout Multiplier...................................................................278
3.16.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................278

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

3.17 Configuring CR-LSP Backup.......................................................................................................................279

3.17.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................279
3.17.2 Configuring CR-LSP Backup..............................................................................................................280
3.17.3 (Optional) Configuring the Path Overlapping Function for Hot-standby CR-LSPs...........................281
3.17.4 (Optional) Locking an Attribute Template for Backup CR-LSPs.......................................................282
3.17.5 (Optional) Configuring the Dynamic Bandwidth Function for a Hot-standby CR-LSP.....................283
3.17.6 (Optional) Configuring a Best-Effort LSP..........................................................................................284
3.17.7 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................285
3.18 Configuring Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and the Backup CR-LSP............................................287
3.18.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................287
3.18.2 Enabling Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and the Backup CR-LSP........................................288
3.18.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................289
3.19 Configuring RSVP GR.................................................................................................................................289
3.19.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................289
3.19.2 Enabling the RSVP Hello Extension Function....................................................................................290
3.19.3 Enabling Full GR of RSVP.................................................................................................................291
3.19.4 (Optional) Enabling the RSVP GR Support Function.........................................................................292
3.19.5 (Optional) Configuring Hello Sessions Between RSVP GR Nodes....................................................292
3.19.6 (Optional) Modifying Basic Time.......................................................................................................293
3.19.7 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................294
3.20 Configuring Static BFD for CR-LSP............................................................................................................294
3.20.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................294
3.20.2 Enabling BFD Globally.......................................................................................................................296
3.20.3 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Ingress of the Tunnel................................................................296
3.20.4 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Egress of the Tunnel.................................................................297
3.20.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................299
3.21 Configuring Static BFD for TE....................................................................................................................300
3.21.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................300
3.21.2 Enabling BFD Globally.......................................................................................................................301
3.21.3 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Ingress of the Tunnel................................................................302
3.21.4 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Egress of the Tunnel.................................................................303
3.21.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................304
3.22 Configuring Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP......................................................................................................306
3.22.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................306
3.22.2 Enabling BFD Globally.......................................................................................................................307
3.22.3 Enabling the Capability of Dynamically Creating BFD Sessions on the Ingress...............................307
3.22.4 Enabling the Capability of Passively Creating BFD Sessions on the Egress......................................308
3.22.5 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters................................................................................................309
3.22.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................310
3.23 Configuring Dynamic BFD for RSVP..........................................................................................................311
3.23.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................311
3.23.2 Enabling BFD Globally.......................................................................................................................312

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

3.23.3 Enabling BFD for RSVP.....................................................................................................................313

3.23.4 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters................................................................................................314
3.23.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................315
3.24 Configuring LDP over TE............................................................................................................................316
3.24.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................316
3.24.2 Configuring Forwarding Adjacency....................................................................................................317
3.24.3 Establishing LDP Remote Peers on the Two Ends of the TE Tunnel.................................................318
3.24.4 (Optional) Configuring the Policy for Triggering the Establishment of an LSP.................................318
3.24.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................319
3.25 Maintaining MPLS TE.................................................................................................................................319
3.25.1 Checking the Connectivity of the TE Tunnel......................................................................................319
3.25.2 Checking a TE Tunnel By Using NQA...............................................................................................320
3.25.3 Checking Information About Tunnel Faults........................................................................................320
3.25.4 Clearing the Operation Information....................................................................................................320
3.25.5 Resetting the Tunnel Interface.............................................................................................................321
3.25.6 Resetting the RSVP Process................................................................................................................321
3.25.7 Deleting or Resetting the Bypass Tunnel............................................................................................321
3.25.8 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP.....................................................................................................322
3.26 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................322
3.26.1 Example for Establishing a Static MPLS TE Tunnel..........................................................................322
3.26.2 Example for Configuring a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP.........................................................329
3.26.3 Example for Configuring a 1:1 Tunnel Protection Group Over a Bidirectional LSP.........................334
3.26.4 Example for Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel.......................................................................................341
3.26.5 Example for Setting Up a CR-LSP by Using the CR-LSP Attribute Template..................................349
3.26.6 Example for Configuring RSVP Authentication.................................................................................357
3.26.7 Example for Configuring Tunnel Properties.......................................................................................362
3.26.8 Example for Configuring SRLG (TE Auto FRR)...............................................................................374
3.26.9 Example for Configuring SRLG (Hot-standby)..................................................................................383
3.26.10 Example for Configuring the Limit Rate for TE Tunnel Traffic.......................................................391
3.26.11 Example for Configuring a DS-TE Tunnel in Non-IETF Mode (MAM)..........................................395
3.26.12 Example for Configuring a DS-TE Tunnel in IETF Mode (RDM)...................................................410
3.26.13 Example for Switching the Non-IETF Mode to the IETF Mode......................................................429
3.26.14 Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR.........................................................................................436
3.26.15 Example for Configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR................................................................................447
3.26.16 Example for Configuring RSVP Key Authentication (RSVP-TE FRR)...........................................455
3.26.17 Example for Configuring RSVP-TE Summary Refresh (RSVP-TE FRR).......................................463
3.26.18 Example for Configuring Board Removal Protection.......................................................................470
3.26.19 Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby...............................................................................478
3.26.20 Example for Locking an Attribute Template for Hot-standby CR-LSPs..........................................485
3.26.21 Example for Configuring the Dynamic Bandwidth Function for a Hot-standby CR-LSP................494
3.26.22 Example for Configuring Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and the Backup CR-LSP............503
3.26.23 Example for Configuring RSVP GR.................................................................................................510

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

3.26.24 Example for Configuring Static BFD for CR-LSP............................................................................517

3.26.25 Example for Configuring Static BFD for TE....................................................................................522
3.26.26 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP......................................................................531
3.26.27 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for RSVP..........................................................................536
3.26.28 Example for Configuring LDP over TE............................................................................................545
3.26.29 Example for Advertising MPLS LSR IDs to Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................554
3.26.30 Example for Configuring an Inter-Area Tunnel................................................................................559

4 MPLS Common Configuration...............................................................................................569

4.1 Introduction to MPLS Common Configuration..............................................................................................570
4.1.1 Overview of MPLS Common Features.................................................................................................570
4.1.2 MPLS Common Features Supported by the NE80E/40E......................................................................570
4.2 Configuring the Mode in Which MPLS Handles the TTL.............................................................................570
4.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................571
4.2.2 Configuring MPLS Uniform Mode.......................................................................................................572
4.2.3 Configuring MPLS Pipe Mode..............................................................................................................572
4.2.4 Configuring the Path Taken by ICMP Response Packets.....................................................................573
4.3 Configuring the Load Balancing of MPLS Layer 3 Forwarding....................................................................574
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................574
4.3.2 Configuring Layer 3 MPLS Forwarding in UCMP Mode....................................................................574
4.4 Optimizing MPLS...........................................................................................................................................575
4.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................575
4.4.2 Configuring PHP...................................................................................................................................576
4.4.3 Configuring the MPLS MTU of the Interface.......................................................................................576
4.4.4 Configuring the Interval for Collecting MPLS Statistics......................................................................577
4.4.5 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................578
4.5 Maintaining MPLS Common Configuration..................................................................................................578
4.5.1 Clearing MPLS Statistics.......................................................................................................................578
4.5.2 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability................................................................................578

5 MPLS OAM Configuration.....................................................................................................580

5.1 Introduction to MPLS OAM...........................................................................................................................581
5.1.1 MPLS OAM Overview..........................................................................................................................581
5.1.2 MPLS OAM Features Supported by the NE80E/40E...........................................................................581
5.2 Configuring Basic MPLS OAM Functions of LSP........................................................................................584
5.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................584
5.2.2 Configuring MPLS OAM on the Ingress..............................................................................................585
5.2.3 Configuring MPLS OAM on the Egress...............................................................................................586
5.2.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................588
5.3 Configuring MPLS OAM Protection Switching of LSP................................................................................588
5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................589
5.3.2 Configuring a Tunnel Protection Group................................................................................................590
5.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Protection Switching Trigger Mechanism.................................................592
5.3.4 (Optional) Enabling MPLS OAM to Detect Bidirectional LSPs..........................................................592

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

5.3.5 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................594

5.4 Maintaining MPLS OAM...............................................................................................................................594
5.4.1 Monitoring the Running of MPLS OAM..............................................................................................594
5.4.2 Monitoring the Running of Protection Group.......................................................................................595
5.5 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................595
5.5.1 Example for Configuring MPLS OAM to Detect a Static LSP.............................................................595
5.5.2 Example for Configuring MPLS OAM Protection Switching..............................................................603

A Glossary......................................................................................................................................617
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................623

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1 Static LSPs Configuration

About This Chapter

You can set up a static LSP by manually allocating labels to LSRs. The static LSP is applicable
to stable and small-scale networks.
1.1 Introduction to Static LSPs
You need to allocate labels to LSRs in manual mode to set up a static LSP.
1.2 Configuring Static LSPs
A static LSP can be set up only after each LSR is manually configured.
1.3 Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP
By configuring static BFD for static LSPs, you can detect connectivity of static LSPs.
1.4 Maintaining Static LSPs
The operations of static LSP maintenance include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity or reachability of an LSP, and configuring the trap function on an LDP LSP.
1.5 Configuration Examples
The following sections provide several examples of the static LSP configurations. Familiarize
yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram. Each configuration
example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration
roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1.1 Introduction to Static LSPs

You need to allocate labels to LSRs in manual mode to set up a static LSP.

1.1.1 Overview of Static LSPs

The static LSP cannot be set up through a label distribution protocol but can be set up by an
administrator. The static LSP is applicable to a stable and small-scaled network with the simple
topology.
When configuring a static LSP, the administrator needs to manually allocate labels for each LSR
by following the rule that the value of the outgoing label of the previous node is equal to the
value of the incoming label of the next node. Each LSR on the static LSP cannot sense the
changes of other LSRs on the LSP. Therefore, the static LSP is a local concept.
A static LSP is set up without using label distribution protocols, and does not need to exchange
control packets. Thus, the static LSP consumes few resources and is applicable to small-scale
networks with simple and stable topology. The static LSP cannot vary with the network topology
dynamically. The administrator needs to adjust the static LSP according to the network topology.

1.1.2 Static LSPs Features Supported by the NE80E/40E

Static LSPs features supported by the system include configuring Static LSPs and Static BFD
for Static LSP.

Static LSPs
Static LSPs need to be configured manually by the administrator. Each LSR on the static LSP
cannot sense the status of the entire LSP, because the static LSP is a local concept. A static LSP
cannot vary with the change of a route dynamically. The administrator then needs to adjust the
static LSP.

Static BFD for Static LSPs

The NE80E/40E supports static BFD for static LSPs. BFD is a bidirectional detection
mechanism. When static BFD is applied to static LSPs which are unidirectional, the reverse links
can be either IP links or static LSPs.

1.2 Configuring Static LSPs

A static LSP can be set up only after each LSR is manually configured.

1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring a static LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you rapidly and correctly
finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
A static LSP works normally only after all the LSRs along the LSP are configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

The setup of static LSPs does not require the label distribution protocol or exchange any control
packet. Thus, the static LSPs consume little resources and are applicable to small-scale networks
with simple and stable topology. The static LSPs cannot vary with the network topology
dynamically. The administrator, therefore, needs to adjust the static LSPs according to the
network topology.

Static LSPs and static CR-LSPs share the same label space (16 - 1023).

Static LSPs are used over the MPLS L2VPN.

For information about the MPLS L2VPN configuration, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/
40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring static LSPs, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring the static unicast route or an IGP to connect LSRs on the network layer

Data Preparation
To configure static LSPs, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Name of the static LSP

2 Destination address and mask

3 Value of incoming label or outgoing label on each LSR

4 Next hop address or outgoing interface on the ingress

5 Incoming interface, next hop address, or outgoing interface on the transit node

6 Incoming interface on the egress

1.2.2 Configuring the LSR ID

Before enabling MPLS, you must configure LSR ID.

Context
When configuring an LSR ID, note the following:

l The LSR ID must be configured before other MPLS commands are run.
l The LSR ID does not have a default value, and must be configured manually.
l It is recommended to use the address of the loopback interface of the LSR as the LSR ID.
l To modify the configured LSR ID, you must run the undo mpls command in the system
view to delete all the MPLS configurations.

Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls lsr-id lsr-id

The LSR ID of the local node is configured.

lsr-id: It is in dotted decimal notation and identifies an LSR.

----End

1.2.3 Enabling MPLS

MPLS features can be configured only after MPLS is enabled.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

MPLS is enabled globally and the MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 4 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface to participate in MPLS forwarding is specified.

Step 5 Run:
mpls

MPLS is enabled on the interface.

----End

1.2.4 Configuring the Ingress for a Static LSP

To set up a static LSP, you need to configure the ingress node in manual mode.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the LSR to be configured as the ingress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-lsp ingress lsp-name destination ip-address { mask-length | mask }
{ nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-number }
out-label out-label

The LSR is configured as the ingress on the specified LSP.

NOTE

It is recommended to set up a static LSP by specifying a next hop. In addition, ensure that the local routing
table contains the route entries, including the destination IP address and the IP address of the next hops,
which exactly match the specified destination IP address and next hop address of the LSP to be set up.

----End

1.2.5 Configuring the Transit for a Static LSP

To set up a static LSP, you need to configure the transit node in manual mode.

Context
Do as follows on the LSR to be configured as a transit node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-lsp transit lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number in-
label in-label { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-type
interface-number } out-label out-label

The LSR is configured as the transit node on the specified LSP.

NOTE

----End

1.2.6 Configuring the Egress for a Static LSP

To set up a static LSP, you need to configure the egress node in manual mode.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the LSR to be configured as the egress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number in-
label in-label [ lsrid ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-id ]

The LSR is configured as the egress on the specified LSP.

----End

1.2.7 Checking the Configuration

After a static LSP is set up, you can view that the static LSP is Up and the route status is Ready.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the static LSP function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls static-lsp [ lsp-name ] [ { include | exclude } ip-address mask-
length ] [ verbose ] command to check the static LSP.
l Run the display mpls route-state [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ { exclude |
include } { idle | ready | settingup } * | destination-address mask-length ] [ verbose ]
command to check the LSP route on the ingress.

----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, run the preceding commands, and you can view as follows:

l When the display mpls static-lsp command, information about the static LSP
configuration is displayed, including the name of the static LSP, FEC, values of the
incoming label and the outgoing label, and the incoming and outgoing interfaces. In
addition, you can view that the status of the LSP is Up.
<HUAWEI> display mpls static-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC LSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
lsp1 3.3.3.9/32 NULL/100 -/GE1/0/0 Up

1.3 Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP

By configuring static BFD for static LSPs, you can detect connectivity of static LSPs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring static BFD for static LSPs, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you rapidly and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
BFD is used to detect the connectivity of the static LSP that is established manually.

NOTE

When the static BFD works on the static LSP, the BFD session can be created for non-host routes.
BFD for LSP can function properly though the forward path is an LSP and the backward path is an IP link.
The forward path and the backward path must be established over the same link; otherwise, if a fault occurs,
BFD cannot identify the faulty path. Before deploying BFD, ensure that the forward and backward paths
are over the same link so that BFD can correctly identify the faulty path.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring static BFD for static LSP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring the static LSP

NOTE

For the static CR-LSP bound to an MPLS TE tunnel, the BFD is available after it is bound to the MPLS
TE tunnel.

Data Preparations
Before configuring static BFD for a static LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Name of static LSP

2 BFD configuration name

3 Parameters of reverse channel

l IP link: IP address of egress, outgoing interface (optional), and source IP address
(optional)
l Dynamic LSP: IP address of egress, address of next hop in LSP, and egress
(optional)
l Static LSP: LSP name
l MPLS TE: number of an MPLS TE tunnel

4 Local discriminator and remote discriminator of a BFD session

1.3.2 Enable Global BFD Capability

You can enable BFD globally on both ends of a link to be detected.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

Context
Do as follows on each LSR at both ends of the link to be detected:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

This node is enabled with the global BFD function. The BFD global view is displayed.

----End

1.3.3 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Ingress

To detect a static LSP through a static BFD session, you need to configure BFD parameters on
the ingress node of the static LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the static LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd cfg-name bind static-lsp lsp-name

The BFD session is bound to the static LSP.

Step 3 Configure the discriminators.
l Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

l Or, run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

Step 4 (Optional) Run the following commands to adjust the minimum interval for the local device to
send BFD packets, the minimum interval for receiving BFD packets and the local BFD detection
multiple:
1. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
2. Run the mpls command to globally enable MPLS and the enter the MPLS view.
3. Run the mpls bfd min-tx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
the local device to send BFD packets.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

The minimum interval for the local device to send BFD packets is set.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
Actual interval for the local device to send BFD packets = MAX { Locally configured
interval for sending BFD packets, Remotely configured interval for receiving BFD
packets}; Actual interval for the local to receive BFD packets = MAX {Remotely
configured interval for sending BFD packets, Locally configured interval for receiving
BFD packets}; Local detection period = Actual interval for the local device to Receive BFD
packets x Remotely configured BFD detection multiple.
For example, assume that the values of parameters are as follows:
l On the local device, the interval for sending BFD packets is set to 200 ms, the interval
for receiving BFD packets is set to 300 ms, and the detection multiple is set to 4.
l On the peer device, the interval for sending BFD packets is 100 ms, the interval for
receiving BFD packets is 600 ms, and the detection multiple is 5.
Then,
l On the local device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 600 ms calculated
by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
300 ms calculated by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, and the detection period
is 1500 ms calculated by 300 ms multiplied by 5.
l On the peer device, the actual interval for sending local BFD packets is 300 ms obtained
by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
600 ms obtained by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, and the detection period
is 2400 ms obtained by 600 ms multiplied by 4.
4. Run the mpls bfd min-rx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
receiving BFD packets.
The minimum interval for receiving BFD packets is adjusted on the local device.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
5. Run the mpls bfd detect-multiplier multiplier command to adjust the local BFD detection
multiple.
The default value is 3.
6. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
7. Run the bfd cfg-name command to enter the BFD session view.
Step 5 Run:
process-pst

BFD session is configured to change the interface status table.

When the BFD session status changes, the static LSP status in the interface status table is
modified.
Step 6 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

When configuring the BFD session of the static LSP, note the following:
l When the static LSP status goes Up, a BFD session is renewed.
l When the static LSP status goes Down, the BFD session becomes Down too.
l When the static LSP is deleted, the session and configuration entries of BFD are deleted.

----End

1.3.4 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Egress

To detect a static LSP through a static BFD session, you need to configure BFD parameters on
the egress node of the static LSP.

Context
The IP link, LSP, or TE tunnel can be used as the reverse tunnel to inform the ingress of a fault.
To avoid affecting BFD detection, an IP link is preferentially selected to inform the ingress of
an LSP fault. The process-pst command is prohibited when a reverse tunnel is configured. If
the configured reverse tunnel requires BFD detection, you can configure a pair of BFD sessions
for it.
Do as follows on the egress of the LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Configure BFD sessions:
l For the IP link, run:
bfd cfg-name bind peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
[ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ source-ip source-ip ]

l For the dynamic LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind ldp-lsp peer-ip ip-address nexthop ip-address [ interface
interface-type interface-number ]

l For the static LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind static-lsp lsp-name

l For MPLS TE, run:

bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number [ te-lsp ]

Step 3 Configure the discriminators.

l Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

l Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1. Run the quit command to return to the system view.

2. Run the mpls command to globally enable MPLS and the enter the MPLS view.
3. Run the mpls bfd min-tx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
the local device to send BFD packets.
The minimum interval for the local device to send BFD packets is set.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
Actual interval for the local device to send BFD packets = MAX { Locally configured
interval for sending BFD packets, Remotely configured interval for receiving BFD
packets}; Actual interval for the local to receive BFD packets = MAX {Remotely
configured interval for sending BFD packets, Locally configured interval for receiving
BFD packets}; Local detection period = Actual interval for the local device to Receive BFD
packets x Remotely configured BFD detection multiple.
For example, assume that the values of parameters are as follows:
l On the local device, the interval for sending BFD packets is set to 200 ms, the interval
for receiving BFD packets is set to 300 ms, and the detection multiple is set to 4.
l On the peer device, the interval for sending BFD packets is 100 ms, the interval for
receiving BFD packets is 600 ms, and the detection multiple is 5.
Then,
l On the local device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 600 ms calculated
by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
300 ms calculated by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, and the detection period
is 1500 ms calculated by 300 ms multiplied by 5.
l On the peer device, the actual interval for sending local BFD packets is 300 ms obtained
by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
600 ms obtained by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, and the detection period
is 2400 ms obtained by 600 ms multiplied by 4.
4. Run the mpls bfd min-rx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
receiving BFD packets.
The minimum interval for receiving BFD packets is adjusted on the local device.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
5. Run the mpls bfd detect-multiplier multiplier command to adjust the local BFD detection
multiple.
The default value is 3.
6. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
7. Run the bfd cfg-name command to enter the BFD session view.
Step 5 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1.3.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of detecting a static LSP through a static BFD session, you can view the
BFD configuration, BFD session information, BFD statistics, and the status of the static LSP.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the static BFD for static LSP function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display bfd configuration { all | static } [ for-lsp ] command to check the BFD
configuration.
l Run the display bfd session { all | static } [ for-lsp ] command to check information about
the BFD session.
l Run the display bfd statistics session { all | static } [ for-ip | for-lsp ] command to check
information about BFD statistics.
l Run the display mpls static-lsp [ lsp-name ] [ { include | exclude } ip-address mask-
length ] [ verbose ] command to check the status of the static LSP.

----End

1.4 Maintaining Static LSPs

The operations of static LSP maintenance include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity or reachability of an LSP, and configuring the trap function on an LDP LSP.

1.4.1 Clearing MPLS Statistics

By running the reset command, you can delete MPLS statistics.

Context

CAUTION
MPLS statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Therefore, confirm the action before you
run the following commands.

Procedure
l Run the reset mpls statistics interface { interface-type interface-number | all } command
in the user view to clear the statistics of the MPLS interface.
l Run the reset mpls statistics lsp { lsp-name | all } command in the user view to clear LSP
statistics.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

1.4.2 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability

By running the ping or tracert command, you can detect connectivity or reachability of an LSP.

Context
You can run the following commands in any view to perform MPLS ping and MPLS tracert.

MPLS ping is performed.

If draft6 is specified, the command is implemented according to draft-ietf-mpls-lsp-
ping-06. By default, the command is implemented according to RFC 4379.
l Run:
tracert lsp [ -a source-ip | -exp exp-value | -h ttl-value | -r reply-mode | -
t time-out ] * ip destination-address mask-length [ ip-address ] [ nexthop
nexthop-address | draft6 ]

MPLS tracert is performed.

If draft6 is specified, the command is implemented according to draft-ietf-mpls-lsp-
ping-06. By default, the command is implemented according to RFC 4379.
----End

1.4.3 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP

By configuring the trap function on an LSP, you can notify the NMS of the changes of the LSP
status.

Context
Run the following commands in the system view to notify the Network Management System
(NMS) of the LSP status change.
By default, the trap function is disabled during the setup of the LDP LSP.

Procedure
l Run the snmp-agent trap suppress feature-name lsp trap-name { mplsxcup |
mplsxcdown } trap-interval trap-interval [ max-trap-number max-trap-number ]
command in the system view to enable the trap function for the LDP LSP and enable the
debugging of excessive mplsxcup or mplsxcdown.
----End

1.5 Configuration Examples

The following sections provide several examples of the static LSP configurations. Familiarize
yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram. Each configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration

roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Follow-up Procedure
NOTE

This document takes interface numbers and link types of the NE40E-X8 as an example. In working
situations, the actual interface numbers and link types may be different from those used in this document.

1.5.1 Example for Configuring Static LSPs

This section provides an example for configuring a static LSP.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-1, the LSRs support MPLS and OSPF as an IGP running on the MPLS
backbone network.
Bidirectional static LSPs are set up between LSRA and LSRD. The LSP from LSRA to LSRD
is LSRA -> LSRB -> LSRD; the LSP from LSRD to LSRA is LSRD -> LSRC -> LSRA.

Figure 1-1 Networking diagram of configuring static LSPs

Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32
P
/0 10 OS2
S 1/0 /30 .2. /0
PO 1.1.
2 1.1 /0
. /30 P
0 0 10 OS1
Loopback1
1/0/ 30 1 LSRB Loopback1
.2. /0/ 4.4.4.9/32
1.1.1.9/32 O S 1 / 1.2 0
P 1.1. /30
.
10

P
LSRA 1 OS /0 LSRD
0.3 2/0
.1. /0 S 2/0 /30
2
1/3 LSRC PO 4.1.
0 POS .
10 /0 10
.3. 1/0/
1.2 0 S 2/0 /30
/30 PO 4.1.1
.
10
Loopback1
3.3.3.9/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the IP address of each interface, set the loopback address as the LSR ID, and use
OSPF to advertise the network segments to which the interfaces are connected and the LSR
ID host route.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

2. Enable MPLS globally on each LSR.

3. Enable MPLS on the interfaces.
4. Specify the destination address, outgoing interface or next hop, outgoing label for the LSP
on the ingress LSR.
5. Specify the incoming interface, outgoing label corresponding to the incoming label of the
last, outgoing interface or next hop of the LSP on the transit.
6. Specify the incoming interface and the incoming label that is the same as the outgoing label
from the last LSR of the LSP on the egress.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP addresses of the interfaces on each LSR as shown in Figure 1-1, OSPF process ID, and
area ID
l Name of the static LSP
l Outgoing label of the interfaces

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of each interface.
According to Figure 1-1, configure the IP address and the mask of the interfaces, including the
loopback interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Use OSPF to advertise the network segments to which the interfaces are connected and the LSR
ID host route.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] ospf 1
[LSRA-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRA-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] ospf 1
[LSRB-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRB-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] ospf 1
[LSRC-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRC-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] ospf 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

[LSRD-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRD-ospf-1] quit

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on the LSRs, and you can
view that the LSRs already learn routes from each other.

Take the display on LSRA as an example.

[LSRA] display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 15
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
OSPF 10 3 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
10.1.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.3.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.1 Pos2/0/0
10.3.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.3.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
10.4.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

The next hop or outgoing interface of the static LSP on 4.4.4.9/32 from LSRA to LSRD is
determined by the routing table. It is shown in boldface. In this example, the next hop IP address
is 10.1.1.2/30.

Take the display on LSRD as an example.

[LSRD] display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 15
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.9/32 OSPF 10 3 D 10.2.1.1 Pos1/0/0
OSPF 10 3 D 10.4.1.1 Pos2/0/0
2.2.2.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.2.1.1 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.4.1.1 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.2.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.2.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.2.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.3.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.4.1.1 Pos2/0/0
10.4.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.4.1.2 Pos2/0/0
10.4.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.4.1.1 Pos2/0/0
10.4.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

The next hop or outgoing interface of the static LSP on 1.1.1.9/32 from LSRD to LSRA is
determined by the routing table. It is shown in boldface. In this example, the next hop IP address
is 10.4.1.1/30.

Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS capability on each LSR.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] quit

Step 4 Configure the basic MPLS functions on each interface.

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] quit

Step 5 Establish a static LSP from LSRA to LSRD.

# Configure the ingress LSRA.
[LSRA] static-lsp ingress RAtoRD destination 4.4.4.9 32 nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label
20

# Configure the transit LSRB.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

[LSRB] static-lsp transit RAtoRD incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 20 nexthop

10.2.1.2 out-label 40

# Configure the egress LSRD.

[LSRD] static-lsp egress RAtoRD incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 40

After the configuration, run the display mpls static-lsp verbose or display mpls lsp command
on the LSRs to view the status of the LSP.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
[LSRA] display mpls static-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC LSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
RAtoRD 4.4.4.9/32 NULL/20 -/Pos1/0/0 Up

As the LSP is unidirectional, you need to configure a static LSP from LSRD to LSRA.
Step 6 Establish the static LSP from LSRD to LSRA.
In the same method, configure the static LSP from LSRD to LSRA.
# Configure the ingress LSRD.
[LSRD] static-lsp ingress RDtoRA destination 1.1.1.9 32 nexthop 10.4.1.1 out-label
30

# Configure the transit LSRC.

[LSRC] static-lsp transit RDtoRA incoming-interface pos 2/0/0 in-label 30 nexthop
10.3.1.1 out-label 60

# Configure the egress LSRA.

[LSRA] static-lsp egress RDtoRA incoming-interface pos 2/0/0 in-label 60

Step 7 Verify the configuration

# After the configuration, run the ping lsp ip 1.1.1.9 32 on LSRD, and you can view that the
LSP is reachable.
Run the display mpls static-lsp or display mpls static-lsp verbose command on the LSRs, and
you can view the status and the detailed information about the static LSP.
Take the output of LSRD as an example.
[LSRD] display mpls static-lsp
TOTAL : 2 STATIC LSP(S)
UP : 2 STATIC LSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC LSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
RAtoRD -/- 40/NULL Pos1/0/0/- Up
RDtoRA 1.1.1.9/32 NULL/30 -/Pos2/0/0 Up
[LSRD] display mpls static-lsp verbose
No : 1
LSP-Name : RAtoRD
LSR-Type : Egress
FEC : -/-
In-Label : 40
Out-Label : NULL
In-Interface : Pos1/0/0
Out-Interface : -
NextHop : -
Static-Lsp Type: Normal
Lsp Status : Up

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

No : 2
LSP-Name : RDtoRA
LSR-Type : Ingress
FEC : 1.1.1.9/32
In-Label : NULL
Out-Label : 30
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos2/0/0
NextHop : 10.4.1.1
Static-Lsp Type: Normal
Lsp Status : Up

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
static-lsp ingress RAtoRD destination 4.4.4.9 32 nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label 20
static-lsp egress RDtoRA incoming-interface Pos2/0/0 in-label 60
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
static-lsp transit RAtoRD incoming-interface Pos1/0/0 in-label 20 nexthop
10.2.1.2 out-label 40
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRC
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
static-lsp transit RDtoRA incoming-interface Pos2/0/0 in-label 30 nexthop
10.3.1.1 out-label 60
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRD
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
static-lsp egress RAtoRD incoming-interface Pos1/0/0 in-label 40
static-lsp ingress RDtoRA destination 1.1.1.9 32 nexthop 10.4.1.1 out-label 30
#
return

1.5.2 Example for Configuring Static BFD for Static LSP

This section provides an example for setting up a static LSP and configuring a static BFD session
for detecting the static LSP.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-2:

l PE1, PE2, P1, and P2 are in one MPLS domain.

l A static LSP is set up along the path PE1 -> P1 ->PE2.

Without MPLS OAM, test the connectivity of the static LSP. When the static LSP fails, PE1
can receive the advertisement within 50 ms.

Figure 1-2 Networking diagram of configuring static BFD for static LSP
Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32
P
/0 10 OS1
S 1/0 /24 .1. /0
5.2 /2
2
PO 1.1. /24
. P
Loopback1 0
/0/ 24 10 P1 10 OS1 Loopback1
1 .1. /0/ 4.4.4.4/32
1.1.1.1/32 O S 1/ 5.1 0
P 1.1. /24
.
10 Static LSP

P
PE1 10 OS /1 PE2
.1. 1/0/ S 1/0 /24
2.1 1 1
/24 PO 1.4.
.
P P2 10
10 OS1 /2
.1. /0/ S 1/0 /24
2.2 0
/24 PO 1.4.2
.
10
Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. The entire MPLS domain applies OSPF protocol and IP route is accessible to each LSR.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

2. Configure the BFD session on PE1 to detect the static LSP.

3. Configure the BFD session on PE2, which advertises a failure on static LSP to PE1 (in this
direction, the link is an IP link).

Data Preparations
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IP addresses of the interfaces on each LSR

l OSPF process number
l BFD session parameters, such as configuration name, minimum detection interval between
sending and receiving packets

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address and the OSPF protocol for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask of each interface as shown in Figure 1-2, including loopback
interfaces.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the host route of the loopback interface. The detailed
configuration is not mentioned here.
After the configuration, each LSR can ping through the other LSR ID. Run the display ip
routing-table command, and you can view the route table on each LSR.
<PE1> display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 15
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.2/32 OSPF 10 2 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 OSPF 10 2 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
4.4.4.4/32 OSPF 10 3 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
OSPF 10 3 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.2.0/24 Direct 0 0 10.1.2.1 Pos1/0/1
10.1.2.1/32 Direct 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.2.2/32 Direct 0 0 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.4.0/24 OSPF 10 2 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.5.0/24 OSPF 10 2 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 2 Enable the MPLS and BFD functions on each LSR.

# Enable MPLS on PE1 globally and enable MPLS on each interface.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] interface pos 1/0/0
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface pos 1/0/1
[PE1-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[PE1-Pos1/0/1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

# Enable BFD on PE1 globally.

[PE1] bfd
[PE1-bfd] quit

Repeat preceding steps on PE2, P1, and P2.

Step 3 Create a static LSP with PE1 being the ingress and PE2 being the egress.
# Configure a static LSP on PE1 (ingress) named 1to4.
[PE1] static-lsp ingress 1to4 destination 4.4.4.4 32 nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label 20

# Configure a static LSP on P1 (transit).

[P1] static-lsp transit 1to4 incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 20 nexthop
10.1.5.1 out-label 30

# Configure a static LSP on PE2 (egress).

[PE2] static-lsp egress 1to4 incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 30

After the configuration, run the ping lsp ip 4.4.4.4 32 command on PE1, and you can view that
the LSP is reachable.
Step 4 Configure the BFD session to detect static LSP.
# Configure a BFD session on PE1 (ingress). The local identifier is 1 and remote identifier is 2.
The minimal intervals for sending and receiving packets are 10 seconds respectively. The
interface status table can be modified.
[PE1] bfd 1to4 bind static-lsp 1to4
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] discriminator local 1
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] discriminator remote 2
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] min-tx-interval 10
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] min-rx-interval 10
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] process-pst
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] commit
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] quit

# Configure the BFD session on PE2 (egress) that advertises the static LSP failure through the
IP route.
[PE2] bfd 4to1 bind peer-ip 1.1.1.1
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] discriminator local 2
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] discriminator remote 1
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] min-tx-interval 10
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] min-rx-interval 10
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] commit
[PE2-bfd-session-4to1] quit

# Run the display bfd session all verbose command, and you can view that the BFD on PE1 is
Up.
[PE1] display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop)State : Up Name : 1to4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 1 Remote Discriminator : 2
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : STATIC_LSP
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer Ip Address : 4.4.4.4
NextHop Ip Address : 10.1.1.2
Static LSP name : 1to4 LSP Token : 0x1002000
Bind Interface : --
FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 7
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 10

Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 30
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 1
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Enable
WTR Interval (ms) : - Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Local Demand Mode : Disable
Last Local Diagnostic : Neighbor Signaled Session Down(Receive AdminDown)
Bind Application : LSPM | OAM_MANAGER
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-B030000 | RCV-2 | IF-B030000 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

# Run the display bfd session all verbose command on PE2, and you can view the output of
configuration.
[PE2] display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (Multi Hop) State : Up Name : 4to1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 2 Remote Discriminator : 1
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : Peer Ip Address
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer Ip Address : 1.1.1.1
NextHop Ip Address : 10.1.4.2
Bind Interface : --
FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 7
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 10
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 30
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : - Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Local Demand Mode : Disable
Last Local Diagnostic : Control Detection Time Expired
Bind Application : No Application Bind
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# Shut down POS 1/0/2 of P1 to simulate a static LSP failure.
[P1] interface pos 1/0/2
[P1-Pos1/0/2] shutdown

# Run the display bfd session all verbose command, and you can view the BFD status.
[PE2] display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (Multi Hop) State : Down Name : 4to1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 2 Remote Discriminator : 1
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : Peer Ip Address
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer Ip Address : 1.1.1.1
Bind Interface : -

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 7

Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 10
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 30
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : - Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Local Demand Mode : Disable
Last Local Diagnostic : Control Detection Time Expired
Bind Application : No Application Bind
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 0/1
[PE1] display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop) State : Down Name : 1to4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 1 Remote Discriminator : 2
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : STATIC_LSP
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer Ip Address : 4.4.4.4
NextHop Ip Address : 10.1.1.2
Bind Interface : --
Static LSP name : 1to4 LSP Token : 0x1002000
FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 7
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 30
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 3000
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 1
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Enable
WTR Interval (ms) : -
Proc interface status : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Local Demand Mode : Disable
Last Local Diagnostic : Control Detection Time Expired
Bind Application : LSPM OAM_MANAGER
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-B030000 | RCV-2 | IF-B030000 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 0/1

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
#
bfd
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
static-lsp ingress 1to4 destination 4.4.4.4 32 nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label 20
#
bfd 1to4 bind static-lsp 1to4
discriminator local 1
discriminator remote 2
min-tx-interval 10
min-rx-interval 10
process-pst
commit
#
Return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
#
bfd
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
bfd 4to1 bind peer-ip 1.1.1.1
discriminator local 2
discriminator remote 1
min-tx-interval 10
min-rx-interval 10
commit
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 1 Static LSPs Configuration

static-lsp egress 1to4 incoming-interface Pos1/0/0 in-label 30

#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
#
Return

l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/2
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.5.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
#
static-lsp transit 1to4 incoming-interface Pos1/0/0 in-label 20 nexthop
10.1.5.1 out-label 30
#
return

l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface Pos1/0/2
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2 MPLS LDP Configuration

About This Chapter

MPLS LDP defines the messages during label distribution and the processing of the messages
that are used to negotiate parameters between LSRs and allocate labels to set up an LSP.

2.1 Introduction to MPLS LDP

MPLS LDP, a label distribution protocol, is used to provide VPN services. MPLS LDP simplifies
the networking and configurations, supports the establishment of LSPs through the triggering
of routes, and supports a great number of LSPs.
2.2 Configuring LDP Sessions
An MPLS LDP session can be set up only after a device is configured with an LSR ID and
enabled with MPLS LDP.
2.3 Configuring LDP LSP
LDP is a label distribution protocol in an MPLS domain to distribute labels during the setup of
an LSP.
2.4 Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP
Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP enables LDP to search for routes according to
the longest match rule to establish inter-area LDP LSPs.
2.5 Configuring the LDP Multi-Instance
You need to configure the LDP multi-instance when deploying the BGP/MPLS IP VPN.
2.6 Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP
By configuring a static BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, you can detect LSP connectivity
according to specified parameters.
2.7 Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP
By configuring a dynamic BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, you does not need to configure
BFD parameters. This can speed up link fault detection and reduce workload on configurations.
2.8 Configuring Manual LDP FRR
By configuring Manual LDP FRR, you can quickly switch traffic to the backup LSP when a link
fails, which ensures uninterrupted traffic transmission.
2.9 Configuring LDP Auto FRR

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

By configuring a policy for triggering the setup of backup LSPs, you can control the setup of
backup LSPs.
2.10 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and IGP
By configuring LDP and IGP synchronization, you can delay the route switchback by
suppressing the setup of IGP neighbor relationship till an LDP session is established.
2.11 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes
By configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes, you can switch traffic from the
faulty primary link to the backup link by suppressing the activation of static routes and delay
traffic switchback to synchronize LDP and static routes.
2.12 Configuring LDP GTSM
By configuring LDP GTSM, you can detect TTLs to prevent attacks.
2.13 Configuring LDP GR
By configuring LDP GR, you can realize the uninterrupted forwarding during the master/slave
switchover or the protocol restart, which can limit the protocol flapping on the control plane.
2.14 Maintaining MPLS LDP
The operations of MPLS LDP maintenance include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity and reachability of an LSP, and configuring the trap function on an LDP LSP.
2.15 Configuration Examples
The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS LDP. Familiarize
yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram. Each configuration
example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration
roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.1 Introduction to MPLS LDP

2.1.1 MPLS LDP Overview

Through LDP, LSRs (Label Switched Router) can map the route information at the network
layer to the switched paths at the data link layer to set up network layer LSPs.

With the prevalence of the Internet early in the 1990s, the IP technology that adopts the longest
match for search becomes a bottleneck in forwarding over networks due to limitation of the
hardware technology. The ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) technology uses labels with
fixed lengths and maintains a label table with a size much smaller than the size of the routing
table. Therefore, compared with IP technology, the ATM technology supports better forwarding
performance.

The traditional IP technology is simple to implement but limited in performance. The ATM
technology has better performance but is difficult to popularize because of its complex signaling
and high cost in deployment. The MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching) technology thus
emerges to combine the advantages of IP and ATM technologies.

Initially, MPLS emerges to speed up the forwarding of the device. With the development of the
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) technology, the speed of routing is not the
bottleneck to the network development. MPLS, however, does not feature in high-speed
forwarding. As MPLS supports multi-layer labels, the connection-oriented forwarding plane,
and the connectionless-oriented control plane, MPLS is widely used in VPN (Virtual Private
Network), TE (Traffic Engineering), and QoS (Quality of Service).

2.1.2 MPLS LDP Features Supported by the NE80E/40E

MPLS LDP features supported by the system include LDP sessions, LDP LSPs, LDP multi-
instance , BFD for LDP LSPs, LDP FRR, LDP GR, LDP and IGP synchronization, and LDP
GTSM.

LDP Sessions
Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions are used between LSRs to swap labels.

l Local LDP session: can be set up only between adjacent LSRs.

l Remote LDP session: can be set between adjacent LSRs or non-adjacent LSRs.

LDP LSP
The LDP protocol is used to create dynamic LSPs. If you need not to strictly control the setup
process of LSPs or to deploy traffic engineering (TE) on an MPLS network, you are
recommended to use LDP to set up LSPs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

LDP Multi-Instance
LDP multi-instance is applicable to the networking of MPLS L3VPN carrier's carrier. For details
of carrier's carrier networking, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Feature
Description - VPN.

BFD for LDP LSP

BFD can detect faults on the data plane of the LDP LSP forwarding path. At the same time, the
format of BFD packets is constant, adaptive to implementation in hardware and traversal through
the firewall. The advantages of BFD for the data plane of LDP LSP are as follows:

l Quick detection
l Wide range of failure detection for LSPs
At present, in the NE80E/40E, BFD can detect LSPs of the following types:

l Static LSP
l LDP LSP
l TE tunnel
BFD for LSP is dedicated to public bear layer of VPN/PW and provides reliability to applications
based on MPLS network, such as VPN FRR, TE FRR, and VLL FRR, to protect services.
When BFD works in unidirectional links, such as LSP and TE, only the IP route along the
backward link needs to be reachable. Therefore, the backward link can be IP tunnels, LSPs, or
TE tunnels.

LDP FRR
The traditional IP Fast Reroute (FRR) cannot effectively protect the traffic on an MPLS network.
The NE80E/40E provides the LDP FRR function as a solution to port protection.
When the network works normally, packets are forwarded through the primary LSP. When the
outgoing interface of the primary LSP is Down, packets are forwarded through the bypass LSP.
This ensures continuous traffic for a short time before network convergence completes. The
NE80E/40E supports the LDP FRR in primary/bypass LSP mode rather than in load balancing
mode.
LDP FRR supports BFD to implement quick fault detection. For details of BFD, refer to the
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability.

LDP and IGP Synchronization

On a network consisting of active and standby links, when an active link fails, traffic is switched
from the active link to the standby link and the traffic interruption takes about hundreds of
milliseconds. When the active link recovers from the fault, the traffic is switched back to the
active link from the standby link and the traffic interruption takes about 5 seconds.
When LDP is synchronized with an IGP, the interruption duration when traffic is switched back
to the active link is shortened to milliseconds.
The basic principle of LDP and IGP synchronization is to delay the switchback of the route by
holding back the IGP neighbor establishment, and the latency depends on when the LDP
convergence completes. That is, before LSPs of the active link are established, traffic is

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

forwarded through the standby link. After the active link is established, the standby link can be
deleted.

Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes

On an MPLS network with primary and backup LSPs, LSRs establish LSPs based on static
routes. When the primary link becomes faulty, traffic is switched from the primary link to the
backup link. In this process, traffic is interrupted for about several hundred milliseconds. After
the primary link recovers, traffic is switched back from the backup link to the primary link. In
this process, traffic is interrupted for about several seconds.
Configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes ensures millisecond-level traffic
interruption when traffic is switched back from the backup link to the primary link.
The basic principle of synchronization between LDP and static routes is to switch traffic from
the faulty primary link to the backup link by suppressing the activation of static routes and delay
traffic switchback to synchronize the forwarding path of static routes with the LSP.

LDP GTSM
The Generalized TTL Security Mechanism (GTSM) protects the service above the IP layer by
checking whether the TTL value in the IP packet header is within a pre-set range. In applications,
GTSM is designed to protect the TCP/IP-based control plane (like routing protocols) from CPU-
usage attacks, such as CPU overload attacks.

LDP GR
Graceful Restart (GR) is a key technology to HA implementation. At present, GR is widely
applied to switchover and system upgrade.
The NE80E/40E supports LDP GR. When the system performs the switchover, the interface
board is not reset and the LDP LSP information on the data plane is stored. In this manner, the
LSP forwarding continues and the impact on forwarding the MPLS packets is minimized.

2.2 Configuring LDP Sessions

An MPLS LDP session can be set up only after a device is configured with an LSR ID and
enabled with MPLS LDP.

2.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring an MPLS LDP session, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you rapidly
and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
LDP sessions are classified into local LDP sessions and remote LDP sessions. These sessions
are applicable to the following scenarios:
l Setting up an LDP LSP through local LDP sessions
Before setting up an LDP LSP, you must set up LDP sessions between all directly connected
LSRs on the LSP to be set up. For details of LDP LSPs, see Configuring LDP LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Allocating inner labels for L2VPN

If a VLL or VPLS needs to be created in Martini mode between two LSRs, an LDP session
must be set up between the two LSRs before they assign inner labels for each other. For
details of L2VPN configuration, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - VPN.
l Configuring LDP over TE
On an MPLS network, if the core devices support TE and edge devices use LDP, you need
to configure the remote LDP session between two edge LSRs. After LDP over TE is
enabled, the entire TE tunnel is regarded as a hop along the LDP LSP. For details of LDP
over TE, see Configuring LDP over TE.

In addition, the NE80E/40E also supports the following attributes:

l LDP transport addresses

LDP sessions are created on the basis of TCP connection. Before setting up an LDP session,
two LSRs need to confirm the LDP transport address of each other, and then set up the TCP
connection.
Generally, it is not recommended to change the LDP transport address.
l LDP timers
– Hello hold timer
– Hello send timer
It is used together with the Hello hold timer to maintain LDP Hello adjacencies.
– Keepalive hold timer
– Keepalive send timer
It is used together with the Keepalive hold timer to maintain LDP sessions.
– Exponential backoff timer
It is used to control the interval for the active role to retry setting up an LDP session.
l MD5 authentication
It is used to improve the security of LDP sessions. A session is set up between two LSRs
successfully only when passwords on both ends are consistent.
l Keychain authentication
Keychain, an enhanced encryption algorithm, calculates a message digest for an LDP
message to prevent the message from being modified. The system automatically adopts a
new password after the previous password expires, preventing the password from being
decrypted.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring MPLS LDP sessions, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring a static route or IGP to connect LSRs on the network layer

Data Preparation
To configure MPLS LDP sessions, you need the following data.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

No. Data

1 LSR ID of each node

2 Name and number of the interface on which an LDP session is to be set up

3 Name and IP address of the remote peer on which a remote LDP session is to be
set up

4 (Optional) LDP transport address

5 l (Optional) Value of the Hello Hold timer

l (Optional) Value of the Hello send timer
l (Optional) Value of the Keepalive Hold timer
l (Optional) Value of the Keepalive send timer
l (Optional) Value of the Exponential backoff timer

6 l (Optional) Peer IP address of MD5 authentication

l (Optional) Password of MD5 authentication

2.2.2 Configuring the LSR ID

Before enabling MPLS, you must configure LSR ID.

Context
When configuring an LSR ID, note the following:

Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls lsr-id lsr-id

The LSR ID of the local node is configured.

lsr-id: It is in dotted decimal notation and identifies an LSR.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.2.3 Enabling MPLS

MPLS features can be configured only after MPLS is enabled.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

MPLS is enabled globally and the MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 4 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface to participate in MPLS forwarding is specified.

Step 5 Run:
mpls

MPLS is enabled on the interface.

----End

2.2.4 Enable Global MPLS LDP

An MPLS LDP session can be set up only after MPLS LDP is enabled.

Context
NOTE

Before enabling the global LDP functions, you must enable global MPLS functions.

Do as follows on each LSR at both ends of an LDP session:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

MPLS LDP is enabled on the local node and the MPLS LDP view is displayed.
By default, the global LDP functions are prohibited.
Step 3 (Optional) Run:
lsr-id lsr-id

The LSR ID for LDP instance is configured.

By default, the LSR ID of the LDP instance is the same as that set in Configuring an LSR
ID. You are recommended to use the default value.
Generally, LDP instances adopt default LSR IDs. In a certain networking solution where VPN
instances are adopted, such as BGP/MPLS VPN network, if the VPN address space and the
public network address space overlap, you need to configure LSR IDs for LDP instances to
ensure successful setup of TCP connections.

----End

2.2.5 (Optional) Configuring the LDP Dynamic Capability

Announcement Function
The dynamic LDP negotiation capability dynamically enables or disables LDP features that
support dynamic negotiation without interrupting an LDP session, ensuring the stability of the
LSP associated with the LDP session.

Context
If a certain LDP feature is enabled after an LDP session has been created, the LDP session and
the LSP associated with the session will be interrupted and re-negotiated when LDP dynamic
capability announcement function is not enabled.
The LDP dynamic capability announcement function dynamically enables or disables an LDP
feature that supports dynamic negotiation without interrupting an LDP session, ensuring the
stability of the LSP associated with the LDP session.

NOTE

The LDP dynamic capability announcement function does not affect the existing functions and therefore
it is recommended to be enabled immediately after LDP is enabled.
Before the LDP dynamic capability announcement function is enabled, MPLS and MPLS LDP must have
been enabled globally.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
capability-announcement

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The LDP dynamic capability announcement function is enabled.

By default, the LDP dynamic capability announcement function is not enabled.

NOTE

The LDP dynamic capability announcement function takes effect only on the LDP features that support
LDP dynamic capability announcement function.

----End

2.2.6 Configuring LDP Sessions

MPLS LDP sessions are classified into the locate LDP session and the remote LDP session.

Context
The MPLS LDP session is classified into the local LDP session and the remote LDP session.
You can choose one of the following configurations according to your demands:
l Configure local LDP session
l Configure remote LDP session
The remote LDP session is set up between two indirectly connected LSRs. The remote LDP
session is applied in the following situations:
– Configuring a VLL or VPLS in Martini mode
– Configuring LDP over TE

Procedure
l Configuring a local LDP session
Do as follows on two directly connected LSRs. If an LDP session is set up between two
directly-connected LSRs, an LDP LSP is set up between these two LSRs. For details of
LDP LSPs, see Configuring LDP LSP.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which LDP session is to be set up is displayed.

NOTE

Before enabling the LDP function, you must enable the MPLS function on the interface.
3. Run:
mpls ldp

MPLS LDP is enabled on the interface.

By default, MPLS LDP is disabled.

NOTE

Disabling LDP on the interface may interrupt all LDP sessions on the interface. In addition, all
the LSPs based on these sessions are deleted accordingly.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Configuring a remote MPLS LDP session

Do as follows on the LSRs on both ends of a remote LDP session. The remote LDP session
is set up between two indirectly-connected LSRs or directly-connected LSRs.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote peer is created and the remote peer view is displayed.
3. Run:
remote-ip ip-address

The IP address of the remote MPLS LDP peer is configured.

The LSR ID configured in Configuring an LSR ID is recommended to be the IP
address of the remote MPLS LDP peer.

NOTE

Modifying or deleting the configured address of a remote peer leads to the deletion of the related
remote LDP session.

----End

2.2.7 (Optional) Configuring LDP Transport Addresses

LSRs need to confirm the transport address of the neighbor before an LDP session is set up
between LSRs. By default, a transport address of an LSR is the LSR ID.

Context
LDP sessions are created on the basis of TCP connections. Before two LSRs set up an LDP
session, they need to confirm the LDP transport address of each other, and then set up a TCP
connection.
Generally, you are not recommended to modify LDP transport addresses.
To modify LDP transport addresses, do as follows on the two LSRs at both ends of an LDP
session:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which the LDP session is set up is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
mpls ldp transport-address { interface-type interface-number | interface }

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

An LDP transport address is specified as the IP address of a specified interface.

By default, the LDP transport address in the public network is the LSR ID set in Configuring
an LSR ID.
If multiple links exist between two LSRs and you intend to establish an LDP session on these
links, the interfaces on the same side of the session must adopt the default transport address or
be configured with the same transport address; otherwise, the LDP session is established only
on one link.
There are two methods of configuring LDP sessions on multiple links:
l Use LSR IDs to set up LDP sessions for each link.
l Each link adopts the LDP transport address specified through the mpls ldp transport-
address command for the same interface.
NOTE

In the case of LDP multi-instance, each instance can have a specific TCP connection.

----End

2.2.8 (Optional) Configuring LDP Timers

LDP timers are classified into Hello hold timer, Hello send timer, Keepalive hold timer,
Keepalive send timer, and the Exponential backoff timer, which can be configured as required.

Context

CAUTION
You are recommended to set the value of a timer equal to or greater than the default value. When
many LDP sessions are set up between LSRs or the CPU usage is high, the status of LDP sessions
may frequently switch between Up and Down if the value of the timer is smaller than the default
value. Increasing the values of timers can improve the stability of LDP sessions.

LDP timers are classified into Hello hold timer, Hello send timer, Keepalive hold timer,
Keepalive send timer, and the Exponential backoff timer.
l Hello hold timers are classified into the following timers:
– Link-Hello hold timer
– Targeted-Hello hold timer
l Hello send timers are classified into the following timers:
– Link-Hello send timer
– Targeted-Hello send timer
l Keepalive hold timers are classified into the following timers:
– Keepalive hold timers of local LDP session
– Keepalive hold timers of remote LDP session
l Keepalive send timers are classified into the following timers:
– Keepalive send timer of local LDP session

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

– Keepalive send timer of remote LDP session

You can select the timers and configure them as required.

Procedure
l Configure a link-Hello hold timer.

Do as follows on the LSRs at both ends of the local LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which the LDP session is set up is displayed.
3. Run:
mpls ldp timer hello-hold interval

The link-Hello hold timer is configured.

By default, the value of the link-Hello hold timer is 45 seconds.

The value of the link-Hello hold timer configured on the LSR may be not equal to the
value of the timer that takes effect. The value of the timer that takes effect is equal to
the smaller value of two values of the timers configured on both ends. When an
interface is connected to multiple LSRs, the value of the effective timer is equal to the
smallest value of the timers configured on all the interfaces.
l Configure a link-Hello send timer.

Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of a local LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which the LDP session is to be set up is displayed.
3. Run:
mpls ldp timer hello-send interval

A link-Hello send timer is configured.

By default, the value of a link-Hello send timer is one third the value of the link-Hello
hold timer.

If the value of the link-Hello send timer is set greater than one third the value of the
link-Hello hold timer, the value of the link-Hello send timer that is equal to one third
the value of the link-Hello hold timer will take effect.
l Configure a targeted-Hello hold timer.

Do as follows on the each LSR of both ends of a remote LDP session:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote MPLS LDP peer view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls ldp timer hello-hold interval

The targeted-Hello hold timer is configured.

By default, the value of the targeted-Hello hold timer is 45 seconds.
The value of the target-Hello hold timer configured on the LSR may be not equal to
the value of the timer that takes effect. The value of the timer that takes effect is equal
to the smaller value of two values of the timers configured on both ends.
l Configure a targeted-Hello send timer.
Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of a remote LDP session:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote MPLS LDP peer view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls ldp timer hello-send interval

A targeted-Hello send timer is configured.

By default, the value of a targeted-Hello send timer is one third the value of the
targeted-Hello hold timer.
If the value of the targeted-Hello send timer is set greater than one third the value of
the targeted-Hello hold timer, the value of the targeted-Hello send timer that is equal
to one third the value of the targeted-Hello hold timer will take effect.
l Configure a Keepalive hold timer for the local LDP session.
Do as follows on the LSRs on both ends of the local LDP session:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which the LDP session is set up is displayed.
3. Run:
mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold interval

The Keepalive timer is configured for the local LDP session.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

By default, the value of the Keepalive timer of the local LDP session is 45 seconds.

The value of the Keepalive timer configured on the LSR may be not equal to the value
of the timer that takes effect. The value of the timer that takes effect is equal to the
smaller value of two values of the timers configured on both ends.

NOTE

Modifying the value of KeepAlive hold timer leads to reestablish of LDP sessions and all LSPs
based on the LDP sessions.
l Configure a Keepalive send timer for setting up a local LDP session.

Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of a local LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface on which the LDP session is to be set up is displayed.
3. Run:
mpls ldp timer keepalive-send interval

A Keepalive send timer for setting up a local LDP session is configured.

By default, for setting up a local LDP session, the value of a Keepalive send timer is
one third the value of the Keepalive hold timer.

If the value of the Keepalive send timer is set greater than one third the value of the
Keepalive hold timer, the value of the Keepalive send time that is equal to one third
the value of the Keepalive hold timer will take effect.
l Configuring a Keepalive hold timer for the remote LDP session

Do as follows on the LSRs at both ends of the LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote MPLS LDP peer view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold interval

The Keepalive timer is configured for the remote LDP session.

By default, the value of the Keepalive timer of the remote LDP session is 45 seconds.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

NOTE

Modifying the value of KeepAlive hold timer leads to reestablish of LDP sessions and all LSPs
based on the LDP sessions.
l Configure a Keepalive send timer for setting up a remote LDP session.

Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of a remote LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote MPLS LDP peer view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls ldp timer keepalive-send interval

A Keepalive send timer for setting up a remote LDP session is configured.

By default, for setting up a remote LDP session, the value of a Keepalive send timer
is one third the value of the Keepalive hold timer.

Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of an LDP session:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

4. Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

5. Run:
backoff timer init max

An Exponential backoff timer is configured.

By default, the initial value is 15 and the maximum value is 120, in seconds.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

NOTE
It is recommended that the initial value be not smaller than 15 and the maximum value be not
smaller than 120 for an Exponential backoff timer.

----End

2.2.9 (Optional) Configuring LDP Authentication

After LDP authentication is configured, the security of the connection of an LDP session is
improved. LDP authentication is configured on LSRs on both ends of an LDP session.

Context
The NE80E/40E supports either LDP MD5 authentication or LDP keychain authentication.
l A typical application of MD5 is to calculate a message digest to prevent message spoofing.
The MD5 message digest is a unique result calculated through an irreversible character
string conversion. If a message is modified during transmission, a different digest is
generated. After the message arrives at the receiving end, the receiving end can determine
that the packet is modified by comparing the received digest with the pre-computed digest.
MD5 authentication can be performed either in plaintext mode or in cipher text mode .
During the configuration of MD5 authentication, two peers of an LDP session can be
configured with different authentication modes and must be configured with the same
password.
l Keychain, an enhanced encryption algorithm to MD5, calculates a message digest for an
LDP message to prevent the message from being modified.
During keychain authentication, a group of passwords are defined to form a password
string, and each password is specified with the encryption and decryption algorithms such
as MD5 algorithm and SHA-1 and configured with the validity period. When sending or
receiving a packet, the system selects a valid password based on the user's configuration.
Within the validity period of the password, the system uses the encryption algorithm
matching the password to encrypt the packet before sending it out, or uses the decryption
algorithm matching the password to decrypt the packet before accepting it. In addition, the
system automatically adopts a new password after the previous password expires,
preventing the password from being decrypted.
The keychain authentication password, the encryption and decryption algorithms, and the
password validity period that construct a keychain configuration node are configured by
using different commands. A keychain configuration node requires at least one password
and encryption and decryption algorithms.
To reference a keychain configuration node, specify the required peer and the name of the
node in the MPLS LDP view. In this manner, an LDP session is encrypted. Multiple peers
can reference the same keychain configuration node.
Before configuring LDP keychain authentication, you need to configure keychain
authentication globally.

You can configure either LDP MD5 authentication or LDP keychain authentication based on
their separate characteristics:
l The MD5 algorithm is easy to configure and generates a single password which can be
changed only manually. Therefore, MD5 authentication is applicable to the network
requiring short-term encryption.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Keychain authentication involves a set of passwords and adopts a new password when an
old one expires. Keychain authentication is complex to configure and is therefore
recommended on a network requiring high security.
NOTE

On one LDP peer, keychain authentication and MD5 authentication cannot be configured together.

Procedure
l Configure LDP MD5 authentication.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

3. Run:
md5-password { plain | cipher } peer-lsr-id password

MD5 authentication is configured and the password is set.

The password can be set either in cipher text or plaintext. A plaintext password is the
set character string that is directly recorded in a configuration file. A cipher text
password is the character string that is encrypted by using a special algorithm and then
recorded in a configuration file.
By default, LDP MD5 authentication is not performed between LDP peers.

NOTE

Characters ^#^# and $@$@ are used to identify passwords with variable lengths. Characters
^#^# are the prefix and suffix of a new password, and characters $@$@ are the prefix and
suffix of an old password. Neither of them can be both configured at the beginning and end of
a plain text password.

CAUTION
Configuring LDP MD5 authentication causes re-establishment of an LDP session and
deletes the LSP associated with the LDP session.

l Configure LDP keychain authentication.

Before configuring LDP keychain authentication, configure keychain globally. For detailed
configurations, see the NE80E/40E Configuration Guide - Security.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

3. Run:
authentication key-chain peer peer-id name keychain-name

LDP keychain is enabled and the keychain name is referenced.

By default, LDP keychain authentication is not performed between LDP peers.

CAUTION
Configuring LDP keychain authentication causes re-establishment of an LDP session
and deletes the LSP associated with the LDP session.

----End

2.2.10 Checking the Configuration

After an MPLS LDP session is successfully set up, you can view information about the interface
enabled with MPLS and MPLS LDP, LDP, the LDP session status, the LDP session peers, and
the remote peer of the LDP session.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the MPLS LDP sessions function are complete.

Procedure
l Run display mpls interface [ interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose ]command to
check information about an interface enabled with MPLS.
l Run display mpls ldp [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check information about LDP.
l Check information about the interface enabled with LDP.
– Run display mpls ldp interface [ interface-type interface-number | verbose ] command
to check information about the specified interface which is enabled with LDP.
– Run display mpls ldp interface [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check information of
all interfaces enabled with LDP.
l Check information about the LDP session status.
– Run display mpls ldp session [ verbose | peer-id ] command to check information about
the specified LDP session.
– Run display mpls ldp session [ all ] [ verbose ] to check information of all LDP sessions.
l Check information about the LDP peer.
– Run display mpls ldp peer peer-id command to check information about the specified
LDP peer.
– Run display mpls ldp peer [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check information of all LDP
peers.
l Run display mpls ldp remote-peer [ remote-peer-name ] command to check information
about the LDP remote peer.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Example
Run the display mpls interface command, and you can view information about all the interfaces
enabled with MPLS.
<HUAWEI> display mpls interface
Interface Status TE Attr LSP Count CRLSP Count Effective MTU
Pos1/0/0 Up Dis 0 0 1500

Run the display mpls ldp command, and you can view information about global LDP including
all timers.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp
LDP Global Information
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Protocol Version : V1 Neighbor Liveness : 600 Sec
Graceful Restart : Off FT Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec
MTU Signaling : On Recovery Timer : 300 Sec
Capability-Announcement : On Longest-match : On
LDP Instance Information
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instance ID : 0 VPN-Instance :
Instance Status : Active LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Loop Detection : Off Path Vector Limit : 32
Label Distribution Mode : Ordered Label Retention Mode : Liberal
Instance Deleting State : No Instance Reseting State : No
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Run the display mpls ldp interface [ verbose ] command, and you can view information about
an LDP interface, including the transport address and all timers.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp interface

LDP Interface Information in Public Network

Codes:LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), IFName(Interface name)
A '*' before an interface means the entity is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IFName Status LAM TransportAddress HelloSent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pos1/0/0 Active DU 172.17.1.1 2495/2514
GE2/0/0 Active DU 172.17.1.1 1106/1094
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp interface verbose

LDP Interface Information in Public Network

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface Name : Pos1/0/0
LDP ID : 1.1.1.1:0 Transport Address : 1.1.1.1
Entity Status : Active Effective MTU : 1500

Configured Hello Hold Timer : 15 Sec

Negotiated Hello Hold Timer : 15 Sec
Configured Hello Send Timer : 2 Sec
Configured Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec
Configured Keepalive Send Timer : 3 Sec
Configured Delay Timer : 0 Sec
Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited
Hello Message Sent/Rcvd : 29913/29878 (Message Count)
Entity Deletion Status : No

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Run the display mpls ldp session [ verbose ] command, and you can view that the status of the
LDP session is Operational.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:01:36 387/386
3.3.3.3:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:01:30 361/361
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 2 session(s) Found.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp session verbose

LDP Session(s) in Public Network

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peer LDP ID : 2.2.2.2:0 Local LDP ID : 1.1.1.1:0
TCP Connection : 1.1.1.1 <- 2.2.2.2
Session State : Operational Session Role : Passive
Session FT Flag : Off MD5 Flag : Off
Reconnect Timer : --- Recovery Timer : ---
Keychain Name : kc1

Negotiated Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec

Configured Keepalive Send Timer : 3 Sec
Keepalive Message Sent/Rcvd : 438/438 (Message Count)
Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited
Label Resource Status(Peer/Local) : Available/Available
Session Age : 0000:01:49 (DDDD:HH:MM)
Session Deletion Status : No

Capability:
Capability-Announcement : On

Outbound&Inbound Policies Applied :

outbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec none
outbound peer all split-horizon
inbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec none

Addresses received from peer: (Count: 3)

10.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 10.1.2.1

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Run the display mpls ldp peer command and the display mpls ldp remote-peer command,
and you can view information about the peers on both ends of an LDP session.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp peer
LDP Peer Information in Public network
A '*' before a peer means the peer is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID TransportAddress DiscoverySource
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2:0 2.2.2.2 Remote Peer : rtb
Serial0/0/0
3.3.3.3:0 3.3.3.3 Remote Peer : rtc
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 2 Peer(s) Found.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp remote-peer

LDP Remote Entity Information

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Peer Name : lsrc
Remote Peer IP : 3.3.3.9 LDP ID : 1.1.1.9:0
Transport Address : 1.1.1.9 Entity Status : Active

Configured Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Auto-config : ---
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 Peer(s) Found.

2.3 Configuring LDP LSP

LDP is a label distribution protocol in an MPLS domain to distribute labels during the setup of
an LSP.

2.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring an LDP LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you rapidly and correctly
finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
If you need not to strictly control the setup process of LSPs or deploy TE on an MPLS network,
you can set up LSPs by using LDP as the label distribution protocol in an MPLS domain.

The number of LSPs that can be set up on an LSR depends on the capacity and performance of
the LSR. Excessive LSPs, however, may lead to unstability of the LSR.

The setup of LSPs requires that proper routes exist on the LSRs and trigger policies be set on
the LSRs. Only routes that meet the trigger policy can trigger the setup of LSPs. In this manner,
you can control the number of LSPs.

The NE80E/40E provides the following types of policies for controlling the number of LSPs:

l The policies for setting up LSPs on the egress or ingress are as follows:
– All static routes and IGP routes trigger the setup of LSPs.
– Labeled BGP routes with 32-bit addresses of the public network trigger the setup of
LSPs. For more information, refer to the chapter "BGP/MPLS IP VPN Configuration"
in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN.
– Host routes trigger the setup of LSPs.
– The setup of LSPs is triggered on the basis of the IP prefix list.
– All routes trigger the setup of LSPs with LDP being disabled.
l When an LSR is a transit LSR, the IP prefix list can be used to filter routes to prevent the
generation of excessive transit LSPs. Only the routes that match the filtering policy can be
used to set up the transit LSP.

As defined in RFC 5036, the label advertisement mode of LDP is classified into two modes:
l Downstream Unsolicited (DU)
l Downstream on Demand (DoD)

As defined in RFC 5036, the label distribution control mode of LDP is classified into two modes:
l Independent
l Ordered

As defined in RFC 5036, the label retention mode of LDP is classified into two modes:
l Liberal

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Conservative

The NE80E/40E recommends combination of DU mode + Ordered mode + Liberal mode.

To correctly implement path Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) detection, an LSR needs to
know the MTU of each link to which the LSR is connected. Then, LDP MTU signaling is
required.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an LDP LSP, complete the following task:

l Configure local LDP sessions

Data Preparation
To configure an LDP LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 (Optional) Configuring Label Distribution and Retention Modes

2 (Optional) Maximum hops in loop detection

2.3.2 Configuring LDP LSP

An LDP LSP can be set up only after an LDP session is set up.

Prerequisite
Configuring LDP Sessions

Context
The MPLS LDP session is created on neighboring LSRs along the LSP. After the MPLS LDP
session is created, the LDP LSP starts to be set up automatically.

2.3.3 (Optional) Configuring Label Advertisement Modes

You can control the establishment of an LSP by configuring an advertisement mode of LDP
labels.

Context
Perform the following operations on the LSR:

Procedure
l Configure an LDP label advertisement mode for a local session.
1. Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls ldp advertisement { dod | du }

The label advertisement mode is configured.

NOTE

l When there are multiple links between neighbors, all the interfaces must use the same label
advertisement mode.
l Modifying the label advertisement mode causes LDP sessions to be reestablished.

----End

2.3.4 (Optional) Configuring LDP to Automatically Trigger the

Request in DoD Mode
You should configure a remote LDP session before configuring LDP Automatically Triggering
the Request in DoD Mode

Context
On a large-scale network deployed with a large number of remote LDP peers, the DLSAMs that
are low-end devices at the edge of the network cannot ensure the network stability or prevent
resource wastes. In this case, you can run the remote-ip auto-dod-request command or the
remote-peer auto-dod-request command to configure the function of triggering a request to a
downstream node for a label mapping message associated with all remote LDP peers or a remote
LDP peer with a specified LSR ID in DoD mode, which can save system resources.
To disable the function of automatically triggering an LSR to send a request to a downstream
node for a label mapping message associated with a specified LSR ID in DoD mode, you can
run the remote-ip auto-dod-request block command.

NOTE

l You should configure a remote LDP session before running the remote-peer auto-dod-request or
remote-ip auto-dod-request command.
l You should run the longest-match command to configure LDP extension for inter-area LSP before
running the remote-peer auto-dod-request or remote-ip auto-dod-request command.
l The mpls ldp advertisement dod command should be run to create an LDP session with a downstream
node in DoD mode before you run the remote-peer auto-dod-request or remote-ip auto-dod-
request command.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 You can perform either of the following procedures to enable the function of triggering a request
to a downstream node for a label mapping message associated with all remote LDP peers or a
remote LDP peer with a specified LSR ID in DoD mode.
l To enable the function of triggering a request to a downstream node for label mapping
messages associated with all remote LDP peers in DoD mode, run:
remote-peer auto-dod-request

l You can perform the following procedures to enable the function of triggering a request to
a downstream node for label mapping messages associated with all remote LDP peers or a
remote LDP peer with a specified LSR ID in DoD mode.
1. Run:
quit

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The remote MPLS LDP peer is created and the remote MPLS LDP peer view is
displayed.
3. Run:
remote-ip ip-address
The IP address of the remote MPLS LDP peer is configured.
NOTE

l The IP address of the remote LDP peer must be the LSR ID of the remote LDP peer. When
an LDP LSR ID is different from an MPLS LSR ID, the LDP LSR ID must be adopted.
l Modifying or deleting the configured address of a remote peer leads to the deletion of the
remote LDP session.
4. Run:
remote-ip auto-dod-request
The function of automatically triggering a request to a downstream node for a label
mapping message associated with a remote LDP peer of a specified LSR ID in DoD
mode is configured.
NOTE
After the remote-peer auto-dod-request command have been configured globally, to disable
the function of automatically triggering an LSR to send a request to a downstream node for a
label mapping message associated with a remote LDP peer of a specified LSR ID in DoD mode,
you can run the remote-ip auto-dod-request block command.

----End

2.3.5 (Optional) Configuring Loop Detection

You need to configure the LDP loop detection on each node to avoid loops.

Context
The NE80E/40E does not support loop detection. However, in the scenario where its neighbor
supports the loop detection function and requires that the notification about whether the loop
detection function be consistent on the two ends, to ensure that the NE80E/40E sets up an LDP
session with such a neighbor, do as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
loop-detect

The device is enabled to advertise that the device has the capable of loop detection during the
initialization of an LDP session.

NOTE
After the device is configured with the loop-detect command, the device still does not support the loop
detection function but only has the loop detection negotiation capability.

----End

2.3.6 (Optional) Configuring LDP MTU Signaling

By configuring the LDP MTU signaling, you can determine the size of MPLS packets to be
forwarded according to an MTU.

Context
LDP automatically computes the minimum MTU value of all interfaces on each LSP. Based on
the minimum MTU value, MPLS determines the size of packets to be forwarded on the ingress.
This prevents the forwarding failure that is caused by large packets on the transit.

Do as follows on each LSR along an LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mtu-signalling [ apply-tlv ]

The system is enabled to send the MTU TLV.

By default, the system sends the private MTU TLV.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

NOTE

Enabling or disabling the sending of the MTU TLV may cause the original LDP session to be re-created.

----End

2.3.7 (Optional) Configuring an Inbound LDP Policy

By configuring an inbound LDP policy, you can prevent the establishment of unwanted LSPs
by an LSR to save device memory.

Context
By default, an LSR receives all label mapping messages, speeding up the convergence of LDP
LSPs. This, however, results in the establishment of a large number of LSPs, wasting resources.
In this case, an inbound LDP policy can be configured to reduce the number of label mapping
messages to be received, reducing the number of LSPs to be established and saving memory.
NOTE

If multiple inbound policies coexist, the first configured inbound policy takes effect on a certain peer.
Between the following inbound policies, as the peer group named group1 includes the peer with the ID
being 2.2.2.2, the first inbound policy which is configured earlier takes effect on peer 2.2.2.2.
inbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec host
inbound peer peer-group group1 fec none
If two inbound policies have been configured with the same peer parameters, the latter overwrites the
earlier. Between the following inbound policies, the latter overwrites the earlier configuration. That is, the
second inbound policy which is configured later takes effect on peer 2.2.2.2.
inbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec host
inbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec none
Before configuring an inbound policy, you must enable MPLS and MPLS LDP globally.
To delete all inbound policies at a time, run the undo inbound peer all command.

After an inbound LDP policy is configured, the LSR determines whether to receive label
mapping messages from the peer device based on the policy. When the LSR is configured not
to receive label mapping messages from the peer device, the processing mechanism varies
according to the label advertisement mode of the session established between the local device
and its peer.
l In the case of DU, a liberal LSP is established and cannot be used as an LDP FRR backup
LSP.
l In the case of DoD, the local device sends release messages to instruct the peer device to
withdraw labels.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
inbound peer { peer-id | peer-group peer-group-name | all } fec { none | host | ip-
prefix prefix-name }

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

An inbound policy for allowing a specified LDP peer to receive label mapping messages for a
specified IGP route is configured.

To apply a policy associated with the same FEC range to an LDP peer group or all LDP peers
receiving label mapping messages, configure peer-group peer-group-name or all in the
command.

----End

2.3.8 (Optional) Configuring an Outbound LDP Policy

By configuring an outbound LDP policy, you can prevent the establishment of unwanted LSPs,
saving memory.

Context
By default, an LSR sends label mapping messages to both upstream and downstream LDP peers,
speeding up the convergence of LDP LSPs. This, however, results in the establishment of a large
number of LSPs, wasting resources. In this case, an outbound LDP policy needs to be configured
to reduce the number of label mapping messages to be sent, reducing the number of LDP LSPs
to be established and saving memory.

NOTE

If multiple outbound policies coexist, the first configured outbound policy takes effect on a certain peer.
Between the following outbound policies, as the peer group named group1 includes the peer with the ID
being 2.2.2.2, the first outbound policy which is configured earlier takes effect on peer 2.2.2.2.
outbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec host
outbound peer peer-group group1 fec none
If two outbound policies have been configured with the same peer parameters, the latter overwrites the
earlier. Between the following outbound policies, the latter overwrites the earlier configuration. That is,
the second outbound policy which is configured later takes effect on peer 2.2.2.2.
outbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec host
outbound peer 2.2.2.2 fec none
Before configuring an outbound policy, you must enable MPLS and MPLS LDP globally.
To delete all outbound policies at a time, run the undo outbound peer all command.

After an outbound LDP policy is configured, the LSR determines whether to send label mapping
messages from the peer device based on the policy. The processing mechanism varies according
to the label advertisement mode of the session established between the local device and its peer.
l In the case of DU, the local device sends valid label mapping messages to the peer device
based on the outbound LDP policy.
l In the case of DoD, after receiving a label request message from an upstream device, the
local device checks whether the request matches the outbound LDP policy. If the request
matches the outbound LDP policy, the local device sends a label mapping message to the
upstream device; if the request does not match the outbound LDP policy, the local device
sends no label mapping message but a Notification message to notify the upstream device
of no route.

Procedure
l Configure a split horizon policy.
1. Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

3. Run:
outbound peer { peer-id | all } split-horizon

A split horizon policy is configured to restrain an LSR from distributing labels to a

specified LDP peer.
By default, no split horizon policy is configured, which allows an LSR to distribute
labels to all LDP peers.
l Configure an outbound policy for allowing label mapping messages for a specified IGP
route to be sent to a specified LDP peer.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp

MPLS LDP view is displayed.

3. Run:
outbound peer { peer-id | peer-group peer-group-name | all } fec { none |
host | ip-prefix prefix-name }

An outbound policy is configured to allow label mapping messages for a specified

IGP route to be sent to a specified LDP peer.
To apply the policy associated with the same FEC range to an LDP peer group or all
LDP peers sending label mapping messages, you can configure peer-group peer-
group-name or all in the command.
l Configure an outbound policy for allowing label mapping messages for a specified labeled
BGP route to be sent to a specified LDP peer.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls ldp

MPLS LDP view is displayed.

3. Run:
outbound peer { peer-id | peer-group peer-group-name | all } bgp-label-
route { none | ip-prefix prefix-name }

An outbound policy is configured to allow label mapping messages for a specified

labeled BGP route to be sent to a specified LDP peer.
To apply the policy associated with the same FEC range to an LDP peer group or all
LDP peers sending label mapping messages, you can configure either peer-group
peer-group-name or all in the command.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.3.9 (Optional) Configuring the Policy of Triggering to Establish

LSPs
By configuring the trigger policy of establishing LSPs, you can use eligible routes to trigger
LDP to set up LSPs.

Context
To set up an LSP according to LDP, you need to set the FEC.

NOTE

l The establishment of an LSP requires precisely matched routes on the LSR. If a loopback interface
with a 32-bit mask is used, the precisely matched host route is required to trigger the establishment of
LSPs.
l Changing LSP triggering policies during the LDP graceful restart (GR) does not take effect.

Do as follows on all the LSRs along the LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run the following commands as required.

l To configure the policy of triggering static routes and IGP routes to establish LSPs, run:
lsp-trigger { all | host | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | none }

l To configure the policy of triggering labeled BGP routes of the public network to establish
LSPs, run:
lsp-trigger bgp-label-route [ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name ]

By default, the triggering policy is host, namely, the route of host IP with the 32-bit address
triggering to establish an LSP.

l If the triggering policy is all, all static route entries and IGP route entries trigger to establish
an LSP. BGP public routes cannot trigger to establish LSPs.
l If the triggering policy is ip-prefix, only the FEC entry filtered in the IP address prefix list
can trigger to establish an LSP.
l If the triggering policy is none, the LSP is not established.
l If the triggering policy is bgp-label-route, the labeled BGP routes of the public network
trigger to establish an LSP.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.3.10 (Optional) Configuring the Policy of Establishing Transit

LSPs
By configuring the trigger policy of establishing transit LSPs, you can use eligible routes to
trigger LDP to set up transit LSPs.

Context
Do as follows on the transit node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
propagate mapping for ip-prefix ip-prefix-name

The policy of establishing transit LSPs is configured.

By default, LDP does not filter the received routing information while establishing transit LSPs.

NOTE

Modifying the policy for setting up transit LSPs does not take effect during LDP GR.

----End

2.3.11 Checking the Configuration

After an LDP LSP is set up, you can view information about LDP, the establishment of LDP
LSPs, and the establishment of LSPs.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the LDP LSP function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls ldp [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check all information about LDP.
l Run the display mpls ldp lsp [ all ] command to check information of all LDP LSPs.
l Run the display mpls lsp [ verbose ] command to check information about LSPs.

----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, you can view the following information:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Run the display mpls ldp command, and you can view information about global LDP including
all timers.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp

LDP Global Information

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Protocol Version : V1 Neighbor Liveness : 600 Sec
Graceful Restart : Off FT Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec
MTU Signaling : On Recovery Timer : 300 Sec
Capability-Announcement : Off Longest-match : Off
LDP Instance Information
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instance ID : 0 VPN-Instance :
Instance Status : Active LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Loop Detection : Off Path Vector Limit : 32
Label Distribution Mode : Ordered Label Retention Mode : Liberal
Instance Deleting State : No Instance Reseting State : No
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Run the display mpls ldp lsp or the display mpls lsp command, and you can view information
about LDP LSPs.
<HUAWEI> display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

2.4 Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP

Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP enables LDP to search for routes according to
the longest match rule to establish inter-area LDP LSPs.

2.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring the LDP extension for Inter-Area LSP, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you rapidly and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
In a large-scale network, multiple IGP areas usually need to be configured for flexible network
deployment and fast route convergence. In this situation, when advertising routes between IGP
areas, to prevent a large number of routes from consuming too many resources, an Area Border
Router (ABR) needs to aggregate the routes in the area and then advertises the aggregated route

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

to the neighbor IGP areas. However, by default, when establishing LSPs, LDP searches the
routing table for the route that exactly matches the forwarding equivalence class (FEC) carried
in the received Label Mapping message. For aggregated routes, only liberal LDP LSPs rather
than inter-area LDP LSPs can be set up.
In this case, you can run the longest-match command to configure LDP to search for routes
according to the longest match rule to establish inter-area LDP LSPs.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring IP addresses for interfaces to make neighboring nodes reachable at the network
layer
l Configuring an IGP to advertise the network segments connecting to interfaces on each
node and to advertise the routes of hosts with LSR IDs
l Configure the policy for aggregating routes.
l Configuring MPLS and MPLS LDP

Data Preparation
To configure LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 IS-IS area ID of each nodes and levels of each nodes and interfaces

2.4.2 Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP

To configure LDP extension for Inter-Area LSP, you need to configure the ingress or transit
node.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
longest-match

LDP is configured to search for routes according to the longest match rule to establish LSPs.

NOTE

Configuring this command during LDP GR is not allowed.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.4.3 Checking the Configuration

After the LDP extension for Inter-Area LSP is configured, you can view information about the
establishment of Inter-Area LSPs.

Prerequisite
All configurations of LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls lsp command to view the setup of the inter-area LSP after LDP is
configured to search for routes according to the longest match rule to establish LSPs.
----End

Example
Configure LDP to search for routes according to the longest match rule to establish LSPs, and
1.3.0.1/32 and 1.3.0.2/32 are routes to other IGP area. You can view that an inter-area LSP is
established. The configuration result is as follows:
[HUAWEI] display mpls lsp

2.5 Configuring the LDP Multi-Instance

You need to configure the LDP multi-instance when deploying the BGP/MPLS IP VPN.

2.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring the LDP multi-instance, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you rapidly and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
The LDP multi-instance is used on the BGP/MPLS VPN. To configure the LDP multi-instance,
you need to bind LDP to a created IP VPN instance.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an LDP multi-instance, complete the following tasks:
l Enabling MPLS
l Enabling MPLS LDP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Configuring the IP VPN instance

Data Preparation
To configure an LDP multi-instance, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 LSR ID of each node

2 Name of the interface that forwards MPLS packets

3 Name of the VPN instance to be enabled with LDP

4 LSR ID of the LDP instance

2.5.2 Configuring the LDP Multi-Instance

To configure the LDP multi-instance, you need to enable LDP for the specified VPN instance
on each node.

Context
To configure the transport address for an LDP instance, you must use the IP address of the
interfaces that are bound to the same VPN instance.

NOTE

In LDP multiple instances, you can adopt the interface address to establish a session.

Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

LDP for the specified VPN instance is enabled and the MPLS LDP VPN instance view is
displayed.
Note:
l Configurations in the MPLS LDP VPN instance view have impact only on LDP-enabled
interfaces that are bound to the same VPN instance.
l Configurations in the MPLS LDP view have no impact on LDP-enabled interfaces that are
bound to the VPN instance.
Step 3 (Optional) Run:
lsr-id lsr-id

An LSR ID is configured for the LDP VPN instance.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

By default, the LDP LSR ID is MPLS LSR ID.

NOTE

In most applications, you need not change the default LDP LSR ID. In some networking schemes that VPN
instances are used, for example, BGP or MPLS VPN, configure an LSR ID separately for LDP multi-
instance to ensure normal establishment of the TCP connection, if the address space of the VPN overlaps
that of the public network.

----End

2.5.3 Checking the Configuration

After the LDP multi-instance is configured, you can view information about LDP of the specified
VPN instance.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the LDP Multi-Instance function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls ldp vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command to check information
about LDP of a specified VPN instance.
----End

Example
After the configuration, run the preceding command, and you can view information about the
specified LDP VPN instance.

2.6 Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP

By configuring a static BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, you can detect LSP connectivity
according to specified parameters.

2.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring a static BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you rapidly and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
When the static BFD works in an LDP LSP, note that:
l BFD can be bound only on the ingress of LDP LSP.
l One LSP can be bound to only one BFD session.
l The detection only supports the LDP LSP that is triggered to establish by the host route.
NOTE

BFD for LSP can function properly though the forward path is an LSP and the backward path is an IP link.
The forward path and the backward path must be established over the same link; otherwise, if a fault occurs,
BFD cannot identify the faulty path. Before deploying BFD, ensure that the forward and backward paths
are over the same link so that BFD can correctly identify the faulty path.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the static BFD for LDP LSP, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring parameters of the network layer to make the network accessible
l Enabling MPLS LDPs on all nodes and establishing an LDP session
l Configuring an LDP LSP

Data Preparations
Before configuring the static BFD for LDP LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 BFD configuration name

2 LDP LSP parameters:

l Next hop address of an LSP
l (Optional) Type and number of interfaces

3 Local discriminator and remote discriminator of a BFD session

2.6.2 Enabling Global BFD Capability

You need to only enable BFD on both ends of the link to be detected.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR on both ends of a link that to be detected:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

This node is enabled with the global BFD function. The BFD global view is displayed.

----End

2.6.3 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Ingress

You need to configure BFD parameters on the ingress node before configuring a static BFD
session to detect an LDP LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of an LSP:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd cfg-name bind ldp-lsp peer-ip ip-address nexthop ip-address [ interface
interface-type interface-number ]

The BFD session is bound to a dynamic LSP.

When the IP address of the egress on the LSP to be detected is borrowed or lent, an interface
must be specified.

NOTE

When configuring static BFD for LDP LSP on a network deployed with LDP over TE, specify interface
interface-type interface-number as the tunnel interface.

Step 3 Configure the discriminators.

l Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

l Or, run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

NOTE

The local identifier and remote identifier on both ends of a BFD session must accord with each other.
Otherwise, the session cannot be established correctly. In addition, the local identifier and remote identifier
cannot be modified after configuration.

The minimum interval for the local device to send BFD packets is set.

By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.

If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.

For example, assume that the values of parameters are as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l On the local device, the interval for sending BFD packets is set to 200 ms, the interval
for receiving BFD packets is set to 300 ms, and the detection multiple is set to 4.
l On the peer device, the interval for sending BFD packets is 100 ms, the interval for
receiving BFD packets is 600 ms, and the detection multiple is 5.
Then,
l On the local device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 600 ms calculated
by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
300 ms calculated by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, and the detection period
is 1500 ms calculated by 300 ms multiplied by 5.
l On the peer device, the actual interval for sending local BFD packets is 300 ms obtained
by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
600 ms obtained by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, and the detection period
is 2400 ms obtained by 600 ms multiplied by 4.
4. Run the mpls bfd min-rx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
receiving BFD packets.
The minimum interval for receiving BFD packets is adjusted on the local device.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
5. Run the mpls bfd detect-multiplier multiplier command to adjust the local BFD detection
multiple.
The default value is 3.
6. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
7. Run the bfd cfg-name command to enter the BFD session view.
Step 5 Run:
process-pst

The BFD session status changes can be advertised to the application on the upper layer.
Step 6 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
When the BFD session is established and its status is Up, the BFD starts to detect failure in an
LDP LSP.
When the LDP LSP is deleted, the BFD status turns Down.
The system does not delete BFD configuration entries and session entries until the LDP session
is deleted.

2.6.4 Configuring BFD with Specific Parameters on Egress

You need to configure BFD parameters on the egress node before configuring a static BFD
session to detect an LDP LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Configure BFD session:
l For the IP link, run:
bfd cfg-name bind peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
[ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ source-ip source-ip ]

l For the dynamic LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind ldp-lsp peer-ip ip-address nexthop ip-address [ interface
interface-type interface-number ]

l For the static LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind static-lsp lsp-name

l For MPLS TE, run:

bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number [ te-lsp ]

Step 3 Configure the discriminators.

l Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

l Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

NOTE

The local identifier and remote identifier on both ends of a BFD session must accord with each other. The
session cannot be established correctly otherwise. In addition, the local identifier and remote identifier
cannot be modified after configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.

Actual interval for the local device to send BFD packets = MAX { Locally configured
interval for sending BFD packets, Remotely configured interval for receiving BFD
packets}; Actual interval for the local to receive BFD packets = MAX {Remotely
configured interval for sending BFD packets, Locally configured interval for receiving
BFD packets}; Local detection period = Actual interval for the local device to Receive BFD
packets x Remotely configured BFD detection multiple.
For example, assume that the values of parameters are as follows:
l On the local device, the interval for sending BFD packets is set to 200 ms, the interval
for receiving BFD packets is set to 300 ms, and the detection multiple is set to 4.
l On the peer device, the interval for sending BFD packets is 100 ms, the interval for
receiving BFD packets is 600 ms, and the detection multiple is 5.
Then,
l On the local device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 600 ms calculated
by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
300 ms calculated by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, and the detection period
is 1500 ms calculated by 300 ms multiplied by 5.
l On the peer device, the actual interval for sending local BFD packets is 300 ms obtained
by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is
600 ms obtained by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, and the detection period
is 2400 ms obtained by 600 ms multiplied by 4.
4. Run the mpls bfd min-rx-interval interval command to adjust the minimum interval for
receiving BFD packets.
The minimum interval for receiving BFD packets is adjusted on the local device.
By default, the value is 1000 milliseconds.
If the backward link is an IP link, this parameter is not applicable.
5. Run the mpls bfd detect-multiplier multiplier command to adjust the local BFD detection
multiple.
The default value is 3.
6. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
7. Run the bfd cfg-name command to enter the BFD session view.
Step 5 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

2.6.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of detecting an LDP LSP through a static BFD session, you can view
the BFD configuration, the specified BFD session, and BFD statistics.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the static BFD for LDP LSP function are complete.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

----End

2.7 Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP

By configuring a dynamic BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, you does not need to configure
BFD parameters. This can speed up link fault detection and reduce workload on configurations.

2.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring a dynamic BFD session to detect an LDP LSP, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
With dynamic BFD for LDP LSP, failure detection speeds up and the workload of configuring
decreases. In addition, LDP FRR is well supported for the LSP for providing better services.

NOTE

When working in LDP LSP, the dynamic BFD supports only the LDP LSP that is created after the host
route is triggered.
BFD for LSP can function properly though the forward path is an LSP and the backward path is an IP link.
The forward path and the backward path must be established over the same link; otherwise, if a fault occurs,
BFD cannot identify the faulty path. Before deploying BFD, ensure that the forward and backward paths
are over the same link so that BFD can correctly identify the faulty path.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the dynamic BFD for LDP LSP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring basic MPLS functions

l Configuring MPLS LDP
l (Optional) Creating the FEC list to enable BFD

Data Preparations
To configure the dynamic BFD for LDP LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 LSR ID on each node

2 BFD session trigger mode

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

No. Data

3 (Optional) FEC list

4 (Optional) BFD parameters

2.7.2 Enabling Global BFD Capability

You need to enable BFD globally on only the ingress node and egress node.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress and egress nodes:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

Enable BFD globally.

----End

2.7.3 Enabling MPLS to Establish BFD Session Dynamically

After enabling BFD on the ingress and egress nodes, you can enable MPLS and dynamically
create a BFD session.

Procedure
l Do as follows on the ingress:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls bfd enable

An LDP LSP is enabled with the capability of creating BFD session dynamically.
The BFD session is not created after this command is run.
l Do as follows on the egress:
1. Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
bfd

The BFD view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls-passive

The function of creating BFD session passively is enabled.

Running this command cannot create a BFD session. The BFD session is not created
until the request packet that contains LSP ping of BFD TLV from the ingress.

----End

2.7.4 Configuring the Triggering Policy of Dynamic BFD for LDP

LSP
The trigger policies of configuring a dynamic BFD session to detect an LDP LSP are classified
into the host mode and FEC list mode, which can be configured as required.

Context
Do as follows on the egress of an LSP to be detected:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls bfd-trigger [ host [ nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-
type interface-number ] * | fec-list list-name ]

The triggering policy to establish the session of dynamic BFD for LDP LSP is configured.

After the command is run, the BFD session is started to create.

There are two triggering policies to establish the session of dynamic BFD for LDP LSP:

l Host mode: is adopted when all host addresses are required to be triggered to create BFD
session. You can specify parameters of nexthop and outgoing-interface to define LSPs that
can create a BFD session.
l FEC list mode: is adopted when only a part of host addresses are required to be triggered to
create a BFD session. You can use the fec-list command to specify host addresses.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.7.5 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters

By adjusting the BFD detection parameters, you can modify the BFD detection interval and
detection multiplier.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

The BFD view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls ping interval interval

The interval for sending LSP ping packets is adjusted.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Exit from the BFD view.

Step 5 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls bfd { min-tx-interval interval | min-rx-interval interval | detect-multiplier
multiplier }*

BFD time parameters are set.

By default, the minimum interval for sending BFD packets and the minimum interval for
receiving BFD packets are 1000 ms, and the detection multiple is 3.
Actual interval for the local device to send BFD packets = MAX {Locally configured interval
for sending BFD packets, Remotely configured interval for receiving BFD packets}; Actual
interval for the local device receive BFD packets = MAX {Remotely configured interval for
sending BFD packets, Locally configured interval for receiving BFD packets}; Local detection
period = Actual interval for receiving BFD packets x Remotely configured BFD detection
multiple.
For example, assume that the values of parameters are as follows:
l On the local device, the interval for sending BFD packets is se to 200 ms, the interval for
receiving BFD packets is set to 300 ms, and the detection multiple is set to 4.
l On the peer device, the configured interval for sending BFD packets is 100 ms, the interval
for receiving BFD packets is 600 ms, and the detection multiple is 5.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Then,
l On the local device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 600 ms calculated by
using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is 300 ms
calculated by using the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, and the detection period is 1500 ms
calculated by 300 ms multiplied by 5.
l On the peer device, the actual interval for sending BFD packets is 300 ms calculated by using
the formula max {100 ms, 300 ms}, the interval for receiving BFD packets is 600 ms
calculated by using the formula max {200 ms, 600 ms}, and the detection period is 2400 ms
calculated by 600 ms multiplied by 4.

----End

2.7.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of detecting an LDP LSP through a dynamic BFD session, you can view
the BFD configurations and BFD sessions on the ingress node and egress node.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the dynamic BFD for LDP LSP function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display bfd configuration all [ verbose ] command to check the BFD
configuration (ingress).
l Run the display bfd configuration passive-dynamic [ peer-ip peer-ip remote-
discriminator discriminator ] [ verbose ] command to check the BFD configuration
(egress).
l Run the display bfd session all [ verbose ] command to check information about the BFD
session (ingress).
l Run the display bfd session passive-dynamic [ peer-ip peer-ip remote-discriminator
discriminator ] [ slot slot-id ] [ verbose ] command to check information about the BFD
established passively (egress).
l Run the display mpls bfd session [ statistics | [ protocol { ldp | cr-static | rsvp-te } ] |
[ outgoing-interface interface-type interface-number ] | [ nexthop ip-address ] | [ fec fec-
address ] | verbose | monitor ] command to check information about BFD session (ingress).
----End

Example
Run the display bfd session all command, and you can view the state of BFD session that is
established dynamically. The state of the BFD session is Up, and the type of the link that is
bound to the session is LDP_LSP.
<HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 State : Up Name : dyn_8192
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 8192 Remote Discriminator : 8192
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : LDP_LSP
Bind Session Type : Dynamic
Bind Peer Ip Address : 3.3.3.3
NextHop Ip Address : 192.168.1.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Bind Interface : Pos1/0/0

LSP Token : 0x3002001
FSM Board Id : 3 TOS-EXP : 6
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 100 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 100
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 100 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 100
Local Detect Multi : 4 Detect Interval (ms) : 400
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 1
Proc interface status : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : -- Process PST : Enable
Active Multi : 3
Last Local Diagnostic : No Diagnostic
Bind Application : VRRP | LSPM | LSPM | L2VPN | OAM_MANAGER
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

Run the display bfd session passive-dynamic verbose command on the egress, and you can
view the state of BFD session that is established passively. The field of BFD bind type is peer
IP address. This indicates that the BFD packets sent from this ingress are transported through
IP routes. BFD parameters cannot be adjusted on the egress. Thus, by default, min-tx-
interval and min-tx-interval are 10 respectively. In fact, however, the actual interval between
sending time and the receiving time depends on the negotiation between both ends.
<HUAWEI> display bfd session passive-dynamic verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (Multi Hop) State : Up Name : dyn_8192
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 8192 Remote Discriminator : 8192
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : Peer Ip Address
Bind Session Type : Entire_Dynamic
Bind Peer Ip Address : 192.168.1.1
Bind Interface : --
FSM Board Id : 3 TOS-EXP : 6
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 100 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 100
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 300
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 253
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : -- Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Last Local Diagnostic : No Diagnostic
Bind Application
Session TX TmrID : -- Session Detect TmrID : --
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

2.8 Configuring Manual LDP FRR

By configuring Manual LDP FRR, you can quickly switch traffic to the backup LSP when a link
fails, which ensures uninterrupted traffic transmission.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring Manual LDP FRR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
LDP FRR provides MPLS with a fast reroute function to implement the local port-level backup.
In addition, the data loss decreases.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring LDP FRR, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring MPLS
l Configuring MPLS LDP
If the LDP FRR is based on the BFD, you need to configure the one-hop BFD.
For details of the one-hop BFD, refer to "BFD Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/
40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability.

Data Preparation
To configure LDP FRR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Type and number of the interface protected in a primary LSP

2 Next hop address in a bypass LSP

3 Name of the IP prefix list that can trigger the establishment of bypass LSPs

4 Priority of LSP backup

5 (Optional) Value of LDP FRR protection timer

2.8.2 Enabling Manual LDP FRR

By configuring parameters on the ingress node, you can enable Manual LDP FRR.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls ldp frr nexthop nexthop-address [ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name ] [ priority
priority ]

LDP FRR is enabled on the interface.

On the same interface, you can configure up to 10 LDP FRR entries with different precedences.
According to different precedences, only one bypass LSP is generated. The smaller the value is,
the higher the precedence is. By default, the precedence value is 50.

NOTE

l LDP FRR cannot be enabled or disabled during the LDP GR.

l If LDP FRR and IP FRR are deployed concurrently, IP FRR is used preferentially.
l When the undo mpls ldp command is run to disable the LDP function in the system view or the undo
mpls ldp command is run to disable the LDP function in the interface view, the LDP FRR configuration
in the interface view is not automatically deleted. Only the LDP FRR function is invalid.
l In LDP FRR configuration, the bypass LSP must be in liberal state. That is, the route state of the bypass
LSP from ingress to egress must be "Inactive Avd".

----End

2.8.3 (Optional) Allowing BFD to Modify the PST

You need to permit the BFD session to modify the PST only when configuring BFD for Manual
LDP FRR.

Context
The procedure is only applicable to configure the LDP FRR based on BFD.
Do as follows on the ingress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd cfg-name

The created BFD session view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
process-pst

BFD is allowed to modify the PST.

Step 4 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

By default, BFD does not modify the PST.

----End

2.8.4 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of Manual LDP FRR, you can view information about Manual LDP
FRR-LSPs and BFD-enabled interfaces.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the LDP FRR function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls lsp command to check information about LSPs enabled with LDP
FRR.
l Run the display bfd interface [ interface-type interface-number ] command to check
information about the BFD interface.

----End

2.9 Configuring LDP Auto FRR

By configuring a policy for triggering the setup of backup LSPs, you can control the setup of
backup LSPs.

2.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring LDP Auto FRR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
In a network where LDP Fast Reroute (FRR) is configured, traffic is fast switched to the backup
LSP when a link becomes faulty. In this case, traffic is uninterrupted and is switched within 50
ms.

There are two types of LDP FRR: manual LDP FRR and LDP Auto FRR.
l In the mode of manual LDP FRR, you need to configure a backup LSP by specifying the
outbound interfaces or the next hops. The configuration procedure is complex, but the
backup LSP can be specified. Therefore, manual LDP FRR is more flexible, and is
applicable to the network with a simple structure.
l In the mode of LDP Auto FRR, a backup LSP can be automatically generated according
to the triggering policy. The configuration procedure is more simplified. In addition, loops
that may occur during the manual configuration can be avoided. Therefore, LDP Auto FRR
is applicable to the large-scale network with a complicated structure.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring LDP Auto FRR, complete the following tasks:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Configuring IP addresses for interfaces to ensure that neighboring nodes are reachable at
the network layer
l Configuring IS-IS to advertise the network segments connecting to interfaces on each node
and to advertise the routes of hosts with Label Switching Router (LSR) IDs
l Configuring MPLS LDP
l Configuring IS-IS Auto FRR

Data Preparation
To configure LDP Auto FRR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Type and number of the interface where a backup LSP is set up

2 Policy for triggering LDP to set up backup LSPs

2.9.2 Enabling LDP Auto FRR

To configure LDP Auto FRR, you need to configure the ingress or transit node.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
auto-frr lsp-trigger { all | host | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | none }

The policy for triggering LDP to set up backup LSPs is configured.

By default, the backup routes with 32-bit addresses trigger LDP to setup backup LSPs.
The auto-frr lsp-trigger command is restricted by the lsp-trigger command. If both the auto-
frr lsp-trigger command and the lsp-trigger command are configured, the established backup
LSPs satisfy both the policy for triggering the setup of LSPs by LDP and the policy for triggering
the setup of backup LSPs by LDP.

NOTE

During LDP GR, changing the policy for triggering the setup of backup LSPs is not allowed.

----End

2.9.3 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of LDP Auto FRR, you can view information about LDP Auto FRR-
LSPs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Prerequisite
All LDP Auto FRR configurations are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls lsp command to view information about the established backup LSP
after LDP Auto FRR is enabled.

----End

Example
Enable LDP Auto FRR. You can view that the backup LSP to the destination 2.2.2.9/32 has
already been set up. The configuration result is as follows:
[HUAWEI] display mpls lsp

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: LDP LSP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
2.2.2.9/32 NULL/3 -/Pos1/0/0
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/1
2.2.2.9/32 1024/3 -/Pos1/0/0
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/1
3.3.3.9/32 NULL/3 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 1025/3 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 NULL/1026 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1026 /Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 1026/1026 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1026 /Pos1/0/0
10.1.3.0/24 1027/3 -/Pos1/0/1
10.1.4.0/24 1028/3 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1027 /Pos1/0/0

2.10 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and IGP

By configuring LDP and IGP synchronization, you can delay the route switchback by
suppressing the setup of IGP neighbor relationship till an LDP session is established.

2.10.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring LDP and IGP synchronization, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
In the networking where primary and backup LSPs are used, synchronization between LDP and
IGP is applied to avoid traffic loss in case the primary LSP fails. The situations are as follows:
l When the primary LSP fails, the IGP traffic and LSP traffic are switched to the backup
LSP. When the primary LSP recovers, IGP converges faster than the creation of the LDP
session. Thus, IGP traffic is switched back to the primary LSP before the LDP session is
set up. This causes the loss of LSP traffic.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l When the primary LSP runs normally whereas the LDP sessions between the nodes along
the primary LSP fail, the LSP traffic is switched to the backup LSP. The IGP traffic,
however, is still transmitted along the primary LSP. As a result, the LSP traffic is lost.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring synchronization between LDP and IGP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring MPLS functions

l Configuring MPLS LDP functions globally and on all interfaces

Data Preparation
To configure synchronization between LDP and IGP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Type and number of the interface on which the backup LSP is set up

2 Type and number of the interface on which the timer is configured

3 Timer value

2.10.2 Enabling Synchronization Between LDP and IGP

To enable LDP and IGP synchronization, you need to configure the interfaces of both ends of
the link between the crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighboring node.

Procedure
l When OSPF runs as an IGP, do as follows on the interfaces of both ends of the link between
the crossing node of the active link and the standby link and the LDP neighboring node on
the active link:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
ospf ldp-sync

Synchronization between LDP and OSPF is enabled on the interface to be protected.

l When IS-IS runs as an IGP, do as follows on the interfaces of both ends of the link between
the crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighboring node on the active
link:
1. Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
isis enable process-id

IS-IS is enabled.
4. Run:
isis ldp-sync

Synchronization between LDP and IS-IS is enabled on the interface to be protected.

----End

2.10.3 (Optional) Setting the Hold-down Timer Value

You can set the value of a hold-down timer, that is, an interval during which an interface waits
for the setup of an LDP session without setting up the OSPF neighbor relationship.

Context
Do as follows on the interface:

Procedure
l When OSPF runs as an IGP, do as follows on the interfaces of both ends of the link between
the crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighboring node on the active
link:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-down value

The interval OSPF should wait for an LDP session to be established is set.

By default, the hold-down timer value is 10 seconds.

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
isis timer ldp-sync hold-down value

The interval IS-IS should wait for an LDP session to be established is set.

By default, the hold-down timer value is 10 seconds.

----End

2.10.4 (Optional) Setting the Hold-max-cost Timer Value

You can set the value of a hold-max-cost timer, that is, an interval for advertising the maximum
cost through LSAs generated locally.

Context
Do as follows on the interface:

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost { value | infinite }

The interval for advertising the maximum cost in the LSAs of local LSRs through
OSPF is set.

By default, the value of the hold-max-cost timer is 10 seconds.

You can choose different parameters as required.

– When OSPF carries only LDP services, to ensure that the route selected by OSPF
is always the same as the LDP LSP, infinite need to be specified.
– When OSPF carries multiple services including LDP services, to ensure that OSPF
route selection and other services still run normally in case the LDP session of the
primary LSP fails, value can be specified.

If this command is configured repeatedly, the latest configuration takes effect.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
isis timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost { value | infinite }

The interval for advertising the maximum cost in the LSAs of local LSRs through IS-
IS is set.

By default, the value of the hold-max-cost timer is 10 seconds.

You can choose different parameters as required.

– When IS-IS carries only LDP services, to ensure that the route selected by IS-IS
is always the same as the LDP LSP, infinite need to be specified.
– When IS-IS carries multiple services including LDP services, to ensure that IS-IS
route selection and other services still run normally in case the LDP session of the
primary LSP fails, value can be specified.

If this command is configured repeatedly, the latest configuration takes effect.

----End

2.10.5 (Optional) Setting the Delay Timer Value

You can set the value of a delay timer, that is, an period for waiting for the setup of an LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the interfaces of both ends of the link between the crossing node of active and
standby links and the LDP neighboring node on the active link:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls ldp timer igp-sync-delay value

The period of waiting for the LSP setup after the establishment of the LDP session is set.

By default, the value of the delay timer is 10 seconds.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.10.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of LDP and IGP synchronization, you can view the synchronization
information and route management information on interfaces enabled with LDP and IGP
synchronization.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the synchronization between LDP and IGP function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display ospf ldp-sync interface { all | interface-type interface-number } command
to check information about synchronization between LDP and OSPF on the interface.
l Run the display isis [ process-id | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] ldp-sync interface
command to check information about synchronization between LDP and IS-IS on the
interface.
l Run the display rm interface [ interface-type interface-number | vpn-instance vpn-
instance-name ] command to check information about the route management.

----End

Example
l If the configurations succeed, run the display ospf ldp-sync or display isis ldp-sync
command, and you can view that the status of the interface configured with synchronization
between LDP and IGP is Sync-Achieved.
l Run the display rm interface command, you can view that the LDP-ISIS or LDP-OSPF
is enabled.

2.11 Configuring Synchronization Between LDP and Static

Routes
By configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes, you can switch traffic from the
faulty primary link to the backup link by suppressing the activation of static routes and delay
traffic switchback to synchronize LDP and static routes.

2.11.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes, familiarize yourself with
the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data.
This can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
Synchronization between LDP and static routes is applicable to an MPLS network with primary
and backup LSPs. On such an MPLS network, LSRs establish LSPs based on static routes. When
the LDP session of the primary link becomes faulty (the fault is not caused by a link failure) or
the primary link recovers, synchronization between LDP and static routes minimizes traffic loss
during traffic switchover and switchback. As shown in Figure 2-1, there is a static route between

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

LSRA and LSRD, and an LSP is established between the two devices based on the static route.
Normally, the link LSRA→LSRB→LSRD is preferred.

l In a switchover scenario, when the LDP session of the primary link becomes faulty (the
fault is not caused by a link failure), traffic transmitted through the static route is not
switched to the backup link. As a result, MPLS traffic on the primary link is interrupted.
Normally, after an LDP session is established, MPLS traffic is forwarded along the primary
link LSRA→LSRB→LSRD. If the LDP session between LSRA and LSRB is disconnected,
the LSP is immediately switched to the backup link LSRA→LSRC→LSRD. Because the
link between LSRA and LSRB works properly, traffic transmitted through the static route
is not switched to the backup link. As a result, LDP is not synchronous with the static route,
and MPLS traffic is interrupted.
After synchronization between LDP and static routes is enabled, when the LDP session
goes Down, traffic is automatically switched to the backup link, thus ensuring non-stop
traffic forwarding.
l In a switchback scenario, when the primary link recovers, traffic transmitted through a
static route is first switched back to the primary link because the static route converges
faster than LDP. However, the backup LSP becomes unavailable, and the primary LSP has
not been established. As a result, MPLS traffic is interrupted.
When the link between LSRA and LSRB becomes faulty, traffic is immediately switched
to the backup link LSRA→LSRC→LSRD. After the link between LSRA and LSRB
recovers, traffic transmitted through the static route is immediately switched to the primary
link LSRA→LSRB→LSRD. However, the backup LSP becomes unavailable, and the
primary LSP has not recovered. Therefore, traffic is interrupted.
After synchronization between LDP and static routes is enabled, when the primary LSP is
established, traffic is switched back to the primary link, thus ensuring non-stop traffic
forwarding.

Figure 2-1 Networking diagram for configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes

LSRB

LSRE LSRA LSRD

LSRC
Primary link
Bypass link

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes, complete the following
tasks:

l Enabling MPLS
l Configuring MPLS LDP in the system view and interface view
l Establishing LDP sessions between devices

Data Preparation
To configure synchronization between LDP and static routes, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Type and number of the outbound interface of a static route

2 Time during which a static route waits for an LDP session to be established, that is,
time of the Hold-down timer

2.11.2 Enabling Synchronization Between LDP and Static Routes

On an MPLS network with primary and backup LSPs, LSRs establish LSPs based on static
routes. By enabling synchronization between LDP and static routes on both ends of the two
links, you can avoid MPLS traffic interruption.

Context
With synchronization between LDP and static routes, you can switch traffic from the faulty
primary link to the backup link by suppressing the activation of static routes and delay traffic
switchback to the primary link, thus ensuring that LDP is synchronous with static routes.

NOTE

Only the static route with a specified outbound interface can be configured with synchronization between
LDP and static routes.

Do as follows on devices on both ends of the primary and backup links:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } interface-type interface-number
[ nexthop-address ] [ preference preference | tag tag ] * ldp-sync [ description
text ]

Synchronization between LDP and static routes is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

By default, synchronization between LDP and static routes is not enabled.

----End

2.11.3 (Optional) Setting a Hold-down Timer

When the primary link recovers, a static route does not become active immediately. Instead, the
static route becomes active only when an LDP session is established before the Hold-down timer
expires. Then traffic is switched back to the primary link.

Context
After a Hold-down timer is set on an interface, the static route enabled with synchronization
between LDP and static routes becomes inactive temporarily and waits for an LDP session to
be established before the Hold-down timer expires. This implements synchronization between
LDP and static routes. If the Hold-down timer expires, the static route becomes active regardless
of whether the LDP session has been established.

NOTE

Setting a Hold-down timer on loopback interfaces or null interfaces is not allowed.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The outbound interface view of the primary link of the static route is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
static-route timer ldp-sync hold-down { timer | infinite }

A Hold-down timer is set.

By default, a Hold-down timer is set to 10 seconds.
l If the Hold-down timer is set to 0 seconds, it indicates that synchronization between LDP
and static routes is disabled on an interface.
l If the Hold-down timer is set to infinite, it indicates that the timer never expires. In this case,
the static route becomes active and MPLS traffic is switched only after an LDP session is
established.

----End

2.11.4 Checking the Configuration

After synchronization between LDP and static routes is configured, you can check the status of
all the interfaces configured with synchronization between LDP and static routes.

Prerequisite
The configurations of synchronization between LDP and static routes are complete.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Procedure
l Run the display static-route ldp-sync [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
command to check the status of the interface configured with synchronization between LDP
and static routes.
If the parameter interface interface-type interface-number is specified, only the status of
a specified interface is displayed.
----End

Example
Run the display static-route ldp-sync command after configuring synchronization between
LDP and static routes. If the following is displayed, it means that the configuration succeeds.
<HUAWEI> display static-route ldp-sync
Total number of routes enable LDP-sync: 1
--------------------------------------------------------
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Enable ldp-sync static routes number: 1
Static-route ldp-sync holddown timer: 10s
Sync State: Normal
Dest = 1.1.1.1, Mask = 32, NextHop = 2.2.2.2
---------------------------------------------------------

2.12 Configuring LDP GTSM

By configuring LDP GTSM, you can detect TTLs to prevent attacks.

2.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring LDP GTSM, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
The Generalized TTL Security Mechanism (GTSM) prevents attacks by using the TTL detection.
An attacker simulates real LDP unicast packets and sends the packets in a large quantity to a
node. After receiving the packets, an interface of the LSR directly sends the packets to LDP of
the control plane if the interface finds that the packets are sent by the local node, without checking
the validity of the packets. Because the control plane of the node needs to process the "legal"
packets, the system becomes abnormally busy and CPU usage is high.
GTSM protects the node by checking whether the TTL value in the IP packet header is within
a pre-defined range, and thus enhances the system security.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring basic LDP GTSM functions, complete the following tasks:
l Enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP

Data Preparation
To configure the basic LDP GTSM functions, you need the following data.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

No. Data

1 Transport address of an LDP peer

2 Maximum number of valid hops permitted by GTSM

2.12.2 Configuring LDP GTSM

To configure LDP GTSM, you need to configure both LDP peers.

Context
Do as follows on the two LDP peers that need to be configured with GTSM:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
gtsm peer ip-address valid-ttl-hops hops

LDP GTSM is configured.

If the value of hops is set to the maximum number of valid hops permitted by GTSM, when the
TTL values carried in the packets sent by an LDP peer are within the range [255 - hops + 1,
255], the packets are received; otherwise, the packets are discarded.

----End

2.12.3 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of LDP GTSM, you can view GTSM statistics.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the LDP GTSM function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display gtsm statistics { slot-id | all } command to check the GTSM statistics.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Example
Run the display gtsm statistics command, and you can view the GTSM statistics in each slot,
including the total number of LDP, BGP, BGP4+, and OSPF packets and the number of packets
that are allowed to pass through or the number of dropped packets.
<HUAWEI> display gtsm statistics all
GTSM Statistics Table
----------------------------------------------------------------
SlotId Protocol Total Counters Drop Counters Pass Counters
----------------------------------------------------------------
6 BGP 0 0 0
6 BGPv6 0 0 0
6 OSPF 0 0 0
6 LDP 11 0 11
----------------------------------------------------------------

2.13 Configuring LDP GR

By configuring LDP GR, you can realize the uninterrupted forwarding during the master/slave
switchover or the protocol restart, which can limit the protocol flapping on the control plane.

2.13.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring LDP GR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
It is necessary to enable LDP GR to maintain normal forwarding and resume the LDP session
and establish LSPs after the switchover and system update.

NOTE

In practical applications, the system-level GR is usually configured in the hardware environment with dual
main control boards. In this manner, the service can be forwarded when the main control board fails.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring LDP GR, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring the IGP GR function

l Configuring the local MPLS LDP session

Data Preparation
To configure LDP GR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 MPLS LSR ID of the local node

2 Value of the Reconnect timer of the LDP session

3 Value of the LDP Neighbor-liveness timer

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

No. Data

4 Value of the LDP Recovery timer

2.13.2 Enabling LDP GR

To enable LDP GR, you need to configure both the GR Restarter and its neighbor.

Context
Do as follows on the LDP GR Restarter and its neighbor nodes:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls lsr-id lsr-id

The local LSR ID is configured.

Step 3 Run:
mpls

The MPLS function is enabled on the local node and the MPLS view is displayed.
Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
mpls ldp

The LDP function is enabled on the local node and the LDP view is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
graceful-restart

The GR function is enabled.

By default, the LDP GR function is disabled.

NOTE

l When the LDP GR is enabled or disabled, the LDP session is renewed.

l During the LDP GR process, the undo mpls ldp and reset mpls ldp commands are not permitted.
l During the LDP GR process, the modification of the LSP trigger policy through the lsp-trigger,
propagate mapping and lsp-trigger bgp-label-route commands is invalid.
l During the LDP GR process, you are not permitted to run the mpls ldp frr nexthop command to enable
the LDP FRR. Alternatively, run the undo mpls ldp frr nexthop command to disable the LDP FRR.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.13.3 (Optional) Configuring GR Restarter Timer

You can set the value of a GR Restarter timer, that is, the Neighbor-liveness timer.

Context
Do as follows on the GR restarter:

NOTE

Modifying the values of the LDP GR timers may lead to reestablishment of LDP sessions.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp
The MPLS LDP view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
graceful-restart timer neighbor-liveness time

The value of the Neighbor-liveness timer is set.

By default, the value of the Neighbor-liveness timer is 600 seconds.

----End

2.13.4 (Optional) Configuring the timer of GR Helper

You can set the values of GR Helper timers, that is, the Reconnect timer for an LDP session and
the LSP Recovery timer.

Context
Do as follows on the GR Helper:

NOTE

If any timer value related to LDP GR is modified, the LDP session is recreated.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp

The MPLS LDP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

graceful-restart timer reconnect time

The time of the Reconnect timer for the LDP session is set.

By default, the time of the Reconnect timer is set to 300 seconds.

Step 4 Run:
graceful-restart timer recovery time

The time of the LSP Recovery timer is set.

By default, the time of the LSP Recovery timer is set to 300 seconds.

Step 5 Run:
graceful-restart timer neighbor-liveness time

The value of the Neighbor-liveness timer is set.

By default, the value of the Neighbor-liveness timer is 600 seconds.

----End

2.13.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of LDP GR, you can view GR information about all protocols related to
MPLS, LDP information, and LDP session information.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the LDP GR function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls graceful-restart command to check information about GR of all
protocols related to MPLS.
l Run the display mpls ldp [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check information about LDP.
l Run the display mpls ldp session [ all ] [ verbose ] command to check information about
the LDP session.

----End

Example
l Run the display mpls ldp command, and you can view that the state of Graceful Restart
is On. That is, LDP GR is enabled.
l Run the display mpls ldp command or the display mpls ldp session verbose command,
and you can view the values of LDP session Reconnect timer, Neighbor-liveness timer,
and LSP Recovery timer.

2.14 Maintaining MPLS LDP

The operations of MPLS LDP maintenance include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity and reachability of an LSP, and configuring the trap function on an LDP LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.14.1 Resetting LDP

Resetting LDP may temporarily affect the reestablishment of the LSP. Take care to reset LDP.

Context

CAUTION
Resetting LDP may temporarily affect the reestablishment of the LSP. Take care to reset LDP.
Resetting LDP is prohibited during the LDP GR.

After you confirm to reset LDP, run the following commands in the user view.

Procedure
l Run the reset mpls ldp command to reset configurations of the global LDP instance.
l Run the reset mpls ldp vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command to reset LDP
configurations on a specified LDP instance.
l Run the reset mpls ldp all command to reset configurations on all LDP instances.
l Run the reset mpls ldp peer peer-id command to reset a specified peer.
l Run the reset mpls ldp vpn-instance vpn-instance-name peer peer-id command to reset
the peer on a specified VPN instance.

----End

2.14.2 Clearing MPLS Statistics

By running the reset command, you can delete MPLS statistics.

Context

CAUTION
MPLS statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Therefore, confirm the action before you
run the following commands.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.14.3 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability

By running the ping or tracert command, you can detect connectivity or reachability of an LSP.

Context
You can run the following commands in any view to perform MPLS ping and MPLS tracert.

MPLS ping is performed.

MPLS tracert is performed.

If draft6 is specified, the command is implemented according to draft-ietf-mpls-lsp-
ping-06. By default, the command is implemented according to RFC 4379.
----End

2.14.4 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP

By configuring the trap function on an LSP, you can notify the NMS of the changes of the LSP
status.

2.15 Configuration Examples

The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS LDP. Familiarize
yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram. Each configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration

roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Follow-up Procedure
NOTE

2.15.1 Example for Configuring Local LDP Sessions

This section describes how to configure a local LDP session, including enabling MPLS and
MPLS LDP on devices and interfaces.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-2, local LDP sessions are set up between LSRA and LSRB, and between
LSRB and LSRC.

Figure 2-2 Networking diagram of Local LDP session configuration

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable global MPLS functions and MPLS LDP functions on each LSR.
2. Enable MPLS functions on interfaces of each LSR.
3. Enable MPLS LDP on interfaces of both ends of a local LDP session.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of each interface on each LSR as shown in Figure 2-2, OSPF process ID, and
OSPF area ID
l LSR IDs of the nodes

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses of the interfaces.
Configure IP addresses and masks for all the interfaces as shown in Figure 2-2, including the
loopback interface. The detailed configuration is not mentioned here.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Step 2 Configure the basic MPLS functions and MPLS LDP functions on each LSR.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS functions on each interface.

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 4 Enable the MPLS LDP functions on the interfaces of both ends of the local LDP session.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 5 Verify the Configuration.

After the configuration of the local LDP session, run the display mpls ldp session command.
You can view that the status of the local LDP sessions between LSRA and LSRB, and between
LSRB and LSRC is Operational.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:22 91/91
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 session(s) Found.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRC

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

2.15.2 Example for Configuring Remote MPLS LDP Sessions

This section describes how to configure a remote LDP session, including enabling MPLS and
MPLS LDP on devices and interfaces.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-3, a remote LDP session is established between LSR A and LSR C.

Figure 2-3 Networking diagram of establishing a remote MPLS LDP session

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable global MPLS capabilities and MPLS LDP capabilities on each LSR.
2. Specify the name and IP address of the remote peer at LSRs on both ends of a remote LDP
session.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of each interface such as Figure 2-3, OSPF process ID, and OSPF area ID
l LSR ID of each node
l Name and IP address of the remote peer of a remote LDP session

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of each interface.
As shown in Figure 2-3, configure the IP address and mask of each interface, including the
loopback interface. In addition, use OSPF to notify interfaces of the connected segments and
the routes to the host that is specified by the LSR ID. The detailed configurations are not
mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure the global MPLS function and MPLS LDP function on each LSR.
# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSR B.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSR C.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 3 Specify the name and IP address of the remote peer on LSRs of both ends of a remote LDP
session.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls ldp remote-peer LSRC
[LSRA-mpls-ldp-remote-lsrc] remote-ip 3.3.3.9
[LSRA-mpls-ldp-remote-lsrc] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls ldp remote-peer LSRA
[LSRC-mpls-ldp-remote-lsra] remote-ip 1.1.1.9
[LSRC-mpls-ldp-remote-lsra] quit

Step 4 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display mpls ldp session command on the LSR, and you can
view that the status of the remote LDP session between LSR A and LSR C is Operational.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3.3.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:01 6/6
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 session(s) Found.

Run the display mpls ldp remote-peer command on LSRs at both ends of the remote LDP
session, and you can view information about the remote peers of the LSRs.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp remote-peer

LDP Remote Entity Information

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Peer Name : LSRC
Remote Peer IP : 3.3.3.9 LDP ID : 1.1.1.9:0
Transport Address : 1.1.1.9 Entity Status : Active

Configured Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec

Configured Keepalive Send Timer : ---
Configured Hello Hold Timer : 45 Sec
Negotiated Hello Hold Timer : 45 Sec
Configured Hello Send Timer : ---
Configured Delay Timer : 0 Sec
Hello Packet sent/received : 10/7
Remote Peer Deletion Status : No
Auto-config : ---
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 Peer(s) Found.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
mpls ldp remote-peer LSRC
remote-ip 3.3.3.9
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
mpls ldp remote-peer LSRA
remote-ip 1.1.1.9
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.15.3 Example for Configuring LSPs by Using LDP

This section provides an example for setting up an LSP through LDP, which consists of
establishing a local LDP session and modifying the trigger policy of establishing LSPs on each
LSR.

Networking Requirements
Establish an LDP LSP from LSRA to LSRC on the network as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Networking diagram of configuring the LDP LSP

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the Local LDP sessions.
2. (Optional) Modify the LDP LSP trigger policy on each LSR.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of the interfaces, OSPF process ID, and area ID
l (Optional) The trigger policy to be modified for establishing an LDP LSP

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the LDP LSP.
After the configuration in Example for Configuring LDP Sessions, all the LSRs triggers the
establishment of LDP LSPs according to the host route that is the default LDP LSP trigger policy.
Run the display mpls ldp lsp command on the LSRs, and you can view that all the host routes
trigger the establishment of LDP LSPs.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
LDP LSP Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DestAddress/Mask In/OutLabel UpstreamPeer NextHop OutInterface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.9/32 3/NULL 2.2.2.9 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
*1.1.1.9/32 Liberal
2.2.2.9/32 NULL/3 - 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.9/32 1024/3 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

3.3.3.9/32 NULL/1025 - 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

3.3.3.9/32 1025/1025 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 5 Normal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 1 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale
A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state
A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

NOTE

Usually, the default trigger policy is used. That is, the establishment of an LDP LSP is triggered by a host
route. You can perform the following procedures to modify the LDP LSP trigger policy according to your
demands.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify the LDP LSP trigger policy.

Configure the conditions of triggering LSPs as all on LSRs. All the static routes and IGP entries
then can trigger the establishment of LSPs.

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRA-mpls] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRB-mpls] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRC-mpls] quit

Step 3 Verify the configuration.

After the preceding configuration, run the display mpls ldp lsp command on each LSR, and
you can view information about the LDP LSP.

Take the display on LSRA as an example.

[LSRA] display mpls ldp lsp
LDP LSP Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DestAddress/Mask In/OutLabel UpstreamPeer NextHop OutInterface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.9/32 3/NULL 2.2.2.9 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
*1.1.1.9/32 Liberal
2.2.2.9/32 NULL/3 - 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.9/32 1024/3 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 NULL/1025 - 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 1025/1025 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/30 3/NULL 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
*10.1.1.0/30 Liberal
10.2.1.0/30 NULL/3 - 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.0/30 1026/3 2.2.2.9 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 8 Normal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 2 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state

A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Configuration file of LSRC

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

2.15.4 Example for Configuring LDP to Automatically Trigger a

Request in DoD Mode
This section provides an example for configuring LDP to automatically trigger a request in DoD
mode, which consists of enabling global MPLS and MPLS LDP and configuring the label
advertisement mode as DoD.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-5, LSR A and LSR D are at the edge of a network. To set up a PW, a
remote LDP session must be set up between LSR A and LSR D to set up a public network tunnel.
As the network is of large scale, to save the network resources, you need to configure LDP to
automatically trigger a request to a downstream node for a label mapping message associated
with a remote LDP peer in DoD mode. In this manner, you can reduce unnecessary IP and MPLS
entries.

Figure 2-5 Networking diagram of configuring LDP to automatically trigger the request in DoD
mode
Loopback0 Loopback0 Loopback0 Loopback0
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32 4.4.4.4/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/1 POS1/0/1
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.2.1/24 10.1.3.1/24
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 10.1.2.2/24 10.1.3.2/24
LSRA LSRB LSRC LSRD

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Assign an IP address to each interface of each node and configure the loopback address
that is used as the LSR ID.
2. Configure basic IS-IS functions on each backbone network device and a static route to the
neighbor of each edge device.
3. Enable global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node.
4. Configure the DoD label distribution mode.
5. Configure LDP extension for inter-area LSP.
6. Configure a remote LDP session and enable the function of automatically triggering a
request to a downstream node for a label mapping message associated with a remote LDP
peer in DoD mode.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of an interface on each node as shown in Figure 2-5
l IS-IS level on each node

Procedure
Step 1 Assign an IP address to each interface of each node and configure the loopback address that is
used as the LSR ID.
As shown in Figure 2-5, configure an IP address and mask for each interface including the
loopback interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure basic IS-IS functions on each backbone network device and a static route to the
neighbor of each edge device.
# Configure basic IS-IS function on LSR B.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 0
[LSRB-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure basic IS-IS function on LSR C and imports static routes.

<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
[LSRC-isis-1] import-route static
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 0
[LSRC-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure a default route with the next-hop address being 10.1.1.2 on LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.2

# Configure a static route to LSR A on LSR B.

<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 10.1.1.1

# Configure a static route to LSR D on LSR C.

<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.0 10.1.3.2

# Configure a default route with the next-hop address being 10.1.3.1 on LSR D.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.3.1

# Run the display ip routing-table command on LSR A to view routing information.

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

1.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

You can view that the configured default route exists on LSR A.
# Run the display ip routing-table command on LSR B to view routing information.
[LSRB] display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 12 Routes : 12

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

1.1.1.1/24 Static 60 0 RD 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0

2.2.2.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
3.3.3.3/32 ISIS-L1 15 10 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
4.4.4.4/32 ISIS-L1 15 74 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.2.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.1 Pos1/0/1
10.1.2.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.2.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

You can view that the configured default route to LSR A exists on LSR B.
Step 3 Enable global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1

[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

The configurations on LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D are the same as the those of LSR A, and the
configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 4 Configure the DoD label distribution mode.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp advertisement dod
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp advertisement dod
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp advertisement dod
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp advertisement dod
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 5 Configure LDP over TE.

# Run the longest-match command on LSR A to enable LDP to set up an LSP by searching for
a route according to the longest matching rule.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] longest-match
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

# Run the longest-match command on LSR D to enable LDP to set up an LSP by searching for
a route according to the longest matching rule.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] longest-match
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 6 Configure a remote LDP session and enable the function of automatically triggering a request
to a downstream node for a label mapping message associated with a remote LDP peer in DoD
mode.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRA] mpls ldp remote-peer lsrd

[LSRA-mpls-ldp-remote-lsrd] remote-ip 4.4.4.4
[LSRA-mpls-ldp-remote-lsrd] remote-ip auto-dod-request
[LSRA-mpls-ldp-remote-lsrd] quit

# Configure LSR D.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] mpls ldp remote-peer lsra
[LSRD-mpls-ldp-remote-lsra] remote-ip 1.1.1.1
[LSRD-mpls-ldp-remote-lsra] remote-ip auto-dod-request
[LSRD-mpls-ldp-remote-lsra] quit

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

# After the preceding configuration, run the display ip routing-table 4.4.4.4 command on LSR
A to view routing information.
<LSRA> display ip routing-table 4.4.4.4
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Table : Public
Summary Count : 1
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

You can view that only a default route exists and no exact route to 4.4.4.4 exists in the routing
table.

# Run the display mpls ldp lsp command on LSR A to view information about the established
LSPs.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

You can view that an LSP destined for 4.4.4.4 is set up. It indicates that LSR A automatically
requests LSR B for a label mapping message associated with the destination 4.4.4.4 and thus
LSP can be set up.

# Run the display tunnel-info all command on LSR A to view information about the established
LSPs.
<LSRA> display tunnel-info all
* -> Allocated VC Token
Tunnel ID Type Destination Token
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0x1000 lsp 4.4.4.4 0

You can view that the LSP from LSR A to LSR D is set up.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A

#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
#
mpls ldp
longest-match
#
#
mpls ldp remote-peer lsrd
remote-ip 4.4.4.4
undo remote-ip pwe3
remote-ip auto-dod-request
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp advertisement dod
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.2
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp advertisement dod
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 10.1.1.1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
import-route static
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp advertisement dod
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
ip route-static 4.4.4.0 255.255.255.0 10.1.3.2
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
#
mpls ldp
longest-match
#
#
mpls ldp remote-peer lsra
remote-ip 1.1.1.1
undo remote-ip pwe3
remote-ip auto-dod-request
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp advertisement dod
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.3.1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
return

2.15.5 Example for Configuring an Inbound LDP Policy

This section describes how to configure an inbound LDP policy, including the operations of
enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP globally.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 2-6, MPLS LDP is configured. LSR D is a DSLAM functioning
as a low-performance access device. By default, LSR D receives label mapping messages from
all peers and then uses the routing information in these messages to establish a large number of
LSPs. As a result, memory on LSR D is overused and LSR D is overburdened. In this case, an
inbound LDP policy needs to be configured on LSR D. The policy allows LSR D to receive label
mapping messages for routes to only LSR C and to establish LSPs to LSR C, thus saving
resources.

Figure 2-6 Networking diagram of an inbound LDP policy

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS1/0/1 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 10.1.2.1/24 10.1.2.2/24

LSRB
LSRA POS1/0/2 LSRC
10.1.3.2/24
Loopback1
4.4.4.9/32

POS1/0/0
10.1.3.1/24
LSRD

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure the IP address and loopback address of each interface.

2. Configure OSPF to advertise the route to each network segment of each interface and to
advertise the host route to each LSR ID.
3. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP in the system view and interface view.
4. Configure an inbound LDP policy.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l IP address of each interface on each LSR as shown in Figure 2-6, OSPF process ID, and
OSPF area ID
l LSR ID of each node

Procedure
Step 1 Assign the IP address to and configure OSPF on each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask of each interface, including the loopback interface, as shown
in Figure 2-6, and configure OSPF to advertise the route to each network segment of each
interface and to advertise the host route to each LSR ID. The detailed configurations are not
described.
Step 2 Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP in the system view and interface view.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/2
[LSRB-Pos1/0/2] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/2] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/2] quit

# Configure LSR C.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

# After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSR D to view
information about the established LSPs.
<LSRD> display mpls lsp

The command output shows that LSPs to LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C have been established on
LSR D.
Step 3 Configure an inbound LDP policy.
# Configure an IP prefix list on LSR D to permit the route to only LSR C to pass the inbound
LDP policy.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] ip ip-prefix prefix1 permit 3.3.3.9 32

# Configure an inbound policy on LSR D to allow LSR D to send label mapping messages
carrying the route to only LSR C.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] inbound peer 2.2.2.9 fec ip-prefix prefix1
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 4 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSR D. The result
shows that only an LSP to LSR C has been established.
<LSRD> display mpls lsp

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A

#
sysname LSRA

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/2
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR D

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
inbound peer 2.2.2.9 fec ip-prefix prefix1
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
#
ip ip-prefix prefix1 index 10 permit 3.3.3.9 32
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

2.15.6 Example for Configuring an Outbound LDP Policy

This section describes how to configure an outbound LDP policy, including the operations of
enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP globally.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 2-7, MPLS LDP is configured. LSR D is a DSLAM functioning
as a low-performance access device. By default, LSR D receives label mapping messages from
all peers and then uses the routing information in these messages to establish a large number of
LSPs. As a result, memory on LSR D is overused and LSR D is overburdened. In this case, an
outbound LDP policy needs to be configured on LSR B to send LSRD label mapping messages
for routes to only LSR C and to establish LSPs to LSR C, thus saving resources.

Figure 2-7 Networking diagram of an outbound LDP policy

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS1/0/1 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 10.1.2.1/24 10.1.2.2/24

LSRB
LSRA POS1/0/2 LSRC
10.1.3.2/24
Loopback1
4.4.4.9/32

POS1/0/0
10.1.3.1/24
LSRD

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure the IP address and loopback address of each interface.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IP address of each interface on each LSR as shown in Figure 2-7, OSPF process ID, and
OSPF area ID
l LSR ID of each node

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Assign the IP address to and configure OSPF on each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask of each interface, including the loopback interface, as shown
in Figure 2-7, and configure OSPF to advertise the route to each network segment of each
interface and to advertise the host route to each LSR ID. The detailed configurations are not
described.
Step 2 Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP in the system view and interface view.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp

[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

# After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSR D to view
information about the established LSPs.
<LSRD> display mpls lsp

The command output shows that LSPs to LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C have been established on
LSR D.
Step 3 Configure an outbound LDP policy.
# Configure an IP prefix list on LSR B to permit the routes to LSR C to pass the outbound LDP
policy.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] ip ip-prefix prefix1 permit 3.3.3.9 32

# Configure an outbound policy on LSR B to send LSR D label mapping messages carrying the
route to only LSR C.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] outbound peer 4.4.4.9 fec ip-prefix prefix1
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 4 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSR D. The result
shows that only an LSP to LSR C has been established.
<LSRD> display mpls lsp

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A

#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
outbound peer 4.4.4.9 fec ip-prefix prefix1
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/2
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
#
ip ip-prefix prefix1 index 10 permit 3.3.3.9 32
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR D

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

2.15.7 Example for Configuring Transit LSPs Through the Prefix

List
This section provides an example for configuring a transit LSP, which consists of establishing
a local LDP session and configuring an IP prefix list on the transit LSP to filter routes.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-8, an LDP LSP is set up between respective LSRs. LSRB allows only the
FEC of 4.4.4.4/32 to pass.

Figure 2-8 Networking diagram of configuring transit LSPs through the prefix list
Loopback1 Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
POS2/0/0
192.168.2.2/24
LSRB LSRC
POS1/0/0
POS1/0/0 192.168.2.1/24 POS2/0/0
192.168.1.2/24 192.168.3.1/24

POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0
192.168.1.1/24 192.168.3.2/24

LSRA LSRD

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 4.4.4.4/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the IP address of the interfaces, set the loopback address as the LSR ID, and use
OSPF to advertise the network segments to which the interfaces are connected and the LSR
ID host route.
2. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP globally on the LSRs, and configure the policy of triggering
the establishment of LSPs.
3. Configure the IP prefix list according to the requirement for LSP control.
4. Filter the transit LSP routes by using the IP prefix list on the transit node.
5. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP on the interfaces.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of the interfaces, OSPF process ID, and area ID
l Policy for triggering the establishment of LSPs
l IP prefix list name, and the routes to be filtered on the transit node

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of the interfaces, and use OSPF to advertise the network segments that
the interfaces are connected to and the LSR ID host route.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

According to Figure 2-8, configure the IP address and the mask of the interfaces, including the
loopback interface, and run OSPF. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure the IP prefix list on the transit.
# Configure the IP prefix list on the transit node LSRB. Only 4.4.4.4/32 of LSRD can be used
to establish the transit LSP.
[LSRB] ip ip-prefix FilterOnTransit permit 4.4.4.4 32

Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions and MPLS LDP functions globally and on the interfaces.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] propagate mapping for ip-prefix FilterOnTransit
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

The configurations of LSRC and LSRD are similar to that of LSRA and LSRB, and the
configurations are not mentioned here.
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
Run the display mpls ldp lsp command, and you can view the establishment of LSPs.
# Display the LDP LSP on LSRA.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

TOTAL: 8 Normal LSP(s) Found.

TOTAL: 1 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale
A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state
A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

# Display the LDP LSP on LSRB.

[LSRB] display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DestAddress/Mask In/OutLabel UpstreamPeer NextHop OutInterface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1/32 NULL/3 - 192.168.1.1 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.2/32 3/NULL 1.1.1.1 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
2.2.2.2/32 3/NULL 3.3.3.3 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
*2.2.2.2/32 Liberal
*2.2.2.2/32 Liberal
3.3.3.3/32 NULL/3 - 192.168.2.1 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/1026 - 192.168.2.1 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1026/1026 1.1.1.1 192.168.2.1 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1026/1026 3.3.3.3 192.168.2.1 Pos2/0/0
*4.4.4.4/32 Liberal
192.168.1.0/24 3/NULL 1.1.1.1 192.168.1.2 Pos1/0/0
192.168.1.0/24 3/NULL 3.3.3.3 192.168.1.2 Pos1/0/0
*192.168.1.0/24 Liberal
*192.168.1.0/24 Liberal
192.168.2.0/24 3/NULL 1.1.1.1 192.168.2.2 Pos2/0/0
192.168.2.0/24 3/NULL 3.3.3.3 192.168.2.2 Pos2/0/0
*192.168.2.0/24 Liberal
*192.168.2.0/24 Liberal
192.168.3.0/24 NULL/3 - 192.168.2.1 Pos2/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 12 Normal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 7 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale
A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state
A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

# Display the LDP LSP on LSRC.

[LSRC] display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DestAddress/Mask In/OutLabel UpstreamPeer NextHop OutInterface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2/32 NULL/3 - 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.2/32 1025/3 2.2.2.2 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.2/32 1025/3 4.4.4.4 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
*2.2.2.2/32 Liberal
3.3.3.3/32 3/NULL 2.2.2.2 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
3.3.3.3/32 3/NULL 4.4.4.4 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
*3.3.3.3/32 Liberal
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/3 - 192.168.3.2 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1026/3 2.2.2.2 192.168.3.2 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1026/3 4.4.4.4 192.168.3.2 Pos2/0/0
*4.4.4.4/32 Liberal
192.168.1.0/24 NULL/3 - 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
192.168.1.0/24 1027/3 2.2.2.2 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
192.168.1.0/24 1027/3 4.4.4.4 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0
*192.168.1.0/24 Liberal
192.168.2.0/24 3/NULL 2.2.2.2 192.168.2.1 Pos1/0/0
192.168.2.0/24 3/NULL 4.4.4.4 192.168.2.1 Pos1/0/0
*192.168.2.0/24 Liberal

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

*192.168.2.0/24 Liberal
192.168.3.0/24 3/NULL 2.2.2.2 192.168.3.1 Pos2/0/0
192.168.3.0/24 3/NULL 4.4.4.4 192.168.3.1 Pos2/0/0
*192.168.3.0/24 Liberal
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 15 Normal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 7 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale
A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state
A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

# Display the LDP LSP on LSRD.

[LSRD] display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DestAddress/Mask In/OutLabel UpstreamPeer NextHop OutInterface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2/32 NULL/1025 - 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.2/32 1025/1025 3.3.3.3 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 NULL/3 - 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 1026/3 3.3.3.3 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 3/NULL 3.3.3.3 127.0.0.1 InLoop0
*4.4.4.4/32 Liberal
192.168.1.0/24 NULL/1027 - 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
192.168.1.0/24 1027/1027 3.3.3.3 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
192.168.2.0/24 NULL/3 - 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
192.168.2.0/24 1028/3 3.3.3.3 192.168.3.1 Pos1/0/0
192.168.3.0/24 3/NULL 3.3.3.3 192.168.3.2 Pos1/0/0
*192.168.3.0/24 Liberal
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 10 Normal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 2 Liberal LSP(s) Found.
TOTAL: 0 Frr LSP(s) Found.
A '*' before an LSP means the LSP is not established
A '*' before a Label means the USCB or DSCB is stale
A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state
A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

The preceding information shows that after the configuration of the LSP control policy, each
LSR has only the LDP LSP destined for 4.4.4.4/32 passing through the transit LSRB, and other
LDP LSPs that do not take LSRB as the transit node.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRB
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
propagate mapping for ip-prefix FilterOnTransit
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
#
ip ip-prefix FilterOnTransit index 10 permit 4.4.4.4 32
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRC
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRD

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
#
Return

2.15.8 Example for Configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP

This section provides an example for configuring LDP extension for Inter-Area LSP, which
consists of enabling global MPLS and MPLS LDP and configuring the policy for aggregating
routes.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-9, there are two IGP areas, Area 10 and Area 20. It is required to establish
the inter-area LSPs from LSRA to LSRB and from LSRA to LSRC. It is required to configure
inter-area LSP on LSRA so that LSRA can search for routes according to the longest match rule
to establish LSPs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Figure 2-9 Networking diagram of configuring LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP

Loopback0
1.3.0.1/32

0/1
Loopback0 Loopback0 S1/ /24 /0 LSRB
1.1.0.1/32
O
1.2.0.1/32 P .1.1.
1
S 1/0 /24
2
POS1/0/0 20 PO 1.1.
. IS-IS
10.1.1.1/24 PO 20
20 S1 Area10
POS1/0/0 .1. /0/
2.1 2
LSRA 10.1.1.2/24 LSRD /24 Loopback0
1.3.0.2/32
IS-IS PO
Area20 20 S1
.1. /0/
2.2 0
/24
LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Assign IP addresses to interfaces on each node and configure the loopback addresses that
are used as LSR IDs.
2. Enable IS-IS.
3. Configure the policy for aggregating routes.
4. Enable global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node.
5. Configure LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IP address of each interface, as shown in Figure 2-9

l IS-IS area ID of each nodes and levels of each nodes and interfaces

Procedure
Step 1 Assign IP addresses to interfaces on each node and configure the loopback addresses that are
used as LSR IDs.

As described in Figure 2-9, configure an IP address and a mask for each interface, including a
loopback interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Step 2 Enable IS-IS.

# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRA-isis-1] network-entity 20.0010.0100.0001.00
[LSRA-isis-1] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface loopback 0
[LSRA-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure the LSRD.

<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] network-entity 10.0010.0200.0001.00
[LSRD-isis-1] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] isis circuit-level level-2
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] isis circuit-level level-1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/2
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] isis circuit-level level-1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] quit
[LSRD] interface loopback 0
[LSRD-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] is-level level-1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 10.0010.0300.0001.00
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 0
[LSRB-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] is-level level-1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 10.0010.0300.0002.00
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 0
[LSRC-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack0] quit

# On LSRA, run the display ip routing-table command. You can view route information.
[LSRA] display ip routing-table

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 11 Routes : 11

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

1.1.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

1.2.0.1/32 ISIS-L1 15 10 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
1.3.0.1/32 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
1.3.0.2/32 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos10/0/0
20.1.1.0/24 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
20.1.2.0/24 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 3 Configure the policy for aggregating routes.

# On LSRD, run the summary command to obtain aggregated LSRB and LSRC host route.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] summary 1.3.0.0 255.255.255.0 avoid-feedback

# On LSRA, run the display ip routing-table command. You can view route information.

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 10 Routes : 10

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

1.1.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

1.2.0.1/32 ISIS-L1 15 10 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
1.3.0.0/24 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
20.1.1.0/24 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
20.1.2.0/24 ISIS-L1 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

The command output shows that the host routes to LSRB and LSRC have been aggregated.
Step 4 Configure global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node so that the network
can forward MPLS traffic, and view the setup of the LSP.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.0.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure the LSRD.

[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 1.2.0.1
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRD] mpls ldp

[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/2
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos1/0/2] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 1.3.0.1
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 1.3.0.2
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit

# After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to view the
established LSP.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

The preceding command output shows that by default, LDP does not establish the inter-area
LSPs from LSRA to LSRB and from LSRA to LSRC.
Step 5 Configure LDP Extension for Inter-Area LSP.
# Run the longest-match command on LSRA to configure LDP to search for a route according
to the longest match rule to establish an inter-area LDP LSP.
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] longest-match
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 6 Verify the configuration.

# After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to view the
established LSP.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

The preceding command output shows that LDP establishes the inter-area LSPs from LSRA to
LSRB and from LSRA to LSRC.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.0.1
mpls
#
mpls ldp
longest-match
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
network-entity 20.0010.0100.0001.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.1.0.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of the LSRD

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 1.2.0.1
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0010.0200.0001.00
import-route isis level-1 into level-2 filter-policy ip-prefix permit-host
summary 1.3.0.0 255.255.255.0 avoid-feedback
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

isis circuit-level level-2

mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
isis circuit-level level-1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/2
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 20.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
isis circuit-level level-1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.2.0.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
ip ip-prefix permit-host index 10 permit 0.0.0.0 32
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRB
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 1.3.0.1
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
isis 1
is-level level-1
network-entity 10.0010.0300.0001.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.3.0.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRC
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 1.3.0.2
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

isis 1
is-level level-1
network-entity 10.0010.0300.0002.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 20.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.3.0.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

2.15.9 Example for Configuring Static BFD for LDP LSP

This section provides an example for configuring a static BFD session to detect an LDP LSP,
which consists of enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP on each device and interface and enabling
BFD on both ends of a link to be detected.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-10, an LDP LSP is set up along the path of PE1 → P1→ PE2 and the path
of PE2 → P2 → PE1 works as an IP link. Static BFD sessions are required to detect the
connectivity of the LDP LSP.

Figure 2-10 Networking diagram of configuring static BFD for LDP LSP
Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32
P
0
/0/ 24 10 OS1
1 .1. /0
S 2/ 5.2 /1
PO 1.1. /24
. P
Loopback1 0
/0/ 4 10 P1 10 OS1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 OS1 .1/2 .1. /0/ 4.4.4.9/32
5.1 0
P 1.1 /24
.
10 LDP LSP

P
PE1 10 OS 1
/0/ 24 PE2
.1. 1/0/ 1
S 1/
2.1 1
/24 PO 1.4.
.
P P2 10
10 OS1 /1
.1. /0/ S 1/0 /24
2.2 0
/24 PO 1.4.2
.
10
Loopback1
3.3.3.9/32

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. The entire MPLS domain applies OSPF and the IP link is accessible to each LSR.
2. Set up an LDP LSP along the path of PE1 → P1 → PE2.
3. Configure PE1 with a BFD session that is bound to the LDP LSP.
4. Configure PE2 with a BFD session that is bound to the IP link to notify PE1 of the detected
LDP LSP faults.

Data Preparations
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of each interface
l OSPF process number
l BFD configuration name, local discriminator, remote discriminator

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address and the OSPF protocol for each interface
Configure the IP address and mask of each interface as shown in Figure 2-10, including loopback
interfaces.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the host route of the loopback interface. The detailed
configuration is omitted here.
After configuration, each LSR can ping through the other LSR ID. Run the display ip routing-
table command, and you can view the route table on each LSR.
<PE1> display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 15

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

1.1.1.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

2.2.2.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
4.4.4.9/32 OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.2.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.1 Pos1/0/1
10.1.2.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.2.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.4.0/24 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.2.2 Pos1/0/1
10.1.5.0/24 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 2 Set up an LDP LSP along the path PE1 → P1 → PE2.

# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] mpls ldp
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1]interface pos 1/0/0
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[P1] mpls
[P1-mpls] quit
[P1] mpls ldp
[P1-mpls] quit
[P1]interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P1]interface pos 1/0/1
[P1-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[P1-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[P1-Pos1/0/1] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] mpls ldp
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2]interface pos 1/0/0
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls ldp lsp command, and you can view that an LDP LSP destined for
4.4.4.9/32 is set up on PE1.
<PE1> display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

Step 3 Enable global BFD functions on LSRs at both ends of the detected link.
# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] bfd
[PE1-bfd] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] bfd
[PE2-bfd] quit

Step 4 On the ingress, set up a BFD session that is bound to the LDP LSP.

# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] bfd 1to4 bind ldp-lsp peer-ip 4.4.4.9 nexthop 10.1.1.2 interface pos 1/0/0
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] discriminator local 1
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] discriminator remote 2
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] process-pst
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] commit
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-1to4] quit

Step 5 On the egress, create a BFD session that is bound to the IP link to notify the ingress of LDP LSP
faults.

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] bfd 4to1 bind peer-ip 1.1.1.9
[PE2-bfd-session-4ot1] discriminator local 2
[PE2-bfd-session-4ot1] discriminator remote 1
[PE2-bfd-session-4ot1] commit
[PE2-bfd-session-4ot1] quit

Step 6 Verify the configuration.

# After the configuration, run the display bfd session all verbose command on the ingress, and
you can view that Up is displayed in the State field and LDP_LSP is displayed in the BFD Bind
Type field.
<PE1> display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 State : Up Name : 1to4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 1 Remote Discriminator : 2
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : LDP_LSP
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer IP Address : 4.4.4.9
NextHop Ip Address : 10.1.1.2
Bind Interface : Pos1/0/0
FSM Board Id : 6 TOS-EXP : 6

Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10

Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 10
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 3000
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 1
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Enable
WTR Interval (ms) : -
Active Multi : 3
Last Local Diagnostic : Neighbor Signaled Session Down(Receive AdminDown)
Bind Application : LSPM | L2VPN | OAM_MANAGER
Session TX TmrID : 94 Session Detect TmrID : 95
Session Init TmrID : - Session WTR TmrID : -
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# After the configuration, run the display bfd session all verbose command on the egress, and
you can view that Up is displayed in the (MultiHop) State field and Peer IP Address is
displayed in the BFD Bind Type field.
<PE2> display bfd session all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 (Multi Hop) State : Up Name : 4to1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 2 Remote Discriminator : 1
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : Peer IP Address
Bind Session Type : Static
Bind Peer IP Address : 1.1.1.9
Bind Interface : -
FSM Board Id : 6 TOS-EXP : 6
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 10 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 10
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 10 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 10
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 3000
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : -
Proc Interface Status : Disable Process PST : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : - Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 3
Last Local Diagnostic : No Diagnostic
Bind Application : No Application Bind
Session TX TmrID : 75 Session Detect TmrID : 76
Session Init TmrID : - Session WTR TmrID : -
Session Echo Tx TmrID : -
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
bfd 1to4 bind ldp-lsp peer-ip 4.4.4.9 nexthop 10.1.1.2 interface Pos1/0/0
discriminator local 1
discriminator remote 2
process-pst
commit
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#
bfd 4to1 bind peer-ip 1.1.1.9
discriminator local 2
discriminator remote 1
commit
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.5.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface Pos1/0/1
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

2.15.10 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for LDP LSP

This section provides an example for configuring a dynamic BFD session to detect an LDP LSP,
which consists of enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP on each device and interface and enabling
BFD on the ingress node and egress node to be detected.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-11, LSRA, LSRB, and LSRC locates at one MPLS domain. An LDP LSP
is established between LSRA and LSRC that requires dynamic BFD for LDP LSP. The time to
detect a failure is within 50 ms.

Figure 2-11 Networking diagram of configuring dynamic BFD for LDP LSP
Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
192.168.1.1/24 192.168.2.1/24
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0
LSRA 192.168.1.2/24 LSRB 192.168.2.2/24 LSRC

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Enable basic MPLS function on each LSR and establish the LDP LSP links.
2. Configuration basic BFD functions.
3. Adjust BFD parameters.

Data Preparations
Before configuring, you need the following data:

l LSR IDs and IP addresses of the interfaces on each LSR

l BFD parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.

Step 2 Configure OSPF. The configuration details are not mentioned here.

Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions

# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# The configuration on LSRB and LSRC is the same as that on LSRA. The configuration details
are not mentioned here.

After the configuration, run the display mpls ldp lsp command on LSR A, and you can view
that an LDP LSP is set up between LSR A and LSR C.

Take the display on LSR A as an example.

<LSRA> display mpls ldp lsp

LDP LSP Information

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

A '*' before a UpstreamPeer means the session is in GR state

A '*' before a NextHop means the LSP is FRR LSP

Step 4 Configure dynamic BFD for LDP LSP from LSRA to LSRC.
# Configure an FEC list on LSRA to ensure that the BFD for LDP LSP only from LSRA to
LSRC is triggered.
[LSRA] fec-list tortc
[LSRA-fec-list-tortc] fec-node 3.3.3.9

# Enable BFD on LSRA. Specify the FEC list that triggers a BFD session dynamically. Adjust
BFD parameters.
[LSRA] bfd
[LSRA-bfd] quit
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls bfd-trigger fec-list tortc
[LSRA-mpls] mpls bfd enable
[LSRA-mpls] mpls bfd min-tx-interval 600 min-rx-interval 600 detect-multiplier 4

# Configure on LSRC with passive enabling BFD for LSP capability.

[LSRC] bfd
[LSRC-bfd] mpls-passive

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display bfd session all verbose command, and you can view the BFD session status
that is created dynamically.
<LSRA> display bfd session all verbose
-----------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 256 State : Up Name : dyn_8192
-----------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator: 8192 Remote Discriminator : 8193
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : LDP_LSP
Bind Session Type : Dynamic
Bind Peer Ip Address : 3.3.3.9
NextHop Ip Address : 192.168.1.2
Bind Interface : Pos1/0/0
FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 6
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 100 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 600
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 100 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 600
Local Detect Multi : 4 Detect Interval (ms) : 1800
Echo Passive : Disable Acl Number : --
Destination Port : 3784 TTL : 1
Proc interface status : Disable Process PST : Enable
WTR Interval (ms) : --
Active Multi : 3
Last Local Diagnostic : No Diagnostic
Bind Application : LSPM | L2VPN | OAM_MANAGER
Session TX TmrID : 77 Session Detect TmrID : 78
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : --
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : --
-----------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

# Display the status of BFD session created dynamically on LSRC. The field of BFD bind type
is Peer IP Address. This indicates the BFD packets sent by LSRC are transported through IP
route.
<LSRC> display bfd session passive-dynamic verbose
-----------------------------------------------------------
Session MIndex : 257 (Multi Hop) State : Up Name : dyn_8193

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

-----------------------------------------------------------
Local Discriminator : 8193 Remote Discriminator : 8192
Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function
BFD Bind Type : Peer Ip Address
Bind Session Type : Entire_Dynamic
Bind Peer Ip Address : 1.1.1.9
Bind Interface : --
FSM Board Id : 1 TOS-EXP : 6
Min Tx Interval (ms) : 100 Min Rx Interval (ms) : 100
Actual Tx Interval (ms): 600 Actual Rx Interval (ms): 100
Local Detect Multi : 3 Detect Interval (ms) : 400
Echo Passive : Disabl Acl Number : --
Proc interface status : Disable Process PST : Disable
WTR Interval (ms) : -- Local Demand Mode : Disable
Active Multi : 4
Last Local Diagnostic : No Diagnostic
Bind Application
Session TX TmrID : 75 Session Detect TmrID : 76
Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : --
Session Echo Tx TmrID : --
PDT Index : FSM-0 | RCV-0 | IF-0 | TOKEN-0
Session Description : --
-----------------------------------------------------------

Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
mpls bfd enable
mpls bfd-trigger fec-list tortc
mpls bfd min-tx-interval 600 min-rx-interval 600 detect-multiplier 4
#
fec-list tortc
fec-node 3.3.3.9
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9

mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRC

#
sysname LSRC
#
bfd
mpls-passive
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
return

2.15.11 Example for Configuring Manual LDP FRR

This section provides an example for configuring Manual LDP FRR, which consists of enabling
MPLS and MPLS LDP on each device and interface and specifying the outgoing interface and
the next hop of the specified backup LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-12, two LSPs are required from LSRA to LSRC. One is the primary LSP
along the path LSRA -> LSRC and another is the bypass LSP along the path LSRA -> LSRB -
> LSRC. Manual LDP FRR is required on LSRA for local interface backup to reduce data loss.
Here, only LSRA must support Manual LDP FRR.

NOTE

In networking of Manual LDP FRR, the bypass LSP must be in liberal state. That is, on an LSR that is
enabled with FRR, run the display ip routing-table ip-address verbose command to view the route state
of the bypass LSP is "Inactive Adv".

Figure 2-12 Networking diagram of configuring Manual LDP FRR

Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32

/0
S 1/0 /30 LSRB
2
PO 1.1.
0 .
10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30
Loopback1 0 1 POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0
1/0/ 30
1.1.1.9/32 S 1/
PO 1.1.
.
10

LSRA P
10 OS2
.3. /0
1.1 /0
/30 PO
10 S1
.3. /0/ LSRC
1.2 0
/30 Primary LSP
Loopback1
3.3.3.9/32 Bypass LSP

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the IP address of the interfaces, set the loopback address as the LSR ID, and use
OSPF to advertise the network segments that the interfaces are connected to and the LSR
ID host route.
2. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP globally on the LSRs.
3. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP on the interfaces.
4. Specify the next hop address that is used by Manual LDP FRR for generating the backup
LSP on the protected interface.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l IP address of the interfaces, OSPF process ID, and area ID

l Policy for triggering the establishment of LSPs
l Next hop address of the backup LSP

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask for each interface, including each Loopback interface as
shown in Figure 2-12. The detailed configuration is not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure OSPF to advertise the LSR ID host route and network segments that the interfaces
are connected to.
# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] ospf 1
[LSRA-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRA-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRB.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] ospf 1
[LSRB-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRB-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRC.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] ospf 1
[LSRC-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRC-ospf-1] quit

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR, and you can
view that the LSRs learn the routes from each other.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
<LSRA> display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 12 Routes : 13
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
10.1.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

10.3.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.1 Pos2/0/0
10.3.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.3.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 3 Configure the MPLS and MPLS LDP functions on the nodes globally and on the interfaces to
forward the MPLS traffic over the network.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

After the configuration, LDP sessions are established between neighboring LSRs. Run the
display mpls ldp session command on each LSR, and you can view that Status is displayed as
Operational.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:01 8/8
3.3.3.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:01 6/6
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 2 session(s) Found.

Step 4 Enable Manual LDP FRR on the POS 2/0/0 on LSRA, and specify the next hop address for
generating the backup LSP.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp frr nexthop 10.1.1.2
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

Run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA, and you can view that Manual LDP FRR is
enabled on the LSP of LSRC.
<LSRA> display mpls lsp
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: LDP LSP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
3.3.3.9/32 NULL/3 -/Pos2/0/0
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 1025/3 -/Pos2/0/0
**LDP FRR** /1025 /Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.9/32 NULL/3 -/Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.9/32 1024/3 -/Pos1/0/0

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp frr nexthop 10.1.1.2
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3

#
return
l Configuration file of LSRB
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRC
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Return

2.15.12 Example for Configuring LDP Auto FRR

This section provides an example for configuring LDP Auto FRR, which consists of enabling
global MPLS and MPLS LDP and IS-IS Auto FRR.

Networking Requirements
With the development of networks, new services that have stringent requirements for real-time
transmission are emerging, for example, Voice over IP (VoIP) and on-line video services. A
large number of services are based on VPN. Currently, VPN services are generally implemented
by using LDP tunnels. In case of data loss due to faults over the link, these services will be
seriously affected.

The Manual LDP FRR is a technique that ensures that when a fault occurs, service traffic on the
public network is forwarded along the backup LSP before routes are converged and a new
primary LSP is established. This mechanism ensures that the service interruption lasts for only
as long as it takes the fault to be detected and traffic to be switched to the backup LSP. Therefore,
packet loss lasts for less than 50 ms. But the time that is required for VPN services to be switched
to a new LSP after routes convergence is completed depends on the actual VPN implementation.
This means that the speed at which VPN services are switched to the new primary LSP must be
raised so as to ensure that VPN services are interrupted for less than 50 ms. This issue can be
solved by configuring LDP Auto FRR.

As shown in Figure 2-13, the primary and backup LSPs are set up between LSRA and LSRC.
The primary LSP is along the path from LSRA to LSRC, and the backup LSP is along the path
LSRA -> LSRB -> LSRC. When the primary LSP becomes faulty, traffic must be rapidly
switched to the backup LSP. After LDP Auto FRR is configured on LSRA, in case of a fault
over the link, a backup LSP is automatically set up to reduce traffic loss.

Figure 2-13 Networking diagram of configuring LDP Auto FRR

Loopback0
2.2.2.9/32

P
10 O S
.2 0

.1 1/
.1 0/
4

.3 0/
/2
.1 1/

.1 1
10 O S

LSRB /2
4
P

backup LSP
PO .1.3
.1 0

10
.1 0/
4

S1 .2/
/2
.1 1/
10 O S

/ 0 24
/2
P

primary LSP POS1/0/0 LSRD

LSRA LSRC 10.1.4.1/24
POS1/0/1 POS1/0/1 POS1/0/0
10.1.2.1/24 10.1.2.2/24 10.1.4.2/24
Loopback0 Loopback0 Loopback0
1.1.1.9/32 3.3.3.9/32 4.4.4.9/32

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Assign IP addresses to interfaces on each node and configure the loopback address that is
used as the LSR ID.
2. Configure IS-IS to advertise the network segments connecting to interfaces on each node
and to advertise the routes of hosts with LSR IDs.
3. Enable global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node.
4. Enable IS-IS Auto FRR on the LSR from which the protected traffic is originated.
5. Change the LSP triggering policy to trigger the setup of LSPs for all routes.
6. Configure a policy for triggering the setup of backup LSPs on the LSR from which the
protected traffic is originated.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP addresses of the interfaces on each node, as listed in Figure 2-13, IS-IS process IDs,
and the area where each nodes resides
l Policy for triggering the setup of backup LSPs

Procedure
Step 1 Assign an IP address to each interface.
As described in Figure 2-13, configure an IP address and a mask for each interface, including
a loopback interface. The detailed configuration procedure is not mentioned here.
Step 2 Enable IS-IS to advertise the network segments connecting to interfaces on each node and to
advertise the routes of hosts with LSR IDs.
# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
[LSRA-isis-1] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/1] isis enable 1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRA] interface loopBack 0
[LSRA-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRB] interface loopBack 0

[LSRB-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/2
[LSRC-Pos1/0/2] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/2] quit
[LSRC] interface loopBack 0
[LSRC-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack0] quit

# Configure LSRD.
<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
[LSRD-isis-1] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface loopBack 0
[LSRD-LoopBack0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-LoopBack0] quit

Step 3 Configure global and interface-based MPLS and MPLS LDP on each node. Enable the network
to forward MPLS traffic and view the setup of the LSPs.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/1] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/2
[LSRC-Pos1/0/2] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/2] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/2] quit

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

# After the configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to view the
established LSP.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

The preceding command output shows that by default, the setup of LSPs is triggered by LDP
for the routes with 32-bit addresses.
Step 4 Enable IS-IS Auto FRR on LSRA. View the routing information and the setup of the LSPs.
# Enable IS-IS Auto FRR on LSRA.
[LSRA] isis
[LSRA-isis-1] frr
[LSRA-isis-1-frr] loop-free-alternate
[LSRA-isis-1-frr] quit
[LSRA-isis-1] quit

# Display information about the route between LSRA and the link connecting LSRC and LSRD.
[LSRA] display ip routing-table 10.1.4.0 verbose

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Table : Public
Summary Count : 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Destination: 10.1.4.0/24
Protocol: ISIS Process ID: 1
Preference: 15 Cost: 20
NextHop: 10.1.2.2 Neighbour: 0.0.0.0
State: Active Adv Age: 00h05m38s
Tag: 0 Priority: low
Label: NULL QoSInfo: 0x0
IndirectID: 0x0
RelayNextHop: 0.0.0.0 Interface: Pos1/0/1
TunnelID: 0x0 Flags: D
BkNextHop: 10.1.1.2 BkInterface: Pos1/0/0
BkLabel: NULL SecTunnelID: 0x0
BkPETunnelID: 0x0 BkPESecTunnelID: 0x0
BkIndirectID: 0x0

The preceding command output shows that a backup IS-IS route is generated after IS-IS Auto
FRR is enabled.
# Run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to view the setup of the LSPs.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

The preceding command output shows that by default, the setup of a backup LSP is triggered
by LDP for the routes with 32-bit addresses.
Step 5 Run the lsp-trigger command on LSRC to change the LSP triggering policy to trigger the setup
of LSPs for all routes. Then, view the setup of the LSPs.
# Run the lsp-trigger command on LSRC to change the LSP triggering policy to trigger the
setup of LSPs for all routes.
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] lsp-trigger all
[LSRC-mpls] quit

# Run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to view information about the established LSPs.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

LDP FRR /1025 /Pos1/0/0

4.4.4.9/32 NULL/1026 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1026 /Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 1026/1026 -/Pos1/0/1
**LDP FRR** /1026 /Pos1/0/0
10.1.3.0/24 1027/3 -/Pos1/0/1
10.1.4.0/24 1028/3 -/Pos1/0/1

The preceding command output shows that the setup of LSPs is triggered by LDP for the routes
with 24-bit addresses.
Step 6 Configure a triggering policy to trigger the setup of backup LSPs for all backup routes.
# Run the auto-frr lsp-trigger command on LSRA to trigger the setup of backup LSPs for all
backup routes.
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] auto-frr lsp-trigger all
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

After the preceding configuration is complete, run the display mpls lsp command on LSRA to
view the setup of backup LSPs.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp

The preceding command output shows that backup LSP is set up between LSRA and the link
connecting LSRC and LSRD.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
auto-frr lsp-trigger all
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

authorization-scheme default
#
accounting-scheme default
#
domain default
#
#
isis 1
frr
loop-free-alternate level-1
loop-free-alternate level-2
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
oam-mgr
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRB
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
#
authorization-scheme default
#
accounting-scheme default
#
domain default
#
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
oam-mgr
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return
l Configuration file of LSRC
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
lsp-trigger all
#
mpls ldp
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
#
authorization-scheme default
#
accounting-scheme default
#
domain default
#
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/1
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/2
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
oam-mgr
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRD

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
aaa
authentication-scheme default
#
authorization-scheme default
#
accounting-scheme default
#
domain default
#
#
isis 1
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
oam-mgr
#
user-interface con 0
user-interface vty 0 4
user-interface vty 16 20
#
return

2.15.13 Example for Configuring Synchronization Between LDP

and IGP
This section provides an example for configuring LDP and IGP synchronization, which consists
of enabling MPLS and MPLS LDP on each device and each interface and configuring the
interfaces of both ends of the link between the crossing node of active and standby links and the
LDP neighboring node.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-14, two links are established between PE1 and PE2. The link PE1 -> P1
-> P2 -> PE2 is an active link and the link PE1 -> P1 -> P3 -> PE2 is a standby link.
Configure synchronization between LDP and IGP on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the
crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighbor node of the active link
respectively. After the active link recovers from the fault, configuring synchronization can
shorten the time of traffic switch from the standby link to the active link and limit the time within
milliseconds.

Figure 2-14 Networking diagram of configuring synchronization between LDP and IGP
Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32

0 P
1/0/ 30 10 OS2
S 2/ .2. /0/
Loopback1 PO 1.1. 1.1 0
/30 P Loopback1
0 .
1.1.1.9/32 1/0/ 010 P2
10 OS1 4.4.4.9/32
S 1/3 .2. /0/
PO 1.1. 1.2 0
. /30
10

PE1 P1 P /0 PE2
10 OS2 2/ 0 30
.3. /0 S .2/
1.1 /0 PO .4.1
/30 P P3 10
10 OS1 0
/0/ 30
.3. /0 2
S .1/
1.2 /0
/30 PO .4.1
10
Loopback1 Primary link
3.3.3.9/32
Bypass link

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Establish LDP sessions between neighboring nodes and between P1 and PE2.
2. Configure LDP and IGP synchronization on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the
crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighboring node of the active link
respectively.
3. Configure the values of hold-down, hold-max-cost, and delay for the timer on interfaces
of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP
neighboring node of the active link respectively.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

l IP addresses of the interfaces, OSPF process number, and the area

l Values of hold-down, hold-max-cost, and delay of the timer

Procedure
Step 1 Assign IP addresses for the interfaces of the nodes and the address of the loopback interface as
the LSR ID, and advertise routes by OSPF. The detailed configurations are not mentioned here.
The link PE1 -> P1 -> P2 -> PE2 is an active link and the link PE1 -> P1 -> P3 -> PE2 is a
standby link. The cost value of POS 2/0/0 on P1 is 1000.
After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each node, and you can
view that they have learnt routes from each other. The out interface of P1 route is POS 1/0/0.
Take the display on P1 as an example.
<P1> display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 14
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.9/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 OSPF 10 4 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.2.1.0/30 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.3.1.0/30 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.1 Pos2/0/0
10.3.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.3.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.3.1.2 Pos2/0/0
10.4.1.0/30 OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/20 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 2 Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP globally and on all the interfaces on the nodes.
# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[P1] mpls
[P1-mpls] quit
[P1] mpls ldp
[P1-mpls-ldp] quit
[P1] interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P1] interface pos 2/0/0
[P1-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[P1-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[P1-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[P2] mpls
[P2-mpls] quit
[P2] mpls ldp
[P2-mpls-ldp] quit
[P2] interface pos 1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[P2-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp

[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P2] interface pos 2/0/0
[P2-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[P2-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[P2-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure P3.
<P3> system-view
[P3] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[P3] mpls
[P3-mpls] quit
[P3] mpls ldp
[P3-mpls-ldp] quit
[P3] interface pos 1/0/0
[P3-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[P3-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[P3-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P3] interface pos 2/0/0
[P3-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[P3-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[P3-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] mpls ldp
[PE2-mpls-ldp] quit
[PE2] interface pos 1/0/0
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface pos 2/0/0
[PE2-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[PE2-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE2-Pos2/0/0] quit

After the configuration, LDP sessions are set up between the adjacent nodes. Run the display
mpls ldp session command on each node, and you can view that the Status is Operational.

Take the display on P1 as an example.

<P1> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:56 227/227
3.3.3.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:56 227/227
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 2 session(s) Found.

Step 3 Enable synchronization between LDP and IGP on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the
crossing node of active and standby links and the LDP neighbor node of the active link
respectively.

# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] ospf ldp-sync
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] interface pos 1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] ospf ldp-sync
[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 4 Set a hold-down value of the timer on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the crossing node
of active and standby links and the LDP neighbor node of the active link respectively.
# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] ospf timer ldp-sync hold-down 8
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] interface pos 1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] ospf timer ldp-sync hold-down 8
[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 5 Set a hold-max-cost value for the timer on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the crossing
node of active and standby links and the LDP neighbor node of the active link respectively.
# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] ospf timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost 9
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] interface pos 1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] ospf timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost 9
[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 6 Set a delay value of the timer on interfaces of P1 and P2. P1 and P2 are the crossing node of
active and standby links and the LDP neighbor node of the active link respectively.
# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] interface pos 1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp timer igp-sync-delay 6
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] interface pos 1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp timer igp-sync-delay 6
[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display ospf ldp-sync interface command on P1, and you can
view that the interface status is Sync-Achieved.
<P1> display ospf ldp-sync interface Pos 1/0/0
Interface Pos1/0/0
HoldDown Timer: 8 HoldMaxCost Timer: 9
LDP State: Up OSPF Sync State: Sync-Achieved

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
ospf ldp-sync
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-down 8
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost 9
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp timer igp-sync-delay 6
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
ospf cost 1000
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
ospf ldp-sync
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-down 8
ospf timer ldp-sync hold-max-cost 9
mpls
mpls ldp
mpls ldp timer igp-sync-delay 6
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255

#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return
l Configuration file of P3
#
sysname P3
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

2.15.14 Example for Configuring Synchronization Between LDP

and Static Routes
By configuring synchronization between LDP and static routes, you can minimize MPLS traffic
loss during traffic switchover and switchback on an MPLS network with the primary link, backup
link, and LSPs depending on static routes.

Networking Requirements
On an MPLS network with primary and backup LSPs, LSRs establish LSPs based on static
routes. When the LDP session of the primary link becomes faulty (the fault is not caused by a
link failure) or the primary link recovers, unsynchronization between LDP and static routes
causes MPLS traffic to be interrupted temporarily.
As shown in Figure 2-15, there are two static routes from LSRA to LSRD, which pass through
LSRB and LSRC respectively. LDP sessions are established based on the static routes. Link A
is the primary link, and Link B is the backup link. It is required that synchronization between
LDP and static routes be configured to ensure non-stop MPLS traffic forwarding when the LDP
session on Link A is disconnected or Link A recovers.

Figure 2-15 Networking diagram for configuring synchronization between LDP and static
routes
Loopback0

LSRB
PO
S2 Loopback0
Loopback0 0/0 0/0 /0/0
/ /
S1 OS1 PO
PO P LinkA S1
/0/
0
PO LinkB
S2/
0/0 0 /0
LSRA 2/0/ S2/0 LSRD
PO S PO
S1/ PO
0/0

LSRC

Loopback0
Device Interface IP Address Device Interface IP Address

LSRA POS 1/0/0 10.1.1.1/30 LSRC POS 1/0/0 20.1.1.2/30

POS 2/0/0 20.1.1.1/30 POS 2/0/0 40.1.1.2/30

Loopback0 1.1.1.1/32 Loopback0 3.3.3.3/32

LSRB POS 1/0/0 10.1.1.2/30 LSRD POS 1/0/0 30.1.1.2/30

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

POS 2/0/0 30.1.1.1/30 POS 2/0/0 40.1.1.2/30

Loopback0 2.2.2.2/32 Loopback0 4.4.4.4/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure static routes between LSRs to ensure network connectivity.
2. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP in the system view and interface view.
3. Configure synchronization between LDP and static routes and verify the configuration.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP addresses of all interfaces
l MPLS LSR IDs of LSRs
l Value of the Hold-down timer

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
# Configure IP addresses for interfaces according to Figure 2-15. The configuration details are
not described here.
Step 2 Configure static routes on devices to ensure network connectivity.
# On LSRA, configure two static routes with different priorities to LSRD, and on LSRD,
configure two static routes with different priorities to LSRA.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] ip route-static 2.2.2.2 32 pos1/0/0
[LSRA] ip route-static 3.3.3.3 32 pos2/0/0
[LSRA] ip route-static 30.1.1.1 30 pos1/0/0
[LSRA] ip route-static 40.1.1.1 30 pos2/0/0
[LSRA] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 32 pos1/0/0 preference 40
[LSRA] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 32 pos2/0/0 preference 60

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 32 pos1/0/0
[LSRB] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 32 pos2/0/0

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 32 pos1/0/0
[LSRC] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 32 pos2/0/0

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] ip route-static 2.2.2.2 32 pos1/0/0
[LSRD] ip route-static 3.3.3.3 32 pos2/0/0
[LSRD] ip route-static 10.1.1.2 30 pos1/0/0
[LSRD] ip route-static 20.1.1.2 30 pos2/0/0
[LSRD] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 32 pos1/0/0 preference 40

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

[LSRD] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 32 pos2/0/0 preference 60

# After the preceding configurations, run the display ip routing-table protocol static command
on each LSR. The command output shows the configured static routes. Take the display on
LSRA as an example.
[LSRA] display ip routing-table protocol static
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Public routing table : Static
Destinations : 5 Routes : 6 Configured Routes : 6

Static routing table status : <Active>

Destinations : 5 Routes : 5

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

2.2.2.2/32 Static 60 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0

3.3.3.3/32 Static 60 0 D 20.1.1.1 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 Static 40 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
30.1.1.0/30 Static 60 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
40.1.1.0/30 Static 60 0 D 20.1.1.1 Pos2/0/0

Static routing table status : <Inactive>

Destinations : 1 Routes : 1

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

4.4.4.4/32 Static 60 0 20.1.1.1 Pos2/0/0

Step 3 Enable MPLS LDP and establish LDP LSPs on LSRs.

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit

The configurations of LSRB, LSRC, and LSRD are similar to the configuration of LSRA, and
are not described here. For configuration details, see "Configuration Files."
# Run the display mpls ldp session command on each LSR. The command output shows that
the status of LDP sessions is Operational. This indicates that LDP sessions have been
established. Take the display on LSRA as an example.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:00 1/1
3.3.3.3:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:02 12/12
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 2 session(s) Found.

Step 4 Configure synchronization between LDP and static routes on LSRA and LSRD.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] ip route-static 4.4.4.4 32 pos1/0/0 ldp-sync
[LSRA] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] static-route timer ldp-sync hold-down 20
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRD.
[LSRD] ip route-static 1.1.1.1 32 pos1/0/0 ldp-sync
[LSRD] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] static-route timer ldp-sync hold-down 20
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# On LSRA, check the status of the outbound interface of the static route configured with
synchronization between LDP and static routes.
[LSRA] display static-route ldp-sync
Total number of routes enable Ldp-Sync: 1
-----------------------------------------------------
Interface Pos1/0/0
Enable ldp-sync static routes number: 1
Static-route ldp-sync holddown timer: 20s
Sync state: Normal
Dest = 4.4.4.4, Mask = 32, NextHop = 10.1.1.1.
-----------------------------------------------------

The preceding display shows that the status of synchronization between LDP and static routes
is Normal. This indicates that synchronization between LDP and static routes has been
configured.
l If the LDP session of the primary link (Link A) is disconnected, traffic is immediately
switched to the backup link (Link B) to synchronize LDP and static routes. This ensures non-
stop traffic forwarding.
l After the primary link recovers, the static route with the next-hop address being 10.1.1.1 is
not preferred immediately. Instead, the static route becomes active only after the LDP session
of the primary link has been established and the Hold-down timer expires (the timeout period
of the timer is 20 seconds). This synchronizes static routes and LDP, thus ensuring non-stop
MPLS traffic forwarding.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
static-route timer ldp-sync hold-down 20
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.252

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface loopback0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0
ip route-static 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0 preference 40 ldp-sync
ip route-static 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0 preference 60
ip route-static 30.1.1.0 255.255.255.252 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 40.1.1.0 255.255.255.252 Pos2/0/0
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface loopback0
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRC

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface loopback0
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
return

l Configuration file of LSRD

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
static-route timer ldp-sync hold-down 20
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface loopback0
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0 preference 40 ldp-sync
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0 preference 60
ip route-static 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 Pos2/0/0
ip route-static 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.252 Pos1/0/0
ip route-static 20.1.1.0 255.255.255.252 Pos2/0/0
#
return

2.15.15 Example for Configuring LDP GTSM

This section provides an example for configuring LDP GTSM, which consists of enabling MPLS
and MPLS LDP on each device and each interface and configuring LDP GTMP on both LDP
peers.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-16, each node runs MPLS and MPLS LDP. It is required to enable GTSM
on LSR B.

Figure 2-16 Networking diagram for configuring LDP GTSM

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
l Configure basic MPLS and MPLS LDP functions.
l Configure GTSM on the two LDP peers.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l LSR ID of each LDP peer
l Maximum number of valid hops permitted by GTSM

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure OSPF to advertise the network segments connected to the interfaces of the LSRs and
host routes of LSR IDs. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 3 Configure each device with MPLS and MPLS LDP functions on each interface. The
configuration details are not mentioned here.
After the preceding configurations, run the display mpls ldp session command on each node,
and you can view the setup of LDP sessions. Take LSR A as an example.
<LSRA> display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:02 9/9
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 session(s) Found.

Step 4 Configure LDP GTSM.

# On LSR A, configure the range of valid TTL values carried in LDP packets received from
LSR B to be from 253 to 255.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] gtsm peer 2.2.2.9 valid-ttl-hops 3

# On LSR B, configure the range of valid TTL values carried in the LDP packets received from
LSR A to be from 252 to 255, and the range of valid TTL values carried in LDP packets received
from LSR C to be from 251 to 255.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] gtsm peer 1.1.1.9 valid-ttl-hops 4
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] gtsm peer 3.3.3.9 valid-ttl-hops 5

# On LSR C, configure the range of valid TTL values carried in LDP packets received from LSR
B to be from 250 to 255.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] gtsm peer 2.2.2.9 valid-ttl-hops 6

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Then, if the host PC simulates the LDP packets of LSR A to attack LSR B, LSR B discards the
packets directly because the TTL values carried in the LDP packets are not within the range of
252 to 255. In the GTSM statistics on LSR B, the number of discarded packets increases.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
gtsm peer 2.2.2.9 valid-ttl-hops 3
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
gtsm peer 1.1.1.9 valid-ttl-hops 4
gtsm peer 3.3.3.9 valid-ttl-hops 5
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3

#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
gtsm peer 2.2.2.9 valid-ttl-hops 6
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

2.15.16 Example for Configuring LDP GR

This section provides an example for configuring LDP GR, which consists of enabling MPLS
and MPLS LDP on each device and each interface and enabling LDP GR on both GR Restarter
and its neighbor.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-17, LSRA, LSRB, and LSRC are LSRs with dual main control boards.
The three LSRs belong to the same OSPF area and are interconnected through OSPF. All of
them support the GR mechanism.

After establishing the LDP sessions between them, LSRA, LSRB, and LSRC start to establish
the LDP GR sessions. When the main control board of LSRB fails and is switched, the LDP GR
mechanism is used in synchronization with neighbor LSRs.

Figure 2-17 Networking diagram of configuring LDP GR

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP address of each interface on the LSRs and the Loopback address used as the
LSR ID, and configure OSPF to advertise the network segments that the interfaces are
connected to and the LSR ID host route.
2. Configure the OSPF GR function on each LSR.
3. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP on each LSR globally.
4. Enable MPLS and MPLS LDP on each interface.
5. Configure parameters during LDP session negotiation on LSRB.
6. Enable the GR function of MPLS LDP on each LSR.
7. Configure the GR session of MPLS LDP and neighboring parameters on LSRB.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IP address of each interface, OSPF process ID, and OSPF area ID

l OSPF GR interval
l Time of the LDP Reconnect timer (300 seconds by default)
l Time of the LDP Neighbor-liveness timer (600 seconds by default)
l Time of the LDP Recovery timer (300 seconds by default)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface. The configuration details are not mentioned here.

Step 2 Configure OSPF to advertise the network segments that the interfaces are connected to and the
LSR ID host route. The configuration details are not mentioned here.

Step 3 Configure the OSPF GR function.

# Configure LSRA.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] ospf 1
[LSRA-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRA-ospf-1] graceful-restart
[LSRA-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRB.
<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] ospf 1
[LSRB-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRB-ospf-1] graceful-restart
[LSRB-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSRC.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] ospf 1
[LSRC-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRC-ospf-1] graceful-restart
[LSRC-ospf-1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Step 4 Configure the MPLS and MPLS LDP functions on each node globally.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 5 Configure the MPLS and MPLS LDP functions on each interface.
# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit

After the preceding configuration is complete, the local LDP sessions are established between
LSRA and LSRB, and between LSRB and LSRC.
Run the display mpls ldp session command on each LSR, and you can view the established
LDP session.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.9:0 Operational DU Passive 0000:00:02 9/9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 session(s) Found.

Step 6 Configure the LDP GR function.

# Configure LSRA.
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

# Configure LSRC.
[LSRC] mpls ldp
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRC-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 7 Configure the parameters of LDP GR on the GR Restarter.

# Configure LSRB.
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart timer reconnect 300
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart timer neighbor-liveness 600
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] graceful-restart timer recovery 300
Warning: All the related sessions will be deleted if the operation is performed
!Continue? (y/n)y
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

# After the configuration, run the display mpls ldp session verbose command on the LSR, and
you can view that On is displayed in the Session FT Flag field.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
[LSRA]display mpls ldp session verbose
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peer LDP ID : 2.2.2.9:0 Local LDP ID : 1.1.1.9:0
TCP Connection : 1.1.1.9 <- 2.2.2.9
Session State : Operational Session Role : Passive
Session FT Flag : On MD5 Flag : Off
Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec Recovery Timer : 300 Sec
Keychain Name : ---

Negotiated Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec

Configured Keepalive Send Timer : 3 Sec
Keepalive Message Sent/Rcvd : 1/1 (Message Count)
Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited
Label Resource Status(Peer/Local) : Available/Available
Session Age : 0000:00:00 (DDDD:HH:MM)
Session Deletion Status : No

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

Capability:
Capability-Announcement : Off

Outbound&Inbound Policies applied : NULL

Addresses received from peer: (Count: 3)

10.1.1.2 10.2.1.1 2.2.2.9

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Alternatively, run the display mpls ldp peer verbose command on the LSR, and you can view
that On is displayed in the Peer FT Flag field.
Take the display on LSRA as an example.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp peer verbose
LDP Peer Information in Public network
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peer LDP ID : 2.2.2.9:0
Peer Max PDU Length : 4096 Peer Transport Address : 2.2.2.9
Peer Loop Detection : Off Peer Path Vector Limit : ----
Peer FT Flag : On Peer Keepalive Timer : 45 Sec
Recovery Timer : 300 Sec Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec
Peer Type : Local

Peer Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited

Peer Discovery Source : Pos1/0/0
Peer Deletion Status : No
Capability-Announcement : Off
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Configuration File
l Configuration file of LSRA
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
graceful-restart
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRB

#
sysname LSRB

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 2 MPLS LDP Configuration

#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
graceful-restart
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
return

l Configuration file of LSRC

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
graceful-restart
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3
#
Return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3 MPLS TE Configuration

About This Chapter

MPLS TE tunnels transmit MPLS L2VPN (VLL and VPLS) services and MPLS L3VPN services
and thus provide high security and guarantees reliable QoS for VPN services.

3.1 Introduction to MPLS TE

Integrating the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technology with the Traffic Engineering
(TE) technology, MPLS TE addresses the problem of the congestion caused by load imbalance.
3.2 Configuring Static CR-LSP
The configuration of a static CR-LSP is simple and label allocation is performed manually, rather
than by using a signaling protocol to exchange control packets. This consumes a few resources.
3.3 Configuring a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP
A static bidirectional co-routed label switched path (LSP) is composed of two static constraint-
based routed (CR) LSPs in opposite directions. Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic
Engineering (TE) supports MPLS forwarding in both directions along such an LSP.
3.4 Configuring an RSVP-TE Tunnel
An RSVP-TE tunnel is the prerequisite for the configuration of TE attributes.
3.5 Referencing the CR-LSP Attribute Template to Set Up a CR-LSP
By configuring a CR-LSP attribute template to set up CR-LSPs, you can simply the
configurations and make the configurations of CR-LSPs more flexible.
3.6 Adjusting RSVP Signaling Parameters
RSVP-TE provides various parameters, which meet the requirements for reliability, network
resources, and advanced MPLS features.
3.7 Configuring RSVP Authentication
RSVP authentication prevents unauthorized nodes from setting up RSVP neighbor relationships
with the local node and prevents spoofing of forged packets.
3.8 Adjusting the Path of CR-LSP
You can adjust and configure the method of calculating CR-LSPs.
3.9 Adjusting the Establishment of MPLS TE Tunnels
By configuring multiple attributes of an MPLS TE tunnel, you can adjust the parameters during
the establishment of the MPLS TE tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.10 Adjusting the Traffic Forwarding of an MPLS TE Tunnel

By adjusting the forwarding of MPLS TE traffic, you can modify the path along which IP traffic
or MPLS traffic is transmitted, or limit the types of traffic that can be transmitted along a TE
tunnel.
3.11 Adjusting Flooding Threshold of Bandwidth Change
By adjusting the flooding threshold of the bandwidth change, you can suppress the frequency
of TEDB update and flooding, which minimizes network resource consumption.
3.12 Configuring Automatic Adjustment of the Tunnel Bandwidth
By being enabled with the automatic bandwidth adjustment, the system can adjust the bandwidth
of a tunnel automatically according to the actual traffic volume.
3.13 Configuring the Limit Rate of MPLS TE Traffic
To limit TE tunnel traffic within the bandwidth range that is actually configured, you need to
set a rate limit for the TE tunnel traffic.
3.14 Configuring DS-TE Tunnel
By integrating traditional TE tunnels with DiffServ models, DS-TE can provide QoS according
to specific service types.
3.15 Configuring MPLS TE FRR
MPLS TE FRR is a local protection technique and is used to protect a CR-LSP against link faults
and node faults. MPLS TE FRR needs to be configured manually.
3.16 Configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR
MPLS TE Auto FRR is a local protection technique and is used to protect a CR-LSP against link
faults and node faults. MPLS TE Auto FRR does not need to be configured manually.
3.17 Configuring CR-LSP Backup
By configuring CR-LSP backup, you can provide end-to-end protection for a CR-LSP.
3.18 Configuring Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and the Backup CR-LSP
This section describes that after the primary CR-LSP is faulty, the system starts the TE FRR
bypass tunnel and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP the same time it sets up a backup CR-
LSP.
3.19 Configuring RSVP GR
This section describes how to configure RSVP-TE GR so that devices along an RSVP-TE tunnel
can retain RSVP sessions during a master/slave switchover.
3.20 Configuring Static BFD for CR-LSP
This section describes how to configure a static BFD session to detect link faults in static CR-
LSPs or RSVP CR-LSPs.
3.21 Configuring Static BFD for TE
This section describes how to configure a static BFD session to detect faults in a TE tunnel.
3.22 Configuring Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP
This section describes how to configure a dynamic BFD session to detect link faults in a static
CR-LSP or an RSVP CR-LSP.
3.23 Configuring Dynamic BFD for RSVP
This section describes how to configure a dynamic BFD session to detect faults in links between
RSVP neighbors.
3.24 Configuring LDP over TE
This section describes how to configure LDP over TE.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.25 Maintaining MPLS TE

This section describes how to clear operation information about MPLS TE, and reset the
automatic bandwidth adjustment.
3.26 Configuration Examples
The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS TE.Each configuration
example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration
roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.1 Introduction to MPLS TE

Integrating the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technology with the Traffic Engineering
(TE) technology, MPLS TE addresses the problem of the congestion caused by load imbalance.

3.1.1 MPLS TE Overview

MPLS TE reserves resources for tunnels to be set up, allowing traffic to be load-balanced among
nodes without passing through congested nodes.

TE
Network resource insufficiency and load imbalance result in congestion on a network, affecting
the performance of a backbone network. TE prevents network congestion and optimizes the
network resources.

TE dynamically monitors traffic and load on network elements and adjusts parameters relevant
to traffic control, routing, and resource constraints in real time. This optimizes utilization of
network resources and prevents imbalance-triggered congestion.

MPLS TE
As a combination of MPLS and TE, MPLS TE load-balances traffic on a network by setting up
an LSP over a specified path to reserve resources for traffic that will not pass through congested
nodes.

An LSP with a higher priority preempts bandwidth resources of LSPs with lower priorities,
providing sufficient bandwidth for services on the LSP with a higher priority in the case of
bandwidth insufficiency.

If a link fault or a node fault occurs, MPLS TE uses path backup and fast reroute (FRR) to ensure
uninterrupted traffic.

Administrators use MPLS TE to create LSPs to eliminate network congestions and use special
offline utility to analyze traffic if the number of LSPs increases to a certain extent.

3.1.2 MPLS TE Features Supported by the NE80E/40E

MPLS TE features supported by the system include RSVP-TE tunnels, MPLS TE reliability,
MPLS TE QoS, and MPLS TE security.
NOTE
This section describes MPLS TE features that are supported by the NE80E/40E. For details about MPLS
TE features, see the section "MPLS TE" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Feature Description
- MPLS.

Static MPLS TE Tunnel

A static MPLS TE tunnel allows labels to be allocated manually, without signaling protocols
exchanging control packets. Static MPLS TE tunnels are established on devices of low
performance on a stable network.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Static MPLS TE tunnels have the highest priority among tunnels and therefore their bandwidth
is not preemptive. In addition, static MPLS TE tunnels do not preempt bandwidth of other types
of CR-LSPs.

RSVP-TE Tunnel
RSVP-TE tunnels are set up by the RSVP-TE signaling protocol and change dynamically
according to the network topology.

RSVP-TE features supported by the NE80E/40E are as follows:

l Collecting and advertising link information

RSVP-TE uses an extended IGP (OSPF-TE or ISIS-TE) to collect and advertise TE link
information and creates a traffic engineering database (TEDB). An extended IGP floods
the link information periodically. If a link goes Up or Down, link attributes change, or the
reservable bandwidth on the link changes to a certain extent, the extended IGP floods the
link information. The flood threshold is adjusted by using command lines.
l Path calculation
On the NE80E/40E, the path of a TE tunnel is calculated by using CSPF. If there are several
paths with the same metric, CSPF selects one of them based on the number of hops and the
user configured tie-breaking.
In addition to the reservable bandwidth and management group attributes, the following
attributes are configurable:
– Tunnel bandwidth
– Affinity attribute
– Explicit path
– Maximum hop limit
– Shared Risk Link Group (SRLG)
l Establishment of an RSVP-TE tunnel
If configured, the system records routes and labels, or detects loops during the establishment
of an RSVP-TE tunnel. When the resources are insufficient, preemption is triggered based
on the setup and the holding priorities.
If an RSVP-TE tunnel fails to be established, the system re-establishes the RSVP-TE tunnel
periodically.
l Signaling mechanism
RSVP-TE reserves resources in either fixed filter (FF) or shared-explicit (SE) mode. The
following extended RSVP mechanisms are supported by the NE80E/40E to relieve network
burden and improve reliability:
– Confirmation and retransmission for RSVP messages
– Summary refreshing
– Hello mechanism
In addition, RSVP authentication is supported by the NE80E/40E to improve network
security.
l Traffic forwarding
VPN traffic is directed to TE tunnels by using configured policy-based routes. Non-VPN
traffic is directed to TE tunnels by using static routes, policy-based routes, IGP shortcut,
or forwarding adjacency.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Tunnel optimization and adjustment

After tunnels are set up, the tunnels are adjusted and optimized by using the following
features:
– Tunnel re-optimization: A path of a CR-LSP is calculated periodically. If a better path
is discovered, a new CR-LSP is established over a better path, and traffic switches to
the new CR-LSP.
– Route pinning: The path of an established tunnel is pinned, which means that the path
of the tunnel is not optimized if a better path is discovered.

Reliability
The NE80E/40E supports the following reliability features applied to MPLS TE tunnels:
l FRR
FRR is a local protection mechanism in RSVP-TE. FRR protects traffic on CR-LSP links
and nodes if faults occur. FRR is classified into manual FRR and automatic FRR.
l CR-LSP backup
CR-LSP backup protects traffic on an entire RSVP-TE CR-LSP from end to end. If the
primary CR-LSP fails, traffic will be switched to the backup CR-LSP. If the backup CR-
LSP also fails, a best-effort path will be generated so that traffic can be switched to the
best-effort path.
l BFD
BFD detects a fault in a CR-LSP at millisecond level. BFD allows rapid detection,
requirements for which hardware detection does not satisfy.
l RSVP GR
RSVP GR is a status recovery mechanism for RSVP-TE tunnels. If a switchover on the
control plane triggered by a fault or an operation, RSVP GR helps the system to properly
forwarding data on the forwarding plane and restore the RSVP-TE LSP on the control plane.
FRR is supported by the NE80E/40E during the GR process.
l MPLS tunnel protection group
An MPLS tunnel protection group provides an end-to-end mechanism applicable to MPLS
TE tunnels, including but not limited to RSVP-TE tunnels. In an MPLS tunnel protection
group, one tunnel protects traffic on other tunnels.
NOTE
For configurations of an MPLS tunnel protection group, see the section "MPLS OAM."
l NSR
If a software or hardware fault occurs on the control plane, NSR ensures the uninterrupted
forwarding and the uninterrupted connection of the control plane. In addition, the control
plane of a neighbor does not sense the fault.

DS-TE
DS-TE maps different service types of traffic (such as voice, video, or data traffic) to LSPs. The
path through which traffic passes is consistent with traffic engineering constraints of a specific
service type.
DS-TE supports either non-IETF or IETF mode on the NE80E/40E.
l The non-IETF (non-standard) mode supports combinations between two CTs (CT0 and
CT1) and eight priorities (0 to 7) and the Bandwidth Constraints models (RDM and MAM).

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Class-Type (CT) refers to the class mapped to a service. The priority refers to the LSP
preemption priority.
l The IEFT (standard) mode supports combinations between eight CTs (CT0 to CT7) and
eight priorities (0 to 7). In addition, it supports the following Bandwidth Constraints
models: RDM, MAM, and extended-MAM.

A DS-TE tunnel supports TE FRR, hot standby, protection group, and CT traffic statistics.

3.2 Configuring Static CR-LSP

The configuration of a static CR-LSP is simple and label allocation is performed manually, rather
than by using a signaling protocol to exchange control packets. This consumes a few resources.

3.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring a static CR-LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you rapidly
and correctly finish the configuration task.

Applicable Environment
The configuration of a static CR-LSP is a simple process. Labels are manually allocated, and no
signaling protocol or exchange of control packets are needed. The setup of a static CR-LSP
consumes a few resources. In addition, you need to configure neither the IGP TE nor CSPF for
the static CR-LSP.

The static CR-LSP cannot dynamically adapt to a changing network. Therefore, its application
is very limited.

The static CR-LSP is a special static LSP that has the similar.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a static CR-LSP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring the static route or IGP to ensure the reachability between LSRs
l Configuring an LSR ID on each LSR
l Enabling basic MPLS functions on each LSR globally and on each interface

Data Preparation
To configure a static CR-LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Nodes through which the static CR-LSP passes

2 Values for outgoing labels on LSRs along the static CR-LSP

3 Number, tunnel ID, and destination address of the tunnel interface

4 Destination address of the static CR-LSP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

5 Next hop address or outgoing interface on the ingress

6 Incoming interface, next hop address, or outgoing interface on each transit

7 Incoming interface on the egress

8 Bandwidth of the ingress and the transit node(s)

NOTE

l The value of the outgoing label on each node is the value of the incoming label of its next node.
l The destination address of a static CR-LSP is the destination address of the TE tunnel interface.

3.2.2 Enabling MPLS TE

Before setting up a static CR-LSP, you must enable MPLS TE.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the static CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te

MPLS TE is enabled on the node globally.

To enable MPLS TE on each interface, enable MPLS TE globally in the MPLS view first.
Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls

The MPLS is enabled on the interface.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 7 Run:
mpls te

The MPLS TE is enabled on the interface.

NOTE

When the MPLS TE is disabled in the interface view, all the CR-LSPs on the current interface change to
Down.
When the MPLS TE is disabled in the MPLS view, the MPLS TE on each interface is disabled, and all
CR-LSPs are deleted.

----End

3.2.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth

By configuring the link bandwidth, you can set the bandwidth of a CR-LSP.

Context
NOTE

To constrain the bandwidth of CR-LSPs, the procedure is mandatory. In addition, the mpls te lsp-tp
outbound command must be run on the corresponding tunnel interface.
By default, the maximum reservable bandwidth on the link is 0 bit/s. If the maximum reservable bandwidth
is not configured, when the bandwidth of the CR-LSP is constrained, the bandwidth of the CR-LSP is more
than the maximum reservable bandwidth. Therefore, the CR-LSP cannot be set up.

Do as follows on each node along the CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The MPLS-TE-enabled interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth bw-value

The maximum available bandwidth of the link is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te bandwidth { bc0 bc0-bw-value | bc1 bc1-bw-value }*

The BC bandwidth of the link is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

l The maximum reservable bandwidth of a link cannot be greater than the actual bandwidth of the link.
A maximum of 80% of the actual bandwidth of the link is recommended for the maximum reservable
bandwidth of the link.
l Neither the BC0 bandwidth nor the BC1 bandwidth can be greater than the maximum reservable
bandwidth of the link.
l If an MPLS TE tunnel to be set up requires the bandwidth that is larger than 67105 kbit/s, it is
recommended that the reserved bandwidth be one thousandth more that the bandwidth to be configured.

----End

3.2.4 Configuring the MPLS TE Tunnel Interface

Before setting up an MPLS TE tunnel, you must create a tunnel interface.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node of a static CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface is created and the tunnel interface view is displayed.
Step 3 To configure the IP address of the tunnel interface, select one of the following commands.
l Run:
ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]

The IP address of the tunnel interface is configured.

The secondary IP address of the tunnel interface can be configured only after the primary IP
address is configured.
l Or, run:
ip address unnumbered interface interface-type interface-number

The tunnel interface is configured to borrow an IP address from other interfaces.

To forward traffic, the tunnel interface must have an IP address; however, because the MPLS
TE tunnel is unidirectional, no peer address is needed. Therefore, it is unnecessary to configure
the IP address separately for the tunnel interface. The tunnel interface often borrows an LSR ID
of the ingress node as the address.

NOTE

Because the type of the packet forwarded by the MPLS TE tunnel is MPLS, the commands, such as ip
urpf commands, related to IP packet forwarding configured on this interface are invalid.

Step 4 Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured to be the tunnel protocol.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 5 Run:
destination ip-address

The destination address of the tunnel is configured, which is usually the LSR ID of the egress
node.

Different types of tunnels need different destination addresses. When the tunnel protocol is
changed to MPLS TE from other different protocols, the configured destination is deleted
automatically and needs to be reconfigured.

Step 6 Run:
mpls te tunnel-id tunnel-id

The tunnel ID is configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static

The signal protocol of the tunnel is configured to be CR-static.

Step 8 (Optional) Run:

mpls te signalled tunnel-name

The tunnel name is specified.

Step 9 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

NOTE

If MPLS TE parameters on a tunnel interface are modified, you need to run the mpls te commit command
to activate them.

----End

3.2.5 Configuring the Ingress of the Static CR-LSP

To set up a static CR-LSP, you need to specify the ingress node of the CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a static CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-cr-lsp ingress { tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number | tunnel-name }
destination destination-address { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface
interface-type interface-number } * out-label out-label [ bandwidth [ ct0 | ct1 |
ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 ] bandwidth ]

The LSR is set as the ingress of the specified static CR-LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

tunnel interface-number specifies the MPLS TE tunnel interface that uses this static CR-LSP.
By default, the Bandwidth Constraints value is ct0, and the value of bandwidth is 0. The
bandwidth used by the tunnel cannot be higher than the maximum reservable bandwidth of the
link.

The value of tunnel-name cannot be spaces or abbreviations. For example, if a tunnel interface
named Tunnel 2/0/0 is specified in the interface tunnel 2/0/0 command, tunnel-name specified
in the static-cr-lsp ingress command must be Tunnel2/0/0; otherwise, the tunnel cannot be set
up. For the transit and egress, tunnel name consistency is not required.

The next hop or outgoing interface is determined by the route from the ingress to the egress. For
the difference between the next hop and outgoing interface, refer to "Static Route Configuration"
in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - IP Routing.

----End

3.2.6 Configuring the Transit of the Static CR-LSP

To set up a static CR-LSP, you need to specify the transit nodes of the CR-LSP. This procedure
is optional because the CR-LSP can have no transit node.

Context
If the static CR-LSP has only the ingress and egress, this configuration is not needed. If the static
CR-LSP has one or more transits, do as follows on the transit node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-cr-lsp transit lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number
in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-
type interface-number } * out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ ct0 | ct1 | ct2
| ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 ] bandwidth ]

The LSR is set as the transit node of the specified static CR-LSP.

No restriction is specified for the lsp-name of the transit and the egress, but the lsp-name should
not be a duplicate of the existing tunnel name on the node.

----End

3.2.7 Configuring the Egress of the Static CR-LSP

To set up a static CR-LSP, you need to specify the egress node of the CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the egress of the static CR-LSP:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
static-cr-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number
in-label in-label [ lsrid ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-id ]

The LSR is configured as the egress of the specified static CR-LSP.

----End

3.2.8 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of a static CR-LSP, you can view the static CR-LSP status.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the static MPLS TE tunnel function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls static-cr-lsp [ lsp-name ] [ { include | exclude } ip-address mask-
length ] [ verbose ] command to check information about the static CR-LSP.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel [ destination ip-address ] [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-
id local-lsp-id | lsr-role { all | egress | ingress | remote | transit } ] [ name tunnel-name ]
[ { incoming-interface | interface | outgoing-interface } interface-type interface-
number ] [ te-class0 | te-class1 | te-class2 | te-class3 | te-class4 | te-class5 | te-class6 | te-
class7 ] [ verbose ] command to check information about the tunnel.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel statistics or display mpls lsp statistics command to check
the tunnel statistics.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
information about the tunnel interface on the ingress.

----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, run the preceding commands, and you can view the following
information:

l Information about the static CR-LSP name, the incoming and outgoing labels, and the
incoming and outgoing interfaces. The status of CR-LSP is Up.
l Statistics of tunnel status on the LSR.
l Details of the tunnel interface, including the tunnel name, state description, and attributes.
The tunnel attributes include the LSP ID, ingress, egress, and signaling protocol.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.3 Configuring a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP

A static bidirectional co-routed label switched path (LSP) is composed of two static constraint-
based routed (CR) LSPs in opposite directions. Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic
Engineering (TE) supports MPLS forwarding in both directions along such an LSP.

3.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring a static bidirectional co-routed LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the
configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
A static bidirectional co-routed LSP is applicable to MPLS Transport Profile (TP) networks,
improving network maintainability.

A static CR-LSP is easy to configure: labels are manually allocated, and no signaling protocol
is used to exchange control packets. The setup of a static CR-LSP consumes only a few resources,
and you do not need to configure IGP TE or CSPF for the static CR-LSP. However, static CR-
LSP application is quite limited. A static CR-LSP cannot dynamically adapt to network changes,
and it uses the same label range (16 to 1023) as a common static LSP.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a static bidirectional co-routed LSP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring unicast static routes or an IGP to ensure the reachability between LSRs
l Configuring an LSR ID for each LSR
l Enabling MPLS globally and on interfaces on all LSRs

Data Preparation
To configure a static bidirectional co-routed LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Physical link supporting MPLS TE forwarding

2 Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for each link

3 Tunnel interface IP address and tunnel ID

4 Next-hop address or outbound interface on the ingress

5 Inbound interface and next-hop address or outbound interface on each transit node

6 Inbound interface on the egress

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

l The value of the outgoing label on each node is the value of the incoming label on its next hop.
l The destination address of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP is the destination address specified
on the tunnel interface.

3.3.2 Enabling MPLS TE

Before setting up a static CR-LSP, you must enable MPLS TE.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the static CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te

MPLS TE is enabled on the node globally.

To enable MPLS TE on each interface, enable MPLS TE globally in the MPLS view first.
Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the interface is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls

The MPLS is enabled on the interface.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te

The MPLS TE is enabled on the interface.

NOTE

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.3.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth

By configuring the link bandwidth, you can set the bandwidth of a CR-LSP.

Context
NOTE

Do as follows on each node along the CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The MPLS-TE-enabled interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth bw-value

The maximum available bandwidth of the link is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te bandwidth { bc0 bc0-bw-value | bc1 bc1-bw-value }*

The BC bandwidth of the link is configured.

NOTE

----End

3.3.4 Configuring a Tunnel Interface on the Ingress

A tunnel interface must be created before an MPLS TE tunnel is established on an ingress.

Context
Perform the following steps on the ingress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

A tunnel interface is created and the tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 To configure an IP address for the tunnel interface, run either of the following commands:
l ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]

The IP address of the tunnel interface is configured.

The secondary IP address of the tunnel interface can be configured only after the primary IP
address is configured.
l ip address unnumbered interface interface-type interface-number

The unnumbered tunnel interface is configured to borrow an IP address from another

interface.
Although an IP address on a tunnel interface enables an MPLS TE tunnel to forward traffic, the
MPLS TE tunnel does not need to be assigned a separate IP address because it is unidirectional.
Therefore, a tunnel interface usually borrows a loopback address, which is the LSR ID of the
ingress.
Step 4 Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured as a tunnel protocol.

Step 5 Run:
destination ip-address

The destination address is configured for the tunnel. It is usually the LSR ID of the egress.
Various types of tunnels have different requirements for destination addresses. If a tunnel
protocol is changed to MPLS TE, the destination address set using the destination command is
automatically deleted and needs to be reconfigured.
Step 6 Run:
mpls te tunnel-id tunnel-id

The tunnel ID is configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static

Static CR-LSP signaling is configured.

Step 8 Run:
mpls te bidirectional

The bidirectional LSP attribute is configured.

Step 9 Run:
mpls te commit

The configurations are committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

Each time an MPLS TE parameter is changed, the mpls te commit command must be run to make the
configuration take effect.

----End

3.3.5 Configure the Ingress of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP

The ingress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP needs to be manually specified.

Context
Perform the following steps on the ingress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-name

A static bidirectional co-routed LSP is created and the static bidirectional LSP view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
forward { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-
number } out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ channel ] bandwidth ]

A CR-LSP is configured on the ingress.

Step 4 Run:
backward in-label in-label-value

A reverse CR-LSP is configured on the ingress.

interface-number is the tunnel interface number of the static bidirectional co-routed LSP. The
default class type value is ct0. The default bandwidth is 0 bit/s. The bandwidth used by the tunnel
must be no more than the maximum reservable link bandwidth.

The next hop or the outbound interface is determined by the route from the ingress to the egress.
For information about differences between a next hop and an outbound interface, see the section
"IP Static Route Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration
Guide - IP Routing.

----End

3.3.6 Configure a Transit Node of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed

LSP
The transit node of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP needs to be manually specified. This
configuration is optional because a static bidirectional co-routed LSP may have no transit node.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
Skip this procedure if a static bidirectional co-routed LSP has only an ingress and an egress. If
a static bidirectional co-routed LSP has a transit node, perform the following steps on this transit
node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bidirectional static-cr-lsp transit tunnel-name

A static bidirectional co-routed LSP is created and the static bidirectional LSP view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
forward in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface
interface-type interface-number } out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ channel ]
bandwidth ]

A CR-LSP is configured on the transit node.

Step 4 Run:
backward in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface
interface-type interface-number } out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ channel ]
bandwidth ]

A reverse CR-LSP is configured on the transit node.

tunnel-name specified on a transit node or an egress cannot be the same as the existing tunnel
name on the transit node or the egress.

----End

3.3.7 Configure the Egress of a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP

The egress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP needs to be manually specified.

Context
Perform the following steps on the egress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress tunnel-name

A static bidirectional co-routed LSP is created and the static bidirectional LSP view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
forward in-label in-label-value lsrid ingress-lsrid tunnel-id ingress-sessionid

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

A CR-LSP is configured on the egress.

ingress-lsrid is the ingress LSR ID. This LSR ID value is used as the FEC value for the reverse
CR-LSP.
ingress-sessionid is the tunnel ID set on the ingress. The tunnel ID and LSR ID identify an egress
CR-LSP in a tunnel originating from the ingress.
Step 4 Run:
backward { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-
number } out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ channel ] bandwidth ]

A reverse CR-LSP is configured on the egress.

tunnel-name specified on a transit node or an egress cannot be the same as the existing tunnel
name on the transit node or the egress.

----End

3.3.8 Configuring the Tunnel Interface on the Egress

The reverse tunnel attribute is configured and the tunnel interface is bound to a static bidirectional
co-routed LSP on the egress.

Context
Perform the following steps on the egress of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

A tunnel interface is created and the tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te passive-tunnel

The reverse tunnel attribute is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress tunnel-name

The tunnel interface is bound to a specified static bidirectional co-routed LSP.

----End

3.3.9 Checking the Configuration

After a static bidirectional co-routed LSP is successfully configured, you can view its status.

Prerequisite
The configurations of a static bidirectional co-routed LSP are complete.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp [ tunnel-name ] [ verbose ] to view a
static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
l Run the display mpls te protection tunnel { aps | all | tunnel-id | interface { tunnel
interface-name | interface-type interface-number | interface-name } } verbose to view
information about a specified working tunnel and its protection tunnel.

----End

Example
Run the display mpls te bidirectional command to view information about a static bidirectional
co-routed LSP.
<HUAWEI> display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel0/0/1 2.2.2.2/32 NULL/20 -/Eth0/0/1 Up
30/NULL Eth0/0/1/-

Run the display mpls te protection tunnel command to view information about a specified
working tunnel and its protection tunnel in a tunnel protection group.
<HUAWEI> display mpls te protection tunnel 100
------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. Work-tunnel status /id Protect-tunnel status /id Switch-Result
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 in defect /100 non-defect /300 protect-tunnel

3.4 Configuring an RSVP-TE Tunnel

An RSVP-TE tunnel is the prerequisite for the configuration of TE attributes.

3.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring an RSVP-TE tunnel, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and efficiently.

Applicable Environment
A dynamic signaling protocol adjusts the path of a TE tunnel on the basis of network topology
changes. To implement advanced features such as TE FRR and CR-LSP backup, establishing
an MPLS TE tunnel by using the RSVP-TE signaling protocol is recommended.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an RSVP-TE tunnel, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring OSPF or IS-IS to ensure the reachability between LSRs

l Configuring an LSR ID for every LSR
l Enabling MPLS on every LSR globally and on each interface

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure an RSVP-TE tunnel, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Nodes through which an RSVP CR-LSP passes

2 Links through which an MPLS TE tunnel passes

3 Maximum bandwidth and the maximum reservable bandwidth for a link

4 OSPF area ID or IS-IS level of a device enabled with TE

5 Tunnel ID

6 Destination address of a tunnel

7 Constraints for an MPLS TE tunnel, such as explicit path or tunnel bandwidth

8 (Optional) RSVP resource reservation style (the default style is Shared-Explicit)

3.4.2 Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP-TE

Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP-TE is the prerequisite for configuring MPLS TE attributes.

Context
NOTE

l If MPLS TE is disabled in the interface view, all CR-LSPs on the current interface go Down.
l If MPLS TE is disabled in the MPLS view, MPLS TE on each interface is disabled and all CR-LSPs
go Down.
l If RSVP-TE on a node is disabled, RSVP-TE on all interfaces of this node is disabled.

Do as follows on each node along a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te

MPLS TE is enabled on the node globally.

Step 4 Run:
mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

RSVP-TE is enabled on the node globally.

Step 5 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 6 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view of the MPLS-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te

MPLS TE is enabled on the interface.

Step 8 Run:
mpls rsvp-te

RSVP-TE is enabled on the interface.

----End

3.4.3 (Optional) Configuring Link Bandwidth

By configuring the link bandwidth, you can set the bandwidth of a CR-LSP.

Context
NOTE

Do as follows on each node along the CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The MPLS-TE-enabled interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth bw-value

The maximum available bandwidth of the link is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te bandwidth { bc0 bc0-bw-value | bc1 bc1-bw-value }*

The BC bandwidth of the link is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

----End

3.4.4 Configuring OSPF TE

A Traffic Engineering DataBase (TEDB) will be generated on a network if OSPF TE is
configured. After OSPF TE is configured, a CR-LSP is established by using OSPF routes not
the routes calculated by CSPF.

Context
By default, an OSPF area does not support TE.

The OSPF TE extension uses Opaque Type 10 LSA to carry the TE attribute of a link. Therefore,
the Opaque capability of OSPF must be enabled. TE LSAs are generated only when at least one
neighbor is in the FULL state.

NOTE

If OSPF TE is not configured, no TE LSA exists and thus no TEDB is generated on a network. In this case,
a CR-LSP is established by using IGP routes not routes calculated by CSPF calculation.

Do as follows on each node along a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
ospf [ process-id ]

The OSPF view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
opaque-capability enable

The OSPF opaque capability is enabled.

Step 4 (Optional) Run:

advertise mpls-lsr-id

The MPLS LSR ID is advertised to multiple OSPF areas. This step is necessary only on an Area
Border Router (ABR) in multiple OSPF areas.

Step 5 Run:
area area-id

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The OSPF area view is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls-te enable [ standard-complying ]

TE is enabled in the current OSPF area.

----End

3.4.5 Configuring IS-IS TE

A TEDB will be generated on a network only if IS-IS TE is configured. After IS-IS TE is
configured, a CR-LSP is established by using IS-IS routes not the routes calculated by CSPF.

Context
Do as follows on each node along a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
isis [ process-id ]

The IS-IS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
cost-style { compatible [ relax-spf-limit ] | wide | wide-compatible }

The IS-IS Wide Metric attribute is configured.

The IS-IS TE extension uses a sub-TLV of IS-reachable TLV (22) to carry TE attributes. The
IS-IS Wide Metric attribute configured as wide, compatible or wide-compatible. By default, IS-
IS sends or receives packets that express route metric in Narrow mode.

Step 4 Run:
traffic-eng [ level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 ]

IS-IS TE is enabled.

By default, IS-IS does not support TE.

If a level is not specified after IS-IS TE is enabled, IS-IS TE is valid for both Level-1 and Level-2.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:

te-set-subtlv { bw-constraint value | lo-multiplier value | unreserve-bw-sub-pool
value }*

The TLV type for the sub-TLVs used to carry the DS-TE parameters is set.

By default, the BW-constraint sub-TLV is 252; the Local Overbooking Multipliers (LOM) sub-
TLV is 253; the unreserve-BW-sub-pool sub-TLV is 251.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.4.6 (Optional) Configuring an MPLS TE Explicit Path

An explicit path is created, over which a CR-LSP is established.

Context
An explicit path consists of a series of nodes. These nodes form a vector path in the sequence
of configuration.
The IP address of an explicit path is the IP address of an interface on the node. Often, the IP
address of a loopback interface on the egress node is used as the destination address of the explicit
path.
Adjacent nodes are connected in the following modes on an explicit path:
l Strict: The two nodes are connected directly.
l Loose: Other LSRs may exist between the two nodes.
The strict mode and the loose mode are used separately or together.
By default, the include strict mode is used. This means that the next hop added to the explicit
path must be directly connected to the previous node. A constraint for an explicit path is that the
nodes through which traffic must pass or cannot pass are selectable.
include indicates that an established LSP must pass through the specified nodes.
exclude indicates that an established LSP cannot pass through the specified nodes.
TE tunnels are classified into intra-area tunnels and inter-area tunnels.
l Intra-area tunnel: indicates that TE tunnels are in a single area. An area is either an OSPF
area or an IS-IS area, not a BGP AS.
l Inter-area tunnel: indicates that TE tunnels traverse through multiple areas. Areas are OSPF
areas or IS-IS areas not BGP ASs.
A loose explicit path must be used to establish an inter-area TE tunnel and the next node of the
explicit path must be an ABR or an ASBR.
Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
explicit-path path-name

The explicit path is created and the explicit path view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
next hop ip-address [ include [ strict | loose ] | exclude ]

The next IP address of the explicit path is specified.

Step 4 (Optional) You can select either of the following commands to adde, modify or delete a node in
the explicit path:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Run:
add hop ip-address1 [ include [ strict | loose ] | exclude ] { after | before }
ip-address2

A node is added to the explicit path.

l Run:
modify hop ip-address1 ip-address2 [ include [ strict | loose ] | exclude ]

The address of a node on the explicit path is modified.

l Run:
delete hop ip-address

A node is deleted from the explicit path.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:
list hop [ ip-address ]

Information about the explicit path is displayed.

----End

3.4.7 Configuring the MPLS TE Tunnel Interface

A tunnel interface must be created and tunnel configurations must be configured on the tunnel
interface before an RSVP-TE tunnel is established.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

A tunnel interface is created and the tunnel interface view is displayed.

CAUTION
Configuring a tunnel interface on the main control board is recommended. The slot ID of the
main control board is the slot ID in interface-number, which is usually 0. In the situation where
a tunnel interface is configured on an interface board, the tunnel interface will be deleted if the
interface board is pulled out.

NOTE

If the shutdown command is run on the tunnel interface, all tunnels established on the tunnel interface will
be deleted.

Step 3 To configure the IP address of a tunnel interface, run one of the following commands.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l To assign an IP address to the tunnel interface, run:

ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]

The secondary IP address of the tunnel interface is configured only after the primary IP
address is configured.
l To use an unnumbered IP address, run:
ip address unnumbered interface interface-type interface-number

A tunnel interface must have an IP address to forward traffic. It is unnecessary to configure an

IP address separately for the tunnel interface as an MPLS TE tunnel is unidirectional. The tunnel
interface often borrows the LSR ID of the ingress node as the address.

NOTE

Because the type of the packet forwarded by the MPLS TE tunnel is MPLS, the commands, such as ip
urpf commands, related to IP packet forwarding configured on this interface are invalid.

Step 4 Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured as a tunnel protocol.

Step 5 Run:
destination ip-address

The destination address of a tunnel is configured, which is usually the LSR ID of the egress
node.

NOTE

CSPF calculation will fail if the destination address of a tunnel is not the LSR ID of the egress.
Different types of tunnels have different requirements for a destination address. If the tunnel protocol is
changed to MPLS TE, the configuration of the destination command is deleted automatically and needs
to be re-configured.

Step 6 Run:
mpls te tunnel-id tunnel-id

The tunnel ID is configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te

RSVP-TE is configured as the signaling protocol for a tunnel.

Step 8 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

NOTE

If MPLS TE parameters on a tunnel interface are changed, run the mpls te commit command to make them
take effect.

----End

3.4.8 Configuring Constraints for an MPLS TE Tunnel

A path over which an RSVP-TE tunnel is set up is precisely controlled by configuring constraint
rules such as an explicit path.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth [ ct0 ct0-bw-value | ct1 ct1-bw-value ] [ flow-queue flow-
queue ]

The bandwidth is configured for the tunnel.

The bandwidth used by the tunnel cannot exceed the maximum reservable bandwidth of the link.

The default bandwidth type of the tunnel is ct0.

If only a specified transmission path, not the bandwidth, needs to be configured for the TE tunnel,
this step is unnecessary.

If the bandwidth for the MPLS TE tunnel is higher than 28630 kbit/s, the assigned bandwidth
of the MPLS TE tunnel may not be precise, and the MPLS TE tunnel can still be set up
successfully.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te path explicit-path path-name

The explicit path used by the MPLS TE tunnel is configured.

If only the bandwidth, not the transmission path, needs to be configured for the TE tunnel, this
step is unnecessary.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.4.9 (Optional) Configuring RSVP Resource Reservation Style

By configuring a resource reservation style, you can configure different LSPs over the same link
to use the same or different reserved resources.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te resv-style { ff | se }

The resource reservation style for the tunnel is specified.

By default, the resource reservation style is the Shared-Explicit (SE) style.

In TE applications, the SE style is used in the make-before-break mechanism, and the Fixed-
Filter (FF) style is seldom used.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.4.10 Configuring CSPF

An IGP uses SPF to calculate the shortest path to each node on a network; MPLS TE uses CSPF
to calculate the path to a certain node.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

NOTE
Configuring CSPF on all the transit nodes is recommended, preventing incomplete path computation on
the ingress.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te cspf

CSPF on the local LSR is enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 4 (Optional) Run:

mpls te cspf preferred-igp { isis | ospf }

The preferred IGP protocol is configured.

By default, CSPF is disabled.

----End

3.4.11 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of an RSVP-TE tunnel, you can view statistics about the RSVP-TE tunnel
and its status.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the RSVP-TE tunnel function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation [ interface interface-
type interface-number ] command to check the allocation of the link bandwidth.
l Run the display ospf [ process-id ] mpls-te [ area area-id ] [ self-originated ] command
to check OSPF TE information.
l Run the display isis traffic-eng advertisements [ { level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 } | { lsp-
id | local } ] * [ process-id | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] command to check the IS-
IS TE status.
l Run the display isis traffic-eng link [ { level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 } | verbose ] * [ process-
id | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] command to check the IS-IS TE status.
l Run the display isis traffic-eng network [ level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 ] [ process-id | vpn-
instance vpn-instance-name ] command to check the IS-IS TE status.
l Run the display isis traffic-eng statistics [ process-id | vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] command to check the IS-IS TE status.
l Run the display isis traffic-eng sub-tlvs [ process-id | vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] command to check the IS-IS TE status.
l Run the display explicit-path [ path-name ] [ verbose ] command to check the explicit
path.
l Run the display mpls te cspf destination ip-address [ affinity properties [ mask mask-
value ] | bandwidth { ct0 ct0-bandwidth | ct1 ct1-bandwidth | ct2 ct2-bandwidth | ct3 ct3-
bandwidth | ct4 ct4-bandwidth | ct5 ct5-bandwidth | ct6 ct6-bandwidth | ct7 ct7-
bandwidth }* | explicit-path path-name | hop-limit hop-limit-number | metric-type
{ igp | te } | priority setup-priority | srlg-strict exclude-path-name | tie-breaking
{ random | most-fill | least-fill } ]* command to check path information for CSPF.
l Run the display mpls te cspf tedb { all | area area-id | interface ip-address | network-
lsa | node [ router-id ] } command to check TEDB information for CSPF.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te [ interface [ interface-type interface-number ] ] command
to check information about RSVP.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te established [ interface interface-type interface-number
peer-ip-address ] command to check the established RSVP-TE tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Run the display mpls rsvp-te peer [ interface interface-type interface-number ] command
to check RSVP information of neighbors.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te reservation [ interface interface-type interface-number
peer-ip-address ] command to check the RSVP reserved resource.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te request [ interface interface-type interface-number peer-
ip-address ] command to check information about the resources that are requsted.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te sender [ interface interface-type interface-number peer-ip-
address ] command to check information about the RSVP sender.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics { global | interface [ interface-type interface-
number ] } command to check statistics about RSVP-TE.
l Run the display mpls te link-administration admission-control [ interface interface-
type interface-number | stale-interface interface-index ] command to check the tunnel
permitted by the local node.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel [ destination ip-address ] [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-
id local-lsp-id | lsr-role { all | egress | ingress | remote | transit } ] [ name tunnel-name ]
[ { incoming-interface | interface | outgoing-interface } interface-type interface-
number ] [ verbose ] command to check tunnel information.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel statistics or display mpls lsp statistics command to check
tunnel statistics.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
the tunnel interface on the ingress.

----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, run the preceding commands, and you can view the following
information:

l Information about links, including the physical bandwidth and available bandwidth of the
link
l Information about OSPF TE LSAs generated by every node
l Information about IS-IS TE on every node
l Information about MPLS RSVP-TE timers, the status of interfaces enabled RSVP-TE, the
bandwidth, the parameters for RSVP neighbors, sender information, and statistics
l Tunnel name, incoming and outgoing labels, and incoming and outgoing interfaces.
l Tunnel status statistics on the LSR
l Detailed information about the tunnel interface on the tunnel ingress, including the tunnel's
name, status, and attributes (including the LSP ID, ingress, and egress)

3.5 Referencing the CR-LSP Attribute Template to Set Up a

CR-LSP
By configuring a CR-LSP attribute template to set up CR-LSPs, you can simply the
configurations and make the configurations of CR-LSPs more flexible.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before using a CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for
the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
You can create a CR-LSP by using the following methods:

l Creating a CR-LSP without using a CR-LSP attribute template

l Creating a CR-LSP by using a CR-LSP attribute template
It is recommended to use a CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP because this
method has the following advantages:
– A CR-LSP attribute template can greatly simplify the configurations of CR-LSPs.
– A maximum of three CR-LSP attribute templates can be created for a hot-standby CR-
LSP or an ordinary backup CR-LSP; thus, you can set up a hot-standby CR-LSP or an
ordinary backup CR-LSP with different path options. (Among the three attribute
templates, the template with the smallest sequence number is firstly used. If the setup
fails, the template with a greater sequence number is used.)
– If configurations of a CR-LSP attribute template are modified, configurations of the
CR-LSPs established by using the CR-LSP attribute template are automatically updated,
which makes the configurations of CR-LSPs more flexible.
NOTE

The preceding two methods can be used together. If the TE attribute configured in the tunnel interface view
and the TE attribute configured through a CR-LSP attribute template coexist, the former takes precedence
over the latter.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before using a CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring an IGP on the P and PE on the MPLS backbone network to ensure IP

connectivity
l Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and RSVP TE on the MPLS backbone network

Data Preparation
To use a CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Names of the primary CR-LSP attribute template, hot-standby CR-LSP attribute

template, or ordinary backup CR-LSP attribute template

2 (Optional) Bandwidth of the CR-LSP attribute template

3 (Optional) Name of the explicit path referenced by the CR-LSP attribute

template

4 (Optional) Affinity value and affinity mask of the CR-LSP attribute template

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

5 (Optional) Setup priority and hold priority of the CR-LSP attribute template

6 (Optional) Hop limit of the CR-LSP attribute template

7 Tunnel interface which will use the attribute template

8 Sequence of using the hot-standby CR-LSP attribute template and ordinary

backup CR-LSP attribute template

3.5.2 Configuring a CR-LSP Attribute Template

You need to configure a CR-LSP attribute template before using the CR-LSP attribute template
to set up a CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP:

Steps 3 to 10 are optional.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-name

A CR-LSP attribute template is created and the LSP attribute view is displayed.

NOTE

A CR-LSP attribute template can be deleted only when it is not used by any tunnel interface.

Step 3 (Optional) Run:

bandwidth { ct0 bandwidth | ct1 bandwidth | ct2 bandwidth | ct3 bandwidth | ct4
bandwidth | ct5 bandwidth | ct6 bandwidth | ct7 bandwidth }*

The bandwidth is set for the CR-LSP attribute template. The optional bandwidth type varies with
DS-TE modes. In non-DS-TE mode, only CT0 and CT1 are supported. In DS-TE mode, if no
TE-Class mapping table is configured, only CT0, CT1, CT2, and CT3 are supported; if a TE-
Class mapping table is configured, the CT types configured in the TE-Class mapping table are
adopted.

NOTE

If an MPLS TE tunnel to be set up requires a bandwidth larger than 67105 kbit/s, it is recommended that
the 1/1000 of the configured bandwidth to be reserved.

Step 4 (Optional) Run:

explicit-path path-name

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

An explicit path is configured for the CR-LSP attribute template.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:

affinity property affinity-value [ mask mask-value ]

The affinity attribute is set for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, both the affinity value and the affinity mask are 0x0.

Step 6 (Optional) Run:

priority setup_priority_value [ hold_priority_value ]

The setup priority and hold priority are set for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, both the setup priority and the hold priority are 7.

Step 7 (Optional) Run:

hop-limit hop-limit

The hop limit is set for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, the hop limit is 32.

Step 8 (Optional) Run:

fast-reroute [ bandwidth ]

FRR is enabled for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, FRR is disabled.

NOTE

Before enabling or disabling FRR for the CR-LSP attribute template, note the following:
l After FRR is enabled, the route recording function is automatically enabled for the CR-LSP.
l After FRR is disabled, attributes of the bypass tunnel are automatically deleted.

Step 9 (Optional) Run:

record-route [ label ]

The route recording function is enabled for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, the route recording function is disabled.

NOTE

The undo mpls te record-route command can take effect only when FRR is disabled.

Step 10 (Optional) Run:

bypass-attributes { bandwidth bandwidth | priority setup_priority_value
[ hold_priority_value ] }

The bypass tunnel attributes are configured for the CR-LSP attribute template.

By default, the bypass tunnel attributes are not configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE
This command can take effect only when the following conditions are met:
l The CR-LSP attribute template has been enabled with FRR allowing bandwidth protection.
l The bandwidth for the bypass tunnel is lower than or equal to the bandwidth for the CR-LSP attribute
template.
l The setup priority and hold priority of the bypass tunnel are smaller than the setup priority and hold
priority of the CR-LSP attribute template.

Step 11 Run:
commit

Configurations of the CR-LSP attribute template are committed.

NOTE

When the CR-LSP attribute template is used to set up a CR-LSP:

l The CR-LSP is removed and a new CR-LSP is created if the Break-Before-Make attribute (the priority
attribute) of the CR-LSP attribute template is modified.
l The CR-LSP is removed after an eligible CR-LSP is created and traffic switches to the new CR-LSP
if the Make-Before-Break attribute of the CR-LSP attribute template is modified.

----End

3.5.3 Setting Up a CR-LSP by Using a CR-LSP Attribute Template

You can use a CR-LSP attribute template to set up the primary CR-LSP, hot-standby CR-LSP,
and ordinary backup CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is display.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

To configure the TE tunnel interface, refer to the section Configuring MPLS TE Tunnel
Interfaces.
Step 3 Run:
mpls te primary-lsp-constraint { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-name }

The primary CR-LSP is set up through the specified CR-LSP attribute template.
If dynamic is used, it indicates that when a CR-LSP attribute template is used to set up a primary
CR-LSP, all attributes in the template adopt the default values.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint number { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-
name }

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The hot-standby CR-LSP is set up by using the specified CR-LSP attribute template.

A maximum of three CR-LSP attribute templates can be used to set up a hot-standby CR-LSP.
The hot-standby CR-LSP must be consistent with the primary CR-LSP in the attributes of the
setup priority, hold priority, and bandwidth type. To set up a hot-standby CR-LSP, you should
keep on attempting to use CR-LSP attribute templates one by one in ascending order of the
number of the attribute templates until the hot-standby CR-LSP is set up.

If dynamic is used, it indicates that the hot-standby CR-LSP is assigned the same bandwidth
and priority as the primary CR-LSP, but specified with a different path from the primary CR-
LSP.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:

mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint wtr interval

The Wait to Restore (WTR) time is set for the traffic to switch back from the hot-standby CR-
LSP to the primary CR-LSP.

By default, the WTR time for the traffic to switch back from the hot-standby CR-LSP to the
primary CR-LSP is 10 seconds.

NOTE

The hot-standby CR-LSP specified in the mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint wtr command must
be an existing one established by running the mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint command.

Step 6 (Optional) Run:

mpls te ordinary-lsp-constraint number { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-
name }

The ordinary backup CR-LSP is set up by using the specified CR-LSP attribute template.

A maximum of three CR-LSP attribute templates can be used to set up an ordinary backup CR-
LSP. The ordinary backup CR-LSP must be consistent with the primary CR-LSP in the attributes
of the setup priority, hold priority, and bandwidth type. To set up an ordinary backup CR-LSP,
you should keep on attempting to use CR-LSP attribute templates one by one in ascending order
of the number of the attribute template until the ordinary backup CR-LSP is set up.

If dynamic is used, it indicates that the ordinary backup CR-LSP is assigned the same bandwidth
and priority as the primary CR-LSP.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te commit

The configurations of the CR-LSP are committed.

----End

3.5.4 Checking the Configuration

After referencing a CR-LSP attribute template to set up CR-LSPs, you can view information
about the established MPLS TE CR-LSPs.

Prerequisite
All configurations of the CR-LSP set up by using the CR-LSP attribute template are complete.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display explicit-path [ path-name ] [ tunnel-interface | lsp-attribute | verbose ]
command to view information about the explicit path configured for the CR-LSP attribute
template.

Step 2 Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface lsp-constraint [ tunnel interface-number ] command
to view information about the CR-LSP attribute template on the TE tunnel interface.

Step 3 Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ auto-bypass-tunnel tunnel-name | tunnel interface-
number ] command to view information about the MPLS TE tunnel using the CR-LSP attribute
template.

----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, you can view the following information:

l List of CR-LSP attribute templates that use the specified explicit path
l Information about the CR-LSP attribute templates on the specified TE tunnel interface
l Information about the CR-LSPs that are set up through the specified CR-LSP attribute
template

3.6 Adjusting RSVP Signaling Parameters

RSVP-TE provides various parameters, which meet the requirements for reliability, network
resources, and advanced MPLS features.

3.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before adjusting RSVP signaling parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
RSVP TE supports diversified signaling parameters. It ensures reliability and network resource
efficiency, and offers certain MPLS TE advanced features.

Before performing the configuration tasks described in this section, you must know in detail the
purpose of each task and the influences they have on networks.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before optimizing the RSVP-TE tunnel, complete the following task:

l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To optimize the RSVP TE tunnel, you need the following data.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

1 Refresh interval of RSVP message

2 PSB, RSB, and BSB timeout multiplier of RSVP

3 Retransmission timer and increment of RSVP

4 Transmission interval and allowable maximum loss numbers of Hello messages

3.6.2 Configuring RSVP Hello Extension

The RSVP Hello extension mechanism can detect reachability of RSVP neighbors.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

RSVP Hello extension is enabled on this node.

By default, the RSVP hello extension is disabled.

Step 4 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello-lost times

The permitted maximum times of Hello message loss is set.

When the RSVP Hello extension is enabled, by default, Hello ACK messages cannot be received
for consecutive 3 times, exceeding which the link is regarded as faulty, and the TE tunnel is torn
down.

Step 5 Run:
mpls rsvp-te timer hello interval

The refresh interval of Hello messages is set.

When the RSVP Hello extension is enabled, by default, the refresh interval of Hello message is
3 seconds.

If the refresh interval is modified, the modification takes effect after the timer times out.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 6 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 7 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view of the RSVP-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

Step 8 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

The RSVP Hello extension mechanism is enabled on the interface.

The RSVP Hello extension mechanism is used to detect the reachability of RSVP neighboring
nodes. For details, refer to RFC 3209 and RFC 3473.

----End

3.6.3 Configuring RSVP Timers

By configuring the RSVP status timer, you can set the refresh interval of Path messages and
Resv messages and the timeout multiplier when RSVP is in the blocked state.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te timer refresh interval

The interval for refreshing Path/Resv messages is set.

By default, the refresh interval of Path/Resv message is 30 seconds.
If the refresh interval is modified, the modification takes effect after the timer expires.
It is not recommended to set a long refresh interval or modify the refresh interval frequently.
Step 4 Run:
mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier number

The timeout multiplier of PSB and RSB is configured.

By default, the timeout multiplier of PSB and RSB is 3.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.6.4 Configuring RSVP Refresh Mechanism

Enabling Srefresh on the interface that connects two neighboring devices can reduce the cost
and improve the performance. After Srefresh is enabled, the retransmission of Srefresh messages
is automatically enabled on the interface.

Context
Enabling Srefresh in the interface view or the mpls view on two nodes that are the neighbors of
each other can reduce the cost and improve the performance of a network. In the interface view,
Srefresh can be enabled only on this interface; in the MPLS view, Srefresh can be enabled on
the entire device. After Srefresh is enabled, the retransmission of Srefresh messages is
automatically enabled on the interface or the device.
Assume that a node initializes the retransmission interval as Rf seconds. If receiving no ACK
message within Rf seconds, the node retransmits the RSVP message after (1 + Delta) x Rf
seconds. The value of Delta depends on the link rate. The node retransmits the message until it
receives an ACK message or the times of retransmission reach the threshold (that is,
retransmission increment value).

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run one of the following commands to enter the interface view or the MPLS view.
l To enter the interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel, run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The Srefresh mechanism that is configured in the interface view takes effect only on the
current interface.
l To enter the MPLS view, run:
mpls

The Srefresh mechanism that is configured in the MPLS view takes effect globally. The
Srefresh mechanism in MPLS view is applied to the TE FRR networking. By doing this,
both the usage of network resources and the reliability of the Srefresh mechanism can be
improved.
Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te srefresh

Srefresh is enabled.
By default, Srefresh is disabled on the interface.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
mpls rsvp-te timer retransmission { increment-value increment | retransmit-value
interval } *

The retransmission parameters are set.

By default, increment is set to 1, and interval is set to 500 milliseconds.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.6.5 Enabling Reservation Confirmation Mechanism

Receiving an ResvConf message does not mean that the resource reservation succeeds. It means
that resources are reserved successfully only on the farthest upstream node where this Resv
message arrives. These resources, however, may be preempted by other applications later.

Context
Do as follows on the egress of the TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm

The reservation confirmation mechanism is enabled.

The reservation confirmation is initiated by the receiver of Path message. An object that requires
confirming the reservation is carried along the Resv message sent by the receiver.

NOTE

Receiving ResvConf messages does not mean that the resource reservation succeeds. It means that,
however, resources are reserved successfully only on the farthest upstream node where this Resv message
arrives. These resources may be preempted by other applications later.

----End

3.6.6 Checking the Configuration

After adjusting RSVP signaling parameters, you can view the refresh parameters, the status of
RSVP reservation confirmation and RSVP Hello extension, and the RSVP status timer
configuration.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te [ interface [ interface-type interface-number ] ] command
to check related information about RSVP-TE.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te psb-content [ ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id lsp-id ] command to
check information about RSVP-TE PSB.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te rsb-content [ ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id lsp-id ] command to
check information about RSVP-TE RSB.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics { global | interface [ interface-type interface-
number ] } command to check RSVP-TE statistics.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Example
If the configurations succeed, run the preceding commands and you can view the following
information:

l Refresh parameters of the interface

l Confirmation of the resource reservation, the state of the Hello extension, and the
configurations of RSVP-TE status timers.

3.7 Configuring RSVP Authentication

RSVP authentication prevents unauthorized nodes from setting up RSVP neighbor relationships
with the local node and prevents spoofing of forged packets.

3.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring RSVP authentication, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
RSVP key authentication prevents an unauthorized node from setting up RSVP neighbor
relationships with the local node or generating forged packets to attack the local node.

RSVP key authentication prevents the following unauthorized means of setting up RSVP
neighbor relationships, protecting the local node from attacks (such as malicious reservation of
high bandwidth):

l An unauthorized node attempts to set up a neighbor relationship with the local node.
l A remote node generates and sends forged RSVP messages to set up a neighbor relationship
with the local node.

The message window function and the handshake function, together with RSVP key
authentication, prevent anti-replay attacks or authentication interruption between RSVP
neighbors resulted from RSVP message mis-sequence during network congestion.

The RSVP authentication lifetime is configured, preventing unceasing RSVP authentication. In

the situation where no CR-LSP exists between RSVP neighbors, the neighbor relationship is
kept Up until the RSVP authentication lifetime expires.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring RSVP authentication, complete the following task:

l Configuring an RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure RSVP authentication, you need the following data.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

1 RSVP authentication key

2 (Optional) Local password used in handshake authentication

3 (Optional) RSVP message window size (being 1 by default)

3.7.2 Configuring RSVP Key Authentication

RSVP key authentication is performed on interfaces of two RSVP neighbors. The keys
configured on the interfaces of the RSVP neighbors must be the same; otherwise, RSVP
authentication fails and the received RSVP packets are discarded.

Context
RSVP authentication uses authentication objects in RSVP messages to authenticate the RSVP
messages, preventing malicious attacks initiated by the modified or forged RSVP messages and
improving the network reliability and security.

The RSVP key authentication is configured either in the interface view or the MPLS RSVP-TE
neighbor view:
l In the interface view, RSVP key authentication configured is performed between directly-
connected nodes.
l In the MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view, the RSVP key authentication is performed between
neighboring nodes, which is recommended.

HMAC-MD5 or keychain authentication is enabled by configuring one of the following optional

parameters:
l cipher: configures HMAC-MD5 authentication with keys displayed in cipher text.
l plain: configures HMAC-MD5 authentication with keys displayed in plaintext.
l keychain: configures keychain authentication by using a globally configured keychain.
NOTE

RSVP keychain authenticate only support hmac-md5 algorithm.

NOTE

Characters ^#^# and $@$@ are used to identify passwords with variable lengths. Characters ^#^# are the
prefix and suffix of a new password, and characters $@$@ are the prefix and suffix of an old password.
Neither of them can be both configured at the beginning and end of a plain text password.

Procedure
l Configure RSVP key authentication in the interface view.

Do as follows on each interface between two directly-connected nodes:

NOTE

The configurations must be complete on either of the two directly-connected interfaces within a
period of time three times the interval at which a Path Refresh message is sent; otherwise, the RSVP
session goes Down.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the MPLS TE link interface is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te authentication { { { cipher | plain } auth-key } | keychain
keychain-name }

The authentication key is configured.

RSVP key authentication configured in the interface view takes effect only on the
current interface and has the lowest preference.
l Configure RSVP key authentication in the MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view.

Do as follows on each neighboring node:

NOTE

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls rsvp-te peer ip-address

The MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view is displayed.

– When ip-address is specified as an interface address but not the LSR ID of the
RSVP neighbor, key authentication is based on this neighbor's interface address.
This means that RSVP key authentication takes effect only on the specified
interface of the neighbor, providing high security. In this case, RSVP key
authentication has the highest preference.
– When ip-address is specified as an address equal to the LSR ID of the RSVP
neighbor, key authentication is based on the neighbor's LSR ID. This means that
RSVP key authentication takes effect on all interfaces of the neighbor. In this case,
this RSVP key authentication has the higher preference than that configured in the
interface view, but has the lower preference than that configured based on the
neighbor interface address.
3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te authentication { { { cipher | plain } auth-key } | keychain
keychain-name }

The authentication key is configured.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.7.3 (Optional) Configuring the RSVP Authentication Lifetime

By setting the RSVP authentication lifetime, you enable a device to retain an RSVP neighbor
relationship for a specified period of time though no CR-LSP exists between the RSVP
neighbors.

Context
RSVP neighbors to remain the neighbor relationship when no CR-LSP exists between them until
the RSVP authentication lifetime expires. Configuring the RSVP authentication time does not
affect the existing CR-LSPs.

Do as follows on each node along the tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run either of the following commands to enter the interface view or the MPLS RSVP-TE
neighbor view:
l To enter the interface view of an MPLS TE tunnel, run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The RSVP authentication lifetime that is configured in the interface view takes effect only
on the current interface.
l To enter the MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view, run:
mpls rsvp-te peer ip-address

– If ip-address is specified as an interface address but not the LSR ID of the RSVP
neighbor, the RSVP authentication lifetime takes effect only on the interface.
– If ip-address is specified as an address equal to the LSR ID, the RSVP authentication
lifetime takes effect on the entire device.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te authentication lifetime lifetime

The RSVP authentication lifetime is set.

lifetime is in the format of HH:MM:SS. The value ranges from 00:00:01 to 23:59:59. By default,
the time is 00:30:00, that is, 30 minutes.

----End

3.7.4 (Optional) Configuring the Handshake Function

RSVP key authentication is the prerequisite for configuring the RSVP handshake function.

Context
Do as follows on each node along a tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run either of the following commands to enter the interface view or the MPLS RSVP-TE
neighbor view:
l To enter the interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel, run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The handshake function that is configured in the interface view takes effect only on the
current interface.
l To enter the MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view, run:
mpls rsvp-te peer ip-address

– When ip-address is specified as an interface address but not the LSR ID of the RSVP
neighbor, the handshake function is configured based on the neighbor interface address.
In this case, the handshake function takes effect only on the interface.
– When ip-address is specified as an address equal to the LSR ID of the neighbor, the
handshake function is configured based on the neighbor LSR ID. In this case, the
handshake function takes effect on the entire device.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake local-secret

The handshake function is configured.

As local-secret is meaningful only on the local side, different values of local-secret can be set
on a device and its neighbor.

The handshake function helps a device to establish an RSVP neighbor relationship with its
neighbor. If a device receives RSVP messages from a neighbor, with which the device has not
established an RSVP authentication relationship, the device will send Challenge messages
carrying local-secret to this neighbor. After receiving the Challenge messages, the neighbor
returns Response messages carrying local-secret the same as that in the Challenge messages.
After receiving the Response messages, the local end checks local-secret carried in the Response
messages. If local-secret in the Response messages is the same as the local set configured local-
secret, the device determines to establish an RSVP authentication relationship with its neighbor.

NOTE

If you run the mpls rsvp-te authentication lifetime command after configuring the handshake function,
note that the RSVP authentication lifetime must be greater than the interval for sending RSVP refresh
messages.
If the RSVP authentication lifetime is smaller than the interval for sending RSVP refresh messages, the
RSVP authentication relationship may be deleted because no RSVP refresh message is received within the
RSVP authentication lifetime. In such a case, after the next RSVP refresh message is received, the
handshake operation is triggered. Repeated handshake operations may cause RSVP tunnels unable to be
set up or cause RSVP tunnels to be deleted.

----End

3.7.5 (Optional) Configuring the Message Window Function

The message window function is configured to prevent mis-sequence of RSVP messages.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
The default window size is 1, which means that a device saves only the largest sequence number
of the RSVP message from neighbors.

When window-size is larger than 1, it means that a device accepts several valid sequence
numbers.

Do as follows on each node along a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

The message window function that is configured in the interface view takes effect only on
the current interface.
l To enter the MPLS RSVP-TE neighbor view, run:
mpls rsvp-te peer ip-address

– When ip-address is specified as an interface address but not the LSR ID of an RSVP
neighbor, the message window function is configured based on the neighbor interface
address. In this case, the handshake function takes effect only on the interface.
– When ip-address is specified as an address equal to the LSR ID of the RSVP neighbor,
the message window function is configured based on the neighbor LSR ID. In this case,
the message window function takes effect on the entire device.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te authentication window-size window-size

The message window function is configured.

window-size is the number of valid sequence numbers carried in RSVP messages that a device
can save.

RSVP Authentication must be configured before the message window function is configured.

NOTE

If RSVP is enabled on an Eth-Trunk interface or an IP-Trunk interface, only one neighbor relationship is
established on the trunk link between RSVP neighbors. Therefore, any member interface of the trunk
interface receives RSVP messages in a random order, resulting in RSVP message mis-sequence.
Configuring RSVP message window size prevents RSVP message mis-sequence.
The window size larger than 32 is recommended. If the window size is set too small, the RSVP packets
are discarded because the sequence number is beyond the range of the window size, causing an RSVP
neighbor relationship to be terminated.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.7.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of RSVP key authentication, you can view information about RSVP-TE
of a physical outgoing interface.

Prerequisite
The configurations of RSVP key authentication are complete.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mpls rsvp-te peer [ interface interface-type interface-number ] command to
view information about the RSVP neighbor on an RSVP-TE-enabled interface.

----End

Example
After the configurations are successful, run the display mpls rsvp-te peer command on an
interface, and you can view that the number of RSBs in the RSVP-TE neighbor information is
not zero.

3.8 Adjusting the Path of CR-LSP

You can adjust and configure the method of calculating CR-LSPs.

3.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before adjusting the path calculation method of CR-LSPs, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
CSPF uses the TEDB and constraints to calculate appropriate paths and establishes CR-LSPs
through the signaling protocol. MPLS TE provides many methods to affect CSPF computation
to adjust the CR-LSP path, including the following modes:

l Tie-breaking
CSPF calculates only a shortest path to reach the tunnel destination. During the path
computation, if there are several paths with the same metric, the device select one of them.
Tie-breaking methods for selecting the path are as follows:
– Most-fill: selects a link with the largest ratio of the used bandwidth to the maximum
reservable bandwidth. This method ensures that bandwidth resources are used
effectively.
– Least-fill: selects the link with the smallest ratio of the used bandwidth to the maximum
reservable bandwidth. This method ensures that links use bandwidth resources evenly.
– Random: selects the link at random. This method can distribute LSPs evenly over links
regardless of the bandwidth.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

Tie-breaking selects the link based on bandwidth ratio. If the ratios are the same, such as no reservable
bandwidth or the equal bandwidth is used, the link that is found firstly is selected, even if least-fill
or most-fill is configured.
l Route pinning
A successfully-established CR-LSP does not vary with the route change. This is called
route pinning.
l Administrative group and affinity property
The affinity property of the MPLS TE tunnel determines the links used by the tunnel. The
affinity property cooperates with link administrative group to determine which links the
tunnel uses.
l SRLG
A shared risk link group (SRLG) is a set of links which are likely to fail concurrently due
to sharing a physical resource. Links in the group have a shared risk. That is, if one of the
links fails, other links in the group may fail too.
In MPLS TE, SRLG is a feature that enhances the path reliability for hot-standby tunnel
or the TE FRR tunnel. The two or more links can have a common risk when they share
common physical resource. For example, the sub-interfaces share the risk with their main
interface since the sub-interface definitely goes down when its main interface goes down.
If the backup or bypass tunnel goes through a link which shares a same risk with the primary
tunnel, the probability of backup tunnel going down along with the primary tunnel is high.
l Hop limit
Hop limit is a rule for path selection for setting up a CR-LSP. It limits the number of hops
that a CR-LSP allows.
l Re-optimization
Dynamically optimizing a CR-LSP is to periodically recompute routes for the CR-LSP. If
the route in recomputation is better than the route in use, then a new CR-LSP is established
according to the recomputed route. Meanwhile, services are switched from the old CR-LSP
to the new CR-LSP, and the old one is deleted.

Pre-configuration Tasks
The configuration tasks described in this section are some special configurations for CSPF in
MPLS TE. Before performing these configuration tasks, you need to know their influences on
the system.

Before adjusting the selection of the CR-LSP, complete the following task:

l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To adjust the selection of the CR-LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Tie-breaking policy for the node and the tunnel

2 Administrative group of links and affinity property of tunnels

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

3 Re-optimization interval of CR-LSP

4 SRLG number, SRLG path calculation mode (preferred or strict)

3.8.2 Configuring Administrative Group and Affinity Property

The configuration of the administrative group affects only LSPs to be set up; the configuration
of the affinity property affects established LSPs by recalculating the paths.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view of the MPLS-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te link administrative group value

The administrative group of the MPLS TE link is configured.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls te affinity property properties [ mask mask-value ] [ best-effort |
secondary ]

The affinity for the tunnel is configured.

By default, the values of administrative group, affinity property, and mask are all 0x0.
Step 7 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Follow-up Procedure
The modification of administrative group takes effect only on LSPs that are established after
modification.
After the modified affinity property is committed, the established LSP in this tunnel may be
affected and the system recalculates the path for the TE tunnel.

3.8.3 Configuring SRLG

In the networking scenario where the hot standby CR-LSP is set up or TE FRR is enabled, you
need to configure the SRLG attribute on the outgoing tunnel interface of the ingress and the
other member links of the SRLG to which the outgoing interface belongs.

Context
Configuring SRLG includes:
l Configuring SRLG for the link
l Configuring SRLG path calculation mode for the tunnel

Procedure
l Configuring SRLG for the link
Do as follows on the links which are in the same SRLG.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the MPLS-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te srlg srlg-number

The interface is configured as an SRLG member.

In application scenario of the hot-standby tunnel or the TE FRR tunnel, you just need
to configure SRLG on the out interface of the ingress node and on anyone out interface
of the links which are in the same SRLG as the protected interface(s).
l Configuring SRLG path calculation mode for the tunnel
Do as follows on the ingress node of the hot-standby tunnel or the TE FRR tunnel.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te srlg path-calculation [ preferred | strict ]

The SRLG path calculation mode is configured.

NOTE

l If you specify the strict keyword, the CSPF always considers the SRLG as a constraint
when calculating the path for the backup CR-LSP or the hot-standby CR-LSP.
l If you specify the preferred keyword, CSPF tries to calculate the path which avoids the
links in the same SRLG as the protected interface(s); if the calculation fails, CSPF does
not consider the SRLG as a constraint anymore.

----End

3.8.4 Configuring CR-LSP Hop Limit

Similar to the administrative group and the affinity property, the hop limit is a condition for CR-
LSP path selection and is used to specify the number of hops along a CR-LSP to be set up.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te hop-limit hop-limit-value [ best-effort | secondary ]

The number of hops along the CR-LSP is set.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.8.5 Configuring Metrics for Path Calculation

You can configure the metric type that is used for setting up a tunnel.

Procedure
l Specifying the metric type used by the tunnel
Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:
1. Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te path metric-type { igp | te }

The metric type for path computation is configured.

4. Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the tunnel is committed.

5. Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

6. (Optional) Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

7. (Optional) Run:
mpls te path metric-type { igp | te }

The path metric type used by the tunnel during route selection is specified.

If the mpls te path metric-type command is not run in the tunnel interface view, the
metric type in the MPLS view is adopted; otherwise, the metric type in the tunnel
interface view is used.

By default, path metric type used by the tunnel during route selection is TE.
l (Optional) Configuring the TE metric value of the path

If the metric type of a specified tunnel is TE, you can modify the TE metric value of the
path on the outgoing interface of the ingress and the transit node through the following
configurations:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the MPLS-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te metric value

The TE metric value of the path is configured.

By default, the path uses the IGP metric value as the TE metric value.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.8.6 Configuring Tie-Breaking of CSPF

You can configure the CSPF tie-breaking function to select a path from multiple paths with the
same weight value.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te tie-breaking { least-fill | most-fill | random }

CR-LSP tie-breaking policy for the LSR is configured.

The default tie-breaking policy is random.
Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls te tie-breaking { least-fill | most-fill | random }

The CR-LSP tie-breaking policy for current tunnel is configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

The tunnel preferentially takes the tie-breaking policy configured in its tunnel interface view. If
the tie-breaking policy is not configured in the tunnel interface view, the configuration in the
MPLS view is adopted.

----End

3.8.7 Configuring Failed Link Timer

By configuring a failed-link timer, you can prevent a failed link from repeatedly participating
in the CSPF calculation.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
CSPF uses a locally-maintained traffic-engineering database (TEDB) to calculate the shortest
path to the destination address. Then, the signaling protocol applies for and reserves resources
for the path. In the case of a link on a network is faulty, if the routing protocol fails to notify
CSPF of updating the TEDB in time, this may cause the path calculated by CSPF to contain the
faulty link.

As a result, the control packets, such as RSVP Path messages, of a signaling protocol are
discarded on the faulty link. Then, the signaling protocol returns an error message to the upstream
node. Receiving the link error message on the upstream node triggers CSPF to recalculate a path.
The path recalculated by CSPF and returned to the signaling protocol still contains the faulty
link because the TEDB is not updated. The control packets of the signaling protocol are still
discarded and the signaling protocol returns an error message to trigger CSPF to recalculate a
path. The procedure repeats until the TEDB is updated.

To avoid the preceding situation, when the signaling protocol returns an error message to notify
CSPF of a link failure, CSPF sets the status of the faulty link to INACTIVE and enables a failed
link timer. Then, CSPF does not use the faulty link in path calculation until CSPF receives a
TEDB update event or the failed link timer expires.

Before the failed link timer expires, if a TEDB update event is received, CSPF deletes the failed
link timer.

Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te cspf timer failed-link interval

The failed link timer is configured.

By default, the failed link timer is set to 10 seconds.

The failed link timer is a local configuration. If the failed link timers of nodes are set to different
values, a failed link that is in ACTIVE state on one node may be in INACTIVE state on other
nodes.

----End

3.8.8 Configuring Loop Detection

By configuring the loop detection function, you can prevent loops.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
In the loop detection mechanism, a maximum number of 32 hops are allowed on an LSP. If
information about the local LSR is recorded in the path information table, or the number of hops
on the path exceeds 32, this indicates that a loop occurs and the LSP fails to be set up.
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te loop-detection

The loop detection on tunnel creation is enabled.

By default, loop detection is disabled.
Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.8.9 Configuring Route Pinning

By configuring the route pinning function, you can use the path that is originally selected, rather
than another eligible path, to set up a CR-LSP.

Context
By default, route pinning is disabled.

NOTE

If route pinning is enabled, the MPLS TE re-optimization cannot be used at the same time.

Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te record-route [ label ]

Route record and label record are enabled.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te route-pinning

Route pinning is enabled.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.8.10 Checking the Configuration

After the adjustment of CR-LSP path selection, you can view the status of the CSPF tie-breaking
function, status of the route pinning function, interval for optimizing a CR-LSP, and affinity
property and its mask.

Prerequisite
All configurations of adjusting the patch for CR-LSP are complete.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
information about the tunnel interface.

----End

Example
If the configuration is successful, run the preceding command and you can view the following
items:

l Tie-breaking policy
l If routing pinning is enabled, the status is displayed as "Enabled"
l If re-optimization is enabled, the status is displayed as "Enabled" and the interval is also
displayed
l Affinity property and its mask

3.9 Adjusting the Establishment of MPLS TE Tunnels

By configuring multiple attributes of an MPLS TE tunnel, you can adjust the parameters during
the establishment of the MPLS TE tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before adjusting the establishment of an MPLS TE tunnel, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
During the establishment of an MPLS TE tunnel, specific configurations are required in the
practical application. This section describes the special configuration.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Note that tasks introduced in this section are of special configuration in MPLS TE. Before
performing these configuration tasks, you must know their influences on the system.
Before adjusting the establishment of the MPLS TE tunnel, complete the following task:
l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To adjust the establishment of the MPLS TE tunnel, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Number of attempts to reestablish a tunnel and the reestablishment interval

2 Setup priority and holding priority of tunnels

3.9.2 Configuring the Tunnel Priority

In the process of establishing a CR-LSP, if no path with the required bandwidth exists, you can
perform bandwidth preemption according to setup priorities and holding priorities.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te priority setup-priority [ hold-priority ]

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The priority for the tunnel is configured.

Both the setup priority and the holding priority range from 0 to 7. The smaller the value is, the
higher the priority is.
By default, both the setup priority and the holding priority are 7. When only the setup priority
is to be configured, ensure that the setup priority must be identical with the holding priority.

NOTE

The value of the setup priority must not be less than that of the holding priority. That is, the setup priority
should not be higher than the holding priority.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.9.3 Configuring Re-optimization for CR-LSP

By configuring the tunnel re-optimization function, you can periodically recompute routes for
a CR-LSP. If the recomputed routes are better than the routes in use, a new CR-LSP is then
established according to the recomputed routes. In addition, services are switched to the new
CR-LSP, and the previous CR-LSP is deleted.

Context
NOTE

l If the re-optimization is enabled, the route pinning cannot be used at the same time.
l The CR-LSP re-optimization cannot be configured when the resource reservation style is FF.

Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te reoptimization [ frequency interval ]

Periodic re-optimization is enabled.

By default, re-optimization is disabled. The default periodic re-optimization interval is 3600
seconds.
Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 5 Run:
return

Back to the user view.

Step 6 (Optional) Run:

mpls te reoptimization

The TE tunnel is re-optimized immediately.

After configuring the timing re-optimization in the tunnel view, return to the user view and run
the mpls te reoptimization command to re-optimize the optimized tunnels immediately. Once
the re-optimization is performed, the timing re-optimization timer is reset and count time again.

----End

3.9.4 Configuring Tunnel Reestablishment Parameters

By configuring the tunnel reestablishment function, you can periodically recompute the route
for a CR-LSP. If the route in recomputation is better than the route in use, a new CR-LSP is then
established according to the recomputed route. In addition, services are switched to the new CR-
LSP, and the previous CR-LSP is deleted.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te retry times

The number of attempts to re-establish a tunnel is specified.

By default, the creation retry times is 5.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te timer retry interval

The interval for re-establishing a tunnel is specified.

By default, the interval for re-establishing a tunnel is 30 seconds.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

If the establishment of a tunnel fails, the system attempts to reestablish the tunnel within the set
interval and the maximum number of attempts is the set reestablishment times.

----End

3.9.5 Configuring Route Record and Label Record

By configuring route record and label record, you can determine whether to record routes and
labels during the establishment of an RSVP-TE tunnel.

Context
By default, routes and labels are not recorded.

Do as follows on the ingress of the CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te record-route [ label ]

The route and label are recorded when establishing the tunnel.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.9.6 Configuring the RSVP Signaling Delay-Trigger Function

In the case that a fault occurs on an MPLS network, a great number of RSVP CR-LSPs need to
be reestablished. This causes consumption of a large number of system resources. By configuring
the delay for triggering the RSVP signaling, you can reduce the consumption of system resources
when establishing an RSVP CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on each node on which multiple RSVP CR-LSPs need to be reestablished:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te signaling-delay-trigger enable

The RSVP signaling delay-trigger function is enabled.

By default, the RSVP signaling delay-trigger function is not enabled.

----End

3.9.7 Checking the Configuration

After adjusting the establishment of an MPLS TE tunnel, you can view the TE tunnel attributes.

Prerequisite
All configurations of adjusting the establishment of an MPLS TE tunnel are complete.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to view
information about the tunnel interface.

----End

Example
If the configurations are successful, run the preceding commands, and you can view the
following items:

l The route record and label record of the tunnel are enabled.
l The times and interval of tunnel reestablishment attempts are displayed.
l The tunnel setup priority and holding priority are displayed.

3.10 Adjusting the Traffic Forwarding of an MPLS TE

Tunnel
By adjusting the forwarding of MPLS TE traffic, you can modify the path along which IP traffic
or MPLS traffic is transmitted, or limit the types of traffic that can be transmitted along a TE
tunnel.

3.10.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before adjusting the forwarding of MPLS TE traffic, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Applicable Environment
In MPLS TE, traffic forwarding is affected by the configurations that changes the path through
which IP traffic or MPLS traffic passes or the configuration that can limit traffic types of the TE
tunnel.
This section describes several measures to adjust traffic forwarding in MPLS TE.

Pre-configuration Tasks
The configuration described in this section should be used together with CSPF and the dynamic
signaling protocol (such as RSVP-TE).
Before adjusting the traffic forwarding, complete the following task:
l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To adjust the traffic forwarding, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Number for TE tunnel interface

2 TE metric of the MPLS TE link

3 IGP metric of the TE tunnel

3.10.2 Configuring IGP Shortcut

By configuring IGP shortcut, you can prevent a route to an LSP from being advertised to
neighbors. In this manner, other nodes cannot use this LSP.

Context
NOTE

The IGP shortcut and the Forwarding Adjacency cannot be used together.

Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te igp shortcut [ isis | ospf ]

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The IGP shortcut is configured.

NOTE

By default, the IGP shortcut is not configured.

If the IGP type is not specified when the IGP shortcut is configured, both IS-IS and OSPF are supported
by default.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te igp metric { absolute | relative } value

The IGP metric value for the tunnel is configured.

By default, the metric value used by the TE tunnel is the same as that of the IGP.
IS-IS does not support the relative metric.
You can specify a metric value used by the TE tunnel when path is calculated in the IGP shortcut
feature.
l If the absolute metric is used, the TE tunnel is equal to the configured metric value.
l If the relative metric is used, the TE tunnel is equal to the sum of the metric value of the
corresponding IGP path and relative metric value.
Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current TE tunnel configuration is committed.

Step 6 For IS-IS, run:
isis enable [ process-id ]

IS-IS is enabled on the tunnel interface.

Step 7 For OSPF, run the following commands in sequence.
l Run the quit command to return to the system view.
l Run the ospf [ process-id ] command to enter the OSPF view.
l Run the enable traffic-adjustment command to configure OSPF IGP shortcut.

----End

3.10.3 Configuring Forwarding Adjacency

By configuring the forwarding adjacency, you can advertise a route of an LSP to neighbors. In
this manner, other nodes can use this LSP.

Context
The routing protocol performs bidirectional detection on a link. When using the forwarding
adjacency to advertise LSP links to other nodes, configure another tunnel for transferring data
packets in the reverse direction. Then, enable the forwarding adjacency on these two tunnels.

NOTE

By default, the forwarding adjacency is disabled.

If the Forwarding Adjacency is used, then the IGP shortcut cannot be used at the same time.

Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te igp advertise [ hold-time interval ]

The forwarding adjacency is enabled.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te igp metric { absolute | relative } value

The IGP metric value for the tunnel is configured.

NOTE

IS-IS does not support relative metric.

The IGP metric value should be set properly to ensure that the LSP is advertised and used correctly. For
example, the metric of a TE tunnel should be less than that of IGP routes to ensure that the TE tunnel is
used as a route link.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

Step 6 For IS-IS, run:
isis enable [ process-id ]

The IS-IS process on the tunnel interface is enabled.

Step 7 For OSPF, run one of the following commands.
l Run the quit command to return to the system view.
l Run the ospf [ process-id ] command to enter the OSPF view.
l Run the enable traffic-adjustment advertise command to enable the forwarding adjacency.

----End

3.10.4 Configuring Switching Delay and Deletion Delay

To ensure that the original CR-LSP can be deleted only after a new CR-LSP is set up, you need
to configure the switching delay and the deletion delay, which avoids traffic interruption.

Context
MPLS TE adopts a make-before-break mechanism. When attributes of an MPLS TE tunnel such
as bandwidth and path change, a new CR-LSP with new attributes, also called Modified LSP,
must be established. To prevent data loss during traffic switching, the new CR-LSP must be
established before the original CR-LSP is torn down. Through the make-before-break
mechanism, the system does not need to calculate the bandwidth to be reserved for the new CR-
LSP. That is, the new CR-LSP shares the bandwidth with the original CR-LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

In practical applications, if the upstream nodes are not as busy as the downstream nodes, the
original CR-LSP may be deleted in advance, causing temporary traffic interruption.

To avoid this problem, you can configure the switch delay and deletion delay on the ingress of
the tunnel.

Do as follows on the ingress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te switch-delay switch-time delete-delay delete-time

The switching delay and deletion delay are configured.

By default, the switching delay is 5 seconds and the deletion delay is 7 seconds.

----End

3.11 Adjusting Flooding Threshold of Bandwidth Change

By adjusting the flooding threshold of the bandwidth change, you can suppress the frequency
of TEDB update and flooding, which minimizes network resource consumption.

3.11.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before adjusting the flooding threshold of the bandwidth change, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
To form a uniform TE database in an IGP domain, OSPF-TE and ISIS-TE need to be enabled
to update and flood information about the traffic engineering database (TEDB) when the
remaining bandwidth changes on the MPLS interface.

When a number of tunnels that need reservable bandwidth are set up on a node, the system
frequently updates and floods information about the TEDB. For example, suppose that the
bandwidth of a certain link is 100 Mbit/s. When 100 TE tunnels whose bandwidth is 1 Mbit/s
are set up, the flooding is performed for 100 times.

The system provides the following mechanism to suppress the frequency of TEDB update and
flooding.
l When the ratio of the reserved bandwidth for an MPLS TE tunnel on a link to the remaining
bandwidth of the link in the TEDB is equal to or greater than the set threshold (that is, flood

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

threshold of the bandwidth), OSPF TE and IS-IS TE flood the link information to all the
nodes within the domain and update the TEDB.
l When the ratio of the released bandwidth of the MPLS TE tunnel on a link to the remaining
bandwidth of the link in the TEDB is equal to or greater than the set threshold, OSPF TE
and IS-IS TE flood the link information to all the nodes within the domain and update the
TEDB.
By default, the flood threshold is 10%. Its value can be modified through command lines.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before adjusting the flood threshold of the bandwidth, complete the following task:
l Configuring RSVP-TE tunnel

Data Preparation
To adjust the flood threshold of the bandwidth, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Flood threshold of the bandwidth

3.11.2 Configuring Flooding Threshold

The bandwidth flooding threshold indicates the ratio of the link bandwidth occupied or released
by a TE tunnel to the link bandwidth remained in the TEDB.

Context
The bandwidth flooding threshold indicates the ratio of the link bandwidth occupied or released
by a TE tunnel to the link bandwidth remained in the TEDB.
If the link bandwidth changes little, bandwidth flooding wastes network resources. For example,
if link bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s and 100 TE tunnels (with bandwidth as 1 Mbit/s) are created
along this link, bandwidth flooding need be performed for 100 times.
If the flooding threshold is set to 10%, bandwidth flooding is not performed when tunnel 1 to
tunnel 9 are created. When tunnel 10 is created, the bandwidth of tunnel 1 to tunnel 10 (10 Mbit/
s in total) is flooded. Similarly, bandwidth flooding is not performed when tunnel 11 to tunnel
18 are created. When tunnel 19 is created, the bandwidth of tunnel 11 to tunnel 19 is flooded.
Therefore, configuring bandwidth flooding threshold can reduce the times of bandwidth flooding
and hence ensure the efficient use of network resources.
By default, on a link, IGP flood information about this link and CSPF updates the TEDB
accordingly if one of the following conditions is met:
l The ratio of the bandwidth reserved for an MPLS TE tunnel to the bandwidth remained in
the TEDB is equal to or higher than 10%.
l The ratio of the bandwidth released by an MPLS TE tunnel to the bandwidth remained in
the TEDB is equal to or higher than 10%.
Do as follows on the ingress or transit node along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the MPLS-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth change thresholds { down | up } percent

The threshold of bandwidth flooding is set.

The flooding threshold can be set only on the physical interface.

----End

3.12 Configuring Automatic Adjustment of the Tunnel

Bandwidth
By being enabled with the automatic bandwidth adjustment, the system can adjust the bandwidth
of a tunnel automatically according to the actual traffic volume.

3.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring the automatic bandwidth adjustment, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
When the automatic bandwidth adjustment is enabled, the bandwidth of the tunnel can be
automatically adjusted according to traffic.

The system periodically collects the traffic rates of outgoing interfaces on the tunnel and
calculates the average bandwidth of the tunnel within a period of time. The establishment of an
LSP is requested according to the bandwidth constraint of the sampled maximum value of
average bandwidth. After the LSP is set up, the old LSP is torn down through the make-before-
break feature and the traffic is switched to the new LSP.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the bandwidth automatic adjustment, complete the following task:

l Configuring RSVP-TE tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure the automatic adjustment of the tunnel bandwidth, you need the following data.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

No. Data

1 Sampling interval

2 Interval for automatic bandwidth adjustment

3 Allowable maximum bandwidth

4 Allowable minimum bandwidth

3.12.2 Configuring Auto Bandwidth Adjustment

If the automatic bandwidth adjustment is enabled, the CR-LSP re-optimization or route pinning
cannot be configured.

Context
By default, automatic bandwidth adjustment is disabled.
The sampling interval is configured in the MPLS view, and is valid for all MPLS TE tunnels.
The rate of the outgoing interface on an MPLS TE tunnel is recorded at each sampling interval.
The actual average bandwidth allocated to the MPLS TE tunnel in a sampling interval can thus
be obtained.
After automatic bandwidth adjustment is enabled, running the mpls te timer auto-bandwidth
command to configure periodic sampling obtains the average bandwidth of the MPLS TE tunnel
during a sampling interval. The system recalculates an average bandwidth based on sampling
during a sampling interval and uses the bandwidth to establish an MPLS TE tunnel. After the
MPLS TE tunnel is established, traffic switches to the new MPLS TE tunnel, and the original
MPLS TE tunnel is deleted. If the MPLS TE tunnel fails to be established, traffic is still being
transmitted along the original MPLS TE tunnel. The bandwidth will be adjusted after the next
sampling interval expires.
Configuring the parameter threshold controls whether to adjust the bandwidth of an MPLS TE
tunnel.
The system checks whether the difference between the sampled average bandwidth and the actual
bandwidth, if the ratio of the difference to the actual bandwidth is larger than the value of
threshold. If the difference is equal to or larger than the value of threshold, the system
automatically adjusts the bandwidth.
If traffic volume changes frequently on a network but the bandwidth does not need to be adjusted
accordingly, set the value of threshold to a large value.
NOTE

The mpls te auto-bandwidth command cannot be configured together with any of the following commands
on one tunnel interface:
l mpls te reoptimization (tunnel interface view)
l mpls te route-pinning
l mpls te backup
l mpls te resv-style ff
l mpls te bandwidth (tunnel interface view) with the multi-CT specified

Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te timer auto-bandwidth [ interval ]

The automatic bandwidth adjustment is enabled and the sampling interval is specified.

By default, the system automatically adjusts bandwidth every 24 hours and bandwidth range is
not restricted unless interval is specified.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 6 To configure automatic bandwidth adjustment, run one of the following commands.
l Run:
mpls te auto-bandwidth adjustment [ threshold percent ] [ frequency interval ]
[ max-bw max-bandwidth min-bw min-bandwidth ]

The frequency and allowable bandwidth range for adjustment are configured.
l Run:
mpls te auto-bandwidth collect-bw [ frequency interval ] [ max-bw max-bandwidth
min-bw min-bandwidth ]

The frequency and allowable bandwidth range for collection are configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.12.3 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of the automatic bandwidth adjustment, you can view information about
the bandwidth of a TE tunnel.

Prerequisite
All configurations of the automatic adjustment of the tunnel bandwidth are complete.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display current-configuration command to check configuration information about
automatic adjustment of the tunnel bandwidth.

----End

Example
After the configuration is successful, run the display current-configuration command on the
ingress of the tunnel, and you can view the following configuration information about the tunnel.

l Automatically-adjusted frequency
l Minimum bandwidth that can be adjusted
l Maximum bandwidth that can be adjusted

3.13 Configuring the Limit Rate of MPLS TE Traffic

To limit TE tunnel traffic within the bandwidth range that is actually configured, you need to
set a rate limit for the TE tunnel traffic.

3.13.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before setting a limit rate for the TE tunnel traffic, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
For a physical link of a TE tunnel, besides traffic on the TE tunnel, the physical link may bear
MPLS traffic of other TE tunnels, MPLS traffic of other non-CR-LSPs, or even IP traffic
simultaneously. To limit the TE tunnel traffic within a bandwidth range that is actually
configured, you need to set a limit rate for TE tunnel traffic.
After the configuration of the limit rate, TE traffic is limited to a bandwidth range that is actually
configured; otherwise, TE traffic of which the bandwidth is higher than the set bandwidth is
dropped.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the limit rate of MPLS TE traffic, complete the following task:

l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel or Configuring Static MPLS TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure the limit rate of MPLS TE traffic, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Interface number of the TE tunnel on which the traffic rate is to be limited

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.13.2 Configuring the Limit Rate of MPLS TE Traffic

Before setting a limit rate for the TE tunnel traffic, you must configure the bandwidth of the
tunnel interfaces.

Context
NOTE

Before configuring the limit rate of MPLS TE traffic, you need to run the mpls te bandwidth command
on a corresponding tunnel interface. Otherwise, the limit rate of TE traffic is unavailable.

Do as follows on the ingress of the tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te lsp-tp outbound

The TE traffic policing is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

3.13.3 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of a limit rate for the TE tunnel traffic, you can view information about
the TE traffic policing.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the limit rate of MPLS TE traffic function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
information about the tunnel interface.
----End

Example
Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command, and you can view that the CAR policy is
enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.14 Configuring DS-TE Tunnel

By integrating traditional TE tunnels with DiffServ models, DS-TE can provide QoS according
to specific service types.

3.14.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring DS-TE, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
MPLS TE tunnel application may has the following four scenarios:

l One TE tunnel bears all types (such as, video, voice, and data) of non-VPN services.
l One TE tunnel bears different types of services of a VPN.
l One TE tunnel bears different types of different VPN services.
l One TE tunnel bears different types of VPN and non-VPN services.

MPLS TE tunnel without Diff-Serv (Differentiated Services) cannot provide the QoS according
to each traffic type. For example, voice flow and video flow are transmitted over a TE tunnel.
The video data frames may be transmitted more repeatedly than the voice flow. Thus, the video
data requires a higher drop precedence than the voice data. The MPLS TE tunnel, however,
allocates the same drop precedence for voice and video flows irrespective of traffic types.

To prevent service interference in one tunnel, you can set up a TE tunnel for each type of each
VPN or non-VPN service. This scheme may waste resources because multiple tunnels need to
be set up if there are large numbers of VPNs bearing different types of services over the network.

In the above listed scenarios, deployment of DS-TE tunnels is the best scheme. The edge nodes
in the DS-TE area divide the traffic into several classes, and add the class information into the
DSCP field in packets. The internal node chooses a proper PHB (Per Hop Behavior) for the
packet according to the DSCP value.

DS-TE optimizes network resources, classify service types, and reserve resources for different
types of services. One DS-TE tunnel can carry up to 8 types of service.

NOTE

l To configure standard DS-TE tunnel services, you need to configure the ingress and egress to support
HQoS. This, however, is not required on the Non-standard DS-TE tunnel.
l When services of the same type of multiple VPNs are carried on the same CE of the DS-TE tunnel,
you can limit the bandwidth of each type of services for each VPN on the access CE to prevent source
competition among services of the same type of multiple VPNs.
l To prevent non-VPN services and VPN services from completing resources, you can configure DS-
TE to carry VPN services only or configure the bandwidth for non-VPN services in DS-TE.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring DS-TE, you need to complete the following tasks:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Configuring unicast static routes or IGP on each LSR to guarantee the reachability between
LSRs at the network layer
l Configuring the LSR ID on each LSR
l Enabling MPLS in system view and interface view on each LSR
l Enabling MPLS TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in system view and interface view on each LSR
l Enabling simple traffic classification on the interfaces of each LSR.

Data Preparation
To configure DS-TE, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 DS-TE mode

2 Bandwidth constraints model

3 TE-class mapping table

4 Link bandwidth

5 Tunnel interface bandwidth

6 The flow queues bandwidth sharing mode between CTs

7 Mapping between CTs and flow queues

3.14.2 Configuring DS-TE Mode

You can configure the non-IETF mode or the IETF mode for an MPLS TE tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR in a DS-TE domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te ds-te mode { ietf | non-ietf }

The DS-TE mode is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

By default, the non-IETF mode is adopted.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
In the NE80E/40E, the non-IETF mode and the IETF mode can be switched to each other. When
the IETF mode is switched to the Non-IETF mode, part LSPs may be deleted or the interworking
may fail. Therefore, be cautious when using the switch command.

NOTE

When the non-IETF DS-TE mode is switched to the IETF DS-TE mode, the user configurations cannot be
lost or modified; however, when the IETF DS-TE mode is switched to the non-IETF DS-TE mode, the
user configurations that are supported in the non-IETF mode but are not supported in the non-IETF mode
are lost or modified as follows:
l The extended-MAM configured in IETF DS-TE mode is automatically switched to the MAM. which
may cause an interworking problem.
l The interface bandwidth values set for BC2 to BC7 in IETF DS-TE mode are deleted.
l The configured mpls te commit command on the tunnel interface is deleted.

Table 3-1 describes how DS-TE mode are switched.

Table 3-1 DS-TE mode switching

Item Non-IETF --> IETF IETF --> Non-IETF

Change in The bandwidth constraints model The bandwidth constraints model is

the is unchanged. changed as follows:
bandwidth The extended-MAM is changed to the
constraint MAM.
s model
The RDM is unchanged.
The MAM is unchanged.

Change in The bandwidth values of BC0 and Other BC values are reset to zero except
the BC1 are unchanged. values of BC0 and BC1.
bandwidth

TE-class If the TE-class mapping table is The TE-Class mapping table is not
mapping configured, it is applied. applied.
table Otherwise, the default one is l If a TE-class mapping table is
applied. configured, it is not deleted.
NOTE
For information about the default TE- l If no TE-class mapping table is
class mapping table, see Table 3-2. configured, the default one is deleted.

LSP LSPs whose combination of <CT, The following LSPs are deleted:
deletion set-priority> or <CT, hold- l Multi-CT LSPs
priority> is not in the TE-class
mapping table are deleted. l LSPs of single CT from CT2 to CT7

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.14.3 Configuring DS-TE Bandwidth Constraints Model

If preemption for CT bandwidth is enabled, you are recommended to adopt the RDM, which
effectively uses bandwidth. If preemption for CT bandwidth is disabled on a network, you are
recommended to adopt the MAM or the extended-MAM.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR in a DS-TE domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te ds-te bcm { extend-mam | mam | rdm }

The DS-TE bandwidth constraints model is configured.

By default, the DS-TE bandwidth constraints model is the RDM.

The DS-TE non-IETF mode does not support the extended-MAM.

----End

3.14.4 (Optional) Configuring TE-Class Mapping Table

You are recommended to configure the same TE class mapping table in an entire DS-TE domain.
Otherwise, LSPs may be incorrectly set up.

Context
This configuration procedure is unnecessary to the non-IETF DS-TE.

For IETF DS-TE, it is recommended that the TE-class mapping tables applied to the entire DS-
TE domain are the same. Otherwise, Some LSPs may not be set up correctly.

Do as follows on each LSR of a DS-TE domain in DS-TE IETF mode:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
te-class-mapping

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

A TE-class mapping table is configured and the TE-Class mapping table view is displayed.

Step 3 Run one or multiple commands as follows to configured TE-Classes:

l To configure TE-Class0, run:

te-class 0 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class1, run:

te-class 1 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class2, run:

te-class 2 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class3, run:

te-class 3 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class4, run:

te-class 4 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class5, run:

te-class 5 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class6, run:

te-class 6 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

l To configure TE-Class7, run:

te-class 7 class-type { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority [ description description-info ]

When configuring a TE-class mapping table, pay attention to the following information:

l Each DS-TE node has one TE-class mapping table at most.

l TE-class is a global concept, that is , TE-class is applied to all DS-TE tunnels of the LSR.
l A TE-class indicates the combination of a Class-Type (CT) and priority. The priority
indicates the priority for CR-LSP preemption rather than the value of the EXP field in the
MPLS packet header. The value of the preemption priority ranges from 0 to 7. The smaller
the value is, the higher the priority is. A CR-LSP can be set up only when both the combination
of its CT and setup priority (<CT, setup-priority>) and the combination of its CT and holding
priority (<CT, hold-priority>) exist in the TE-class mapping table. For example, suppose the
TE-class mapping table of a certain node contains only TE-Class[0] = <CT0, 6> and TE-
Class[1] = <CT0, 7>. Only the following types of CR-LSPs can be set up successfully:
– Class-Type = CT0, setup-priority = 6, hold-priority = 6
– Class-Type = CT0, setup-priority = 7, hold-priority = 6
– Class-Type = CT0, setup-priority = 7, hold-priority = 7
NOTE
The setup-priority cannot be higher than the hold-priority. Therefore, the LSP , whose Class-Type is
CT0, setup-priority is 6, holding priority is 7, does not exist.
l In the MAM and extended-MAM, the CT of a higher priority can preempt the bandwidth of
CTs of the same type. CTs of different types do not preempt the bandwidth of each other.
l In the RDM, the preemption of bandwidth among CTs is determined by the preemption
priority and the corresponding bandwidth constraint. Assume m and n are preemption
priorities (0<=m<n<=7) and i and j are CT values (0<=i<j<=7).

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

– CTi with priority m can preempt the bandwidth of CTi with priority n or the bandwidth
of CTj with priority n.
– The total bandwidth of CTi is equal to or less than the bandwidth of BCi.
l When the bandwidth of all CTs along an LSP meets the requirements, the preemption can
be performed and the LSP can be set up.

In DS-TE IETF mode, when the TE-class mapping table is not configured, the default TE-class
mapping table is applied. See Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Default TE-class mapping table

TE-Class CT Priority

TE-Class[0] 0 0

TE-Class[1] 1 0

TE-Class[2] 2 0

TE-Class[3] 3 0

TE-Class[4] 0 7

TE-Class[5] 1 7

TE-Class[6] 2 7

TE-Class[7] 3 7

NOTE
After a TE-class is configured, you can run the { te-class0 | te-class1 | te-class2 | te-class3 | te-class4 | te-
class5 | te-class6 | te-class7 } description description-info command to modify the TE-class description.

----End

3.14.5 Configuring Link Bandwidth

By configuring the link bandwidth, you can limit the bandwidth of a DS-TE tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on each outgoing interface along the LSP in a DS-TE domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the outgoing interface of the link is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 3 Run:
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth bw-value

The maximum reservable bandwidth of the link is configured.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te bandwidth { bc0 bc0-bw-value | bc1 bc1-bw-value | bc2 bc2-bw-value | bc3
bc3-bw-value | bc4 bc4-bw-value | bc5 bc5-bw-value | bc6 bc6-bw-value | bc7 bc7-bw-
value }*

The BC bandwidth of the link is configured.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
In different bandwidth constraints models, the relationships between the reservable bandwidth
and the bandwidth of each BC are different.
l In the RDM: max-reservable-bandwidth >= bc0-bw-value >= bc1-bw-value >= bc2-bw-
value >= bc3-bw-value >= bc4-bw-value >= bc5-bw-value >= bc6-bw-value >= bc7-bw-
value
l In the MAM: max-reservable-bandwidth >= bc0-bw-value + bc1-bw-value + bc2-bw-
value + bc3-bw-value + bc4-bw-value + bc5-bw-value + bc6-bw-value + bc7-bw-value
l In the extended-MAM: It is the same as the MAM.
BC is the bandwidth constraint for outgoing interface, while CT bandwidth is the bandwidth of
the class type of DS-TE tunnel. The total bandwidth of BCi (0 <= i <= 7) of an interface is equal
to or greater than the CTi bandwidth of all tunnels passing through this outgoing interface. For
example, three LSPs of CT1 pass through a link and their bandwidth values are x, y, and z
respectively. The bandwidth of BC1 of the link should be equal to or greater than the total
bandwidth of x, y, and z.

3.14.6 Configuring the Tunnel Interface

To set up a DS-TE tunnel, you must create a tunnel interface and configure other tunnel attributes
on the tunnel interface.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface is created and the tunnel interface view is displayed.
Step 3 (Optional) Run:
description text

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The tunnel description information is configured.

Step 4 Run one of the following commands to configure the IP address of the tunnel interface.

l ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]

The IP address of the tunnel interface is configured.

The secondary IP address can be configured on the tunnel interface only when the primary
IP address is configured. ip_address_unnumbered
l ip address unnumbered interface interface-type interface-number

The tunnel interface borrows the IP address of another interface.

To forward traffic, the tunnel interface must be configured with an IP address. Because that an
MPLS TE tunnel is unidirectional, no peer address exists. Therefore, a tunnel interface needs
not to be assigned with an IP address. Instead, the tunnel interface takes the LSR ID of the local
node as its IP address.

Step 5 Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured as the tunnel protocol.

Step 6 Run:
destination ip-address

The LSR ID of the egress is configured as the destination address of the tunnel.

By default, the tunnel is a GRE tunnel. Different tunnels require different destination addresses.
When the tunnel protocol is changed from another protocol to MPLS TE, the preceding
destination address is deleted and a new one needs to be configured.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te tunnel-id tunnel-id

The tunnel ID is configured.

Step 8 Run:
mpls te signal-protocol { cr-static | rsvp-te }

The signaling protocol of the tunnel is configured.

Step 9 (Optional) run:

mpls te priority setup-priority [ hold-priority ]

The priority for the tunnel is configured.

By default, both the setup-priority and the hold-priority are 7. Both the setup-priority and the
hold-priority range from 0 to 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority is.

NOTE
The setup priority should not be higher than the holding priority. When the holding priority is not specified,
it is the same as the setup priority.

Step 10 Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration of the tunnel is committed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

When the MPLS TE parameters are modified each time, you need to run the mpls te commit
command to commit the configuration.

----End

3.14.7 Configuring the Static CR-LSP and the Bandwidth

A static CR-LSP supports eight CTs in standard DS-TE mode and supports CT0 and CT1 in
non-standard DS-TE mode.

Procedure
l Configure the ingress of the static CR-LSP.

Do as follows on the ingress of the static CR-LSP:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
static-cr-lsp ingress { tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number | tunnel-
name } destination destination-address { nexthop next-hop-address |
outgoing-interface interface-type interface-number } out-label out-label
bandwidth { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 } bandwidth

The ingress of the static CR-LSP is configured and its CT and the bandwidth are
specified.

NOTE

l tunnel interface-number is the interface number of the MPLS TE tunnel of the static CR-
LSP.
l The static CR-LSP supports eight CTs in DS-TE IETF mode and supports only CT0 and
CT1 in DS-TE non-IETF mode. That is, the CT of the static CR-LSP in IETF mode can be
whichever of the CT0 to CT7; the static CR-LSP in non-IETF mode can only be CT0 or
CT1.
l The tunnel bandwidth cannot exceed the max-reservable bandwidth of the link.
l tunnel-name must be the same as that in the interface tunnel interface-number command.
The value is a case-sensitive string without blank space or abbreviation. Assume a tunnel
interface is created through the interface tunnel 2/0/0 command. The tunnel name is
Tunnel 2/0/0 and the parameter of the ingress of the static CR-LSP must be Tunnel 2/0/0.
Otherwise, the tunnel is set up incorrectly. This rule is inapplicable to transit LSRs or the
egress.

The static CR-LSP supports the single CT only in DS-TE IETF mode. The static CR-LSP
has the highest priority whose value is zero, and does not support bandwidth preemption.
That is, when a static CR-LSP is being set up, it does not preempt the resources of other
LSPs regardless whether the unreserved bandwidth of its out interface is enough or not. In
addition, after a static CR-LSP is set up, its bandwidth cannot be preempted by other LSPs.

On one node (ingress, transit LSR, or egress) in any Bandwidth Constraints model, the total
bandwidth of CTi is not more than the bandwidth of BCi (0 <= i <= 7). That is, CTi can
use only bandwidth of BCi.

For instance, the bandwidth of BC1 on PE is x. Two static CR-LSPs with the CT1 bandwidth
being y and z respectively are set up on the PE. The total bandwidth of CT1s (y + z) is not
more than the bandwidth of BC1 (x).

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE
If the bandwidth of the MPLS TE tunnel is configured more than 28630 kbit/s, the actual bandwidth
allocation on the MPLS TE tunnel may be not precise. The MPLS TE tunnel, however, can be set
up successfully.
l Configure the transit LSR of the static CR-LSP.
The configuration is unnecessary if the static CR-LSP has only the ingress and egress. When
transit LSRs reside in the static CR-LSP, do as follows on each transit LSR:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
static-cr-lsp transit lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type
interface-number in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-address |
outgoing-interface interface-type interface-number } out-label out-label-
value bandwidth { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 } bandwidth

The transit LSR of the static CR-LSP is configured.

On the transit LSR and egress, tunnel-name cannot be specified as the same as the
name of an existing tunnel on the node. The name of the MPLS TE tunnel interface
associated with the static CR-LSP can be used, such as Tunnel1/0/0.
l Configure the egress of the static CR-LSP.
Do as follows on the egress of the static CR-LSP:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
static-cr-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-
number in-label in-label [ lsrid ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-id ]

The egress of the static CR-LSP is configured.

----End

3.14.8 Configuring the RSVP CR-LSP and Its Bandwidth

When establishing an RSVP CR-LSP and specifying the bandwidth, you need to ensure that the
bandwidth of LSPs of all CTs is not greater than the bandwidth of all BCs.

Procedure
l Configuring IGP-TE
For detailed configurations, see the section Configuring OSPF TE or Configuring IS-IS
TE.
l Configuring CSPF
For detailed configurations, see the section Configuring CSPF.
l Configure the bandwidth of the MPLS TE tunnel
Do as follows on the ingress of an MPLS TE tunnel:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The MPLS TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

3. Run one of the following commands to configure the bandwidth of the MPLS TE
tunnel interface.
– To configure the single CT, run:
mpls te bandwidth { ct0 bw-value [ flow-queue ] | ct1 bw-value [ flow-
queue ] | ct2 bw-value | ct3 bw-value | ct4 bw-value | ct5 bw-value |
ct6 bw-value | ct7 bw-value }

NOTE

l If you specify the name of the flow queue template referenced by the tunnel in this
command, traffic over the tunnel is then scheduled and assigned bandwidth based on
the flow queue template.
l If the flow queue template referenced by the tunnel is not specified, the system
automatically generates the flow queue template referenced by the tunnel according to
the CT and flow queue mapping configured in the ct-flow-mapping view.
– To configure the multi-CT, run
mpls te bandwidth { ct0 bw-value | ct1 bw-value | ct2 bw-value | ct3 bw-
value | ct4 bw-value | ct5 bw-value | ct6 bw-value | ct7 bw-value } *

NOTE

If the flow queue template needs to be referenced when the single CT is configured, configure
the flow queue template first. For detailed configurations of the flow queue template, refer to
the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - QoS.
In tunnel policy, the multiple class type (multi-CT) CR-LSP supports only the VPN tunnel
binding mode rather than the select-sequence mode.
4. Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the tunnel is committed.

On one node in any the Bandwidth Constraints model, the total bandwidth of CTi is not
more than the bandwidth of BCi (0 <= i <= 7) irrespective of. That is, CTi can use only the
bandwidth of BCi.
For instance, the bandwidth of BC1 on a PE is x and two CR-LSPs are set up on the node
with their CT1 bandwidth being y and z respectively. The total bandwidth of CT1 (y + z)
is not more than the bandwidth of BC1 (x).

NOTE
If the bandwidth of the MPLS TE tunnel is configured as more than 28630 kbit/s, the bandwidth
allocation on the MPLS TE tunnel may be not precise. The MPLS TE tunnel, however, can be set
up successfully.
l (Optional) Configure the explicit path of the tunnel.
To specify the path used by the tunnel, do as follows on the ingress of the tunnel:
1. Create and configure the explicit path. See Configuring MPLS-TE Explicit Path.
2. Run:
quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Return to the system view.

3. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The MPLS TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

4. Run:
mpls te path explicit-path path-name

The explicit path used by the tunnel is configured.

5. Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the tunnel is committed.

----End

3.14.9 Configuring Mappings Between CTs and Flow Queues

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a DS-TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
ct-flow-mapping template name

The template of mappings between CTs and flow queues is created and the ct-flow-mapping
view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
map ct ct-number to { cs7 | cs6 | ef | af4 | af3 | af2 | af1 | be } [ pq | wfq |
lpq ]

The mappings between CTs and flow queues are configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

l Support flexible mapping between CTs and flow queues.

l The system supports eight templates of the mappings between CTs and flow queues. Seven templates can
be manually configured; one template is default and you cannot modify the configuration of this default
template.
l By default, the default template is adopted. The default template defines the mappings between CTs and
flow queues as follows:
l Maps CT 0 to be lpq.
l Maps CT 1 to af1 wfq.
l Maps CT 2 to af2 wfq.
l Maps CT 3 to af3 wfq.
l Maps CT 4 to af4 wfq.
l Maps CT 5 to ef pq.
l Maps CT 6 to cs6 pq.
l Maps CT 7 to cs7 pq.
l According to the parameters of a flow queue configured through the map ct ct-number to { cs7 | cs6 | ef |
af4 | af3 | af2 | af1 | be } [ pq | wfq | lpq ] command, the system automatically generates a template applicable
to the DS-TE tunnel.

Step 4 Run:
ct-flow-mapping commit

The mappings between CTs and flow queues defined in the template are committed. Thus, the
mappings can take effect.
Step 5 Run:
quit

Return to the system view from the ct-flow-mapping view.

Step 6 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

NOTE

The interface is the physical interface that is bound to the DS-TE tunnel on the ingress.

Step 7 Run:
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping-name

The template of mappings between CTs and flow queues is applied to the interface.
Step 8 (Optional) Run:
mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared

The interface enabled with DS-TE is configured that CTs do not share the bandwidth of each
other.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

l When the interface enabled with DS-TE is configured to share bandwidths of CTs, it indicates that eight
CTs of a DS-TE tunnel can share the bandwidth of each other. In this manner, the bandwidth of the DS-TE
tunnel is efficiently used. Thus, it is recommended you to adopt the shared attribute by default.
l When CTs can share the bandwidth of each other on the interface enabled with DS-TE, the shaping parameter
of the flow queue parameters is the CIR of SQ, that is, the total bandwidths of CTs.
l When CTs cannot share the bandwidth of each other on the interface enabled with DS-TE, the shaping
parameter of the flow queue parameters is the bandwidth of the CT.
l When an interface supports DS-TE and is selected as the outgoing interface of a tunnel working in Up state,
you need to reset the tunnel to take the modification of the shared or unshared attribute on the interface into
effect.

----End

3.14.10 (Optional) Configuring the Interface Class Queue

Context
Do as follows on the interface at the network side on the ingress of a DS-TE tunnel:

NOTE

l The interface class queue is an interface-specific scheduling policy. You can configure according to the
network scheme.
l It is recommended that traffic of the same service type applies the same queue scheduling mode to the flow
queue and the class queue.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
port-wred port-wred-name

A port WRED object is created and the port WRED view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
color { green | yellow | red } low-limit low-limit-value high-limit high-limit-
value discard-percentage discard-percentage-value

A WRED object for a class queue is configured and the upper limit, the lower limit, and the
discard probability are set for packets of different colors.

NOTE

l If you do not configure a WRED object for a class queue, the system uses the default tail-drop policy.
l You can create multiple port-wred objects to be referenced by class queues as required. The system
provides one default port-wred object. In addition, you can configure a maximum of seven port-wred
objects.

Step 4 Run:
quit

You return to the system view.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
port-queue cos-value { { pq | wfq weight weight-value | lpq} | shaping { shaping-
value | shaping-percentage shaping-percentage-value } | port-wred wred-name } *
outbound

A class queue is configured and a scheduling policy is set for queues of different priorities.
You can configure scheduling parameters for eight class queues on one interface.
If you do not configure a class queue template, the system uses the default class queue template.
The default class queue template contains the following parameters:
l By default, the system performs PQ on the class queues ef, cs6, and cs7.
l The system performs WFQ on the class queues be, af1, af2, af3, and af4. The scheduling
weight is 10:10:10:15:15.
l The default shaping value is the maximum bandwidth of the interface.
l The default discard policy is tail drop.

----End

3.14.11 Checking the Configuration

After a DS-TE tunnel is configured, you can view information about DS-TE and traffic of each
CT on the tunnel interface.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the DS-TE tunnel function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te ds-te { summary | te-class-mapping [ default | config |
verbose ] } command to check information about DS-TE.
l Run display mpls te te-class-tunnel { all | { ct0 | ct1 | ct2 | ct3 | ct4 | ct5 | ct6 | ct7 }
priority priority } command to check TE tunnels associated with the TE-classes.
l Run the display interface tunnel interface-number command to check information about
traffic of each CT on the tunnel interface.
NOTE

Before viewing traffic information about each CT configured for a DS-TE tunnel, run the mpls te
lsp-tp outbound command in the tunnel interface view to limit the rate at which TE traffic is
transmitted.

----End

Example
After the configuration, run the following commands, and you can view the information.
l Run the display mpls te ds-te command on the ingress of the tunnel, and you can view
information about DS-TE.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Run the display mpls te te-class-tunnel command on the ingress of the tunnel, and you
can view TE tunnels associated with the TE-classes.
l Run the display interface tunnel interface-number command on the ingress of the tunnel,
and you can view information about traffic of each CT on the tunnel.

3.15 Configuring MPLS TE FRR

MPLS TE FRR is a local protection technique and is used to protect a CR-LSP against link faults
and node faults. MPLS TE FRR needs to be configured manually.

3.15.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring MPLS TE FRR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
MPLS TE Fast ReRoute (FRR) is a local protection technique.

NOTE

The RSVP-TE tunnel of SE style supports FRR; the static TE tunnel does not support FRR.

Additional bandwidth is occupied because the bypass tunnel used by the FRR needs to be pre-
established. When idle network bandwidth is insufficient, the FRR should be used only for
important nodes or links.

l Supporting board hot pulling-out protection

When the interface board where an outgoing interface of a primary tunnel on a PLR resides
is pulled out, the MPLS TE traffic is swiftly switched to the bypass tunnel. When the
interface board is re-inserted and the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel is available,
MPLS TE traffic is switched back to the primary tunnel. The TE FRR with board hot
pulling-out protection is used to protect the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel on a
PLR.
When board hot pulling-out protection is used, note that the tunnel interface of the primary
tunnel on a PLR, the tunnel interface of the bypass tunnel, and the outgoing interface of
the bypass tunnel must not reside on the interface board to be pulled out. It is recommended
to configure the TE tunnel interfaces of a PLR on the main control board.
NOTE

When the interface where the LSP or CR-LSP resides is deleted, or when the board where the interface
resides is pulled out, the interface goes to the Stale state and becomes a staled interface. If the number
of staled interfaces on a node reaches the maximum specified in the license, the node cannot provide
FRR protection for the primary tunnel in the following cases:
l The undo mpls command is run on the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel.
l The interface board where the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel resides is pulled out or
the interface board fails.
l Supporting FRR during RSVP GR
In the NE80E/40E, the FRR can be performed to reduce the fault duration when the PLR
node, PLR upstream node, MP, or MP downstream node is restarted or the switchover is
performed; meanwhile, the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel of the PLR fails.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

During the RSVP GR, the Down event of the outgoing interface on the tunnel triggers FRR
switchover.
l Not supporting simultaneous failure of multiple nodes
The FRR does not take effect when multiple nodes fail simultaneously. That is, if the FRR
is performed, data is switched from the primary LSP to the bypass LSP. During the period
that data is transmitted on the bypass LSP, the bypass LSP must be in the Up state all the
time. If the bypass LSP goes Down during this period, the protected data cannot be
forwarded through MPLS. Data transmission then is interrupted and the FRR function is
invalidated. Although the bypass LSP goes Up again, it cannot forward data. Data can be
forwarded only after the primary LSP is restored or re-created.

When configuring a bypass LSP, you must specify the link or node protected by the bypass LSP
and ensure that this bypass LSP does not pass through the link or node it protects. Otherwise,
the protection does not take effect.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring MPLS TE fast reroute, complete the following tasks:

l Establishing the primary LSP by using the RSVP-TE signaling protocol

l Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP TE in the MPLS view and physical interface view of the
node along the bypass tunnel (See Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP TE.)
l (Optional) Configuring physical bandwidth of the bypass tunnel (See (Optional)
Configuring Link Bandwidth.)
l Enabling CSPF on the PLR node
l (Optional) Configuring the explicit path of the bypass tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure TE FRR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Protection policy of FRR, that is, a node or a link that is the object to be protected

2 (Optional) Bandwidth of the bypass tunnel

3 (Optional) Scanning interval of TE FRR

3.15.2 Enabling TE Fast Reroute

Before configuring manual TE FRR, you must enable TE FRR.

Context
By default, the TE FRR is disabled.

Do as follows on the ingress node along the primary LSP:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the primary LSP is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te fast-reroute [ bandwidth ]

FRR is enabled.

NOTE

The primary tunnel in a tunnel protection group can be configured with the TE FRR for dual protection.
On the ingress, the tunnel protection group and TE FRR cannot be configured together. Otherwise, neither
the tunnel protection group nor TE FRR takes effect. The protection tunnel in the tunnel protection group,
however, cannot be configured with the TE FRR.
For example, assume Tunnel 1/0/0 and Tunnel 2/0/0 are MPLS TE tunnel interfaces and the ID of Tunnel
2/0/0 is 200. The mpls te protection tunnel 200 and mpls te fast-reroute commands can be run on Tunnel
1/0/0. That is, Tunnel 1/0/0 can be the primary tunnel in the protection group and the TE FRR function.
When the mpls te protection tunnel 200 command is run on Tunnel 1/0/0, the mpls te fast-reroute
command cannot be run on Tunnel 2/0/0.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.15.3 Configuring Bypass Tunnels

To configure MPLS TE FRR, you need to configure a path and the attributes for a bypass tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the PLR node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 To configure the IP address for the bypass tunnel interface, run the following commands as
required.
l Run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]

The IP address of the bypass tunnel interface is configured.

The secondary IP address of the interface can be configured only after the primary IP address
is configured.
l Run:
ip address unnumbered interface

The bypass tunnel interface borrows an IP address from another interface.

NOTE

To forward traffic, the tunnel interface must be configured with an IP address. An MPLS TE tunnel is
unidirectional and no peer address exists. Therefore, a tunnel interface needs not to be assigned with
an IP address. The tunnel interface borrows the loopback interface address that is used as the LSR ID
of the local node.

Step 4 Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is specified as the tunneling protocol.

Step 5 Run:
destination ip-address

The destination address of the bypass tunnel is configured as the LSR ID of the MP node.
Step 6 Run:
mpls te tunnel-id tunnel-id

The ID of the bypass tunnel is configured.

Step 7 (Optional) Run:
mpls te path explicit-path path-name

The explicit path used by the bypass tunnel is configured.

The physical link that the bypass tunnel passes through cannot overlap through which the primary
tunnel passes.
Step 8 (Optional) Run either of the following commands as required:
l mpls te bandwidth { ct0 ct0-bw-value | ct1 ct0-bw-value } [ flow-queue flow-
queue ]

l mpls te bandwidth { { ct0 ct0-bw-value | ct1 ct1-bw-value | ct2 ct2-bw-value |

ct3 ct3-bw-value | ct4 ct4-bw-value | ct5 ct5-bw-value | ct6 ct6-bw-value | ct7
ct7-bw-value } *

The bandwidth of the bypass tunnel is set.

Step 9 Run:
mpls te bypass-tunnel

The bypass tunnel are configured.

NOTE

One tunnel interface cannot serve as the bypass tunnel and backup tunnel at the same time, nor as the bypass
tunnel and the protect tunnel in a protection group. That is, the mpls te bypass-tunnel and mpls te
backup commands cannot be configured on the same interface, and the mpls te bypass-tunnel and mpls
te protection tunnel commands also cannot be configured on the same interface.

Step 10 Run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te protected-interface interface-type interface-number

The interface to be protected by the bypass tunnel is specified.

NOTE

The mpls te protected-interface and mpls te backup commands cannot be run on the same tunnel interface
at the same time.

Step 11 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the bypass tunnel is configured, the route record is enabled.

One bypass tunnel protects up to six physical interfaces. After a tunnel is specified to protect a
physical interface, its corresponding LSP becomes the bypass LSP. The establishment of a
bypass LSP can be triggered when an explicit path on the PLR is configured.

During the FRR period, if the bypass LSP goes Down, the protected data cannot be forwarded
over an MPLS network; thus traffic may be interrupted and the FRR fails. Even after the bypass
LSP goes Up again, traffic cannot be forwarded. Traffic can be forwarded only after the primary
LSP is restored or re-established.

NOTE

l The mpls te fast-reroute command and the mpls te bypass-tunnel command cannot be configured
on the same interface.
l The mpls te reoptimization command and the mpls te bypass-tunnel command cannot be configured
on the same interface.
l If the FRR switching occurs, the data flow is switched from the primary LSP to the bypass LSP. During
the period when the data flow is forwarded through the bypass LSP, the bypass LSP must be in Up
state. Otherwise, the FRR fails.

3.15.4 (Optional) Configuring the Scanning Timer for FRR

By configuring a TE FRR scanning timer, you can search for the eligible LSPs that can function
as bypass LSPs and then bind the optimal LSP to the primary LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the PLR node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te timer fast-reroute [ weight ]

The scanning timer for FRR is configured.

If weight is specified, the system can calculate the scanning interval according to the following
formula:
Scanning interval = Weight x 1000 x 200/Maximum number of RSVP LSPs
If the calculated scanning interval is greater than 1000 milliseconds, it is the actual scanning
interval; otherwise, 1000 ms is the scanning interval.
By default, the interval of the scanning timer is 1000 milliseconds.
After configuring FRR, the PLR performs scheduled scanning to search for LSPs that can serve
as bypass LSPs and binds the optimal bypass LSP to the primary LSP. After the FRR switching,
if the protected LSP is restored or another LSP is established, traffic is switched to the original
LSP or the newly-established LSP.

----End

3.15.5 (Optional) Modifying PSB and RSB Timeout Multiplier

To perform TE FRR during the RSVP GR process, you need to modify the timeout multiplier
of the PSB or RSB.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the tunnel to support the FRR during the RSVP GR:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier number

The timeout multiplier of the path state block (PSB) and reserved state block (RSB) is configured.
The timeout multiplier of the PSB and RSB is recommended to be equal to or greater than five
to avoid the PSB and RSB loss because of large numbers of RSVP LSPs.

----End

3.15.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of MPLS TE FRR, you can view detailed information about a bypass
tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Prerequisite
The configurations of the MPLS TE FRR function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls lsp [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-id lsp-id ] [ verbose ] command
to check information about the primary LSP.
l Run the display mpls lsp attribute { bypass-inuse { inuse | not-exists | exists-not-
used } | bypass-tunnel tunnel-name } command to check information about the bypass
LSP or bypass tunnel.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
details about interfaces on the primary tunnel or bypass tunnel.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel path [ [ tunnel-name ] [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-id
local-lsp-id ] | fast-reroute { local-protection-available | local-protection-inuse } ]
command to check information about paths of the primary tunnel or bypass tunnel.

----End

3.16 Configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR

MPLS TE Auto FRR is a local protection technique and is used to protect a CR-LSP against link
faults and node faults. MPLS TE Auto FRR does not need to be configured manually.

3.16.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
On the network that requires high reliability, the FRR protection is configured to improve the
reliability of the network. If the network topology is complex and multiple links need to be
configured, the configuration procedure is complicated. The Auto FRR can set up a bypass tunnel
automatically to meet the requirements to reduce the workload and improve the network
reliability.

Similar to the common MPLS TE FRR, MPLS TE Auto FRR also supports board hot pulling-
out protection and FRR during RSVP GR. For details, see Configuring MPLS TE FRR.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the Auto FRR, complete the following tasks:

l Establishing the primary LSP by using the RSVP-TE signaling protocol

l Enabling MPLS, MPLS TE and RSVP TE globally and in the physical interface view of
the node along the bypass tunnel (See Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP TE.)
l (Optional) Configuring physical bandwidth of the bypass tunnel (See (Optional)
Configuring Link Bandwidth.)
l Enabling CSPF on the ingress node and the transit node of the primary tunnel

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure the MPLS Auto FRR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Protection policy of the Auto FRR, that is, the link or the node to be protected

2 (Optional) Bandwidth of the bypass tunnel

3 (Optional) Scanning interval of TE FRR

3.16.2 Enabling the TE Auto FRR

Before configuring TE Auto FRR, you must enable TE Auto FRR.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node of the tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te auto-frr

The TE Auto FRR is enabled globally.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The interface view of the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel is displayed.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
mpls te auto-frr { link | node | default }

The TE Auto FRR is enabled on the outgoing interface on the ingress node of the primary tunnel.
By default, after Auto FRR is enabled globally, all the MPLS TE interfaces are automatically
configured with the mpls te auto-frr default command. To disable Auto FRR on some
interfaces, run the undo mpls te auto-frr command on these interfaces. Then, these interfaces
no longer have Auto FRR capability even if Auto FRR is enabled or is to be re-enabled globally.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

By default, the TE Auto FRR is disabled.

NOTE

l If the mpls te auto-frr default command is configured in the interface view, the Auto FRR capability
of the interface is consistent with the global Auto FRR capability.
l After the node protection is enabled, if the topology does not meet the requirement to set up an automatic
bypass tunnel for node protection, the penultimate hop (but not other hops) on the primary tunnel
attempts to set up an automatic bypass tunnel for link protection.

----End

3.16.3 Enabling the TE FRR and Configuring the Auto Bypass

Tunnel Attributes
After TE Auto FRR is enabled, the system automatically sets up a bypass tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node of the primary tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the primary tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te fast-reroute [ bandwidth ]

The TE FRR is enabled.

To guarantee the tunnel bandwidth, you must specify the parameter bandwidth.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
mpls te bypass-attributes bandwidth bandwidth [ priority setup-priority [ hold-
priority ] ]

The attributes of the bypass tunnel are configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

l The bypass tunnel attributes can be configured only after the mpls te fast-reroute bandwidth
command is run on the primary tunnel.
l The bandwidth of the bypass tunnel cannot be greater than the bandwidth of the primary tunnel.
l When the attributes of the automatic bypass tunnel are not configured, by default, the bandwidth of the
automatic bypass tunnel is the same as the bandwidth of the primary tunnel.
l The setup priority of the bypass tunnel cannot be higher than the holding priority. Both priorities cannot
be higher than the priority of the primary tunnel.
l When the bandwidth of the primary tunnel is changed or the FRR is disabled, the attributes of the
bypass tunnel are cleared automatically.
l On one TE tunnel interface, the bandwidth of the bypass tunnel cannot be configured together with the
multi-CT.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the tunnel is committed.

----End

3.16.4 (Optional) Configuring the Scanning Timer for FRR

By configuring a TE FRR scanning timer, you can search for the eligible LSPs that can function
as bypass LSPs and then bind the optimal LSP to the primary LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the PLR node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te timer fast-reroute [ weight ]

The scanning timer for FRR is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

if the protected LSP is restored or another LSP is established, traffic is switched to the original
LSP or the newly-established LSP.

----End

3.16.5 (Optional) Modifying PSB and RSB Timeout Multiplier

To perform TE FRR during the RSVP GR process, you need to modify the timeout multiplier
of the PSB or RSB.

Context
Do as follows on each node along the tunnel to support the FRR during the RSVP GR:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier number

----End

3.16.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of MPLS TE Auto FRR, you can view detailed information about a
bypass tunnel.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the MPLS TE auto FRR function are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command to check binding information about the
primary tunnel and the auto bypass tunnel.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number | auto-bypass-
tunnel tunnel-name ] command to check detailed information about the auto bypass tunnel.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel path [ [ tunnel-name ] [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-id
local-lsp-id ] | fast-reroute { local-protection-available | local-protection-inuse } ]
command to check path information about the primary tunnel and the auto bypass tunnel.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.17 Configuring CR-LSP Backup

By configuring CR-LSP backup, you can provide end-to-end protection for a CR-LSP.

3.17.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring CR-LSP backup, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
A backup CR-LSP provides an end-to-end path protection over an entire LSP.
A backup CR-LSP is classified into the following types:
l Hot-standby CR-LSP: A hot-standby CR-LSP is established at the same time a primary
CR-LSP is set up. If the CR-LSP transmitting services fails, traffic rapidly switches to the
hot-standby CR-LSP. Additional bandwidth is needed in hot-standby mode.
l Ordinary backup CR-LSP: An ordinary backup CR-LSP is set up only after the primary
CR-LSP fails. No additional bandwidth is needed in ordinary backup mode. If the primary
CR-LSP fails, traffic switches only after the backup CR-LSP has been successfully set up.
l Best-effort path: If the primary CR-LSP has failed but a backup CR-LSP fails to be
established or no backup CR-LSP is established, the system establishes a temporary CR-
LSP, also called a best-effort path, and switches traffic to this best-effort path. On the
network shown in Figure 3-1, the primary CR-LSP is along the path PE1 -> P2 -> P1 ->
PE2 and the backup CR-LSP is along the path PE1 -> P2 -> PE2. If both of them fail, a
best-effort path is established along the path PE1 -> P2 -> P1 -> PE2.

Figure 3-1 Schematic diagram of a best-effort LSP

P1 P2

Primary path
PE1 PE2 Secondary path
Best-effort path

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring CR-LSP backup, complete the following tasks:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Enabling MPLS, MPLS TE, and RSVP TE globally and in the interface view of each node
along a backup CR-LSP (See Enabling MPLS TE and RSVP TE.)

Data Preparation
To configure CR-LSP backup, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Backup mode

2 (Optional) Explicit path for the backup CR-LSP

3 (Optional) Affinity property of the backup CR-LSP

4 (Optional) Hop limit of the backup CR-LSP

3.17.2 Configuring CR-LSP Backup

CR-LSP backup is configured on the ingress of a primary CR-LSP. Hot standby and ordinary
backup are mutually exclusive.

Context
By default, the CR-LSP backup is not enabled. After the CR-LSP backup is configured on the
ingress of a tunnel, the system automatically selects the path of the backup CR-LSP without
manual interruption.
Do as follows on the ingress node of the primary tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te backup { hot-standby [ wtr interval ] | ordinary }

The mode of establishing the CR-LSP backup is configured.

NOTE

A primary CR-LSP cannot function as a bypass tunnel or a backup CR-LSP for another CR-LSP. That is,
the mpls te protected-interface or mpls te bypass-tunnel are mutually exclusive.

Step 4 (Optional) Run:

mpls te path explicit-path path-name secondary

The explicit path used by the backup CR-LSP is specified.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

When an explicit path is used to set up a hot-standby CR-LSP, it cannot completely overlap the path of the
primary CR-LSP; otherwise, the hot-standby CR-LSP cannot protect the primary CR-LSP.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:

mpls te affinity property properties [ mask mask-value ] secondary

The affinity property used by the backup CR-LSP is configured.

By default, the affinity property used by the backup CR-LSP is 0x0.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
mpls te hop-limit hop-limit-value secondary

The number of hops of the backup CR-LSP is limited.

By default, the hop limit of a backup CR-LSP is 32.
Step 7 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

3.17.3 (Optional) Configuring the Path Overlapping Function for

Hot-standby CR-LSPs
This section describes how to configure the path overlapping function for hot-standby CR-LSPs.

Context
The path overlapping function can be configured for hot-standby CR-LSPs. This function allows
a hot-standby CR-LSP to use links of a primary CR-LSP. After the hot-standby CR-LSP is
established, it can protect traffic on the primary CR-LSP.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnelinterface-number

The MPLS TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te backuphot-standbyoverlap-path

The path overlapping function is configured.

NOTE

The path overlapping function takes effect only on hot-standby CR-LSPs to be established.
It allows a hot-standby CR-LSP to use some links of the primary CR-LSP. This hot-standby CR-LSP can
use all links of the primary CR-LSP if an explicit path is configured for it.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

3.17.4 (Optional) Locking an Attribute Template for Backup CR-

LSPs
You can configure the function of locking a CR-LSP attribute template to avoid unnecessary
traffic switchover.

Context
The system provides three prioritized attribute templates for a hot-standby backup CR-LSP and
three for an ordinary backup CR-LSP. If an existing backup CR-LSP is set up using a lower-
priority attribute template, the system automatically attempts to set up a new backup CR-LSP
using a higher-priority attribute template.

When a specified attribute template is locked, the system does not use a higher-priority attribute
template to re-establish a CR-LSP even though the existing CR-LSP is set up using a lower-
priority attribute template. This avoids unnecessary traffic switchover and thus saves system
resources.

Do as follows on the ingress of the primary CR-LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te primary-lsp-constraint { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-name }

The CR-LSP attribute template is used to set up a primary CR-LSP.

Step 4 Run one of the following commands to use an attribute template to set up an ordinary backup
CR-LSP or a hot-standby CR-LSP:
l To set up a backup CR-LSP, run:
mpls te ordinary-lsp-constraint number { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-attribute-
name }

l To set up a hot-standby CR-LSP, run:

mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint number { dynamic | lsp-attribute lsp-
attribute-name }

Step 5 Run one of the following commands to lock the attribute template that is used by an ordinary
backup CR-LSP or a hot-standby CR-LSP:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l For the attribute template that is used to set up an ordinary backup CR-LSP, run:
mpls te backup ordinary-lsp-constraint lock

l For the attribute template that is used to set up a hot-standby CR-LSP, run:
mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock

Step 6 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If you run the undo mpls te backup ordinary-lsp-constraint lock command or the undo mpls
te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock command to unlock the attribute template, the
system continues trying a higher-priority attribute template to set up a backup CR-LSP.

3.17.5 (Optional) Configuring the Dynamic Bandwidth Function for

a Hot-standby CR-LSP
The dynamic bandwidth function enables a hot-standby CR-LSP to be set up without occupying
bandwidth, thus saving system resources.

Context
With the dynamic bandwidth function, a hot-standby CR-LSP occupies bandwidth resources
only when taking over traffic from a faulty primary CR-LSP, rather than when the primary CR-
LSP works normally.

You can configure the dynamic bandwidth function for a hot-standby CR-LSP on the ingress of
a primary CR-LSP.

Procedure
l Do as follows to configure a hot-standby CR-LSP that is set up without an attribute
template:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

3. Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured as the tunneling protocol.

4. Run:
mpls te backup hot-standby dynamic-bandwidth

The dynamic bandwidth function for the hot-standby CR-LSP is configured.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

5. Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration is committed.

l Do as follows to configure a hot-standby CR-LSP that is set up by using an attribute
template:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

3. Run:
tunnel-protocol mpls te

MPLS TE is configured as the tunneling protocol.

4. Run:
mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint dynamic-bandwidth

The dynamic bandwidth function for the hot-standby CR-LSP is configured.

5. Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the preceding configuration, the system can establish a new hot-standby CR-LSP using
the required bandwidth according to the make-before-break mechanism to replace the hot-
standby CR-LSP with bandwidth at 0 bit/s.
You can run the undo mpls te backup hot-standby dynamic-bandwidth command to delete
the dynamic bandwidth function for the hot-standby CR-LSP, thus allowing the hot-standby CR-
LSP to re-occupy bandwidth.

3.17.6 (Optional) Configuring a Best-Effort LSP

By configuring a best-effort path, you can switch traffic to the best-effort path when both the
primary CR-LSP and the backup CR-LSP fail.

Context
In best-effort mode, do as follows on the ingress node of the TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te backup ordinary best-effort

A best-effort LSP is configured.

NOTE

The mpls te backup ordinary best-effort command and the mpls te backup ordinary command cannot
be configured on the same tunnel interface.

Step 4 (Optional) Run:

mpls te affinity property properties [ mask mask-value ] best-effort

The affinity property used in the best-effort LSP is configured.

By default, the value of the affinity property used by the best-effort LSP is 0x0.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
mpls te hop-limit hop-limit-value best-effort

The number of hops of the best-effort LSP is limited.

By default, the hop limit of a backup CR-LSP is 32.
Step 6 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After a best-effort LSP is configured, the device triggers the setup of a best-effort LSP when
both the primary LSP and the backup LSP fail.

3.17.7 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of CR-LSP backup, you can view information about a backup CR-LSP.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number ] command to check
information about the tunnel interface.
l Run the display mpls te hot-standby state { all [ verbose ] | interface tunnel interface-
number } command to check the hot standby status.
l Run the display mpls te tunnel [ destination ip-address ] [ lsp-id ingress-lsr-id session-
id local-lsp-id ] [lsr-role { all | egress | ingress | remote | transit } ] [ name tunnel-
name ] [ { incoming-interface | interface | outgoing-interface } interface-type interface-
number ] [ te-class0 | te-class1 | te-class2 | te-class3 | te-class4 | te-class5 | te-class6 | te-
class7 ] [ verbose ] command to check information about the tunnel.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Example
In hot standby mode, after the configuration, run the display mpls te tunnel-interface
command, and you can view information about a backup CR-LSP.
[HUAWEI] display mpls te tunnel-interface
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Hot-Standby LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : DOWN
Main LSP State : SETTING UP
Hot-Standby LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 32769
Modify LSP State : SETTING UP

Run the display mpls te hot-standby state command, and you can view information about the
hot standby.
<HUAWEI> display mpls te hot-standby state interface Tunnel 1/0/0
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the Tunnel1/0/0 hot-standby state
----------------------------------------------------------------
session id : 100
main LSP token : 0x100201a
hot-standby LSP token : 0x100201b
HSB switch result : Best-Effort LSP
WTR : 15s

Run the display mpls te tunnel to check information about the tunnel.
<HUAWEI> display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 1024
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress LSP Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 2.2.2.2
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : Static CR Resv Style :
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 1
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: -
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 0
Created Time : 2008/04/03 19:31:14
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 0 Hold-Priority : 0
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0xe3 Protected Flag : 0x04
Bypass In Use : Not Exists

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

3.18 Configuring Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and

the Backup CR-LSP
This section describes that after the primary CR-LSP is faulty, the system starts the TE FRR
bypass tunnel and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP the same time it sets up a backup CR-
LSP.

3.18.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP, familiarize
yourself with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the
required data. This can help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Application Environment
To protect important links and nodes, you can configure the TE FRR bypass tunnel and the end-
to-end backup CR-LSP together. The backup CR-LSP is more reliable than the TE FRR bypass
tunnel. Therefore, to improve the security of the tunnel, you are recommended to configure
synchronization of the TE FRR bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP.

l In ordinary backup mode, the following situations occur:

– When the protected link or node is faulty, the system switches traffic to the TE FRR
bypass tunnel and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP. At the same time, the system
tries to set up a backup CR-LSP.
– When the backup CR-LSP is set up successfully and the primary CR-LSP is not restored,
traffic is switched to the backup CR-LSP.
– When the backup CR-LSP fails to be set up and the primary CR-LSP is not restored,
traffic still passes through the TE FRR bypass tunnel.
l In hot standby mode, the following situations occur:
– If the backup CR-LSP is in the Up state and the protected link or node is faulty, traffic
is switched to the TE FRR bypass tunnel and then immediately switched to the backup
CR-LSP. At the same time, the system tries to restore the primary CR-LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

– If the backup CR-LSP is in the Down state, the processing of hot standby is the same
as the processing of ordinary backup.

When the primary CR-LSP is Up and the hot standby CR-LSP is also in the Up state, more
bandwidth resources are needed. The ordinary CR-LSP is set up only when the primary CR-LSP
is in the FRR-in-use state. That is, when the primary CR-LSP works normally, no more
bandwidth resources are needed. Therefore, the ordinary backup is recommended.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP, you need to
complete the following tasks:

l Setting up the primary tunnel

l Configuring manual MPLS TE FRR or MPLS TE Auto FRR (See the section Configuring
MPLS TE FRR or the section Configuring MPLS Auto TE FRR.)
l Configuring the backup CR-LSP (except for the best-effort path) in either hot standby mode
or ordinary backup mode (See the section Configuring CR-LSP Backup.)

Data Preparation
To configure synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP, you need the
following data.

No. Data

1 Protection policy of TE FRR, that is, to protect the link or the node

2 Backup mode

3.18.2 Enabling Synchronization of the Bypass Tunnel and the

Backup CR-LSP
By configuring synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP, you can protect
the entire CR-LSP.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress LSR of the primary tunnel:

NOTE

Before the configuration, you must configure the end-to-end protection (except for the best-effort path) in
either hot standby mode or ordinary backup mode and the TE FRR partial protection.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the MPLS TE tunnel is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te backup frr-in-use

When the primary CR-LSP is faulty (that is, the primary CR-LSP is in FRR-in-use state), the
system starts the TE FRR bypass tunnel and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP. At the same
time, the system tries to set up a backup CR-LSP.
Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The tunnel configurations are committed.

Step 5 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

----End

3.18.3 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP, you
can view information about the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP.

Prerequisite
All configurations of synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP are complete.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface [ tunnel interface-number | auto-bypass-
tunnel tunnel-name ] command, and you can view information about the tunnel.
----End

3.19 Configuring RSVP GR

This section describes how to configure RSVP-TE GR so that devices along an RSVP-TE tunnel
can retain RSVP sessions during a master/slave switchover.

3.19.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring RSVP-TE GR, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
When an RSVP node performs an active/standby switchover, an RSVP adjacency relationship
between the local node and its neighbor is torn down because of signaling protocol timeout,
resulting in removal of a CR-LSP and a temporary traffic interruption.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

RSVP GR resolves the preceding problem. The RSVP GR mechanism allows the adjacency
relationship to be reestablished between neighbors without tearing down RSVP sessions.

On the NE80E/40E, FRR switching is performed during the RSVP GR process. FRR protects
traffic if a switchover is performed on the PLR node, PLR upstream node, MP, or MP
downstream node and the outgoing interface of the PLR primary tunnel fails, reducing the fault
period.

NOTE

When FRR is performed during the RSVP GR process, setting the timeout multiplier in the PSB and RSB
to a value equal to or greater than five is recommended, preventing PSB and RSB loss due to oversized
data. For detailed configurations, see (Optional) Modifying the PSB and RSB Timeout Multiplier.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring RSVP GR, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring an RSVP-TE tunnel

l Enabling IS-IS GR or OSPF GR on each LSR

Data Preparation
To configure RSVP GR, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 IGP parameters:
l IS-IS: IS-IS process ID, Network Entity Title (NET), and IS-IS level of each node
l OSPF: OSPF process ID and AS number

2 MPLS LSR ID of each node

3 Tunnel interface number and tunnel ID

4 (Optional) Basic RSVP GR time

3.19.2 Enabling the RSVP Hello Extension Function

By configuring the RSVP Hello extension, you can enable a device to quickly check reachability
between RSVP nodes.

Context
Do as follows on a GR node and its neighboring nodes:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

The RSVP Hello extension function is enabled globally.

Step 4 Run:
quit

The system view is displayed.

Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The RSVP interface view is displayed.

Step 6 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

The RSVP Hello extension function is enabled on the interface.

By default, although the RSVP Hello extension function has been enabled globally, it is disabled
on RSVP-enabled interfaces.

----End

3.19.3 Enabling Full GR of RSVP

By enabling RSVP full GR, you can ensure uninterrupted data transmission on the forwarding
plane.

Context
Do as follows on a GR node:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr

The RSVP GR function and the function of supporting RSVP GR on a neighbor are enabled.
By default, the RSVP GR function and RSVP GR support function are disabled.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.19.4 (Optional) Enabling the RSVP GR Support Function

By being enabled with RSVP GR, a device supports the GR capability of its neighbor.

Context
RSVP GR takes effect on the RSVP GR-enabled neighbor automatically after the neighbor is
enabled with RSVP full GR. If the GR node's neighbor is a GR node, do not perform the following
steps. If the GR node's neighbor is not a GR node, do as follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te

RSVP-TE is enabled.
Step 4 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

The RSVP Hello function is enabled on the local node.

Step 5 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello support-peer-gr

The function of supporting RSVP GR on the neighbor is enabled.

----End

3.19.5 (Optional) Configuring Hello Sessions Between RSVP GR

Nodes
On a network enabled with TE FRR, a Hello session needs to be set up between a PLR and an
MP.

Context
If TE FRR is deployed, a hello session is required between a PLR and an MP. Do as follows on
the PLR and MP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te

RSVP-TE is enabled.
Step 4 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello

The RSVP Hello function is enabled on the local node.

Step 5 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello nodeid-session ip-address

A Hello session is set up between a restarting node and a neighbor node.

ip-address is the LSR ID of the RSVP neighbor.

----End

3.19.6 (Optional) Modifying Basic Time

By setting the basic time and the number of ingress LSPs, you can modify the restart time.

Context
After an active/standby switchover starts, an RSVP GR node has an RSVP smoothing period,
during which the data plane continues forwarding data if the control plane is not restored. After
RSVP smoothing is completed, a restart timer is started.
Restart timer value = Basic time + Number of ingress LSPs x 60 ms
In this formula, the default basic time is 90 seconds and is configurable by using a command
line, and the number of LSPs is the number of LSPs with the local node being the ingress.
After the restart timer expires, the recovery timer is started.
Recovery timer = Restart time + Total number of LSPs x 40 ms
Do as follows on the GR node to modify the basic time:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls rsvp-te hello basic-restart-time basic-restart-time

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The RSVP GR basic time is modified.

By default, the RSVP GR basic time is 90 seconds.

----End

3.19.7 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of RSVP GR, you can view that the TE tunnel properly forward data
during the GR process.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart command to check the status of the local
RSVP GR.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart peer [ { interface interface-type interface-
number | node-id } [ ip-address ] ] command to check the status of RSVP GR on a neighbor.

----End

Example
Run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart command on a restarted node. If "GR-Self GR-
Support" is displayed in the Graceful-Restart Capability field, it means that the local device has
the RSVP GR function. During the GR process, in the output of the display mpls rsvp-te
graceful-restart command, "Restart time going on" or "Recovery time going on" is displayed
in the GR Status field.

Run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart peer command on the restarted node.

Information displayed in the Neighbor Capability field has specific meanings:

l Can Do Self GR: means that the neighbor node is enabled with the RSVP GR capability.
l Can Support GR: means that the neighbor node is enabled with the RSVP GR supporting
capability.
l Both "Can Do Self GR" and "Can Support GR": mean that the neighbor node is enabled
with the RSVP GR function and the RSVP GR support function.

Run the ping lsp te tunnel command on the neighbor node and immediately run the slave
switchover command in the system view on the restarted node, and you can view that data
forwarded through the TE tunnel is not interrupted during GR.

3.20 Configuring Static BFD for CR-LSP

This section describes how to configure a static BFD session to detect link faults in static CR-
LSPs or RSVP CR-LSPs.

3.20.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring static BFD for CR-LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the
configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Applicable Environment
BFD detects the following types of CR-LSPs:
l Static CR-LSP
l RSVP CR-LSP

BFD for static CR-LSP and BFD for RSVP CR-LSP can be used to replace MPLS OAM to
detect the MPLS TE tunnel protection groups and trigger primary/backup CR-LSP switchover.
BFD for CR-LSP is applicable to the hot-standby CR-LSP. It detects the primary and backup
CR-LSPs and triggers CR-LSPs switchover.

For details about MPLS OAM configuration, refer to the chapter "MPLS OAM Configuration"
in the Configuration Guide - MPLS.

NOTE

For the same CR-LSP, MPLS OAM and BFD cannot be configured simultaneously.
In the scenario that static BFD for CR-LSP is applied and the BFD status is Up, if the tunnel interface to
which CR-LSP belongs is shut down, the BFD status remains Up.
BFD for LSP can function properly though the forward path is an LSP and the backward path is an IP link.
The forward path and the backward path must be established over the same link; otherwise, if a fault occurs,
BFD cannot identify the faulty path. Before deploying BFD, ensure that the forward and backward paths
are over the same link so that BFD can correctly identify the faulty path.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring static BFD for CR-LSP, complete the following task:

l Configuring Static MPLS TE Tunnel or Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel or MPLS TE

tunnel protection group
NOTE

For details about the configuration of the MPLS TE tunnel protection group for the MPLS TE tunnel, refer
to the chapter "MPLS OAM Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration
Guide - MPLS.

Data Preparation
To configure static BFD for CR-LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 BFD session name

2 Backward channel (IP link, dynamic LSP, static LSP, or MPLS TE tunnel)

3 Local and remote discriminators of the BFD session

4 Minimum interval for sending BFD packets

5 Minimum interval for receiving BFD packets

6 Local BFD detection multiplier

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.20.2 Enabling BFD Globally

To configure static BFD for CR-LSP, you must enable BFD globally on the ingress node and
the egress node of a tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node and egress node of the tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

BFD is enabled globally.

----End

3.20.3 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Ingress of the Tunnel

The BFD parameters configured on the ingress node include the local and remote discriminators,
local minimum intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received, and BFD detection
multiplier, which determine the establishment of a BFD session.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress node of a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp [ backup ]

BFD is configured to detect the primary or backup CR-LSP bound to a specified tunnel.

The parameter backup means that backup CR-LSPs are to be checked.

Step 3 Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is set.

Step 4 Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is set.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 5 (Optional) Run:

min-tx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent is set.
The default value is specified in the license.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
min-rx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received is set.
The default value is specified in the license.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
detect-multiplier multiplier

The local detection multiplier is adjusted.

By default, the local detection multiplier is 3.
Step 8 Run:
process-pst

The system is enabled to change the port status table (PST) when the BFD status changes.
When the BFD status changes, BFD notifies the application of the change, triggering a fast
switchover between the primary and bypass CR-LSPs.
Step 9 Run:
commit

The current configuration is committed.

NOTE

Actual local sending interval = MAX { Configured local sending interval, Configured remote receiving
interval }
Actual local receiving interval = MAX { Configured remote sending interval, Configured local receiving
interval }
Actual local detection interval = Actual local receiving interval x Configured remote detection multiplier
For example:
l The local sending and receiving intervals are set to 200 ms and 300 ms respectively and the detection
multiplier is set to 4.
l The remote sending and receiving intervals are set to 100 ms and 600 ms respectively and the detection
multiplier is set to 5.
Then,
l Actual local sending interval = MAX {200 ms, 600 ms} = 600 ms; Actual local receiving interval =
MAX {100 ms, 300 ms} = 300 ms; Actual local detection interval is 300 ms x 5 = 1500 ms.
l Actual remote sending interval = MAX {100 ms, 300 ms} = 300 ms; Actual remote receiving interval
= MAX {200 ms, 600 ms} = 600 ms; Actual remote detection interval is 600 ms x 4 = 2400 ms.

----End

3.20.4 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Egress of the Tunnel

The BFD parameters configured on the egress node include the local and remote discriminators,
local minimum intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received, and BFD detection
multiplier, which determine the establishment of a BFD session.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the egress node of a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Configure a reverse tunnel to inform the ingress of a fault if the fault occurs. The reverse tunnel
can be the IP link, LSP, or TE tunnel. To prevent affecting BFD detection, an IP link is usually
selected to inform the ingress of an LSP fault. The process-pst command is not allowed if a
reverse tunnel is configured. If the configured reverse tunnel requires BFD detection, configure
a pair of BFD sessions for it. Choose one of the following configurations as required:
l For an IP link, run:
bfd cfg-name bind peer-ip ip-address [ vpn-instance vpn-name ] [ interface
interface-type interface-number] [ source-ip ip-address ]

l For an LDP LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind ldp-lsp peer-ip ip-address nexthop ip-address [ interface
interface-type interface-number ]

l For a static LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind static-lsp lsp-name

l For a CR-LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp [ backup ]

l For a TE tunnel, run:

bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number

Step 3 Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is set.

Step 4 Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is set.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:
min-tx-interval interval

The minimum interval at which the local end sends BFD packets is set.
The default value is specified by the license.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
min-rx-interval interval

The minimum interval at which the local end receives BFD packets is set.
The default value is specified by the license.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
detect-multiplier multiplier

The local detection multiplier is set.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 8 Run:
commit

The configuration is committed.

----End

3.20.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of static BFD for CR-LSP, you can view that the status of a BFD session
is Up.

Procedure
l Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check BFD configurations on the ingress.
l Run the following commands to check BFD configurations on the egress:

– Run the display bfd configuration all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ verbose ] command
to check all BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd configuration static [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te | name cfg-name ]
[ verbose ] command to check the static BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd configuration peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] [ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the reverse path
being an IP link.
– Run the display bfd configuration static-lsp lsp-name [ verbose ] command to check
the configurations of BFD with the reverse path being a static LSP.
– Run the display bfd configuration ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip nexthop nexthop [
interface interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose ] command to check the
configurations of BFD with the backward channel being an LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a CR-LSP.
– Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a TE tunnel.
l Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check BFD session configurations on the ingress.
l Run the following commands to check BFD session configurations on the egress:

– Run the display bfd session all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id | verbose ]
command to check all the BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd session static [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id | verbose ]
command to check the static BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd session peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
[ slot slot-id | verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward
channel being an IP link.
– Run the display bfd session static-lsp lsp-name [ verbose ] command to check the
configurations of BFD with the backward channel being a static LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

– Run the display bfd session ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip [ interface interface-type
interface-number ] [ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the
backward channel being an LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a CR-LSP.
– Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number [ verbose ]
command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel being a TE
tunnel.
l Run the following command to check BFD statistics:

– Run the display bfd statistics [ slot slot-id ] command to check all BFD statistics.
– Run the display bfd statistics session all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id ]
command to check all BFD session statistics.
– Run the display bfd statistics session peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] [ slot slot-id ] command to check statistics about the BFD session that detects
faults in the IP link.
– Run the display bfd statistics session static-lsp lsp-name command to check statistics
about the BFD session that detects faults in the static LSP.
– Run the display bfd statistics session ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip [ interface interface-
type interface-number ] command to check statistics of the BFD session that detects
faults in the LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd statistics session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-
lsp command to check statistics about the BFD session that detects faults in the CR-
LSP.

----End

Example
After the configuration, run the preceding commands to check BFD session status, and you can
view that the BFD session is Up.

3.21 Configuring Static BFD for TE

This section describes how to configure a static BFD session to detect faults in a TE tunnel.

3.21.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring static BFD for TE, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
BFD for TE allows applications such as VPN FRR or VLL FRR to fast switch traffic if the
primary tunnel fails, preventing service interruption.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

MPLS OAM and BFD cannot be configured together on a TE tunnel.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring static BFD for TE, complete the following task:

l Configuring Static MPLS TE Tunnel or Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure static BFD for TE, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Name of the BFD session

2 Backward channel (IP link, dynamic LSP, static LSP, or MPLS TE tunnel)

3 Local and remote discriminators of the BFD session

4 (Optional) Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent

5 (Optional) Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received

6 (Optional) Local detection multiplier

3.21.2 Enabling BFD Globally

To configure static BFD for TE, you need to enable BFD globally on the ingress and egress
nodes of a tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress and egress of a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

BFD is enabled globally.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.21.3 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Ingress of the Tunnel

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number

BFD is configured to detect faults in a specified tunnel.

Step 3 Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

Step 4 Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:
min-tx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent is set.
The default value is determined by the license.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
min-rx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received is set.
The default value is specified in the license.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
detect-multiplier multiplier

The local detection multiplier is set.

Step 8 Run:
process-pst

Modifying the protection status table is enabled.

This command is used to notify an application protocol of TE tunnel status changes.
Step 9 Run:
commit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The BFD configuration is committed.

NOTE

If the status of the tunnel to be checked is Down, the BFD session cannot be set up.
Actual local sending interval = MAX { Configured local sending interval, Configured remote receiving
interval }
Actual local receiving interval = MAX { Configured remote sending interval, Configured local receiving
interval }
Actual local detection interval = Actual local receiving interval x Configured remote detection multiplier.
For example:
l The local sending and receiving intervals are set to 200 ms and 300 ms respectively and the detection
multiplier is set to 4.
l The remote sending and receiving intervals are set to 100 ms and 600 ms respectively and the detection
multiplier is set to 5.
Then,
l Actual local sending interval = MAX {200 ms, 600 ms} = 600 ms; Actual local receiving interval =
MAX {100 ms, 300 ms} = 300 ms; actual local detection interval is 300 ms x 5 = 1500 ms.
l Actual remote sending interval = MAX {100 ms, 300 ms} = 300 ms; Actual remote receiving interval
= MAX {200 ms, 600 ms} = 600 ms; Actual remote detection interval is 600 ms x 4 = 2400 ms.

----End

3.21.4 Configuring BFD Parameters on the Egress of the Tunnel

Context
Do as follows on the egress node of a tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Configure a reverse tunnel to inform the ingress of a fault if the fault occurs. The reverse tunnel
can be the IP link, LSP, or TE tunnel. To prevent affecting BFD detection, an IP link is usually
selected to inform the ingress of an LSP fault. The process-pst command is prohibited if a reverse
tunnel is configured. If the configured reverse tunnel requires BFD detection, configure a pair
of BFD sessions for it. Choose one of the following configurations as required:
l For an IP link, run:
bfd cfg-name bind peer-ip ip-address [ vpn-instance vpn-name ] [ interface
interface-type interface-number] [ source-ip ip-address ]

l For an LDP LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind ldp-lsp peer-ip ip-address nexthop ip-address [ interface
interface-type interface-number ]

l For a static LSP, run:

bfd cfg-name bind static-lsp lsp-name

l For a TE tunnel, run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

bfd cfg-name bind mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number

Step 3 Run:
discriminator local discr-value

The local discriminator is configured.

Step 4 Run:
discriminator remote discr-value

The remote discriminator is configured.

Step 5 (Optional) Run:
min-tx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent is set.
The default value is determined by the License.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
min-rx-interval interval

The local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received is set.
The default value is specified in the license.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
detect-multiplier multiplier

The local detection multiplier is set.

Step 8 Run:
commit

The current configuration is committed.

----End

3.21.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of static BFD for TE, you can view that the status of a BFD session is
Up.

Procedure
l Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number
[ verbose ] command to check BFD configurations on the ingress.
l Run the following commands to check BFD configurations on the egress:
– Run the display bfd configuration all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ verbose ] command
to check all information about BFD.
– Run the display bfd configuration static [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te | name cfg-name ]
[ verbose ] command to check the static BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd configuration peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] [ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward
channel being an IP link.
– Run the display bfd configuration static-lsp lsp-name [ verbose ] command to check
the configurations of BFD with the backward channel being a static LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 304

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

– Run the display bfd configuration ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip nexthop nexthop [
interface interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose ] command to check the
configurations of BFD with the backward channel being an LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a CR-LSP.
– Run the display bfd configuration mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a TE tunnel.
l Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number [ verbose ]
command to check BFD session configurations on the ingress.
l Run the following commands to check BFD session configurations on the egress:

– Run the display bfd session all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id | verbose ]
command to check all BFD configurations.
– Run the display bfd session static [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id | verbose ]
command to check the configurations of static BFD.
– Run the display bfd session peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
[ slot slot-id | verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward
channel being an IP link.
– Run the display bfd session static-lsp lsp-name [ verbose ] command to check the
configurations of BFD with the backward channel being a static LSP.
– Run the display bfd session ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip [ interface interface-type
interface-number ] [ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the
backward channel being an LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-lsp
[ verbose ] command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel
being a CR-LSP.
– Run the display bfd session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number [ verbose ]
command to check the configurations of BFD with the backward channel being a TE
tunnel.
l Run the following command to check BFD statistics:

– Run the display bfd statistics [ slot slot-id ] command to check all BFD statistics.
– Run the display bfd statistics session all [ for-ip | for-lsp | for-te ] [ slot slot-id ]
command to check all BFD session statistics.
– Run the display bfd statistics session peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] [ slot slot-id ] command to check statistics of the BFD session that detects faults
in the IP link.
– Run the display bfd statistics session static-lsp lsp-name command to check statistics
about the BFD session that detects faults in the static LSP.
– Run the display bfd statistics session ldp-lsp peer-ip peer-ip [ interface interface-
type interface-number ] command to check statistics of the BFD session that detects
faults in the LDP LSP.
– Run the display bfd statistics session mpls-te interface tunnel interface-number te-
lsp command to check statistics of the BFD session that detects faults in the CR-LSP.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 305

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Example
After the configuration, run the preceding commands to check BFD session status, and you can
view that the BFD session is Up.

3.22 Configuring Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP

This section describes how to configure a dynamic BFD session to detect link faults in a static
CR-LSP or an RSVP CR-LSP.

3.22.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring dynamic BFD for CR-LSP, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the
configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
Compared with static BFD, dynamically creating BFD sessions simplifies configurations and
reduces configuration errors.
BFD detects faults in the following CR-LSPs:
l Static CR-LSP
l RSVP CR-LSP
Currently, dynamic BFD for CR-LSP cannot detect faults in the entire TE tunnel.

NOTE

MPLS OAM and BFD cannot be configured together for one CR-LSP.
If a dynamic BFD session for CR-LSP is Up but the tunnel interface of the detected CR-LSP is shut down,
the BFD session is still Up.
BFD for LSP can function properly though the forward path is an LSP and the backward path is an IP link.
The forward path and the backward path must be established over the same link; otherwise, if a fault occurs,
BFD cannot identify the faulty path. Before deploying BFD, ensure that the forward and backward paths
are over the same link so that BFD can correctly identify the faulty path.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring dynamic BFD for CR-LSP, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring Static MPLS TE Tunnel or Configuring an RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure dynamic BFD for CR-LSP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent

2 Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received

3 Local BFD detection multiplier

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 306

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.22.2 Enabling BFD Globally

To configure dynamic BFD for CR-LSP, you need to enable BFD globally on the ingress node
and the egress node of a tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress and the egress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

BFD is enabled globally.

----End

3.22.3 Enabling the Capability of Dynamically Creating BFD

Sessions on the Ingress
You can enable the ingress node to dynamically create BFD sessions on a TE tunnel in either
of two modes, that is, enabling BFD globally and enabling BFD on a tunnel interface.

Context
Enabling the capability of dynamically creating BFD sessions on a TE tunnel can be
implemented in either of the following methods:

l Enabling MPLS TE BFD Globally if most TE tunnels on the ingress need to dynamically
create BFD sessions
l Enabling MPLS TE BFD on the Tunnel Interface if certain TE tunnels on the ingress
need to dynamically create BFD sessions

Procedure
l Enable MPLS TE BFD globally.

Do as follows on the ingress:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 307

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te bfd enable

The capability of dynamically creating BFD sessions is enabled on the TE tunnel.

After this command is run in the MPLS view, dynamic BFD for TE is enabled on all
the tunnel interfaces, excluding the interfaces on which dynamic BFD for TE are
blocked.
4. (Optional) Block the capability of dynamically creating BFD sessions for TE on the
tunnel interfaces of the TE tunnels that do not need dynamic BFD for TE.
(1) Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

(2) Run:
mpls te bfd block

The capability of dynamically creating BFD sessions on the tunnel interface is

blocked.
(3) Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration on this tunnel interface is committed.

l Enable MPLS TE BFD on a tunnel interface.
Do as follows on the ingress:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te bfd enable

The capability of dynamically creating BFD sessions is enabled on the TE tunnel.

The command configured in the tunnel interface view takes effect only on the current
tunnel interface.
4. Run:
mpls te commit

The configuration of the TE tunnel is committed.

----End

3.22.4 Enabling the Capability of Passively Creating BFD Sessions

on the Egress
On a unidirectional LSP, creating a BFD session on the active role (ingress node) triggers the
sending of LSP ping request messages to the passive role (egress node). Only after the passive
role receives the ping packets, a BFD session can be automatically set up.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 308

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the egress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

The BFD view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls-passive

The capability of passively creating BFD sessions is enabled.

After this command is run, a BFD session can be created only after the egress receives an LSP
Ping request containing a BFD TLV from the ingress.

----End

3.22.5 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters

BFD parameters are adjusted on the ingress of a tunnel in either of two modes, that is, adjusting
BFD parameters globally and on a tunnel interface.

Context
BFD parameters are adjusted on the ingress of a TE tunnel either of the following modes:

l Adjusting Global BFD Parameters if most TE tunnels on the ingress use the same BFD
parameters
l Adjusting BFD Parameters on an Interface if certain TE tunnels on the ingress need
BFD parameters different from global BFD parameters
NOTE

Actual local sending interval = MAX { Configured local sending interval, Configured remote receiving
interval }
Actual local receiving interval = MAX { Configured remote sending interval, Configured local receiving
interval }
Actual local detection interval = Actual local receiving interval x Configured remote detection multiplier
On the egress of the TE tunnel enabled with the capability of passively creating BFD sessions, the default
values of the receiving interval, sending interval and detection multiplier cannot be adjusted. The default
values of these three parameters are the minimum configurable values on the ingress. Therefore, the BFD
detection interval on the ingress and that on the egress of a TE tunnel are as follows:
l Actual detection interval on the ingress = Configured receiving interval on the ingress x 3
l Actual detection interval on the egress = Configured sending interval on the ingress x Configured
detection multiplier on the ingress

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 309

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
l Adjust global BFD parameters.

Do as follows on the ingress of a TE tunnel:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te bfd { min-tx-interval tx-interval | min-rx-interval tx-interval |
detect-multiplier multiplier }*

BFD time parameters are adjusted globally.

l Adjust BFD parameters on the tunnel interface.
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The TE tunnel interface view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te bfd { min-tx-interval tx-interval | min-rx-interval rx-interval |
detect-multiplier multiplier }*

BFD time parameters are adjusted.

4. Run:
mpls te commit

The current configurations of the TE tunnel interface are committed.

----End

3.22.6 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of dynamic BFD for CR-LSP, you can view that a CR-LSP is Up and a
BFD session is successfully set up.

Procedure
l Run the display bfd configuration dynamic [ verbose ] command to check the
configuration of dynamic BFD on the ingress.
l Run the display bfd configuration passive-dynamic [ peer-ip peer-ip remote-
discriminator discriminator ] [ verbose ] command to check the configuration of dynamic
BFD on the egress.
l Run the display bfd session dynamic [slot slot-id ] [ verbose ] command to check
information about the BFD session on the ingress.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 310

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Run the display bfd session passive-dynamic [ peer-ip peer-ip remote-discriminator

discriminator ] [slot slot-id ] [ verbose ] command to check information about the BFD
session passively created on the egress.
l Check the BFD statistics.
– Run the display bfd statistics [slot slot-id ] command to check statistics about all BFD
sessions.
– Run the display bfd statistics session dynamic [ slot slot-id ] command to check
statistics about dynamic BFD sessions.
l Run the display mpls bfd session [ statistics | [ protocol { ldp | cr-static | rsvp-te } ] |
[ outgoing-interface interface-type interface-number ] | [ nexthop ip-address ] | [ fec fec-
address ] | verbose | monitor ] command to check information about the MPLS BFD
session.

----End

Example
Run the display bfd session all verbose command on the ingress, and you can view that the
status of the BFD sessions is Up and the links bound to the sessions are TE LSPs.

Run the display bfd session passive-dynamic verbose command on the egress, and you can
view that the BFD session created on the egress is a multi-hop BFD session bound to the peer
IP address.

3.23 Configuring Dynamic BFD for RSVP

This section describes how to configure a dynamic BFD session to detect faults in links between
RSVP neighbors.

3.23.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring dynamic BFD for RSVP, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the
configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
BFD for RSVP is applied to a scenario where TE FRR is used and a Layer 2 device exists on
the primary LSP between a PLR and its downstream neighbors. On a network where GR is
enabled on the PLR and MP, BFD for RSVP is also recommended.

By default, the interval at which RSVP Hello messages are sent is 3 seconds. The interval at
which a neighbor is declared Down is three times the interval at which RSVP Hello messages
are sent. This allows devices to detect a fault in an RSVP neighbor at seconds level.

If a Layer 2 device exists on a link between RSVP neighboring nodes, the neighboring node
cannot rapidly detect the fault after the link fails, resulting in a great loss of data.

BFD detects faults at millisecond level in protected links or nodes. BFD for RSVP rapidly detects
faults in an RSVP neighbor, allowing packets to switch to a backup LSP rapidly.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 311

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring BFD for RSVP, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

Data Preparation
To configure BFD for RSVP, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent

2 Local minimum interval at which BFD packets are received

3 Local BFD detection multiplier

When modifying BFD session parameters, select the parameters for the BFD sessions shared by
different protocols as follows:

l If the interval at which BFD packets are sent, interval at which BFD packets are received,
and local detection multiplier are set globally and on the interfaces of a node, the parameters
configured on the interfaces are used by a local RSVP protocol.
l If BFD for RSVP and other protocols share a BFD session on a node, the node selects the
smallest time parameters among all protocols as the local parameters.
l The following formulas are applied:
– Actual local sending interval = MAX { Configured local sending interval, Configured
remote receiving interval }
– Actual local receiving interval = MAX { Configured remote sending interval,
Configured local receiving interval }
– Actual local detection interval = Actual local receiving interval x Configured remote
detection multiplier

3.23.2 Enabling BFD Globally

To configure dynamic BFD for RSVP, you must enable BFD on both ends of RSVP neighbors.

Context
Do as follows on the two RSVP neighboring nodes between which a Layer 2 device resides:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 312

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
bfd

BFD is enabled globally.

----End

3.23.3 Enabling BFD for RSVP

You can enable BFD for RSVP in either of two modes, that is, enabling BFD for RSVP globally
and enabling BFD for RSVP on RSVP interfaces.

Context
Enabling BFD for RSVP in the following manners:
l Enabling BFD for RSVP Globally if most RSVP interfaces on a node need BFD for
RSVP.
l Enabling BFD for RSVP on the RSVP Interface if certain RSVP interfaces on a node
need BFD for RSVP.

Procedure
l Enable BFD for RSVP globally.
Do as follows on both RSVP neighboring nodes between which a Layer 2 device resides:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te bfd all-interfaces enable

BFD for RSVP is enabled globally.

After this command is run in the MPLS view, BFD for RSVP is enabled on all RSVP
interfaces except the interfaces with BFD for RSVP that are blocked.
4. (Optional) Block BFD for RSVP on the RSVP interfaces that need not BFD for RSVP.
(1) Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the RSVP-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

(2) Run:
mpls rsvp-te bfd block

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 313

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

BFD for RSVP is blocked on the interface.

l Enable BFD for RSVP on the RSVP interface.

Do as follows on the two RSVP neighboring nodes between which a Layer 2 device resides:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the RSVP-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te bfd enable

BFD for RSVP is enabled on the RSVP interface.

----End

3.23.4 (Optional) Adjusting BFD Parameters

BFD parameters are adjusted on the ingress of a tunnel in either of two modes, that is, adjusting
BFD parameters globally and on a tunnel interface.

Context
BFD for RSVP parameters are adjusted on the ingress of a TE tunnel either of the following
modes:

l Adjusting Global BFD Parameters if most RSVP interfaces on a node use the same BFD
parameters
l Adjusting BFD Parameters on an RSVP Interface if certain RSVP interfaces require
BFD parameters different from global BFD parameters

Procedure
l Adjust global BFD parameters globally.

Do as follows on the two RSVP neighboring nodes between which a Layer 2 device resides:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te bfd all-interfaces { min-tx-interval tx-interval | min-rx-
interval rx-interval | detect-multiplier multiplier }*

BFD parameters are set globally.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 314

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

Parameters are described as follows:

l tx-interval indicates the Desired Min Tx Interval (DMTI), that is, the desired minimum
interval for the local end sending BFD control packets.
l rx-interval indicates the Required Min Rx Interval (RMRI), that is, the supported minimum
interval for the local end receiving BFD control packets.
l multiplier indicates the BFD detection multiplier.
BFD detection parameters that take effect on the local node may be different from the
configured parameters:
l Actual local sending interval = MAX { Locally-configured DMTI, Remotely-configured
RMRI }
l Actual local receiving interval = MAX { Remotely-configured DMTI, Locally-configured
RMRI }
l Actual local detection interval = Actual local receiving interval x Configured remote
detection multiplier
l Adjust BFD parameters on an RSVP interface.

Do as follows on the two RSVP neighboring nodes between which a Layer 2 device resides:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The view of the RSVP-TE-enabled interface is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls rsvp-te bfd { min-tx-interval tx-interval | min-rx-interval rx-
interval | detect-multiplier multiplier }*

BFD parameters on the RSVP interface are adjusted.

----End

3.23.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of dynamic BFD for RSVP, you can view that the status of a BFD session
for RSVP is Up.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te bfd session { all | interface interface-type interface-
number | peer ip-address } [ verbose ] command to check information about the BFD for
RSVP session.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te [ interface [ interface-type interface-number ] ] command
to check the configuration of RSVP-TE.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te peer [ interface interface-type interface-number ] command
to check information about the RSVP neighbor.
l Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics { global | interface [ interface-type interface-
number ] } command to check statistics about RSVP-TE.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 315

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Example
If the configurations are successful, you can view that the status of the BFD session for RSVP
is Up.

NOTE

Information about the BFD session can be checked only after the BFD session parameters are configured
and the session is created successfully.

3.24 Configuring LDP over TE

This section describes how to configure LDP over TE.

3.24.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring LDP over TE, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
On an MPLS network, if LDP is enabled on the edge LSR and TE is supported only on the core
LSR, LDP over TE is recommended. In LDP over TE, a TE tunnel is considered as one hop
along the entire LDP LSP.

NOTE
On a network deployed with LDP over TE, static or dynamic BFD is used to detects faults in an LDP LSP.
If the shutdown command is run on a tunnel interface through which the LDP LSP passes when the BFD
status is Up, the BFD status remains Up.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring LDP over TE, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring IGP to ensure the reachability between LSRs

l Configuring basic MPLS functions of all nodes and interfaces
l Enabling MPLS LDP on the interface in the non-TE domain
l Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel on the TE node

Data Preparation
To configure LDP over TE, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 IP address and loopback address of the interface on each LSR

2 Metrics and link overhead

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 316

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.24.2 Configuring Forwarding Adjacency

By configuring the forwarding adjacency, you can advertise a route of an LSP to neighbors. In
this manner, other nodes can use this LSP.

NOTE

By default, the forwarding adjacency is disabled.

If the Forwarding Adjacency is used, then the IGP shortcut cannot be used at the same time.

Do as follows on the ingress along a CR-LSP tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te igp advertise [ hold-time interval ]

The forwarding adjacency is enabled.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te igp metric { absolute | relative } value

The IGP metric value for the tunnel is configured.

NOTE

IS-IS does not support relative metric.

Step 5 Run:
mpls te commit

The current tunnel configuration is committed.

Step 6 For IS-IS, run:
isis enable [ process-id ]

The IS-IS process on the tunnel interface is enabled.

Step 7 For OSPF, run one of the following commands.
l Run the quit command to return to the system view.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 317

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Run the ospf [ process-id ] command to enter the OSPF view.

l Run the enable traffic-adjustment advertise command to enable the forwarding adjacency.

----End

3.24.3 Establishing LDP Remote Peers on the Two Ends of the TE

Tunnel
To configure LDP over TE, you need to create remote LDP peers on both ends of a TE tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress and egress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls ldp remote-peer remote-peer-name

The view of the MPLS LDP remote peer is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
remote-ip ip-address

The IP address of the remote peer is specified.

----End

3.24.4 (Optional) Configuring the Policy for Triggering the

Establishment of an LSP
A policy is configured to trigger the establishment of an LSP on the ingress and egress of a TE
tunnel.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress and egress of a TE tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 318

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 3 Run:
lsp-trigger { all | host | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | none }

The policy for triggering the establishment of LSPs is configured.

----End

3.24.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration of LDP over TE, you can view that an LDP LSP over TE is set up.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mpls ldp lsp [ all | [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] destination-address
mask-length ] command to check information about the tunnel interface on the ingress of an
LDP LSP.

----End

Example
After the configurations are successful, run the display mpls ldp lsp command, and you can
view that LDP LSP over TE is added.

3.25 Maintaining MPLS TE

This section describes how to clear operation information about MPLS TE, and reset the
automatic bandwidth adjustment.

3.25.1 Checking the Connectivity of the TE Tunnel

This section describes how to check connectivity of a TE tunnel between the ingress and egress.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the TE tunnel detection are complete.

Example
After configuring MPLS TE, run the ping lsp command on the ingress of the TE tunnel, and
you can view whether or not the ingress pings the egress. If the ping fails, run the tracert lsp

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 319

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

command to locate the fault. If the hot-standby parameter is specified, the hot-standby CR-LSP
can be tested. If draft6 is specified, the command is implemented in compliance with draft-ietf-
mpls-lsp-ping-06. By default, the command is implemented in compliance with RFC 4379.

3.25.2 Checking a TE Tunnel By Using NQA

After the configuration of MPLS TE, you can use NQA to detect the connectivity and jitter of
a TE tunnel.

Context
After configuring MPLS TE, you can use NQA to check the connectivity and jitter of the TE
tunnel. For detailed configurations, see the chapter "NQA Configuration" in the HUAWEI
NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - System Management.

3.25.3 Checking Information About Tunnel Faults

If an RSVP-TE tunnel interface goes Down, you can view information about the fault.

Context
If an RSVP-TE tunnel interface goes Down, you can run the following command to view
information about tunnel faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Run display mpls te tunnel-interface last-error [ tunnel-name ] command to view information
about tunnel faults.

----End

Example
Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface last-error command on the ingress, and you can view
last errors of a local node or last errors carried in a PathErr message received from the
downstream node. The errors can be as follows:
l CSPF computation failures
l Errors that occur during the RSVP GR process
l Errors that occur when the RSVP signaling is triggered
l Errors that are carried in the received RSVP PathErr messages

This command shows the last five recorded errors of the TE tunnel.

3.25.4 Clearing the Operation Information

This section describes how to clear statistics about RSVP-TE.

Context
Run the reset command in the user view to clear the operation information.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 320

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset mpls rsvp-te statistics { global | interface [ interface-type interface-number ] }
command in the user view to clear statistics about RSVP-TE.

----End

3.25.5 Resetting the Tunnel Interface

By resetting a tunnel interface, you can activate configurations of the tunnel.

Context
To make the tunnel-related configuration take effect, you can run the mpls te commit command
in the tunnel interface view and run the reset command in the user view.

NOTE

If the configuration is modified in the interface view of the TE tunnel but the mpls te commit command
is not configured, the system cannot execute the reset mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel command to re-
establish the tunnel.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number command to reset the tunnel
interface.

----End

3.25.6 Resetting the RSVP Process

By resetting the RSVP process, you can re-establish all RSVP CR-LSPs or verify the RSVP
operation process.

Context

CAUTION
Resetting the RSVP process results in the release and reestablishment of all RSVP CR-LSPs.

To re-establish all RSVP CR-LSPs or verify the operation process of RSVP, run the following
reset command.

Procedure
l Run the reset mpls rsvp-te command to reset the RSVP process.
----End

3.25.7 Deleting or Resetting the Bypass Tunnel

In the scenario where MPLS TE Auto FRR is enabled, you can delete or re-establish a bypass
tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 321

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Context
In a scenario where MPLS TE Auto FRR is used, you can run the following reset command to
release or re-establish bypass tunnels.

Procedure
l Run the reset mpls te auto-frr { lsp-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id | name bypass-tunnel-
name } command to delete or reset the Auto FRR bypass tunnel.
----End

3.25.8 Enabling the Trap Function of LSP

By configuring the trap function on an LSP, you can notify the NMS of the changes of the LSP
status.

3.26 Configuration Examples

The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS TE.Each configuration
example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration
roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files.

Follow-up Procedure
NOTE

3.26.1 Example for Establishing a Static MPLS TE Tunnel

This section provides an example for configuring a static MPLS TE tunnel, including enabling
MPLS TE, configuring the MPLS TE bandwidth, setting up an MPLS TE tunnel, and setting up
a static CR-LSP.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-2, a static TE tunnel from LSR A to LSR C and a static TE
tunnel from LSR C to LSR A need to be set up. The bandwidth of both tunnels is 10 Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 322

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-2 Networking diagram of static CR-LSP configuration

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
ATM1/0/0 ATM1/0/0 ATM2/0/0 ATM2/0/0
2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.2.1.1/24 3.2.1.2/24

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Assign an IP address to each interface on each LSR, configure the loopback address as the
MPLS LSR ID, and configure OSPF to advertise the route to the network segment
connecting to each interface and LSR ID.
2. Configure the LSR ID and globally enable MPLS and MPLS TE on each node and interface.
3. Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and BC0 bandwidth for the link on each
outgoing interface of each LSR along the tunnel (assume the tunnel obtains bandwidth from
BC0).
4. Create a tunnel interface on the ingress and specify the IP address of the tunnel, tunnel
protocol, destination address, tunnel ID, and the signaling protocol used for establishing
the tunnel.
5. Configure a static LSP associated with the tunnel, and specify the outgoing label and next-
hop address on the ingress, the incoming interface, next-hop address, and outgoing label
on the transit node, and the incoming label and incoming interface on the egress to set up
the LSP.
NOTE

l The outgoing label of each node is the incoming label of the next node.
l When running the static-cr-lsp ingress { tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number | tunnel-name }
destination destination-address { nexthop next-hop-address | outgoing-interface interface-type
interface-number } out-label out-label-value [ bandwidth [ ct0 | ct1 ] bandwidth ] command to
configure the ingress of a CR-LSP, note that tunnel-name must be the same as the tunnel name created
by using the interface tunnel interface -number command. tunnel-name is a case-sensitive character
string in which spaces are not supported. For example, the name of the tunnel created by using the
interface tunnel 2/0/0 command is Tunnel2/0/0. In this case, the parameter of the static CR-LSP on
the ingress is Tunnel2/0/0, ensuring that the tunnel is successfully created. This restriction does not
apply to transit nodes or egresses.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l OSPF process ID and area ID of each LSR

l Tunnel interface names, tunnel interface IP addresses, destination addresses, tunnel IDs,
and tunnel signaling protocol (CR-Static) on LSR A and LSR C
l The maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of links
l Next-hop address and outgoing label of the ingress on the static CR-LSP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 323

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Incoming interface, next-hop address, and outgoing label of the transit node on the static
CR-LSP
l Incoming interface of the egress on the static CR-LSP

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of each interface and a routing protocol.
# Configure the IP address of each interface and the routing protocol as shown in Figure 3-2 to
ensure the reachability between LSRs.
The detailed configuration is not provided here.
Step 2 Configure the basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface atm 1/0/0
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] pvc 1/100
[LSRA-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/100] map ip 2.1.1.2 broadcast
[LSRA-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/100] quit
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] ospf network-type p2p
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] quit

The configurations of LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C are similar, and are not provided here.
Step 3 Configure MPLS-TE bandwidth attributes for links.
# Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth for links and BC0 bandwidth on each outgoing
interface of each LSR along the tunnel. The BC0 bandwidth of links must be greater than the
tunnel bandwidth (10 Mbit/s).
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface atm 1/0/0
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-Atm1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface atm 1/0/0
[LSRB-Atm1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Atm1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Atm1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface atm 2/0/0
[LSRB-Atm2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Atm2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Atm2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] interface atm 2/0/0
[LSRC-Atm2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRC-Atm2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRC-Atm2/0/0] quit

Step 4 Configure an MPLS TE tunnel.

# Create the MPLS TE tunnel from LSR A to LSR C on LSR A.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 324

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0

[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Create the MPLS TE tunnel from LSR C to LSR A on LSR C.

[LSRC] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 5 Create a static CR-LSP from LSR A to LSR C.

# Configure LSR A as the ingress of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRA] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel1/0/0 destination 3.3.3.3
nexthop 2.1.1.2 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure LSR B as the transit node of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRB] static-cr-lsp transit tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface atm 1/0/0 in-label 20
nexthop 3.2.1.2 out-label 30 bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure LSR C as the egress of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRC] static-cr-lsp egress tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface atm 2/0/0 in-label 30

Step 6 Create a static CR-LSP from LSR C to LSR A.

# Configure LSR C as the ingress of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRC] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel2/0/0 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 3.2.1.1 out-label 120 bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure LSR B as the transit node of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRB] static-cr-lsp transit tunnel2/0/0 incoming-interface atm 2/0/0 in-label 120
nexthop 2.1.1.1 out-label 130 bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure LSR A as the egress of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRA] static-cr-lsp egress tunnel2/0/0 incoming-interface atm 1/0/0 in-label 130

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A. You can view
that the status of the tunnel interface is Up.

Run the display mpls te tunnel command on each LSR. You can view the establishment status
of the MPLS TE tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1 3.3.3.3 1 NULL/20 I Tunnel1/0/0
- - - 130/NULL I Tunnel2/0/0
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 325

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- - - 20/30 I Tunnel1/0/0
- - - 120/130 I Tunnel2/0/0
[LSRC] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3.3.3 1.1.1.1 1 NULL/120 I Tunnel2/0/0
- - - 30/NULL I Tunnel1/0/0

Run the display mpls lsp or display mpls static-cr-lsp command on each LSR. You can view
the establishment status of the static CR-LSP.

# View the configuration on LSR A.

[LSRA] display mpls lsp
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: STATIC CRLSP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
3.3.3.3/32 NULL/20 -/Atm1/0/0
-/- 130/NULL Atm1/0/0/-
[LSRA] display mpls static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel1/0/0 3.3.3.3/32 NULL/20 -/Atm1/0/0 Up
tunnel2/0/0 -/- 130/NULL Atm1/0/0/- Up

# Display the configuration on LSR B.

[LSRB] display mpls lsp
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: STATIC CRLSP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
-/- 20/30 GE1/0/0/GE2/0/0
-/- 120/130 GE2/0/0/GE1/0/0
[LSRB] display mpls static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
tunnel1/0/0 -/- 20/30 Atm1/0/0/Atm2/0/0 Up
tunnel2/0/0 -/- 120/130 Atm2/0/0/Atm1/0/0 Up

# Display the configuration on LSR C.

[LSRC] display mpls lsp
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: STATIC CRLSP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
1.1.1.1/32 NULL/120 -/GE2/0/0
-/- 30/NULL GE2/0/0/-
[LSRC] display mpls static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 2 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel2/0/0 1.1.1.1/32 NULL/120 -/GE2/0/0 Up
tunnel1/0/0 -/- 30/NULL GE2/0/0/- Up

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 326

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

When the static CR-LSP is used to establish the MPLS TE tunnel, the packets on the transit node
and the egress are forwarded directly based on the specified incoming label and outgoing label.
Therefore, no information about FECs is displayed on LSR B or LSR C.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Atm1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
pvc 1/100
map ip 2.1.1.2 broadcast
ospf network-type p2p
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/0 destination 3.3.3.3 nexthop
2.1.1.2 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000
static-cr-lsp egress tunnel2/0/0 incoming-interface Atm1/0/0 in-label 130
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Atm1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
pvc 1/100
map ip 2.1.1.1 broadcast
ospf network-type p2p
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface Atm2/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 327

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0

pvc 1/100
map ip 3.2.1.2 broadcast
ospf network-type p2p
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
#
static-cr-lsp transit tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface Atm1/0/0 in-label 20
nexthop 3.2.1.2 out-label 30 bandwidth ct0 10000
static-cr-lsp transit tunnel2/0/0 incoming-interface Atm2/0/0 in-label 120
nexthop 2.1.1.1 out-label 130 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Atm2/0/0
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
pvc 1/100
map ip 3.2.1.1 broadcast
ospf network-type p2p
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel2/0/0 destination 1.1.1.1 nexthop
3.2.1.1 out-label 120 bandwidth ct0 10000
static-cr-lsp egress tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface Atm2/0/0 in-label 30
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 328

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.26.2 Example for Configuring a Static Bidirectional Co-routed LSP

This section uses an example to describe the procedure for configuring a static bidirectional co-
routed LSP, including how to enable MPLS TE, configure MPLS TE bandwidth attributes,
configure an MPLS TE tunnel, and create a static bidirectional co-routed LSP.

Context
MPLS-TP is widely used on transport networks. Although MPLS-TP supports OAM, OAM
itself only supports the network element-level management system, which cannot meet the
requirements for network management over public telecommunication networks. MPLS-TP
OAM supporting static bidirectional co-routed LSP is an effective operation and management
method and can detect, identify, and locate faults in the MPLS-TP user plane.
This example only describes the configuration procedure for a static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
For information about MPLS-TP OAM, see the description in Configuring MPLS-TP OAM.
As shown in Figure 3-3, a static bidirectional co-routed LSP originates from LSR A and
terminates on LSR C. OAM PDUs travel through this LSP and any transit node can send a
response along the same path in the opposite direction. The links for the static bidirectional co-
routed LSP between LSR A and LSR C has the bandwidth of 10 Mbit/s.

Figure 3-3 Networking diagram for a static bidirectional co-routed LSP

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.2.1.1/24 3.2.1.2/24

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Assign an IP address to each interface and configure a routing protocol.
2. Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE.
3. Configure MPLS TE attributes for links.
4. Configure MPLS TE tunnels.
5. Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress for the static bidirectional co-routed
LSP.
6. Bind the tunnel interface configured on LSR C to the static bidirectional co-routed LSP.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Tunnel interface's name and IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, and static CR-LSP
signalling on LSR A and LSR C

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 329

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of each link

l Next-hop address and outgoing label on the ingress
l Inbound interface, next-hop address, and outgoing label on the transit node
l Inbound interface on the egress

Procedure
Step 1 Assign an IP address to each interface and configure a routing protocol.
# Configure an IP address and a mask for each interface and configure OSPF so that all LSRs
can interconnect with each other.
The configuration details are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

The configurations on LSR B and LSR C are similar to the configuration on LSR A.
Step 3 Configure MPLS TE attributes for links.
# Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and BC0 bandwidth for the link on the outbound
interface of each LSR. The BC0 bandwidth of links must be greater than the tunnel bandwidth
(10 Mbit/s).
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

Step 4 Configure MPLS TE tunnel interfaces.

# Create an MPLS TE tunnel on LSR A to reach LSR C.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 330

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1

[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bidirectional
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Create an MPLS TE tunnel on LSR C to reach LSR A.

Step 5 Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress of the static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
# Configure LSR A as the ingress.
[LSRA] bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel/0/0
[LSRA-bi-static-ingress-Tunnell/0/0] forward nexthop 2.1.1.2 out-label 20
bandwidth ct0 10000
[LSRA-bi-static-ingress-Tunnell/0/0] backward in-label 20

# Configure LSR B as a transit node.

[LSRB]bidirectional static-cr-lsp transit lsp1
[LSRB-bi-static-transit-lsp1] forward in-label 20 nexthop 3.2.1.2 out-label 40
bandwidth ct0 10000
[LSRB-bi-static-transit-lsp1] backward in-label 16 nexthop 2.1.1.1 out-label 20
bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure LSR C as the egress.

[LSRC] bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1
[LSRC-bi-static-egress-lsp1] forward in-label 40 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 100
[LSRC-bi-static-egress-lsp1] backward nexthop 3.2.1.1 out-label 16 bandwidth ct0
10000

Step 6 Bind the tunnel interface on LSR C to the static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
[LSRC] interface Tunnel2/0/0
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te passive-tunnel
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

After completing the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSRA. You
can see that the tunnel interface is Up.
Run the display mpls te tunnel command on each LSR to check that MPLS TE tunnels are set
up.
# Check the configuration results on LSR A.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel

# Check the configuration results on LSR A.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 331

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- - - 20/30 I Tunnel1/0/0
- - - 120/130 I Tunnel2/0/0

# Check the configuration results on LSR A.

[LSRC] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3.3.3 1.1.1.1 1 NULL/120 I Tunnel2/0/0
- - - 30/NULL I Tunnel1/0/0

Run the display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp command on each LSR. Information about
the static bidirectional co-routed LSP is displayed.
# Check the configuration results on LSR A.
[LSRA] display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel1/0/0 3.3.3.3/32 NULL/20 -/Pos1/0/0
20/NULL Pos1/0/0- Up

# Check the configuration results on LSR A.

[LSRB] display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
lsp1 -/32 20/40 -/Pos1/0/0
16/20 Pos2/0/0- Up

# Check the configuration results on LSR A.

[LSRC] display mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
lsp1 1.1.1.1/32 40/NULL Pos1/0/0/-
NULL/16 -/Pos1/0/0 Up

When a static bidirectional co-routed LSP is established, packets on a transit node (LSR B) and
the egress (LSR C) are forwarded directly based on the incoming and outgoing labels specified
on the nodes. Therefore, the FEC-relevant contents are empty in the display on LSR B and LSR
C.
After completing the configurations, run the ping command on LSR A. The static bidirectional
co-routed LSP is reachable.
[LSRA] ping lsp te Tunnel 1/0/0
LSP PING FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 : 100 data bytes, pres
s CTRL_C to break
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=1 time = 110 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=2 time = 70 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=3 time = 60 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=4 time = 80 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=5 time = 60 ms

--- FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 ping statistics ---

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 332

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

5 packet(s) transmitted
5 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 60/76/110 ms

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel1/0/0
forward nexthop 2.1.1.2 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000
backward in-label 20
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bidirectional
mpls te commit
#
ip route-static 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 2.1.1.2
ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 2.1.1.2
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp transit lsp1
forward in-label 20 nexthop 3.2.1.2 out-label 40 bandwidth ct0 10000
backward in-label 16 nexthop 2.1.1.1 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 333

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0

mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 2.1.1.1
ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 3.2.1.2
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1
forward in-label 40 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 100
backward nexthop 3.2.1.1 out-label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te passive-tunnel
mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1
mpls te commit
#
ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 3.2.1.1
ip route-static 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 3.2.1.1
#
return

3.26.3 Example for Configuring a 1:1 Tunnel Protection Group Over

a Bidirectional LSP
A tunnel protection group provides end to end protection for a tunnel if a network fault occurs.
This example describes how to configure a 1:1 tunnel protection group.

Context
Figure 3-4 shows an MPLS network. APS is configured on PE1 and PE2. The working tunnel
is established along the path PE1 -> PE2 and the protection tunnel is established along the path
PE1 -> P -> PE2. When the MPLS network operates properly, the working tunnel transmits
MPLS traffic. If the working tunnel fails, MPLS traffic switches to the protection tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 334

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-4 Networking diagram for a 1:1 bidirectional tunnel protection group
Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32

P
G E 1/0/0 G E 2/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 10.1.2.2/24

G E 2/0/0 G E 2/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.2.1/24

PE1 PE2
G E 1/0/0 G E 1/0/0
10.1.3.1/24 10.1.3.2/24
Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32
P rim ary path
B ackup path

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Assign an IP address to each interface and configure a routing protocol.

2. Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE.
3. Configure MPLS TE bandwidth attributes for links.
4. Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress for the static bidirectional co-routed
LSP of primary tunnel.
5. Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress for the static bidirectional co-routed
LSP of protect tunnel.
6. Configure MPLS TE tunnels.
7. Configure APS.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l Tunnel interface's name and IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, and static CR-LSP
signaling on PE1 and PE2
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of each link
l Next-hop address and outgoing label on the ingress
l Inbound interface, next-hop address, and outgoing label on the transit node
l Inbound interface on the egress

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 335

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Assign an IP address to each interface and configure a routing protocol.

Configure an IP address and a mask for each interface and configure OSPF to allow all LSRs to
interconnect with each other.

The configuration details are not provided here.

Step 2 Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

The configurations on PE2 and P are similar to the configuration on PE1.

Step 3 Configure MPLS TE attributes for links.

# Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and BC0 bandwidth for the link on the outbound
interface of each node. The BC0 bandwidth of links must be greater than the tunnel bandwidth
(10 Mbit/s).

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure P.
[P] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 336

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 4 Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress for the static bidirectional co-routed LSP
of primary tunnel.
# Configure PE1 as the ingress.
[PE1] bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel1/0/0
[PE1-bi-static-ingress-Tunnel1/0/0] forward nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label 20
bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-bi-static-ingress-Tunnel1/0/0] backward in-label 20

# Configure P as a transit node.

[P]bidirectional static-cr-lsp transit lsp1
[P-bi-static-transit-lsp1] forward in-label 20 nexthop 10.1.2.1 out-label 40
bandwidth ct0 10000
[P-bi-static-transit-lsp1] backward in-label 16 nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 20
bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure PE2 as the egress.

[PE2] bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel1/0/0
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp1] forward in-label 40 lsrid 2.2.2.2 tunnel-id 100
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp1] backward nexthop 10.1.2.2 out-label 16 bandwidth ct0
10000
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp1] quit

# Bind the tunnel interface on PE2 to the static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
[PE2] interface Tunnel1/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te passive-tunnel
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel1/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

Step 5 Configure the ingress, a transit node, and the egress for the static bidirectional co-routed LSP
of protect tunnel.
# Configure PE1 as the ingress.
[PE1] bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel2/0/0
[PE1-bi-static-ingress-Tunnel2/0/0] forward nexthop 10.1.3.2 out-label 80
bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-bi-static-ingress-Tunnel2/0/0] backward in-label 90
[PE1-bi-static-ingress-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2 as the egress.

[PE2] bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel2/0/0
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp2] forward in-label 80 lsrid 2.2.2.2 tunnel-id 200
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp2] backward nexthop 10.1.3.1 out-label 90 bandwidth ct0
10000
[PE2-bi-static-egress-lsp2] quit

# Bind the tunnel interface on PE2 to the static bidirectional co-routed LSP.
[PE2] interface Tunnel2/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te passive-tunnel
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel2/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 6 Configure MPLS TE tunnel interfaces.

# Create a working tunnel on PE1 to reach PE2.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bidirectional
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Create a protection tunnel on PE1 to reach PE2.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 337

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1] interface tunnel 2/0/0

[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address 1.1.1.9 32
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bidirectional
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/1] quit

# Create a working tunnel on PE2 to reach PE1.

[PE2] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Create a protection tunnel on PE2 to reach PE1.

[PE2] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address 2.2.2.9 32
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 7 Configure APS.

[PE1] interface Tunnel1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te protection tunnel 100 mode revertive wtr 1

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

After completing the configuration, run the display mpls te protection tunnel all verbose
command on PE1. You can see that the tunnel interface is Up.
# Check the configurations on PE1.
[PE1] display mpls te protection tunnel all verbose
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the No.1 protection-group
----------------------------------------------------------------
Work-tunnel id : 1
Protect-tunnel id : 2
Work-tunnel name : Tunnel1/0/0
Protect-tunnel name : Tunnel2/0/0
Work-tunnel reverse-lsp : --
Protect-tunnel reverse-lsp : --
Switch result : work-tunnel
Tunnel using Best-Effort : none
Tunnel using Ordinary : none
Work-tunnel frr in use : none
Work-tunnel defect state : in defect
Protect-tunnel defect state : in defect
Work-tunnel forward-lsp defect state : in defect
Protect-tunnel forward-lsp defect state : in defect
Work-tunnel reverse-lsp defect state : non-defect
Protect-tunnel reverse-lsp defect state : non-defect
HoldOff : 0ms
WTR : 30s
Mode : revertive
Using same path : --
Local state : signal fail for protection
Far end request : no request

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 338

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel1/0/0
forward nexthop 10.1.1.2 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000
backward in-label 20
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel2/0/0
forward nexthop 10.1.3.2 out-label 80 bandwidth ct0 10000
backward in-label 90
#
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bidirectional
mpls te protection tunnel 100 mode revertive wtr 1
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te bidirectional
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
#
return

l Configuration file of P

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 339

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
sysname P
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp transit lsp1
forward in-label 20 nexthop 10.1.2.1 out-label 40 bandwidth ct0 10000
backward in-label 16 nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 20 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel1/0/0
forward in-label 40 lsrid 2.2.2.2 tunnel-id 100
backward nexthop 10.1.2.2 out-label 16 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
bidirectional static-cr-lsp ingress Tunnel2/0/0
forward in-label 80 lsrid 2.2.2.2 tunnel-id 200
backward nexthop 10.1.3.1 out-label 90 bandwidth ct0 10000
#
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 340

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bidirectional
mpls te passive-tunnel
mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel1/0/0
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te bidirectional
mpls te passive-tunnel
mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel2/0/0
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
#
return

3.26.4 Example for Configuring RSVP-TE Tunnel

This section provides an example for configuring an RSVP-TE tunnel, including enabling
MPLS, MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and CSPF.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-5, IS-IS is run on LSR A, LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D. They
are all Level 2 devices.
RSVP-TE is used to establish a TE tunnel from LSR A to LSR D. The bandwidth is 20 Mbit/
s. The maximum reservable bandwidth of links along the tunnel is 100 Mbit/s. The bandwidth
constraints model is the default RDM and the bandwidth of BC0 is 100 Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 341

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-5 Networking diagram of the RSVP-TE tunnel

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 4.4.4.9/32

LSRA LSRD
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 30.1.1.2/24
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0 30.1.1.1/24
Loopback1 20.1.1.1/24 20.1.1.2/24 Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP addresses for the interfaces on each LSR and configuring loopback address
as the LSR ID.
2. Enable IS-IS globally, configure the name of network entity, change cost type, enable IS-
IS TE and enable IS-IS on all interfaces including loopback interfaces.
3. Configure LSR ID and enable MPLS, MPLS TE, MPLS RSVP-TE, and MPLS TE CSPF
globally.
4. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and MPLS RSVP-TE on each interface.
5. Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for the links on each
LSR along the tunnel.
6. Create the tunnel interface on the ingress and specifying the IP address, tunnel protocol,
destination address, tunnel ID, dynamic signaling protocol RSVP-TE, and tunnel
bandwidth.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IS-IS area ID of each LSR, originating system ID, and IS-IS level
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for the links along the tunnel
l Tunnel interface name, IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, tunnel signaling protocol
(RSVP-TE), and tunnel bandwidth

Configuration Procedure
1. Configure IP addresses for interfaces.
Configure the IP address and mask on each interface as shown in Figure 3-5. The detailed
configuration is not mentioned here.
2. Configure the IS-IS protocol to advertise routes.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 342

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
[LSRA-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRA-isis-1] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface loopback 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
[LSRB-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
[LSRC-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
[LSRD-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRD-isis-1] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface loopback 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] quit

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR, and you
can view that LSRs learned routes from each other.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.
[LSRA] display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 10 Routes : 10
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.9/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.9/32 ISIS-L2 15 10 D 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
3.3.3.9/32 ISIS-L2 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
4.4.4.9/32 ISIS-L2 15 30 D 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 343

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

20.1.1.0/24 ISIS-L2 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
30.1.1.0/24 ISIS-L2 15 30 D 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

3. Configure the basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and CSPF.
# Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and RSVP-TE globally on each LSR, enable MPLS, MPLS
TE, and RSVP-TE on all tunnel interfaces, and enable CSPF in the system view on the
ingress.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls te
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] mpls te
[LSRD-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 344

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

4. Configure IS-IS TE.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRA-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRA-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRB-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRC-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRD-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRD-isis-1] quit

5. Configure the MPLS TE link bandwidth.

# Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and the maximum BC0 bandwidth of the
link on all tunnel interfaces.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface pos2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

6. Configure MPLS TE tunnel interface.

# Create tunnel interfaces on the ingress. Then configure IP addresses for the tunnel
interfaces, tunnel protocol, destination address, tunnel ID, dynamic signaling protocol, and
tunnel bandwidth. Finally, commit the configurations to validate them by using the mpls
te commit command.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 4.4.4.9
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 345

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

7. Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A, and you
can view that the status of the tunnel interface goes Up.
[LSRA] display interface tunnel
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2009-01-15, 16:35:10
Description : Tunnel1/0/0 Interface
...

Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command on LSR A to display the information
on the tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel1/0/0
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.9
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.9
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: -
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1024
Created Time : 2010/06/07 16:01:18 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 2000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 346

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Run the display mpls te cspf tedb all command on LSR A to display the link information
in the TEDB.
[LSRA] display mpls te cspf tedb all
Maximum Node Supported: 128 Maximum Link Supported: 256
Current Total Node Number: 4 Current Total Link Number: 6
Id Router-Id IGP Process-Id Area Link-Count
1 3.3.3.9 ISIS 1 Level-2 2
2 2.2.2.9 ISIS 1 Level-2 2
3 4.4.4.9 ISIS 1 Level-2 1
4 1.1.1.9 ISIS 1 Level-2 1

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.9
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
mpls te commit
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 347

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 348

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.5 Example for Setting Up a CR-LSP by Using the CR-LSP

Attribute Template
This section provides an example for setting up a CR-LSP by using a CR-LSP attribute template,
including the configurations of enabling MPLS and MPLS TE, configuring a CR-LSP attribute
template, and using the CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-6, a primary CR-LSP is set up, with LSR A being the ingress
and LSR D being the egress. The primary CR-LSP needs to be configured with a hot-standby
CR-LSP and an ordinary backup CR-LSP. In this manner, when the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic
can be switched to the hot-standby CR-LSP or ordinary backup CR-LSP.

Figure 3-6 Networking diagram of setting up a CR-LSP by using a CR-LSP attribute template
LSRC
/0 PO
S 1/0 24 10. S2/0
PO .1.2/ 1.4 /0
1 .1/2 PO
0/0 0 . 41 S
1.1.1.1/32 S1 /
2 4 1 0.1 1/0/0 4.4.4.4/32
O
P .1.1 / .4.2
1 POS2/0/0 LSRE POS2/0/0 /24
10.
10.1.3.1/24 10.1.6.2/24
PO POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
/0
LSRA 10 S3/
.1. 0/0
10.1.3.2/24 10.1.6.1/24
S 3/0 /24 LSRD
2.1 PO .5.2
/24 PO 0 .1
10 S1/ 2 / 0/ 4 10
.1. 0/0 S /2
2.2
/24 PO .5.1
.1
10
LSRB

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 349

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

1. Configure an IP address and a routing protocol for each interface so that they can
communicate with each other at the network layer.
2. Enable MPLS and MPLS TE in the system view and in each interface view.
3. Configure a CR-LSP attribute template on the ingress of the CR-LSP.
4. Create a CR-LSP on the TE tunnel interface by using the CR-LSP attribute template.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l LSR ID of each device
l Name of each CR-LSP attribute template and attributes of each template
l IP address of the tunnel interface, destination address of the tunnel, and tunnel ID

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address and an IGP for each interface so that they can communicate with each
other at the network layer.
The configuration details are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure the LSR ID for each device, and enable MPLS and MPLS TE in the system and
interface views on each device.
# Configure LSR A.
<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos3/0/0
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] quit

NOTE

The configurations of LSR B, LSR C, LSR D, and LSR E are similar to those of LSR A, and are not provided
here.

Step 3 Configure a CR-LSP attribute template and its explicit paths.

# On LSR A, configure the path LSR A->LSR C->LSR D as the explicit path named
up_path.
[LSRA] explicit-path up_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] next hop 10.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] next hop 10.1.4.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 350

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# On LSR A, configure the path LSRA->LSRB->LSRD as the explicit path named

down_path.
[LSRA] explicit-path down_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] next hop 10.1.2.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] next hop 10.1.5.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] quit

# On LSR A, configure the path LSRA->LSRE->LSRD as the explicit path named

middle_path.
[LSRA] explicit-path middle_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] next hop 10.1.3.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] next hop 10.1.6.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] quit

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_1.

[LSRA] lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_1] explicit-path up_path
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_1] priority 5 5
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_1] hop-limit 12
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_1] commit

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_2.

[LSRA] lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_2
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] explicit-path down_path
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] priority 5 5
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] hop-limit 15
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] commit

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_3.

[LSRA] lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] explicit-path middle_path
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] priority 5 5
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] commit

NOTE
The priorities of the CR-LSP attribute templates configured on the same tunnel interface must be the same.

Step 4 Set up a CR-LSP by using the CR-LSP attribute template, with LSR A being the ingress and
LSR D being the egress.
# Set up a CR-LSP, with LSRA being the ingress and LSRD being the egress.
[LSRA] interface tunnel1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 4.4.4.4
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te primary-lsp-constraint lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint 1 lsp-attribute
lsp_attribute_2
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te ordinary-lsp-constraint 1 lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface lsp-constraint command on LSRA. You can view
the configurations of the LSP attribute template.
<LARA> display mpls te tunnel-interface lsp-constraint
Tunnel Name : Tunnel1/0/0
Primary-lsp-constraint Name : lsp_attribute_1
Hotstandby-lsp-constraint Number: 1
Hotstandby-lsp-constraint Name : lsp_attribute_2
Ordinary-lsp-constraint Number : 1
Ordinary-lsp-constraint Name : lsp_attribute_3

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 351

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose on LSR A. You can see that the LSP attribute template
is used to set up a CR-LSP.
<LSRA> display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 1
ER-Hop Table Index : 0 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: 1 NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1024
Created Time : 2010/07/01 17:40:35 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 5
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

No : 2
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 2049
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32770
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Hot-Standby
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos3/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 352

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0

IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 1
ER-Hop Table Index : 1 AR-Hop Table Index: 1
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: 0
PSB Handle : 1025
Created Time : 2010/07/01 17:40:36 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 5
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# After shutting down POS 1/0/0 on LSR C and POS 1/0/0 on LSR B, you can see that the LSP
attribute template is used to set up an ordinary CR-LSP.
<LSRA> display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32771
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Ordinary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 1
ER-Hop Table Index : 2 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1212
Created Time : 2010/07/02 15:24:18 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 353

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0

CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 5
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
explicit-path middle_path
next hop 10.1.3.2
next hop 10.1.6.2
#
explicit-path up_path
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 10.1.4.2
#
explicit-path down_path
next hop 10.1.2.2
next hop 10.1.5.2
#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
explicit-path up_path
priority 5
hop-limit 12
commit
#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_2
explicit-path down_path
priority 5
hop-limit 15
commit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 354

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3
explicit-path middle_path
priority 5
commit

#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te primary-lsp-constraint lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint 1 lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_2
mpls te ordinary-lsp-constraint 1 lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.5.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 355

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.4.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 356

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR E

#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.6.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.6 Example for Configuring RSVP Authentication

This section provides an example for configuring RSVP authentication, improving network
security.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-7, Eth-Trunk 1 member interfaces on LSR A and LSR B are
GE 1/0/0, GE 2/0/0, and GE 3/0/0. An MPLS TE tunnel using RSVP is established between
LSR A and LSR C.
The handshake function is required to implement RSVP key authentication between LSR A and
LSR B and prevent forged RSVP requests for reserving resources from causing resource
exhaustion. In addition, the message window function is required to prevent RSVP message mis-
sequence.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 357

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-7 Networking diagram of RSVP authentication

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
Eth-Trunk 1 Eth-Trunk 1
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE4/0/0 GE1/0/0

LSRA LSRB 20.1.1.1/24 20.1.1.2/24 LSRC
GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure an MPLS network and set up an MPLS TE tunnel.
2. Configure authentication on every interface to authenticate RSVP messages.
3. Configure the handshake on every interface.
4. Configure the window size on every interface to enable the interface to save 32 sequence
numbers.
NOTE

Setting the size of a sliding window to be a value larger than 32 is recommended. If the size of a sliding
window is too small, received RSVP messages with the sequence number beyond the window size are
discarded, resulting in the termination of an RSVP neighbor relationship.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l OSPF process ID and area ID of the interface on each LSR
l RSVP authentication key and local password
l Window size for RSVP authentication

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask of each interface as shown in Figure 3-7. For detailed
configuration, see configuration files in this example.
Step 2 Configure OSPF.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the route to the network segment of each interface and
the host route of each LSR ID. For detailed configuration, see configuration files in this example.
After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR. You can view
that the LSRs have learned routes from each other.
Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE, MPLS RSVP-TE, and CSPF.
# Configure LSR A.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 358

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1

[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface eth-trunk 1
[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls
[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls te
[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] quit

NOTE

The configurations of LSR B and LSR C are similar to that of LSR A, and are not provided here.

Step 4 Configure OSPF TE.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] ospf 1
[LSRA-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRA-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] ospf 1
[LSRB-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRB-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] ospf 1
[LSRC-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRC-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit

Step 5 Configure the MPLS TE tunnel.

# Configure the MPLS TE tunnel on LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A. You can view
the tunnel interface is Up.
[LSRA] display interface tunnel 1/0/0
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2007-9-27, 16:38:41
Description : Tunnel1/0/0 Interface, Route Port
...

Step 6 Configure the RSVP authentication on interfaces of the MPLS TE links on LSR A and LSR B.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface eth-trunk 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 359

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication plain 123456789

[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake 12345678
[LSRA-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication window-size 32

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface eth-trunk 1
[LSRB-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication plain 123456789
[LSRB-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake 12345678
[LSRB-Eth-Trunk1] mpls rsvp-te authentication window-size 32

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

Run the reset mpls rsvp-te command, and then run the display interface tunnel command on
LSR A. You can view that the tunnel interface is Up.
Run the display mpls rsvp-te interface command on LSR A or LSR B. You can view
information about RSVP authentication.
[LSRA] display mpls rsvp-te interface eth-trunk 1
Interface: Eth-Trunk1
Interface Address: 10.1.1.1
Interface state: UP Interface Index: 0x406
Total-BW: 0 Used-BW: 0
Hello configured: NO Num of Neighbors: 1
SRefresh feature: DISABLE SRefresh Interval: 30 sec
Mpls Mtu: 1500 Retransmit Interval: 500 msec
Increment Value: 1
Authentication: ENABLE
Challenge: ENABLE WindowSize: 32
Next Seq # to be sent:3570642420 4 Key ID: d5d7adf41800
Bfd Enabled: DISABLE Bfd Min-Tx: 10
Bfd Min-Rx: 10 Bfd Detect-Multi: 3

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface Eth-Trunk1
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te authentication plain 123456789
mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake 12345678
mpls rsvp-te authentication window-size 32
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 360

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 1
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Eth-Trunk1
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te authentication plain 123456789
mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake 12345678
mpls rsvp-te authentication window-size 32
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
eth-trunk 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 361

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabiEthernet1/0/0
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
Return

3.26.7 Example for Configuring Tunnel Properties

This section provides an example for configuring properties of an MPLS TE tunnel, including
the maximum available bandwidth, maximum reservable bandwidth, and the Color field that is
the administrative group property of each link.

Networking Requirements

Figure 3-8 Networking diagram of configuring tunnel properties

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0
192.168.1.1/24 192.168.2.1/24 192.168.2.2/24
POS1/0/0
LSRA 192.168.1.2/24 LSRB POS3/0/0 POS2/0/0 LSRC
192.168.3.1/24 192.168.3.2/24

On the network shown in Figure 3-8, the maximum reservable bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s. The
RDM is used and the bandwidth of BC0 is 100 Mbit/s.

LSR A has two tunnels to LSR C, namely, Tunnel 1/0/0 and Tunnel 1/0/1, each of which requires
the bandwidth of 40 Mbit/s. These two tunnels provide the total bandwidth of 80 Mbit/s, greater
than the bandwidth (50 Mbit/s) of the link between LSR A and LSR B. In addition, Tunnel 1/0/1
has a higher priority than Tunnel 1/0/0, and preemption is allowed.

It is required to use the tunnel affinity property and mask based on the administrative group
property. Tunnel 1/0/0 on LSR A uses one physical link from LSR B to LSR C and Tunnel 1/0/1
uses another physical link from LSR B to LSR C.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 362

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure basic MPLS TE capability. (See "Configuration Roadmap" in Example for
Configuring the RSVP-TE Tunnel.)
2. Configure the administrative group properties of the outgoing interface of the tunnel on
each node along the tunnel.
3. Determine the affinity property and the mask of each tunnel based on the administrative
group properties and the networking requirements.
4. Specify the priority of tunnels as required.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l OSPF process ID and OSPF area ID of each LSR
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for the link along the tunnel
l Administrative group property of the link LSR A --> LSR B and administrative group
property of the link LSR B --> LSR C
l Affinity property and its mask
l Tunnel interface name, IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, tunnel bandwidth, tunnel
priority, and tunnel signaling protocol (by default, RSVP-TE is used.)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses for the interfaces.
On the network shown in Figure 3-8, configure the IP address and mask for interfaces, including
the loopback interface.
The detailed configuration is not provided here.
Step 2 Configure the IGP protocol.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the route to network segment of each interface and
LSR ID.
The detailed configuration is not provided here.
Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS functions, and enable MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and OSPF TE. Enable
CSPF on the ingress.
# Configure the basic MPLS functions, and enable MPLS TE and RSVP-TE on LSR A, LSR B,
and LSR C.
Take LSR A as an example.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 363

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure OSPF TE on LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C. Use the display on LSR A as an example.
[LSRA] ospf
[LSRA-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRA-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRA-ospf-1] quit

The configurations of LSR B and LSR C are similar to that of LSR A, and are not provided here.
# Enable CSPF on LSR A, the ingress node.
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit

Step 4 Configure MPLS TE properties for the links.

# Set the maximum reservable bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s, and the BC0 bandwidth to 100 Mbit/
s.
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000

# Set the administrative group property to 0x10001 for the link on LSR A.
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te link administrative group 10001
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Set the MPLS TE properties for the links on LSR B.

[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te link administrative group 10101
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 3/0/0
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] quit

After the configuration, check the TEDB on LSR A for the following properties:
l Maximum bandwidth
l Maximum reservable bandwidth
l Color field, that is, the administrative group property of the links
[LSRA] display mpls te cspf tedb node
Router ID: 1.1.1.1
IGP Type: OSPF Process Id: 1
MPLS-TE Link Count: 1
Link[1]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.1.1
Peer IP Address: 192.168.1.2
Peer Router Id: 2.2.2.2
Peer OSPF Router Id: 2.2.2.2
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x10001
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 100000 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 364

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1

BW Unreserved:
Class ID:

[0]: 100000 (kbps), [1]: 100000 (kbps)

[2]: 100000 (kbps), [3]: 100000 (kbps)
[4]: 100000 (kbps), [5]: 100000 (kbps)
[6]: 100000 (kbps), [7]: 100000 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
Router ID: 2.2.2.2
IGP Type: OSPF Process Id: 1
MPLS-TE Link Count: 3
Link[1]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.2.1
Peer IP Address: 192.168.2.2
Peer Router Id: 3.3.3.3
Peer OSPF Router Id: 3.3.3.3
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x10101
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 100000 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1
BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:

[0]: 100000 (kbps), [1]: 100000 (kbps)

[2]: 100000 (kbps), [3]: 100000 (kbps)
[4]: 100000 (kbps), [5]: 100000 (kbps)
[6]: 100000 (kbps), [7]: 100000 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
Link[2]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.1.2
Peer IP Address: 192.168.1.1
Peer Router Id: 1.1.1.1
Peer OSPF Router Id: 1.1.1.1
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x0
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 365

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[0]: 100000 (kbps), [1]: 100000 (kbps)

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 366

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 5 Create MPLS TE tunnels.

# Create Tunnel 1/0/0 on LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 367

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3

[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 40000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te affinity property 10101 mask 11011
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

The tunnels use the default setup and holding priorities, which are the lowest priority with the
value being 7.
The affinity property of the tunnel is 0x10101, and the mask is 0x11011, both of which match
the administrative group property of the links along the tunnel.
After the configuration, check the status of the tunnel on LSR A.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel-interface
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 1

Check the TEDB. You can view the change of bandwidth used by the links.
[LSRA] display mpls te cspf tedb node
Router ID: 1.1.1.1
IGP Type: OSPF Process Id: 1
MPLS-TE Link Count: 1
Link[1]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.1.1
Peer IP Address: 192.168.1.2
Peer Router Id: 2.2.2.2
Peer OSPF Router Id: 2.2.2.2
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x10001
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 100000 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1
BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 100000 (kbps), [1]: 100000 (kbps)
[2]: 100000 (kbps), [3]: 100000 (kbps)
[4]: 100000 (kbps), [5]: 100000 (kbps)
[6]: 100000 (kbps), [7]: 60000 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
Router ID: 2.2.2.2
IGP Type: OSPF Process Id: 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 368

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 369

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Link[3]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.3.1
Peer IP Address: 192.168.3.2
Peer Router Id: 3.3.3.3
Peer OSPF Router Id: 3.3.3.3
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x10011
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 100000 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 100000 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1
BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 100000 (kbps), [1]: 100000 (kbps)
[2]: 100000 (kbps), [3]: 100000 (kbps)
[4]: 100000 (kbps), [5]: 100000 (kbps)
[6]: 100000 (kbps), [7]: 100000 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
Router ID: 3.3.3.3
IGP Type: OSPF Process Id: 1
MPLS-TE Link Count: 2
Link[1]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.2.2
Peer IP Address: 192.168.2.1
Peer Router Id: 2.2.2.2
Peer OSPF Router Id: 2.2.2.2
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x0
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 0 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 0 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 0 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1
BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 370

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)

[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
Link[2]:
Interface IP Address(es): 192.168.3.2
Peer IP Address: 192.168.3.1
Peer Router Id: 2.2.2.2
Peer OSPF Router Id: 2.2.2.2
IGP Area: 0
Link Type: point-to-point Link Status: Active
IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Color: 0x0
Bandwidth Allocation Model : Russian Doll Model
Maximum Link-Bandwidth: 0 (kbps)
Maximum Reservable Bandwidth: 0 (kbps)
Bandwidth Constraints: Local Overbooking Multiplier:
BC[0]: 0 (kbps) LOM[0]: 1
BC[1]: 0 (kbps) LOM[1]: 1
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)
BW Unreserved:
Class ID:
[0]: 0 (kbps), [1]: 0 (kbps)
[2]: 0 (kbps), [3]: 0 (kbps)
[4]: 0 (kbps), [5]: 0 (kbps)
[6]: 0 (kbps), [7]: 0 (kbps)
[8]: 0 (kbps), [9]: 0 (kbps)
[10]: 0 (kbps), [11]: 0 (kbps)
[12]: 0 (kbps), [13]: 0 (kbps)
[14]: 0 (kbps), [15]: 0 (kbps)

BW Unreserved for Class type 0 indicates the available bandwidth from the maximum
reservable bandwidth for various priorities. The command output shows that the unreserved
bandwidth changes for CT 7 on the outgoing interfaces on each LSR along the tunnel. This
means that some tunnels succeed in reserving 40 Mbit/s bandwidth with the priority being 7.
The bandwidth allocation also shows the path that the tunnel uses. This indicates that the affinity
property and the mask of the tunnel must match the administrative group property of the links.

Run the display mpls te tunnel command on LSR B. You can view the outgoing interface of
the tunnel.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel

# Create Tunnel 1/0/1 on LSR A.

[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 101
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te bandwidth ct0 40000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te affinity property 10011 mask 11101
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te priority 6
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 371

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 6 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display interface Tunnel or display mpls te tunnel-
interface command to check the status of the tunnel on LSR A. You can view that the status of
Tunnel 1/0/0 is Down. This is because the maximum reservable bandwidth of the physical link
(LSR A --> LSR B) is not enough, and the bandwidth of Tunnel 1/0/0 is preempted by Tunnel
1/0/1 with a higher priority.
Run the display mpls te cspf tedb node command to check the TEDB and the changes of
bandwidth used on the links. The command output proves that Tunnel 1/0/1 passes by POS 3/0/0
on LSR B.
Run the display mpls te tunnel command on LSR B. You can view the outgoing interface of
the tunnel.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te link administrative group 10001
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 40000
mpls te affinity property 10101 mask 11011
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel1/0/1
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 101
mpls te bandwidth ct0 40000
mpls te priority 6
mpls te affinity property 10001 mask 11101

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 372

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te link administrative group 10101
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te link administrative group 10011
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 373

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.8 Example for Configuring SRLG (TE Auto FRR)

This section provides an example for configuring the SRLG based on TE Auto FRR, including
configuring the SRLG number and configuring the SRLG path calculation mode.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-9 shows a networking diagram of an MPLS network. An RSVP-TE tunnel has been
set up between PE1 and PE2, the path of the tunnel is PE1 --> P1 --> PE2, and the outbound
interface of the tunnel on P1 is GE 2/0/0.
Links to network segments 10.2.1.0/30 and 10.5.1.0/30 are in SRLG 1.
To enhance the reliability of the tunnel, it is required that TE Auto FRR be enabled on P1 and
that the auto bypass tunnel's path is preferred to avoid the links that have a member in the same
SRLG as the link of the primary tunnel. If no path is available, the path calculation is performed
regardless of the SRLG attribute.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 374

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-9 Networking diagram of TE Auto FRR

Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32

G
10 E2/
P2 .4. 0/0
1.1
/30
GE1/0/0
10.3.1.2/30
Loopback1 10 GE3
.4.
4.4.4.4/32 GE4/0/0 1.2 /0/0
10.3.1.1 /30 /30
GE2/0/0 GE1/0/0
PE1 P1 SRLG 2
10.2.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30 PE2
GE1/0/0 SRLG1 GE1/0/0 GE3/0/0 SRLG1 GE2/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30 10.5.1.2/30
Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 5.5.5.5/32
Path of the primary CR-LSP

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP address and enable IGP on each node.

2. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE and MPLS RSVP-TE globally and in the interfaces view of each
node.
3. Configure IS-IS TE on each node and enable CSPF on PE1 and P1.
4. Configure SRLG numbers for SRLG member interfaces.
5. Configure the SRLG path calculation mode in the system view on the PLR node.
6. Set up an RSVP-TE tunnel between PE1 and PE2, with the explicit path being PE1 --> P1
--> PE2.
7. Enable TE FRR in the tunnel interface view of the ingress and enable TE Auto FRR on the
outbound interface of the primary tunnel on PLR node.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l SRLG number
l SRLG path calculation mode (preferred or strict)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 375

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

As shown in Figure 3-9, configure an IP address for each interface, create loopback interface
on each node, and then configure the IP address of the loopback interface as the MPLS LSR ID.
For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example, and are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure an IGP.
Configure OSPF or IS-IS on each node to ensure that nodes can communicate with each other.
The example in this document use IS-IS. For configuration details, see the configuration file of
this example.
Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions.
On each node, configure an LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system view. Enable MPLS in the
interface view. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.
Step 4 Configure basic MPLS TE functions.
On each node, enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the MPLS view and in the interface
view. Configure the maximum bandwidth and maximum reservable bandwidth for each
interface. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.
Step 5 Configure IS-IS TE and CSPF.
Configure IS-IS TE on each node and CSPF on PE1 and P1. For configuration details, see the
configuration file of this example.
Step 6 Configure SRLG
# On P1, add links to network segments 10.2.1.0/30 10.5.1.0/30 to SRLG 1.
[P1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te srlg 1
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[P1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te srlg 1
[P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure the SRLG path calculation mode on the PLR node.

[P1] mpls
[P1-mpls] mpls te srlg path-calculation preferred

# Run the display mpls te srlg command on P1, and you can view information about the SRLG
and the interfaces that belong to the SRLG.
[P1] display mpls te srlg all
Total SRLG supported : 512
Total SRLG configured : 2

SRLG 1: GE2/0/0 GE3/0/0

# Run the display mpls te link-administration srlg-information command on P1, and you can
view information about the SRLG memberships of the interfaces.
[P1] display mpls te link-administration srlg-information

SRLGs on GigabitEthernet2/0/0:
1

SRLGs on GigabitEthernet3/0/0:
1

# Run the display mpls te cspf tedb srlg command on P1, and you can view TEDB information
of the specified SRLG.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 376

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[P1] display mpls te cspf tedb srlg 1

Interface-Address IGP-Type Area
10.2.1.1 ISIS 1
10.5.1.1 ISIS 1
10.2.1.1 ISIS 2
10.5.1.1 ISIS 2

Step 7 Configure the explicit path of the primary tunnel.

# Configure the explicit path of the primary tunnel on PE1.

<PE1> system-view
[PE1] explicit-path main
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.1.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.2.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 5.5.5.5
[PE1-explicit-path-main] quit

# Display information about the explicit path on PE1.

[PE1] display explicit-path main
Path Name : main Path Status : Enabled
1 10.1.1.2 Strict Include
2 10.2.1.2 Strict Include
3 5.5.5.5 Strict Include

Step 8 Configure the tunnel interfaces for the primary tunnel.

# Create a tunnel interface on PE1, specify an explicit path, and configure the tunnel bandwidth.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 5.5.5.5
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path main
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

# Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1, and you can see that the status of
the tunnel is Up.
[PE1] display interface tunnel 1/0/0
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
...

NOTE

Take note of the preceding items that appear in the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command output.
Information in "..." can be ignored.

Step 9 Configure TE Auto FRR.

# Enable TE auto FRR on the GE2/0/0 of P1.

[P1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te auto-frr link
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Enable TE FRR in the tunnel interface view of PE1.

[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te fast-reroute
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

Run the display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel1/0/0 command on PE1, and you can see that the
local protection is available on the outbound interface (10.2.1.1) of the primary tunnel on P1.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 377

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1] display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel1/0/0

Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel1/0/0
Lsp ID : 5.5.5.5 :1
Hop Information
Hop 0 10.1.1.1
Hop 1 10.1.1.2 Label 65536
Hop 2 1.1.1.1 Label 65536
Hop 3 10.2.1.1 Local-Protection available
Hop 4 10.2.1.2 Label 3
Hop 5 5.5.5.5 Label 3

Step 10 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on P1, and you can
see that the primary tunnel is bound with a bypass tunnel, tunnel 0/0/2048. The FRR next hop
is 10.4.1.2.
[P1] display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 3072
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit LSP Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Egress LSR ID : 5.5.5.5
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -

ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: 2

C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 65546
Created Time : 2009/03/30 09:52:03
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 10000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : Not Used
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel0/0/2048], InnerLabel[3]
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : 10.4.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : 2049
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 378

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel0/0/2048 command on the P1 to check the path
of the bypass tunnel, you can see that the path of the bypass tunnel is P1-->P2-->PE2.
[P1] display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel0/0/2048
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel0/0/2048
Lsp ID : 1.1.1.1 :2049 :1
Hop Information
Hop 0 10.3.1.1
Hop 1 10.3.1.2
Hop 2 2.2.2.2
Hop 3 10.4.1.1
Hop 4 10.4.1.2
Hop 5 5.5.5.5

# Run the shutdown command on GE 4/0/0 of P1.

[P1] interface gigabitethernet4/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] shutdown
[P1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] return

# Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1, and you can see that the status of
the primary tunnel is Up.
[PE1] display interface tunnel 1/0/0
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
...

NOTE

Take note of the preceding items that appear in the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command output.
Information in "..." can be ignored.

# Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on P1, and you can
see that the primary tunnel is still bound with the tunnel 0/0/2048 and the FRR next hop is
10.5.1.2.
<P1> display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Egress LSR ID : 5.5.5.5
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: 5
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 65547
Created Time : 2009/03/30 09:52:03
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 10000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 379

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : Not Used
Bypass Tunnel Id : 201359400
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel0/0/2048], InnerLabel[3]
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : 10.5.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : 2049
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel0/0/2048 command on P1, you can see the path
of the auto bypass tunnel.
[P1] display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel0/0/2048
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel0/0/2048
Lsp ID : 123.1.1.1 :2049 :2
Hop Information
Hop 0 10.5.1.1
Hop 1 10.5.1.2
Hop 2 5.5.5.5

# You can see that the path of the auto bypass tunnel is P1-->PE2 rather than P1-->P2-->PE2.
That is because that the SRLG path calculation mode is configured as preferred. Therefore,
CSPF tries to calculate the path of the bypass tunnel to avoid the links in the same SRLG as the
protected interface(s); if the calculation fails, CSPF does not take the SRLG as a constraint.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 5.5.5.5
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 380

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252

isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te srlg path-calculation preferred
mpls te cspf
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te auto-frr link
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls te srlg 1
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls te srlg 1
mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 381

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0006.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 382

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.9 Example for Configuring SRLG (Hot-standby)

This section provides an example for configuring the SRLG based on hot standby, including
configuring the SRLG number and configuring SRLG path calculation mode.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-10 shows a networking diagram of an MPLS network. An RSVP-TE tunnel has been
set up between the PE1 and PE2 and the path of the tunnel is PE1 --> P4 --> PE2.
The link PE1 --> P1--> P2 --> P4 and the link PE1 --> P4 are in the same SRLG (SRLG1 for
example); the link P4 --> PE2 and the link P4 --> P2 --> P3 --> PE2 are in the same SLRG (take
SRLG2 for example.)
To enhance the reliability of the tunnel, a hot standby CR-LSP is required and the backup tunnel's
path should avoid the links that have a member in the same SRLG as the link of the primary
tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 383

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-10 Networking diagram of TE FRR

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
GE2/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.2.1.1/3010.2.1.2/30 10.4.1.1/30 10.4.1.2/30

GE1/0/0 P1 P2 SRLG 2 P3
GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.1.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30 10.7.1.1/30

SRLG 1
GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 10.5.1.2 /30 10.7.1.2/30
PE1 P4 PE2

GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE3/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE3/0/0

10.8.1.1/30 10.3.1.1/30 10.3.1.2/30 10.6.1.1/30 10.6.1.2/30 10.8.1.2/30
Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
5.5.5.5/32 4.4.4.4/32 6.6.6.6/32

Path of the primary CR-LSP

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure IP address and enable IGP on each node.
2. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE and MPLS RSVP-TE globally and in the interface view on all
nodes.
3. Set up an RSVP-TE tunnel between PE1 and PE2, and the explicit path is PE1 --> P1 -->
PE2.
4. Configure SRLG number on the outbound interface of the link that is in the same SRLG
as the link of the primary tunnel.
5. Configure SRLG path calculation mode in the system view on the ingress.
6. Configure a hot-standby CR-LSP.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l SRLG number
l SRLG path calculation mode (preferred or strict)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
As shown in Figure 3-10, configure an IP address for each interface, create the loopback
interface on each node, and then configure the IP addresses of the loopback interfaces as the
MPLS LSR ID. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 384

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The detailed configuration is not provided here.

Step 2 Configure IGP.

Configure OSPF or IS-IS on each node to ensure that nodes can communicate with each other.
The example in this document use IS-IS. For configuration details, see the configuration file of
this example.

Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions.

On each node, configure an LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system view. Enable MPLS in the
interface view. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.

Step 4 Configure basic MPLS TE functions and enable MPLS RSVP-TE.

On each node, enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the system view and in the interface
view. Configure the maximum bandwidth and maximum reservable bandwidth for each
interface. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.

Step 5 Configure IS-IS TE and CSPF.

Configure IS-IS TE on each node and CSPF on PE1. For configuration details, see the
configuration file of this example.

Step 6 Configure the explicit path of the primary CR-LSP.

# Configure the explicit path of the primary CR-LSP on PE1.

<PE1> system-view
[PE1] explicit-path main
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.3.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.6.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 6.6.6.6
[PE1-explicit-path-main] quit

# Display information about the explicit path on PE1.

[PE1] display explicit-path main
Path Name : main Path Status : Enabled
1 10.1.1.2 Strict Include
2 10.2.1.2 Strict Include
3 5.5.5.5 Strict Include

Step 7 Configure the tunnel interfaces for the primary tunnel.

# Create a tunnel interface on PE1, specify an explicit path, and configure the tunnel bandwidth.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 6.6.6.6
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path main
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1, and you can see that the status of the
tunnel is Up.
[PE1] display interface tunnel 1/0/0
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
...

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 385

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Take note of the preceding items that appear in the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command
output. Information in "..." can be ignored.
Step 8 Configure SRLG
# Configure SRLG1 for the link PE1 --> P1 and the link PE1 --> P4.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te srlg 1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te srlg 1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te srlg 2

# Configure SRLG 2 for the link P2 --> P3.

[P2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te srlg 2
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure the SRLG path calculation mode on the ingress.

[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te srlg path-calculation strict
[PE1-mpls] quit

Run the display mpls te srlg command, and you can view information about the SRLG and the
interfaces that belong to that SRLG.
[P1] display mpls te srlg all
Total SRLG supported : 512
Total SRLG configured : 2

SRLG 1: GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0

SRLG 2: GE2/0/0

Run the display mpls te link-administration srlg-information command, and you can view
information about the memberships on the interface.
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration srlg-information

SRLGs on GigabitEthernet1/0/0: 1

SRLGs on GigabitEthernet2/0/0: 1 2

Run the display mpls te cspf tedb srlg command, and you can view TEDB information of the
specified SRLG.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te cspf tedb srlg 1
Interface-Address IGP-Type Area
10.1.1.1 ISIS 1
10.1.1.1 ISIS 2
10.3.1.1 ISIS 1
10.3.1.1 ISIS 2
[PE1] display mpls te cspf tedb srlg 2
Interface-Address IGP-Type Area
10.3.1.1 ISIS 1
10.3.1.1 ISIS 2
10.4.1.1 ISIS 1
10.4.1.1 ISIS 2

Step 9 Configure a hot-standby CR-LSP on the ingress.

# Configure PE1.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 386

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0

[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te backup hot-standby
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

Run the display mpls te hot-standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1, and you
can view information about the hot standby.
[PE1] display mpls te hot-standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the Tunnel1/0/0 hot-standby state
----------------------------------------------------------------

session id : 100
main LSP token : 0x100201a
hot-standby LSP token : 0x100201b
HSB switch result : Primary LSP
WTR : 10s
using same path : --

Step 10 Verify the configuration.

# Run the shutdown command on GE 3/0/0 of PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] shutdown
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls te hot-standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1 again,
and you can see that the hot-standby LSP token is 0x0. This means that the hot-standby LSP is
not set up even though there are paths for setting up the hot-standby LSP.
[PE1] display mpls te hot-standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the Tunnel1/0/0 hot-standby state
----------------------------------------------------------------

session id : 100
main LSP token : 0x100201c
hot-standby LSP token : 0x0
HSB switch result : Primary LSP
WTR : 10s
using same path : --

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te srlg path-calculation strict
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.3.1.2
next hop 10.6.1.2
next hop 6.6.6.6
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0005.00
traffic-eng level-1-2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 387

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls te srlg 1
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls te srlg 1
mpls te srlg 2
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.8.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 6.6.6.6
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te backup hot-standby
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 388

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return?
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls te srlg 2
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of P3
#
sysname P3
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 389

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of P4
#
sysname P4
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.6.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 390

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 6.6.6.6
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0006.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.6.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.7.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.8.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 6.6.6.6 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
Return

3.26.10 Example for Configuring the Limit Rate for TE Tunnel

Traffic

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 3-11, IS-IS is run on LSR A, LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D. An RSVP-TE
tunnel is established from LSR A to LSR D and the BC0 bandwidth of the TE tunnel is 20 Mbit/
s. The maximum reservable bandwidth of the link along the tunnel is 100 Mbit/s and the
bandwidth constraints model is RDM, and BC0 bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 391

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

The limit rate of TE traffic needs to be limited at 20 Mbit/s or lower. TE traffic at greater than
20 Mbit/s is dropped.

Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of an RSVP-TE tunnel

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 4.4.4.9/32

LSRA LSRD
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 30.1.1.2/24
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0 30.1.1.1/24
Loopback1 20.1.1.1/24 20.1.1.2/24 Loopback1
2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure an MPLS TE tunnel.

2. Configure TE traffic policing.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IS-IS area IDs, initial system IDs, and IS-IS levels of each LSR
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC0 bandwidth of the tunnel
l Interface number, IP address, destination IP address, tunnel ID, tunnel signaling protocol
(RSVP-TE), and bandwidth of the tunnel

Configuration Procedure
1. Configure an MPLS TE tunnel.
The configuration details are not provided here. For detailed configurations,
seeConfiguring an RSVP-TE Tunnel.
2. Configure TE traffic policing.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te lsp-tp outbound
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

3. Verify the configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 392

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display current-configuration command in the tunnel
interface view of Tunnel1/0/0 on LSR A. You can view that the mpls te lsp-tp
outbound command configuration is displayed in the command output.

Configuration File
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.9
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
mpls te lsp-tp outbound
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 393

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-2
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 394

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.11 Example for Configuring a DS-TE Tunnel in Non-IETF

Mode (MAM)
This section provides an example for configuring a DS-TE tunnel in non-IETF mode, including
configuring the DS-TE mode, bandwidth constraint module, and mapping of CTs and service
types.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 3-12, PEs and P on the MPLS backbone network are enabled with OSPF
to interwork with each other. PE1 accesses VPN-A and PE2 accesses VPN-B. VPN-A transmits
EF traffic and VPN-B transmits BE traffic. The QoS requirements of different types of traffic
are as follows:

Traffic Bandwidth Jitter

EF traffic on VPN-A 100 Mbit/s Shorter than 50 ms

BE traffic on VPN-B 200 Mbit/s None

A static DS-TE tunnel between PE1 and PE2 is required to be set up in non-IETF mode to
transmit the preceding traffic. The bandwidth constraints model is required to be MAM and the
bandwidth preemption is not allowed between CTs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 395

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-12 Networking diagram of a DS-TE in non-IETF mode

AS: 65410 AS: 65430

VPN-A VPN-A
CE1 CE3
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.3.1.1/24

Loopback1
GE1/0/0 2.2.2.9/32 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 PE1 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 PE2 10.3.1.2/24
Loopback1 172.1.1.2/24 172.2.1.1/24 Loopback1
1.1.1.9/32 GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0 3.3.3.9/32
GE2/0/0 172.1.1.1/24 P 172.2.1.2/24 GE2/0/0
10.2.1.2/24 10.4.1.2/24
MPLS backbone
AS: 100

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.2.1.1/24 10.4.1.1/24
CE2 CE4

VPN-B VPN-B
AS: 65420 AS: 65440

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. A static CR-LSP is set upfor each type of traffic on each VPN because the static TE tunnel
supports the single CT only.
2. Two static CR-LSPs are created in non-IETF mode, with tunnel interfaces of static CR-
LSPs being tunnel 3/0/0 and tunnel 3/0/1 and CTs being CT0 and CT1 separately.
3. Tunnel 3/0/0 is configured to transmit EF traffic of VPN-A and tunnel 3/0/1 is configured
to transmit BE traffic of VPN-B.
4. The reservable bandwidth of the link should be equal to or greater than the total bandwidth
of BCs. Thus, the reservable bandwidth of the link is equal to or greater than 300 Mbit/s.

Data Preparation
To configure DS-TE in MAM, you need the following data.

l LSR IDs of PEs and P

l Interface number of the TE tunnel
l Values of the maximum reservable bandwidth and bandwidth values for BCs on each link
l VPN instance name, Route-Distinguisher (RD), VPN target, and name of the tunnel policy
of VPN-A and VPN-B

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 396

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses for interfaces on the PEs and P. Enable OSPF to ensure that the PEs and
P can communicate with each other.
Configuration details are not provided here.
After the configurations, OSPF adjacencies can be created between PE1, P, and PE2. By using
the display ospf peer command, you can see that the status of the adjacency is Full. By using
the display ip routing-table command, you can see that PEs can learn the route to Loopback1
from each other.
Step 2 Configure LSR ID and enable MPLS and MPLS-TE on each PE and P.
# Configuration PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure P.
<P> system-view
[P] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[P] mpls
[P-mpls] mpls te
[P-mpls] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

Step 3 Configure the DS-TE mode and the bandwidth constraints model on each PE and P.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode non-ietf
[PE1-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm mam
[PE1-mpls] quit

# Configure P.
[P] mpls
[P-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode non-ietf

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 397

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[P-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm mam

[P-mpls] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode non-ietf
[PE2-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm mam
[PE2-mpls] quit

Step 4 Configure link bandwidth on each PE and P.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure P.
[P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation

command on the PE, and you can view information about BC bandwidth allocation for interfaces.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation interface
gigabitethernet 3/0/0
Link ID: GigabitEthernet3/0/0
Bandwidth Constraint Model : Maximum Allocation Model (MAM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 300000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbit/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbit/sec) : 200000
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbit/sec) : 0
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 100000 0
1 0 1 0 100000 0
2 0 2 0 100000 0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 398

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3 0 3 0 100000 0
4 0 4 0 100000 0
5 0 5 0 100000 0
6 0 6 0 100000 0
7 0 7 0 100000 0
8 1 0 0 200000 0
9 1 1 0 200000 0
10 1 2 0 200000 0
11 1 3 0 200000 0
12 1 4 0 200000 0
13 1 5 0 200000 0
14 1 6 0 200000 0
15 1 7 0 200000 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Configure tunnel interfaces on PEs.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] description For VPN-A_EF
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 3.3.3.9
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel3/0/1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] description For VPN-B_BE
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] destination 3.3.3.9
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 301
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te commit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] description For VPN-A_EF
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 1.1.1.9
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface tunnel3/0/1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] description For VPN-B_BE
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] destination 1.1.1.9
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 301
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te commit

Step 6 Configure a static CR-LSP on each PE and P.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/0 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
[PE1] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
[PE1] static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 101
[PE1] static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 201

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 399

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Configure P.
[P] static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 100 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
[P] static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 200 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
[P] static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 101 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
[P] static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 201 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000

Configure PE2.
[PE2] static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 100
[PE2] static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 200
[PE2] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/0 destination 1.1.1.9
nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
[PE2] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 1.1.1.9
nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000

After the configuration, run the display mpls static-cr-lsp command on a PE, and you can see
that the static CR-LSP goes Up.
Take tunnel 3/0/0 on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls static-cr-lsp Tunnel3/0/0
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel3/0/0 3.3.3.9/32 NULL/100 -/S1/0/1 Up

Run the display interface tunnel interface-number command on a PE, and you can see that the
tunnel interface goes Up.
Take tunnel 3/0/0 on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display interface tunnel 3/0/0
Tunnel3/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2008-05-23, 10:03:07
Description :For VPN-A_EF
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered, using address of LoopBack1(1.1.1.9/32)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL, loopback not set
Tunnel destination 3.3.3.9
Tunnel up/down statistics 1
Tunnel protocol/transport MPLS/MPLS, ILM is available,
primary tunnel id is 0x8201002c, secondary tunnel id is 0x0
...

Run the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation command again, and you
can view that the bandwidth has been allocated for CT0 and CT1 with priorities being 0.
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation interface
gigabitethernet 3/0/0
Link ID: GigabitEthernet3/0/0
Bandwidth Constraint Model : Maximum Allocation Model (MAM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 300000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbit/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbit/sec) : 200000
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbit/sec) : 300000
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 400

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 100000 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0
2 0 2 0 0 0
3 0 3 0 0 0
4 0 4 0 0 0
5 0 5 0 0 0
6 0 6 0 0 0
7 0 7 0 0 0
8 1 0 200000 0 0
9 1 1 0 0 0
10 1 2 0 0 0
11 1 3 0 0 0
12 1 4 0 0 0
13 1 5 0 0 0
14 1 6 0 0 0
15 1 7 0 0 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 7 Bind the inbound interface with the DS domain on a PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure P.
[P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] trust upstream default
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] trust upstream default
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display diffserv domain default command on a PE, and you
can view information about the default traffic policy for traffic classification in a DS domain.

Take the display on PE1 as an example.

[PE1] display diffserv domain default
Diffserv domain name:default
...
mpls-exp-inbound 0 phb be green
mpls-exp-inbound 1 phb af1 green
mpls-exp-inbound 2 phb af2 green
mpls-exp-inbound 3 phb af3 green
mpls-exp-inbound 4 phb af4 green
mpls-exp-inbound 5 phb ef green
mpls-exp-inbound 6 phb cs6 green

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 401

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls-exp-inbound 7 phb cs7 green

mpls-exp-outbound be green map 0
mpls-exp-outbound af1 green map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af1 yellow map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af1 red map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af2 green map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af2 yellow map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af2 red map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af3 green map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af3 yellow map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af3 red map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af4 green map 4
mpls-exp-outbound af4 yellow map 4
mpls-exp-outbound af4 red map 4
mpls-exp-outbound ef green map 5
mpls-exp-outbound cs6 green map 6
mpls-exp-outbound cs7 green map 7
...

NOTE
Take note of the preceding items that appear in the display diffserv domain default command output.
Information in "..." can be ignored.

Step 8 Configure the mapping of the CT and service type on the PEs and P.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 0 to ef pq
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 1 to be lpq
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] ct-flow-mapping commit
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 0 to ef pq
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 1 to be lpq
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] ct-flow-mapping commit
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# After the configuration, run the display ct-flow-mapping command on PEs, and you can view
the mapping relationship between CTs and flow queues.

Take the display on PE1 as an example.

[PE1] display ct-flow-mapping all
Totle template: 2
template-name:default
map CT 0 to be lpq
map CT 1 to af1 wfq
map CT 2 to af2 wfq
map CT 3 to af3 wfq
map CT 4 to af4 wfq
map CT 5 to ef pq
map CT 6 to cs6 pq
map CT 7 to cs6 pq

template-name:mapping1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 402

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

map CT 0 to ef pq
map CT 1 to be lpq

Step 9 Create the MP-IBGP peer relationship between PEs, and create the EBGP peer relationship
between PEs and CEs.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] bgp 100
[PE1-bgp] peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100
[PE1-bgp] peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface loopback 1
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4
[PE1-bgp-af-vpnv4] peer 3.3.3.9 enable
[PE1-bgp-af-vpnv4] quit
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
[PE1-bgp-vpna] peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65410
[PE1-bgp-vpna] import-route direct
[PE1-bgp-vpna] quit
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] peer 10.2.1.1 as-number 65420
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] import-route direct
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] quit

NOTE
The configuration of PE2 is similar to that of PE1. The configuration detail is not provided here.

# Configure CE1.
[CE1] bgp 65410
[CE1-bgp] peer 10.1.1.2 as-number 100
[CE1-bgp] import-route direct

NOTE
The configuration of other CEs (CE2, CE3, and CE4) is similar to that of CE1. The configuration details
are not provided here.

After the configuration, run the display bgp vpnv4 all peer command on the PE, and you can
see that the BGP peer relationship is created between PEs and its status is Established.
[PE1] display bgp vpnv4 all peer
BGP local router ID : 1.1.1.9
Local AS number : 100
Total number of peers : 3 Peers in established state : 3
Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent OutQ Up/Down State PrefRcv

3.3.3.9 4 100 12 18 0 00:09:38 Established 0

Peer of vpn instance:
vpn instance vpna :
10.1.1.1 4 65410 25 25 0 00:17:57 Established 1
vpn instance vpnb :
10.2.1.1 4 65420 21 22 0 00:17:10 Established 1

Step 10 Configure a tunnel policy on the PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] tunnel-policy policya
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policya] tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te tunnel 3/0/0
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policya] quit
[PE1] tunnel-policy policyb
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policyb] tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te tunnel 3/0/1
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policyb] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] tunnel-policy policya
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policya] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te tunnel 3/0/0
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policya] quit
[PE2] tunnel-policy policyb

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 403

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE2-tunnel-policy-policyb] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te tunnel 3/0/1

[PE2-tunnel-policy-policyb] quit

Step 11 Configure VPN instances on PEs and connect CEs to PEs.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpna

[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna] ipv4-family
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 100:1
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] vpn-target 111:1 both
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policya
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv] quit
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna] quit
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpnb

[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb] ipv4-family
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 100:2
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] vpn-target 222:2 both
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policyb
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] quit
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpna
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.2 24
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip address 10.2.1.2 24
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] ip vpn-instance vpna

[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna] ipv4-family
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 200:1
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] vpn-target 111:1 both
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policya
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] quit
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna] quit
[PE2] ip vpn-instance vpnb

[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb] ipv4-family
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 200:2
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] vpn-target 222:2 both
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policyb
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] quit
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpnb] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpna
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.3.1.2 24
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip address 10.4.1.2 24
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure IP addresses for interfaces of CEs. The configuration details are not provided here.
After the configuration, run the display ipvpn-instance verbose command on the PE, and you
can view the configuration of VPN instances. PEs can ping through the CEs connecting to the
PEs.
Step 12 Verify the configuration.
After the configuration, connect CE1, CE2, CE3, and CE4 to port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4
of a tester. Inject EF traffic from port 1 and port 2 to port 2 and port 1 respectively, with the

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 404

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

bandwidth being 100 Mbit/s. Inject BE traffic from port 3 and port 4 to port 2 and port 1
respectively, with the bandwidth being 200 Mbit/s. All the packets are not discarded and the
jitter of EF traffic is shorter than 50 ms.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
ip vpn-instance vpna
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 100:1
tnl-policy policya
vpn-target 111:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 111:1 import-extcommunity
#
ip vpn-instance vpnb
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 100:2
tnl-policy policyb
vpn-target 222:2 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 222:2 import-extcommunity
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te bcm mam
#
ct-flow-mapping mapping1
map ct 0 to ef pq
map ct 1 to be lpq
ct-flow-mapping commit
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A_EF
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 405

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te tunnel-id 300

mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B_BE
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9
mpls te tunnel-id 301
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100
peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65410
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.2.1.1 as-number 65420
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel 3/0/0 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 101
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 201
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return
l Configuration file of P
#
sysname P
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te bcm mam
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 406

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
in-label 100 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
in-label 200 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
in-label 101 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
in-label 201 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
ip vpn-instance vpna
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:1
tnl-policy policya
vpn-target 111:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 111:1 import-extcommunity
#
ip vpn-instance vpnb
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:2
tnl-policy policyb
vpn-target 222:2 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 222:2 import-extcommunity
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te bcm mam
#
ct-flow-mapping mapping1
map ct 0 to ef pq
map ct 1 to be lpq
ct-flow-mapping commit
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 407

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A_EF
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B_BE
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9
mpls te tunnel-id 301
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 1.1.1.9 as-number 100
peer 1.1.1.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.3.1.1 as-number 65430
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.4.1.1 as-number 65440
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 100
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 200

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 408

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/0 destination 1.1.1.9

nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 1.1.1.9
nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return
l Configuration file of CE1
#
sysname CE1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65410
peer 10.1.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.1.1.2 enable
#
return
l Configuration file of CE2
#
sysname CE2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65420
peer 10.2.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.2.1.2 enable
#
return
l Configuration file of CE3
#
sysname CE3
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65430
peer 10.3.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.3.1.2 enable
#
return
l Configuration file of CE4
#
sysname CE4

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 409

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65440
peer 10.4.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.4.1.2 enable
#
return

3.26.12 Example for Configuring a DS-TE Tunnel in IETF Mode

(RDM)
This section provides an example for configuring a DS-TE tunnel in IETF mode.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 3-13, PEs and P on the MPLS backbone network are enabled with OSPF
to communicate with each other. The P, however, does not support MPLS LDP. PE1 accesses
VPN-A and PE2 accesses VPN-B. An LDP LSP needs to be set up along the path PE3 --> PE1
--> P --> PE2 --> PE4. As shown in Figure 3-13, VPN-A transmits EF and AF traffic; VPN-B
transmits EF, AF, and BE traffic; the LDP LSP transmits BE traffic. The QoS requirements of
different types of traffic are as follows:

Traffic Bandwidth Jitter

EF traffic on VPN-A 100 Mbit/s Shorter than 50 ms

AF traffic on VPN-A 50 Mbit/s Shorter than 200 ms

EF traffic on VPN-B 100 Mbit/s Shorter than 50 ms

AF traffic on VPN-B 50 Mbit/s Shorter than 200 ms

BE traffic on VPN-B 50 Mbit/s None

BE traffic on the LDP LSP 50 Mbit/s None

The networking requires that a DS-TE tunnel be set up between PE1 and PE2 to transmit the
preceding traffic and meet different QoS requirements of different traffic types. The bandwidth
constraints model is RDM. CTi can preempt the bandwidth of CTj (0 <= i < j <= 7). This means
that bandwidths will first be allocated for CTs with higher priorities.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 410

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-13 Networking diagram of a DS-TE tunnel in IETF mode

AS 65410 AS 65430
VPN-A VPN-A
CE1 CE3
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.3.1.1/24

MPLS backbone AS 100

Loopback 1 Loopback 1 Loopback 1
1.1.1.9/32 2.2.2.9/32 3.3.3.9/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 10.3.1.2/24
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0
Loopback 1 PE1 172.1.1.1/24 172.2.1.2/24 PE2 Loopback
4.4.4.9/32 5.5.5.9/32
GE4/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE4/0/0
10.5.1.1/24 172.1.1.2/24 172.2.1.1/24 10.6.1.1/24
P
PE3 GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0 PE
10.2.1.2/24 10.4.1.2/24 GE1/0/0
GE1/0/0
10.6.1.2/24
10.5.1.2/24

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.2.1.1/24 10.4.1.1/24
CE2 CE4
VPN-B VPN-B
AS 65420 AS 65440

Configuration Roadmap
NOTE

l In this example, the bandwidth and delay time are guaranteed for all service traffic of each VPN in DS-
TE tunnels.
l If you need to guarantee the bandwidth and delay time for all service traffic only in DS-TE tunnels
irrespective of VPNs, you can set up only one DS-TE tunnel to transmit all the traffic.
l You can limit the service traffic of different VPNs in DS-TE tunnels by limiting the ingress PE to
access VPNs and the service traffic of VPNs.

The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Set up two TE tunnels to transmit EF and AF traffic of VPN-A and VPN-B.

2. Set up different tunnels for VPN-B and the LDP LSP when VPN-B and LDP LSP have
same traffic.
3. Set up one TE tunnel when VPN-A and the LDP LSP have three types of traffic.
4. Set up two RSVP-TE tunnels on tunnel 3/0/0 and tunnel 3/0/1. Each tunnel is configured
with three CTs with the priority being 0, that is, CT0, CT1, and CT2. CT0, CT1, and CT2
bear EF, AF, and BE traffic respectively.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 411

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

5. CT2 and CT1 of tunnel 3/0/0 transmit EF and AF traffic of VPN-A. CT0 of tunnel 3/0/0
transmits BE traffic of the LDP LSP. CT2, CT1, and CT0 of tunnel 3/0/1 transmit EF, AF,
and BE traffic of VPN-B.
6. Paths of the two tunnels are the same. Thus, the BCi bandwidth should be equal to or greater
than the total bandwidth of CTi to CT7 of all the TE tunnels. In addition, the maximum
reservable bandwidth for links should be equal to or greater than the bandwidth of BC0.
Therefore, the bandwidth relationships between BCi and CT1 to CT7 is as follows:
Bandwidth of BC2 on the link => Bandwidth of CT2 of Tunnel 3/0/0 and Tunnel 3/0/1 =
100 Mbit/s
Bandwidth of BC1 => Bandwidth of BC2 + CT1 of Tunnel 3/0/0 and Tunnel 3/0/1 = 200
Mbit/s
Bandwidth of BC0 => Bandwidth of BC1 + Bandwidth of CT0 of Tunnel 3/0/0 + Bandwidth
of CT0 of Tunnel 3/0/1 = 400 Mbit/s
Reservable bandwidth of the link = Bandwidth of BC0 = 400 Mbit/s
7. Services of the same type in two TE tunnels require the same bandwidth and jitter.
Therefore, the CT template is used to configure the TE tunnel.

Data Preparation
To configure a DS-TE tunnel in IETF mode (RDM), you need the following data.
l LSR IDs of PEs and P
l Interface number of the TE tunnel
l TE-class mapping table
l Values of the maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of links
l VPN-A instance name, VPN-B instance name, route-distinguisher, VPN target, and name
of the tunnel policy

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses for interfaces on PEs and the P. Enable OSPF to ensure that PEs and the
P can communicate with each other.
The configuration details are not provided here.
After the configurations, OSPF adjacencies can be created between PE1, P, and PE2. By using
the display ospf peer command, you can view that the status of the adjacency is Full. By using
the display ip routing-table command, you can see that PEs can learn the Loopback1 route
from each other.
Step 2 Configure LSR ID and enable MPLS on each PE and P. Enable MPLS TE and RSVP-TE on
PE1, PE2, and the P. Enable MPLS LDP on all PEs.
# Configure PE3.
<PE3> system-view
[PE3] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
[PE3] mpls
[PE3-mpls] quit
[PE3] mpls ldp
[PE3-mpls-ldp] quit
[PE3] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 412

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te
[PE1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] mpls ldp
[PE1-mpls-ldp] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 4/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] mpls
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] quit

# Configure the P.
<P> system-view
[P] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
[P] mpls
[P-mpls] mpls te
[P-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[P-mpls] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te
[PE2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] mpls ldp
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 4/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] mpls
[PE2-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] mpls ldp
[PE2-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] quit

# Configure PE4.
<PE4> system-view
[PE4] mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.9
[PE4] mpls
[PE4-mpls] quit
[PE4] mpls ldp
[PE4-mpls-ldp] quit
[PE4] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE4-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 413

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE4-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls ldp

[PE4-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display mpls rsvp-te interface command on PE1, PE2, or the
P, and you can view interfaces enabled with RSVP and information about RSVP. Run the display
mpls ldp lsp command on PE1, PE2, PE3, or PE4, and you can see that an LDP LSP exists
between PE3 and PE1, and between PE2 and PE4.
Step 3 Configure OSPF TE on PE1, PE2, and the P and enable CSPF.
# Configure OSPF TE on PE1, PE2, and the P and enable CSPF on the ingress of the TE tunnel.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ospf 1
[PE1-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[PE1-ospf-1] area 0
[PE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[PE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[PE1-ospf-1] quit
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te cspf

# Configure P.
[P] ospf 1
[P-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[P-ospf-1] area 0
[P-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[P-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[P-ospf-1] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] ospf 1
[PE2-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[PE2-ospf-1] area 0
[PE2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[PE2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[PE2-ospf-1] quit
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te cspf
[PE2-mpls] quit

After the configuration, run the display ospf mpls-te command, and you can view the TE LSA
information in the OSPF Link State Database (LSDB).
Step 4 Configure the DS-TE mode and the bandwidth constraints model on PE1, PE2, and the P.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[PE1-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm rdm
[PE1-mpls] quit

# Configure P.
[P] mpls
[P-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[P-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm rdm
[P-mpls] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[PE2-mpls] mpls te ds-te bcm rdm
[PE2-mpls] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 414

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display mpls te ds-te summary command on a PE or P, and
you can view information about DS-TE configuration.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te ds-te summary
DS-TE IETF Supported :YES
DS-TE MODE :IETF
Bandwidth Constraint Model :RDM
TEClass Mapping (default):
TE-Class ID Class Type Priority
TE-Class 0 0 0
TE-Class 1 1 0
TE-Class 2 2 0
TE-Class 3 3 0
TE-Class 4 0 7
TE-Class 5 1 7
TE-Class 6 2 7
TE-Class 7 3 7

Step 5 Configure link bandwidth on the PEs and P.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure the P.
[P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
[P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation

interface command on the PE and you can view information about BC bandwidth allocation for
interfaces.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation interface
gigabitethernet 3/0/0
Link ID: GigabitEthernet3/0/0
Bandwidth Constraint Model : Russian Dolls Model (RDM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 400000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbit/sec) : 400000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbit/sec) : 200000
Reservable Bandwidth BC2(Kbit/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC3(Kbit/sec) : 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC4(Kbit/sec) : 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC5(Kbit/sec) : 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC6(Kbit/sec) : 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC7(Kbit/sec) : 0
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbit/sec) : 0
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 415

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 400000 0
1 1 0 0 200000 0
2 2 0 0 100000 0
3 0 7 0 400000 0
4 1 7 0 200000 0
5 2 7 0 100000 0
6 - - - - -
7 - - - - -
8 - - - - -
9 - - - - -
10 - - - - -
11 - - - - -
12 - - - - -
13 - - - - -
14 - - - - -
15 - - - - -
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 6 Configure a TE-class mapping table on each PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] te-class-mapping
[PE1-te-class-mapping] te-class0 class-type ct0 priority 0 description For-EF
[PE1-te-class-mapping] te-class1 class-type ct1 priority 0 description For-AF
[PE1-te-class-mapping] te-class2 class-type ct2 priority 0 description For-BE
[PE1-te-class-mapping] quit
[PE2] te-class-mapping
[PE2-te-class-mapping] te-class0 class-type ct0 priority 0 description For-EF
[PE2-te-class-mapping] te-class1 class-type ct1 priority 0 description For-AF
[PE2-te-class-mapping] te-class2 class-type ct2 priority 0 description For-BE
[PE2-te-class-mapping] quit

After the configuration, run the display mpls te ds-te te-class-mapping command on a PE, and
you can view information about the TE-class mapping table.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te ds-te te-class-mapping
TE-Class ID Class Type Priority Description
TE-Class0 0 0 For-EF
TE-Class1 1 0 For-AF
TE-Class2 2 0 For-BE
TE-Class3 - - -
TE-Class4 - - -
TE-Class5 - - -
TE-Class6 - - -
TE-Class7 - - -

Step 7 Configure an explicit path on the PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] explicit-path path1
[PE1-explicit-path-path1] next hop 172.1.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-path1] next hop 172.2.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-path1] next hop 3.3.3.9
[PE1-explicit-path-path1] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] explicit-path path1
[PE2-explicit-path-path1] next hop 172.2.1.1
[PE2-explicit-path-path1] next hop 172.1.1.1
[PE2-explicit-path-path1] next hop 1.1.1.9
[PE2-explicit-path-path1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 416

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display explicit-path command on a PE, and you can view
information about the explicit path.

Take the display on PE1 as an example.

[PE1] display explicit-path path1
Path Name : path1 Path Status : Enabled
1 172.1.1.2 Strict Include
2 172.2.1.2 Strict Include
3 3.3.3.9 Strict Include

Step 8 Configure the tunnel interface on the PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] description For VPN-A & Non-VPN
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 3.3.3.9
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path path1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te priority 0
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel3/0/1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] description For VPN-B
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] destination 3.3.3.9
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 301
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te path explicit-path path1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te priority 0
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te commit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] description For VPN-A & Non-VPN
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 1.1.1.9
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path path1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te priority 0
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2] interface tunnel3/0/1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] description For VPN-B
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] destination 1.1.1.9
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 301
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te path explicit-path path1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te priority 0
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/1] mpls te commit

Run the display interface tunnel interface-number command on a PE, and you can see that the
tunnel interface goes Up.

Take tunnel 3/0/0 on PE1 as an example.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 417

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1] display interface tunnel3/0/0

Tunnel3/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2008-05-23, 11:15:01
Description :For VPN-A & Non-VPN
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered, using address of LoopBack1(1.1.1.9/32)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL, loopback not set
Tunnel destination 3.3.3.9
Tunnel up/down statistics 1
Tunnel protocol/transport MPLS/MPLS, ILM is available,
primary tunnel id is 0x8201002c, secondary tunnel id is 0x0
...

Run the display mpls te te-class-tunnel command on a PE, and you can check the TE tunnel
associated with the TE-class.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te te-class-tunnel all
------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. CT priority status tunnel name tunnel commit
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 CT0 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/0 Yes
2 CT0 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/1 Yes
3 CT1 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/0 Yes
4 CT1 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/1 Yes
5 CT2 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/0 Yes
6 CT2 0 Valid Tunnel3/0/0 Yes

Step 9 Bind the outbound interface with a DS domain on a PE.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 4/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 4/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] trust upstream default
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 418

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display diffserv domain default command on a PE, and you
can view information about the default traffic policy for traffic classification in a DS domain.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display diffserv domain default
Diffserv domain name:default
...
mpls-exp-inbound 0 phb be green
mpls-exp-inbound 1 phb af1 green
mpls-exp-inbound 2 phb af2 green
mpls-exp-inbound 3 phb af3 green
mpls-exp-inbound 4 phb af4 green
mpls-exp-inbound 5 phb ef green
mpls-exp-inbound 6 phb cs6 green
mpls-exp-inbound 7 phb cs7 green
mpls-exp-outbound be green map 0
mpls-exp-outbound af1 green map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af1 yellow map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af1 red map 1
mpls-exp-outbound af2 green map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af2 yellow map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af2 red map 2
mpls-exp-outbound af3 green map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af3 yellow map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af3 red map 3
mpls-exp-outbound af4 green map 4
mpls-exp-outbound af4 yellow map 4
mpls-exp-outbound af4 red map 4
mpls-exp-outbound ef green map 5
mpls-exp-outbound cs6 green map 6
mpls-exp-outbound cs7 green map 7
...

NOTE
Take note of the preceding items that appear in the display diffserv domain default command output.
Information in "..." can be ignored.

Step 10 Configure the mapping of the CT and service type on the PEs and P.
# Bind the outbound interface of services with the DS domain on PEs for simple traffic
classification.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 0 to ef pq
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 1 to af1 wfq
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 2 to be lpq
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] ct-flow-mapping commit
[PE1-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 0 to ef pq
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 1 to af1 wfq
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] map ct 2 to be lpq
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] ct-flow-mapping commit
[PE2-ct-flow-mapping-mapping1] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# After the configuration, run the display ct-flow-mapping command on PEs, and you can view
the mapping relationship of CTs and traffic queues.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 419

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Take the display on PE1 as an example.

template-name:mapping1
map CT 0 to ef pq
map CT 1 to af1 wfq
map CT 2 to be lpq

Step 11 Configure port queue.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue ef pq shaping 220000 outbound
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue af1 wfq weight 15 shaping 120000 outbound
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue be lpq shaping 150000 outbound
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue ef pq shaping 220000 outbound
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue af1 wfq weight 15 shaping 120000 outbound
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] port-queue be lpq shaping 150000 outbound
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit

Step 12 Configure LDP over TE.

# Configure the forwarding adjacency on the TE tunnel and create the MPLS LDP peer
relationship between both ends on the TE tunnel.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te igp advertise
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls
[PE1-Tunnel3/0/0] quit
[PE1] ospf 1
[PE1-ospf-1] enable traffic-adjustment advertise
[PE1-ospf-1] quit
[PE1-] mpls ldp remote-peer pe1tope2
[PE1-mpls-ldp-remote-pe1tope2] remote-ip 3.3.3.9

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface tunnel3/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te igp advertise
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls
[PE2-Tunnel3/0/0] quit
[PE2] ospf 1
[PE2-ospf-1] enable traffic-adjustment advertise
[PE2-ospf-1] quit
[PE2-] mpls ldp remote-peer pe2tope1
[PE2-mpls-ldp-remote-pe2tope1] remote-ip 1.1.1.9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 420

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on PE1 or PE2, and you can
view route information. The outbound interface destined for 5.5.5.9 is tunnel 3/0/0 on PE1 and
the outbound interface destined for 4.4.4.9 is tunnel 3/0/0 on PE2.
Step 13 Create the MP-IBGP remote peer relationship between PEs, and create the EBGP peer
relationship between PEs and CEs.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] bgp 100
[PE1-bgp] peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100
[PE1-bgp] peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface loopback 1
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4
[PE1-bgp-af-vpnv4] peer 3.3.3.9 enable
[PE1-bgp-af-vpnv4] quit
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
[PE1-bgp-vpna] peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65410
[PE1-bgp-vpna] import-route direct
[PE1-bgp-vpna] quit
[PE1-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] peer 10.2.1.1 as-number 65420
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] import-route direct
[PE1-bgp-vpnb] quit

NOTE
The configuration of PE2 is similar to that of PE1. The configuration details are not provided here.

# Configure CE1.
[CE1] bgp 65410
[CE1-bgp] peer 10.1.1.2 as-number 100
[CE1-bgp] import-route direct

NOTE
The configuration of other CEs (CE2, CE3, and CE4) is similar to that of CE1. The configuration details
are not provided here.

3.3.3.9 4 100 12 18 0 00:09:38 Established 0

Peer of vpn instance:
vpn instance vpna :
10.1.1.1 4 65410 25 25 0 00:17:57 Established 1
vpn instance vpnb :
10.2.1.1 4 65420 21 22 0 00:17:10 Established 1

Step 14 Configure the tunnel policy on PEs.

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] tunnel-policy policya
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policya] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te tunnel 3/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 421

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE2-tunnel-policy-policya] quit
[PE2] tunnel-policy policyb
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policyb] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te tunnel 3/0/1
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policyb] quit

Step 15 Configure VPN instances on PEs and connect CEs to PEs.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpna

[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna] ipv4-family
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 100:1
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] vpn-target 111:1 both
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policya
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] quit
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna] quit
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpnb

[PE1-vpn-instance-vpna] ipv4-family
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 100:2
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] vpn-target 222:2 both
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policyb
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb-af-ipv4] quit
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpnb] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpna
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.2 24
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip address 10.2.1.2 24
[PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] ip vpn-instance vpna

[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna] ipv4-family
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 200:1
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] vpn-target 111:1 both
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policya
[PE2-vpn-instance-vpna-af-ipv4] quit
PE2-vpn-instance-vpna] quit
[PE2] ip vpn-instance vpnb

# Configure IP addresses for interfaces of CEs. The configuration details are not provided here.

After the configuration, run the display ipvpn-instance verbose command on the PE, and you
can view the configuration of VPN instances. PEs can ping CEs connecting to PEs.

Step 16 Verify the configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 422

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, connect the tester to PE3, PE4, and all CEs and inject the following
traffic to the connected interfaces.

Traffic Type Bandwidth

Between CE1 and CE2 EF 100 Mbit/s

AF 50 Mbit/s

Between CE3 and CE4 EF 100 Mbit/s

AF 50 Mbit/s

BE 50 Mbit/s

Between PE3 and PE4 BE 50 Mbit/s

You can see that all packets are not discarded. The jitter of EF traffic is shorter than 50 ms, and
the jitter of AF traffic is shorter than 200 ms.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 423

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ct-flow-mapping commit
#
te-class-mapping
te-class0 class-type ct0 priority 0 description For-BE
te-class1 class-type ct1 priority 0 description For-AF
te-class2 class-type ct2 priority 0 description For-EF
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 4000000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 300000 bc2 200000
mpls rsvp-te
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
port-queue ef pq shaping 220000 outbound
port-queue af1 wfq weight 15 shaping 120000 outbound
port-queue be lpq shaping 150000 outbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
trust upstream default
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A & Non-VPN
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te priority 0
mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000 ct1 50000 ct2 100000
mpls te path explicit-path path1
mpls te igp advertise
mpls te igp metric absolute 1
mpls te commit
mpls
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9
mpls te tunnel-id 301
mpls te priority 0
mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000 ct1 50000 ct2 100000
mpls te path explicit-path path1
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 424

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100

peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65410
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.2.1.1 as-number 65420
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
enable traffic-adjustment advertise
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.5.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return
l Configuration file of the P node
#
sysname P
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te mode ietf
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
mpls rsvp-te
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
mpls rsvp-te
trust upstream default
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 425

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

area 0.0.0.0
opaque-capability enable
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
ip vpn-instance vpna
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:1
tnl-policy policya
vpn-target 111:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 111:1 import-extcommunity
#
ip vpn-instance vpnb
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:2
tnl-policy policyb
vpn-target 222:2 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 222:2 import-extcommunity
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te mode ietf
mpls te rsvp-te
#
mpls ldp
#
mpls ldp remote-peer pe2tope1
remote-ip 1.1.1.9
#
explicit-path path1
next hop 172.1.1.1
next hop 172.2.1.1
next hop 1.1.1.9
#
ct-flow-mapping mapping1
map ct 0 to ef pq
map ct 1 to af1 wfq
map ct 2 to be lpq
ct-flow-mapping commit
#
te-class-mapping
te-class0 class-type ct0 priority 0 description For-EF
te-class1 class-type ct1 priority 0 description For-AF
te-class2 class-type ct2 priority 0 description For-BE
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 426

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 400000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 400000 bc1 200000 bc2 100000
mpls rsvp-te
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
port-queue ef pq shaping 220000 outbound
port-queue af1 wfq weight 15 shaping 120000 outbound
port-queue be lpq shaping 150000 outbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.6.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
trust upstream default
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A & Non-VPN
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te priority 0
mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
mpls te path explicit-path path1
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9
mpls te tunnel-id 301
mpls te priority 0
mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000 ct1 50000 ct2 50000
mpls te path explicit-path path1
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 1.1.1.9 as-number 100
peer 1.1.1.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.3.1.1 as-number 65430
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.4.1.1 as-number 65440
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
enable traffic-adjustment advertise
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.6.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 427

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls-te enable
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return

l Configuration file of PE3

#
sysname PE3
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.5.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0
#
return

l Configuration file of PE4

#
sysname PE4
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.9
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.6.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.6.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 5.5.5.9 0.0.0.0
#
return

l Configuration file of CE1

#
sysname CE1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65410
peer 10.1.1.2 as-number 100

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 428

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.1.1.2 enable
#
return

l Configuration file of CE2

#
sysname CE2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65420
peer 10.2.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.2.1.2 enable
#
return

l Configuration file of CE3

#
sysname CE3
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65430
peer 10.3.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.3.1.2 enable
#
return

l Configuration file of CE4

#
sysname CE4
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
bgp 65440
peer 10.4.1.2 as-number 100
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
import-route direct
peer 10.4.1.2 enable
#
return

3.26.13 Example for Switching the Non-IETF Mode to the IETF

Mode
This section provides an example for switching the non-IETF mode to the IETF mode.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 429

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in the following figure, two static DS-TE tunnels between PE1 and PE2
are set up in non-IETF mode for transmitting EF traffic of VPN-A and BE traffic of VPN-B.

The DS-TE tunnel set up in non-IETF mode supports only the single CT, namely, CT0 or CT1.
In the case of network expansion, it is required that the non-IETF mode be switched to the IETF
mode supporting eight CTs.

Figure 3-14 Networking diagram of switching the non-IETF mode to the IETF mode

AS: 65410 AS: 65430

VPN-A VPN-A
CE1 CE3
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.3.1.1/24

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.2.1.1/24 10.4.1.1/24
CE2 CE4

VPN-B VPN-B
AS: 65420 AS: 65440

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

NOTE

1. When the non-IETF mode is switched to the IETF mode, the system automatically deletes
the CR-LSPs whose combination of <CT, set-priority> or combination of <CT, hold-
priority> does not exist in the TE-class mapping table. If the TE-class mapping table is
improperly configured, the CR-LSP that transmits traffic may be deleted incorrectly,
resulting in service interruption. Therefore, before switching the DS-TE mode, you need

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 430

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

to check the CTs, setup priority, and holding priority of the ingress and transit CR-LSPs,
and the configuration of TE-class mapping table.
2. For certain CR-LSPs, if the combination of the CT and setup priority or the combination
of the CT and holding priority does not exist in the TE-class mapping table, you need to
configure or modify the TE-class mapping table.
3. Switch the DS-TE mode.
4. Configure related DS-TE items or related services.

Data Preparation
None

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display current-configuration | include static-cr-lsp ingress and display current-
configuration | include static-cr-lsp transit commands on PE1, P, and PE2, and you can view
the CTs of the static ingress and transit CR-LSPs, and the TE-class mapping table.
NOTE

l For static CR-LSPs, both the setup priority and the holding priority are 0 and the two priorities need
not to be checked.
l For RSVP CR-LSPs, run the display current-configuration interface tunnel command, and you can
view the configured mpls te bandwidth and mpls te priority commands, CTs, setup priority, and
holding priority on each tunnel interface.

# Run the display current-configuration | include static-cr-lsp ingress and display current-
configuration | include static-cr-lsp transit commands on the PE and P, and you can view
CTs, setup and holding priorities of the static ingress and transit CR-LSPs. Then, run the display
mpls te ds-te te-class-mapping config command, and you can view the configuration of the
TE-class mapping table.

# Take the display on PE1 as an example. The operation on other nodes is similar to that on PE1
and therefore is not provided here.
<PE1> display current-configuration | include static-cr-lsp ingress
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel 3/0/0 destination 3.3.3.9 nexthop
172.1.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 3.3.3.9 nexthop
172.1.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
<PE1> display current-configuration | include static-cr-lsp transit
<PE1> display mpls te ds-te te-class-mapping config Info: Configure TE-Class first.

NOTE

The display current-configuration | include static-cr-lsp transit command output is null, indicating that
no static transit CR-LSP is set up on PE1.
The display mpls te ds-te te-class-mapping config command output shows "Info: Configure TE-Class
first.", indicating that no TE-class mapping table is configured on PE1.

# The command output indicates that the static CR-LSPs of CT0 and CT1 are set up on PE1. In
addition, because the setup and holding priorities of the static CR-LSPs are 0, the following TE-
classes must exist in the TE-class mapping table:
l <CT = CT0, Priority = 0>
l <CT = CT1, Priority = 0>

Step 2 Configure TE-classes on PE1, P, and PE2.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 431

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

In this example, the TE-classes of <CT = CT0, Priority = 0> and <CT = CT1, Priority = 0> need
to be configured. Because the two TE-classes already exist in the default TE-class mapping table,
no other TE-class mapping table needs to be configured in this example. After the non-IETF
mode is switched to the IETF mode, the system uses the default TE-class mapping table.

NOTE
For information about the default TE-class mapping table, see Table 3-2.

Step 3 Switch the DS-TE modes on PE1, P, and PE2.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[PE1-mpls] quit

# Configure P.
[P] mpls
[P-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[P-mpls] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls te ds-te mode ietf
[PE2-mpls] quit

NOTE

After the non-IETF mode is switched to the IETF mode, the bandwidth constraints model remains
unchanged and does not need to be configured again.
In addition, related configurations of DS-TE and services accesses are required according to the service.
The configurations are not provided in this example.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 432

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A_EF
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B_BE
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.9
mpls te tunnel-id 301
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100
peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 3.3.3.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65410
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.2.1.1 as-number 65420
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 433

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

network 1.1.1.9 0.0.0.0

mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel 3/0/0 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 3.3.3.9
nexthop 172.1.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 101
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 201
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return

l Configuration file of the P node

#
sysname P
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te mode ietf
mpls te ds-te bcm mam
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
in-label 100 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 100 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-1to2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
in-label 200 nexthop 172.2.1.2 out-label 200 bandwidth ct1 200000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-A_EF-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
in-label 101 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp transit VPN-B_BE-2to1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
in-label 201 nexthop 172.1.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 434

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
ip vpn-instance vpna
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:1
tnl-policy policya
vpn-target 111:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 111:1 import-extcommunity
#
ip vpn-instance vpnb
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 200:2
tnl-policy policyb
vpn-target 222:2 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 222:2 import-extcommunity
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9
mpls
mpls te
mpls te ds-te mode ietf
mpls te ds-te bcm mam
#
ct-flow-mapping mapping1
map ct 0 to ef pq
map ct 1 to be lpq
ct-flow-mapping commit
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpna
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip binding vpn-instance vpnb
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.0
trust upstream default
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 172.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 300000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 200000
trust upstream default
mpls te ct-flow-mapping mapping1
mpls te ct-bandwidth unshared
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.9 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
description For VPN-A_EF
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel3/0/1
description For VPN-B_BE
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.9

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 435

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te tunnel-id 301

mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 1.1.1.9 as-number 100
peer 1.1.1.9 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 1.1.1.9 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpna
peer 10.3.1.1 as-number 65430
import-route direct
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpnb
peer 10.4.1.1 as-number 65440
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 172.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-A_EF incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 100
static-cr-lsp egress VPN-B_BE incoming-interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 in-
label 200
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/0 destination 1.1.1.9
nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 101 bandwidth ct0 100000
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 3/0/1 destination 1.1.1.9
nexthop 172.2.1.1 out-label 201 bandwidth ct1 200000
#
tunnel-policy policya
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/0
#
tunnel-policy policyb
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.9 te Tunnel3/0/1
#
return

3.26.14 Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR

This section provides an example for implementing link protection by using TE FRR.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-15, the primary LSP is along the path LSR A --> LSR B --
> LSR C --> LSR D, and the link from LSR B to LSR C requires a link protection by using FRR.
A bypass LSP is set up over the path LSR B --> LSR E --> LSR C. LSR B is a PLR, and LSR
C is an MP.
An explicit path is used to establish the MPLS TE primary and the bypass tunnels. The RSVP-
TE signaling protocol is adopted.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 436

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-15 Networking diagram of MPLS TE FRR configuration

Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32

LSRD

GE1/0/0
4.1.1.2/24

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32 GE1/0/0
LSRA LSRB 4.1.1.1/24

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0 LSRC

2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.1.1.1/24 3.1.1.2/24 POS3/0/0
POS3/0/0 Loopback1 3.3.1.2/24
3.2.1.1/24 5.5.5.5/32
Primary LSP POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
Bypass LSP 3.2.1.2/24 3.3.1.1/24

LSRE

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Establish the primary tunnel and enable TE FRR in the tunnel interface view.
2. Configure the bypass tunnel on the PLR (LSRB) and specify the protectable bandwidth
and the interface to be protected.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IS-IS area ID on each LSR, original system ID, and IS-IS level
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for the link along the tunnel
l Explicit paths of the primary and the bypass tunnels
l Interface names, IP addresses, destination addresses, tunnel IDs, tunnel signaling protocol
(RSVP-TE) of the primary and bypass tunnels
l Bandwidth that the bypass tunnel can protect and the protected link interface

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP address on each interface.
The IP address and mask on each interface including the loopback interface are configured as
shown in Figure 3-15. The detailed configuration is not mentioned here.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 437

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Configure an IGP.

The IS-IS protocol is configured on all LSRs to advertise routes of LSR IDs. The detailed
configuration is not provided here.
After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR and you can
view that the LSRs learned routes from each other.
Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE, CSPF, RSVP-TE, and IS-IS TE.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] isis
[LSRA-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRA-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2

NOTE

The configurations of LSR B, LSR C, LSR D, and LSR E are similar to those of LSR A and LSR B, and
are not provided here.
Only LSR A and LSR B need to be enabled CSPF.

Step 4 Configuring the MPLS TE attributes of the links.

# Configure the maximum reservable link bandwidth as 100 Mbit/s and BC bandwidth as 100
Mbit/s on LSR A, LSR B, LSR C, LSR D, and LSR E.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 3/0/0
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos3/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRE-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRE-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 438

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRE-Pos2/0/0] quit

Step 5 Establish an MPLS TE tunnel as the primary LSP on LSR A.

# Configure the explicit path for the primary LSP.
[LSRA] explicit-path pri-path
[LSRA-explicit-path-pri-path] next hop 2.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-pri-path] next hop 3.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-pri-path] next hop 4.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-pri-path] next hop 4.4.4.4
[LSRA-explicit-path-pri-path] quit

# Configure the MPLS TE tunnel as the primary LSP.

[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 4.4.4.4
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path pri-path

# Enable FRR.
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te fast-reroute
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A. The status of
Tunnel 1/0/0 is Up.
[LSRA] display interface tunnel 1/0/0
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2009-01-12, 09:35:10
Description : Tunnel1/0/0 Interface, Route Port
...

Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command on LSR A. You can view information about
the tunnel interface.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : 0 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1081
Created Time : 2010/07/01 15:02:57 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 50000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 439

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0

Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

Step 6 Configure the bypass tunnel on LSR B that functions as PLR.

# Configure the explicit path of the bypass LSP.
[LSRB] explicit-path by-path
[LSRB-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 3.2.1.2
[LSRB-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 3.3.1.2
[LSRB-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 3.3.3.3
[LSRB-explicit-path-by-path] quit

# Configure the bypass tunnel.

[LSRB] interface tunnel 3/0/0
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path by-path
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000

# Configure bandwidth that can be protected by the bypass tunnel.

[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bypass-tunnel

# Bind the bypass tunnel to the protected interface.

[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te protected-interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRB-Tunnel3/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR B. You can view
that the status of the Tunnel 3/0/0 interface is Up.
Run the display mpls lsp command on all LSRs to check LSP entries. You can view that LSPs
pass through LSR B and LSR C.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp
------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 440

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/1024 -/GE1/0/0
[LSRB] display mpls lsp
------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP
------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
4.4.4.4/32 1024/1024 GE1/0/0/GE2/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 NULL/1024 -/Pos3/0/0
[LSRC] display mpls lsp
------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP
------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
4.4.4.4/32 1024/3 GE2/0/0/GE1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 3/NULL Pos3/0/0/-
[LSRD] display mpls lsp
------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP
------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
4.4.4.4/32 3/NULL GE1/0/0/-
[LSRE] display mpls lsp
------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP
------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
3.3.3.3/32 1024/3 Pos1/0/0/Pos2/0/0

Run the display mpls te tunnel command on all the LSRs to check the establishment status of
the tunnel. You can view that two tunnels pass through LSR B and LSR C.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1 4.4.4.4 1 --/3 I Tunnel1/0/0
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1 4.4.4.4 1 1026/3 I Tunnel1/0/0
2.2.2.2 3.3.3.3 1 --/3 I Tunnel3/0/0
[LSRC] display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1 4.4.4.4 1 1024/3 I Tunnel1/0/0
2.2.2.2 3.3.3.3 1 3/-- I Tunnel3/0/0
[LSRE] display mpls te tunnel

Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on LSR B. You can view
that the bypass tunnel is bound to GE 2/0/0 and remains unused.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 4098
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit LSP Type : Primary

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 441

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1

Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: 2
C-Hop Table Index : 1
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 65546
Created Time : 2009/01/12 09:42:04
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 100000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : Not Used
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel3/0/0], InnerLabel[1024]
Bypass Lsp ID : 9 FrrNextHop : 3.3.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

# Shut down the protected outgoing interface on the PLR.
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] shutdown
%Oct 20 17:21:19 2005 LSRB IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface
GigabitEthernet2/0/0 turns into DOWN state

Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A. You can view the status of the
primary LSP. The status of the tunnel interface is still Up.
Run the tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A. You can view the path over which the
tunnel is established.
[LSRA] tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 442

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

0 Ingress 2.1.1.2/[13312 ]
1 2.1.1.2 1 ms Transit
2 3.2.1.2 16 ms Transit
3 3.3.1.2 1 ms Transit
4 4.1.1.2 1 ms Egress

The preceding information shows that the link is already switched to the bypass tunnel.
NOTE

After FRR swithing, run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command immediately, and you can view
that two CR-LSPs are in the Up state because FRR establishes a new LSP by using make-before-break.
The old LSP is deleted only after the new LSP has been established successfully.

Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on LSR B. You can view
that the bypass tunnel is used.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 4098
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
ER-Hop Table Index : 3 AR-Hop Table Index: 12
C-Hop Table Index : 50
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 66000
Created Time : 2009/01/12 10:09:10
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 100000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : In Use
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel3/0/0], InnerLabel[1024]
Bypass Lsp ID : 9 FrrNextHop : 3.3.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 443

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Set the scanning timer of FRR on PLR to 5 seconds.

[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te timer fast-reroute 5
[LSRB-mpls] quit

# Re-enable the protected interface on PLR.

[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] undo shutdown

Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command. You can view the status of the primary LSP
on LSR A. The tunnel interface is in Up state.
After a while, run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on LSR B.
You can view that Tunnel 3/0/0 is bound to GE 2/0/0 and remains unused.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path pri-path
next hop 2.1.1.2
next hop 3.1.1.2
next hop 4.1.1.2
next hop 4.4.4.4
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te record-route label
mpls te path explicit-path pri-path
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 444

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls te timer fast-reroute 5
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path by-path
next hop 3.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te record-route
mpls te path explicit-path by-path
mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000
mpls te bypass-tunnel
mpls te protected-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 445

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3

mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR E

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 446

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0005.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 3.3.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.15 Example for Configuring MPLS TE Auto FRR

This section provides an example for establishing a bypass tunnel for node protection on the
ingress and a bypass tunnel for link protection on a transit node and providing bandwidth
protection for the primary tunnel.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-16, a primary tunnel is set up over the explicit path LSR A
--> LSR B --> LSR C. A bypass tunnel is set up on the headend LSR A for node protection and
a bypass tunnel is set up on the transit LSR B for link protection, and both of them provide
bandwidth protection.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 447

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-16 Example for configuring Auto FRR

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1

1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32

GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE3/0/0

LSRA LSRC
2.1.1.2/24 3.1.1.1/24 3.1.1.2/24
GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 LSRB GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 2.1.1.1/24 GE1/0/0 10.1.1.1/24
Loopback1
GE2/0/0
3.2.1.1/24 4.4.4.4/32 4.1.1.2/24

GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0
3.2.1.2/24 4.1.1.1/24
LSRE

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Set up a primary tunnel, enable TE FRR in the tunnel interface view, and enable TE Auto
FRR in the MPLS view.
2. Specify the bandwidth that the bypass tunnel can protect and the setup and holding priorities
of the bypass tunnel.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data.
l OSPF process ID and OSPF area ID of each LSR
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of the link
l Explicit path through which the primary tunnel passes
l Name of the primary tunnel interface, IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, tunnel
signaling protocol (RSVP-TE), and tunnel bandwidth

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask for each interface including Loopback interfaces as shown
in Figure 3-16. The detailed configuration is not provided here.
Step 2 Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the routes of each network segment and the host route
of each LSR ID.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the host route of each LSR ID. The detailed
configuration is not provided here.
After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR. You can view
that the LSRs have learned the host routes of LSR IDs from each other.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 448

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and CSPF.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

NOTE

The configurations of LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D are similar to that of LSR A, and are not provided here.
CSPF is enabled only on LSR A and LSR B.

Step 4 Configure OSPF TE.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] ospf
[LSRA-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRA-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRA-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] ospf
[LSRB-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRB-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRB-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] ospf
[LSRC-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRC-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRC-ospf-1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] ospf
[LSRD-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[LSRD-ospf-1] area 0
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[LSRD-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[LSRD-ospf-1] quit

Step 5 Configure the MPLS TE link bandwidth.

Set the maximum reservable bandwidth for the link to 10 Mbit/s, the BC0 bandwidth to 10 Mbit/
s and the BC1 bandwidth to 3 Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 449

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000

The outgoing interfaces on the link through which the primary and bypass tunnels pass use are
similar to these configurations, and are not provided here.
Step 6 Configure the explicit path for the primary tunnel.
[LSRA] explicit-path master
[LSRA-explicit-path-master] next hop 2.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-master] next hop 3.1.1.2

Step 7 Enable TE Auto FRR.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te auto-frr

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te auto-frr

Step 8 Configure the primary tunnel.

[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopBack1
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te record-route label
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path master
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 400
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te priority 4 3
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te fast-reroute bandwidth
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bypass-attributes bandwidth 200 priority 5 4
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 9 Verify the configuration.

Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel2/0/0 verbose command on the ingress LSR A.
You can view information about the primary tunnel and the auto bypass tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel2/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel2/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 3072
Session ID : 200 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress LSP Type : Primary

Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1

Egress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: 2
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 65546
Created Time : 2009/03/30 09:52:03
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 450

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 10000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : Not Used
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel0/0/2048], InnerLabel[3]
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : 10.1.1.1
ReferAutoBypassHandle : 2049
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

You can view that the primary tunnel is bound to the Auto bypass tunnel, that is, Tunnel 0/0/2048.

Run the display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel0/0/2048 verbose command. You can view
detailed information about the Auto bypass tunnel. The bandwidth, setup priority, and holding
priority of the Auto bypass tunnel are the same as the bypass-attributes of the primary tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel name Tunnel0/0/2048 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel0/0/2048
TunnelIndex : 3 LSP Index : 2051
Session ID : 1026 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : - AR-Hop Table Index: 3
C-Hop Table Index : 3
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1027
Created Time : 2010/07/01 13:35:53 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 200 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 4
--------------------------------

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 451

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

You can view that the Auto bypass tunnel protects traffic on GE 2/0/0 but not other three
interfaces on the primary tunnel. The bandwidth of the Auto bypass tunnel is 200 kbit/s, and its
setup and holding priorities are 5 and 4 respectively.
Run the display mpls te tunnel path command on LSR A. You can view information about the
primary tunnel and the Auto bypass tunnel, and node and bandwidth protection that are provided
for the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel path
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel2/0/0
Lsp ID : 1.1.1.1 :200:1
Hop Information
Hop 0 2.1.1.1 Local-Protection available | bandwidth | node
Hop 1 2.1.1.2 Label 106497
Hop 2 2.2.2.2
Hop 3 3.1.1.1 Local-Protection available | bandwidth
Hop 4 3.1.1.2 Label 3
Hop 5 3.3.3.3
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel0/0/2048
Lsp ID : 2.2.2.2 :2049 :2
Hop Information
Hop 0 2.2.2.2
Hop 1 3.2.1.1
Hop 2 3.2.1.2
Hop 3 4.4.4.4
Hop 4 4.1.1.1
Hop 5 4.1.1.2
Hop 6 3.3.3.3
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel0/0/2048
Lsp ID : 1.1.1.1 :2049:3
Hop Information
Hop 0 10.1.1.2
Hop 1 10.1.1.1
Hop 2 3.3.3.3

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 452

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te auto-frr
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path master
next hop 2.1.1.2
next hop 3.1.1.2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te record-route label
mpls te bandwidth ct0 400
mpls te path explicit-path master
mpls te priority 4 3
mpls te fast-reroute bandwidth
mpls te bypass-attributes bandwidth 200 priority 5 4
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls te auto-frr
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 453

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000

mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 454

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
return

l Configuration file of LSR D

#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.16 Example for Configuring RSVP Key Authentication (RSVP-

TE FRR)
This section provides an example for configuring RSVP authentication in the MPLS view to
improve network security in the TE FRR networking.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-17, the primary tunnel is along the path LSR A -> LSR B -
> LSR C -> LSR D, and FRR is required on the link between LSR B and LSR C for protection.
A bypass tunnel is set up along the path LSR B -> LSR E -> LSR C. LSR B functions as the
PLR and LSR C functions as the MP.
The primary and bypass MPLS TE tunnels are set up by using explicit paths. RSVP-TE is used
as the signaling protocol.
The RSVP authentication needs to be configured on LSR B and LSR C. In this example, LSR
B and LSR C are configured as neighboring nodes by using their LSR IDs, and RSVP key
authentication is enabled to achieve higher reliability.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 455

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-17 Networking diagram of the MPLS TE FRR-based RSVP key authentication
Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32

LSRD

GE1/0/0
4.1.1.2/24

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32 GE1/0/0
LSRA LSRB 4.1.1.1/24

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0 LSRC

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.1.1.1/24 3.1.1.2/24 POS3/0/0
POS3/0/0 3.3.1.2/24
3.2.1.1/24
Primary LSP POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
Bypass LSP 3.2.1.2/24 3.3.1.1/24

LSRE

Loopback1
5.5.5.5/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure MPLS TE FRR based on Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR.

2. Configure RSVP key authentication on LSR B and LSR C of the tunnel, preventing forged
Resv messages from consuming network resources.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l MPLS LSR ID of each device

l Local password and key for RSVP authentication
l Data listed in "Data Preparation" of Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR

Procedure
Step 1 Configure MPLS TE FRR.

Configure the primary tunnel and bypass tunnel based on Example for Configuring MPLS TE
FRR and then bind the two tunnels.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 456

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 2 Configure RSVP key authentication on LSR B and LSR C to enhance security of packet
transmission. In addition, check whether the RSVP key authentication is successfully
configured, configure the RSVP-TE handshake function, and set a local password.
# Configure RSVP key authentication on LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls rsvp-te peer 3.3.3.3
[LSRB-mpls-rsvp-te-peer-3.3.3.3] mpls rsvp-te authentication plain huawei
[LSRB-mpls-rsvp-te-peer-3.3.3.3] mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake beijingHW

# Configure RSVP key authentication on LSR C.

[LSRC] mpls rsvp-te peer 2.2.2.2
[LSRC-mpls-rsvp-te-peer-2.2.2.2] mpls rsvp-te authentication plain huawei
[LSRC-mpls-rsvp-te-peer-2.2.2.2] mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake beijingHW

Step 3 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics global command on LSR B. You can view the status
of the RSVP key authentication. If the command output shows that the values of the
SendChallengeMsgCounter field, RecChallengeMsgCounter field, SendResponseMsgCounter
field, and RecResponseMsgCounter field are not zero, it indicates that the PLR and the MP
successfully shake hands with each other and RSVP key authentication is configured
successfully.
<LSRB> display mpls rsvp-te statistics global
LSR ID: 2.2.2.2 LSP Count: 2
PSB Count: 1 RSB Count: 1
RFSB Count: 0

Total Statistics Information:

PSB CleanupTimeOutCounter: 0 RSB CleanupTimeOutCounter: 0
SendPacketCounter: 104 RecPacketCounter: 216
SendCreatePathCounter: 7 RecCreatePathCounter: 57
SendRefreshPathCounter: 48 RecRefreshPathCounter: 28
SendCreateResvCounter: 4 RecCreateResvCounter: 4
SendRefreshResvCounter: 26 RecRefreshResvCounter: 49
SendResvConfCounter: 0 RecResvConfCounter: 0
SendHelloCounter: 0 RecHelloCounter: 0
SendAckCounter: 0 RecAckCounter: 0
SendPathErrCounter: 1 RecPathErrCounter: 0
SendResvErrCounter: 0 RecResvErrCounter: 0
SendPathTearCounter: 0 RecPathTearCounter: 1
SendResvTearCounter: 1 RecResvTearCounter: 1
SendSrefreshCounter: 0 RecSrefreshCounter: 0
SendAckMsgCounter: 0 RecAckMsgCounter: 0
SendChallengeMsgCounter: 1 RecChallengeMsgCounter: 1
SendResponseMsgCounter: 1 RecResponseMsgCounter: 1
SendErrMsgCounter: 1 RecErrMsgCounter: 0
ResourceReqFaultCounter: 0
Bfd neighbor count: 1 Bfd session count: 0

# Shut down the protected outbound interface on the PLR.

[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] shutdown

# Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A to view the status of the primary
tunnel. You can see that the tunnel interface is Up.
# Run the tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A. You can view the path by which the
tunnel passes.
[LSRA] tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 457

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

0 Ingress 2.1.1.2/[13312 ]
1 2.1.1.2 1 ms Transit 3.2.1.2/[13312 13312 ]
2 3.2.1.2 16 ms Transit 3.3.1.2/[3 ]
3 3.3.1.2 1 ms Transit 4.1.1.2/[3 ]
4 4.1.1.2 1 ms Egress

The command output shows that traffic is switched to the bypass tunnel.
# Run the display mpls te tunnel name tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on LSR B. You can see
that the bypass tunnel is working.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel name tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 4098
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit LSP Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
ER-Hop Table Index : 3 AR-Hop Table Index: 12
C-Hop Table Index : 50
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 66000
Created Time : 2009/01/12 10:09:10
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 50000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : In Use
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel3/0/0], InnerLabel[1024]
Bypass Lsp ID : 9 FrrNextHop : 3.3.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the display mpls rsvp-te peer command. You can see whether the bypass tunnel is
successfully set up.
[LSRB] display mpls rsvp-te peer
Remote Node id Neighbor

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 458

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Neighbor Addr: -----

SrcInstance: 0xDAC29CB4 NbrSrcInstance: 0x0
PSB Count: 1 RSB Count: 0
Hello Type Sent: NONE
SRefresh Enable: NO
Last valid seq # rcvd: NULL

Interface: gigabitethernet1/0/0
Neighbor Addr: 2.1.1.1
SrcInstance: 0xDAC29CB4 NbrSrcInstance: 0x0
PSB Count: 1 RSB Count: 0
Hello Type Sent: NONE
SRefresh Enable: NO
Last valid seq # rcvd: NULL

Interface: gigabitethernet2/0/0
Neighbor Addr: 3.1.1.2
SrcInstance: 0xDAC29CB4 NbrSrcInstance: 0x0
PSB Count: 0 RSB Count: 0
Hello Type Sent: NONE
SRefresh Enable: NO
Last valid seq # rcvd: NULL

Interface: POS1/0/0
Neighbor Addr: 3.2.1.2
SrcInstance: 0xDAC29CB4 NbrSrcInstance: 0x0
PSB Count: 0 RSB Count: 1
Hello Type Sent: NONE
SRefresh Enable: NO
Last valid seq # rcvd: NULL

The command output shows that the number of RSBs on POS 1/0/0 of LSR B is not zero. This
indicates that RSVP key authentication is successfully configured on LSR B and its neighbor
LSR E, and the resources are successfully reserved.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 459

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te record-route label
mpls te path explicit-path pri-path
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls te timer fast-reroute 5
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path by-path
next hop 3.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 460

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1

tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te record-route
mpls te path explicit-path by-path
mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000
mpls te bypass-tunnel
mpls te protected-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
mpls te commit
mpls rsvp-te peer 3.3.3.3
mpls rsvp-te authentication plain huawei
mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake beijingHW
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
mpls rsvp-te peer 2.2.2.2
mpls rsvp-te authentication plain huawei
mpls rsvp-te authentication handshake beijingHW
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 461

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR E

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 462

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

3.26.17 Example for Configuring RSVP-TE Summary Refresh

(RSVP-TE FRR)
This section provides an example for configuring RSVP Summary Refresh (Srefresh) to improve
resource usage in the TE FRR networking.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 3-18, the primary tunnel is along the path LSR A -> LSR B -> LSR C ->
LSR D, and the link between LSR B and LSR C requires FRR for protection. In addition, the
summary refresh (Srefresh) function needs to be configured on LSR B and LSR C.

A bypass tunnel is set up along the path LSR B -> LSR E -> LSR C. LSR B functions as the
PLR and LSR C functions as the MP.

The primary and bypass MPLS TE tunnels are set up by using explicit paths. RSVP-TE is used
as the signaling protocol.

The Srefresh function needs to be configured on LSR B and LSR C. In addition, RSVP key
authentication is configured in the MPLS view. This helps the Srefresh function to achieve higher
reliability.

Figure 3-18 Networking diagram of the MPLS TE FRR-based Srefresh function

Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32

LSRD

GE1/0/0
4.1.1.2/24

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32 GE1/0/0
LSRA LSRB 4.1.1.1/24

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0 LSRC

GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.1.1.1/24 3.1.1.2/24 POS3/0/0
POS3/0/0 3.3.1.2/24
3.2.1.1/24
Primary LSP POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
Bypass LSP 3.2.1.2/24 3.3.1.1/24

LSRE

Loopback1
5.5.5.5/32

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 463

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure MPLS TE FRR based on Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR.
2. Configure the Srefresh function on the PLR and MP along a tunnel to enhance transmission
reliability of RSVP messages and improve resource usage.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Data listed in "Data Preparation" of Example for Configuring MPLS TE FRR

Procedure
Step 1 Configure MPLS TE FRR.
You can configure the primary and bypass MPLS TE tunnels based on Example for
Configuring MPLS TE FRR, and then bind the two tunnels.
Step 2 Configure the Srefresh function on LSR B functioning as the PLR and LSR C functioning as
the MP.
# Configure the Srefresh function on LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te srefresh
[LSRB-mpls] quit

# Configure the Srefresh function on LSR C.

[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te srefresh
[LSRC-mpls] quit

Step 3 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics global command on LSR B. You can view the status
of the Srefresh function. If the command output shows that the values of the
SendSrefreshCounter field, RecSrefreshCounter field, SendAckMsgCounter field, and
RecAckMsgCounter field are not zero, it indicates that the Srefresh packets are successfully
transmitted.
[LSRB] display mpls rsvp-te statistics global
LSR ID: 2.2.2.2 LSP Count: 2
PSB Count: 1 RSB Count: 1
RFSB Count: 0

Total Statistics Information:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 464

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

SendSrefreshCounter: 1 RecSrefreshCounter: 6
SendAckMsgCounter: 6 RecAckMsgCounter: 16
SendChallengeMsgCounter: 0 RecChallengeMsgCounter: 0
SendResponseMsgCounter: 0 RecResponseMsgCounter: 0
SendErrMsgCounter: 1 RecErrMsgCounter: 0
ResourceReqFaultCounter: 0
Bfd neighbor count: 1 Bfd session count: 0

# Shut down the protected outbound interface GE 2/0/0.

[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] shutdown

# Run the display interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A to view the status of the primary
tunnel. You can view that the tunnel interface is Up.
# Run the tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0 command on LSR A. You can view the path by which the
tunnel passes.
[LSRA] tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 2.1.1.2/[13312 ]
1 2.1.1.2 1 ms Transit 3.2.1.2/[13312 13312 ]
2 3.2.1.2 16 ms Transit 3.3.1.2/[3 ]
3 3.3.1.2 1 ms Transit 4.1.1.2/[3 ]
4 4.1.1.2 1 ms Egress

# The command output shows that traffic is switched to the bypass tunnel.
# Run the display mpls te tunnel name tunnel1/0/0 verbose command on LSR B. You can
view that the bypass tunnel is working.
[LSRB] display mpls te tunnel name tunnel1/0/0 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 4098
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Transit LSP Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : GE1/0/0
Out-Interface : GE2/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
ER-Hop Table Index : 3 AR-Hop Table Index: 12
C-Hop Table Index : 50
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 66000
Created Time : 2009/01/12 10:09:10
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 50000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : In Use
Bypass Tunnel Id : 67141670
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel3/0/0], InnerLabel[1024]

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 465

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Bypass Lsp ID : 9 FrrNextHop : 3.3.1.2

ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the display mpls rsvp-te statistics global command. You can view the statistics about
the Srefresh function.
[LSRB]display mpls rsvp-te statistics global
LSR ID: 2.2.2.2 LSP Count: 2
PSB Count: 2 RSB Count: 2
RFSB Count: 1

Total Statistics Information:

PSB CleanupTimeOutCounter: 0 RSB CleanupTimeOutCounter: 0
SendPacketCounter: 28 RecPacketCounter: 61
SendCreatePathCounter: 3 RecCreatePathCounter: 18
SendRefreshPathCounter: 9 RecRefreshPathCounter: 6
SendCreateResvCounter: 3 RecCreateResvCounter: 2
SendRefreshResvCounter: 4 RecRefreshResvCounter: 10
SendResvConfCounter: 0 RecResvConfCounter: 0
SendHelloCounter: 0 RecHelloCounter: 0
SendAckCounter: 0 RecAckCounter: 0
SendPathErrCounter: 1 RecPathErrCounter: 0
SendResvErrCounter: 0 RecResvErrCounter: 0
SendPathTearCounter: 0 RecPathTearCounter: 0
SendResvTearCounter: 0 RecResvTearCounter: 0
SendSrefreshCounter: 14 RecSrefreshCounter: 8
SendAckMsgCounter: 8 RecAckMsgCounter: 18
SendChallengeMsgCounter: 0 RecChallengeMsgCounter: 0
SendResponseMsgCounter: 0 RecResponseMsgCounter: 0
SendErrMsgCounter: 0 RecErrMsgCounter: 0
ResourceReqFaultCounter: 0
Bfd neighbor count: 2 Bfd session count: 0

After the Srefresh function is configured on LSR B and LSR C globally, the Srefresh function
on LSR B and LSR C takes effect when the primary tunnel fails.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path pri-path
next hop 2.1.1.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 466

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

next hop 3.1.1.2

next hop 4.1.1.2
next hop 4.4.4.4
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te record-route label
mpls te path explicit-path pri-path
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 50000
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls te timer fast-reroute 5
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
mpls rsvp-te srefresh
#
explicit-path by-path
next hop 3.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 467

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te record-route
mpls te path explicit-path by-path
mpls te bandwidth ct0 100000
mpls te bypass-tunnel
mpls te protected-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te srefresh
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 3.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 3.3.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 468

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 4.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR E
#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0005.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 3.3.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 469

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.18 Example for Configuring Board Removal Protection

This section provides an example for implementing the switchover and switchback of TE traffic
between the installation and removal of an interface board.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-19 shows the networking diagram of MPLS TE FRR. The primary tunnel is along PLR
→ LSR1→ MP → LSR3, and its bypass tunnel is along PLR → LSR2 → MP. After the interface
board where POS 1/0/0 of the PLR resides is removed, TE traffic of the primary tunnel needs
to switch to the bypass tunnel, and after the interface board is installed back, traffic switches
back to the primary tunnel.

Figure 3-19 Networking diagram for configuring MPLS TE FRR

Loopback 1
2.2.2.2/32
PO
/0 30 S
1/0 /30 .1. 2/0
Loopback 1 S
PO 1.1.2
1.1/ /0 Loopback 1 Loopback 1
1.1.1.1/32 /0 . 30 PO 4.4.4.4/32 5.5.5.5/32
LSR1
1/0 0 10 30 S1
.1 /
S /3 .1. 0/0
PO 1.1.1 2/3 POS3/0/0
0 . 0 50.1.1.1/30
1
POS1/0/0
P /0 MP 50.1.1.2/30 LSR3
PLR 2 OS / 0
0.1 2/0 2 30
.1. /0 POS .1.2/
1/3 LSR2 .1
0 POS /0 40
20 1 /
2 300
.1. /0/0
1.2 P OS .1.1/
/30 .1
40 : primary LSP
Loopback 1 : bypass LSP
3.3.3.3/32

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure the tunnel interfaces of the primary and bypass tunnels on the master control
board.
2. Specify the explicit paths of the primary tunnel and the bypass tunnel when configuring
MPLS TE FRR. The explicit paths of the primary tunnel and the bypass tunnel must pass
through different interface boards of the PLR and the primary tunnel cannot be on the board
to be removed; otherwise, board hot removal protection cannot be implemented.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 470

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Slot number of the main control board on the PLR
l Tunnel interfaces of the primary and bypass tunnels
l Outgoing interfaces of the primary and bypass tunnels
l Explicit paths of the primary and bypass tunnels

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP address on each interface.
The IP address and mask on each interface including the loopback interface are configured as
shown in Figure 3-19. The detailed configuration is not provided here.
Step 2 Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the routes of each network segment and the host route
of each LSR ID.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise the host route of each LSR ID. The detailed
configuration is not provided here.
After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR. You can view
that the LSRs learn the host route of the LSR ID from each other.
Step 3 Configure the basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE and RSVP-TE.
# Configure a PLR.
[PLR] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[PLR] mpls
[PLR-mpls] mpls te
[PLR-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[PLR-mpls] quit
[PLR] interface pos 1/0/0
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] quit
[PLR] interface pos2/0/0
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] quit

NOTE

The configurations on LSR1, LSR2, the MP, and LSR3 are similar to the configuration on the PLR, and
are not provided here.

Step 4 Configure OSPF TE on all LSRs and enable CSPF on the ingress of the primary tunnel.
# Configure OSPF TE.
[PLR] ospf
[PLR-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[PLR-ospf-1] area 0
[PLR-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[PLR-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[PLR-ospf-1] quit

NOTE

The configurations on LSR1, LSR2, the MP, and LSR3 are similar to the configuration on a PLR, and are
not provided here.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 471

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# Enable CSPF on the ingress of the primary tunnel.

[PLR] mpls
[PLR-mpls] mpls te cspf

Step 5 Configure the reservable bandwidth for the interfaces on each link.
Set the maximum reservable bandwidth of the link to 10 Mbit/s, the BC0 bandwidth to 10 Mbit/
s, and the BC1 bandwidth to 3 Mbit/s.
# Configure the PLR.
[PLR] interface pos 1/0/0
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
[PLR-Pos1/0/0] quit
[PLR] interface pos 2/0/0
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
[PLR-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure link bandwidth on all the outgoing interfaces of the link along the primary and
bypass tunnels. The configurations are not provided here.
Step 6 Configure the primary tunnel.
# Configure the explicit path for the primary tunnel on the PLR.
[PLR] explicit-path master
[PLR-explicit-path-master] next hop 10.1.1.2
[PLR-explicit-path-master] next hop 30.1.1.2
[PLR-explicit-path-master] next hop 50.1.1.2
[PLR-explicit-path-master] next hop 5.5.5.5
[PLR-explicit-path-master] quit

# Configure the tunnel interface of the primary tunnel.

[PLR] interface tunnel0/0/1
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] ip address unnumbered interface loopback1
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] destination 5.5.5.5
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te path explicit-path master
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te bandwidth ct0 400

# Enable MPLS TE FRR.

[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te fast-reroute
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] mpls te commit
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/1] quit

# Run the display interface tunnel command on PLR. You can view the status of Tunnel 0/0/1
of the primary tunnel is Up.
[PLR] display interface tunnel 0/0/1
Tunnel0/0/1 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2009-03-29, 16:35:10
Description : Tunnel0/0/1 Interface, Route Port
...

Step 7 Configure the bypass tunnel.

# Configure the explicit path for the bypass tunnel on the PLR.
[PLR] explicit-path by-path
[PLR-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 20.1.1.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 472

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PLR-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 40.1.1.2

[PLR-explicit-path-by-path] next hop 4.4.4.4

# Configure the tunnel interface of the bypass tunnel.

[PLR] interface tunnel 0/0/2
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] destination 4.4.4.4
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te path explicit-path by-path
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te bypass-tunnel

# Configure the interface protected by the bypass tunnel.

[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te protected-interface pos 1/0/0
[PLR-Tunnel0/0/2] mpls te commit

# Run the display interface tunnel command on PLR. You can view the status of Tunnel 0/0/2
of the bypass tunnel is Up.
<PLR> display interface tunnel 0/0/2
Tunnel0/0/2 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2009-03-29, 16:43:34
Description : Tunnel0/0/2 Interface, Route Port
...

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

# Run the tracert lsp te tunnel command on the PLR. You can view TE traffic is transmitted
through the primary tunnel.
<PLR> tracert lsp te tunnel 0/0/1
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel0/0/1 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 10.1.1.2/[65536 ]
1 10.1.1.2 50 ms Transit 30.1.1.2/[131072 ]
2 30.1.1.2 40 ms Transit 50.1.1.2/[3 ]
3 5.5.5.5 70 ms Egress

# After the interface board where the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel (POS 1/0/0) resides
is removed, run the display interface tunnel and display mpls te tunnel stale-interface
interface-index verbose commands. You can view that the tunnel interface of the primary tunnel
remains Up.
# Run the display mpls te tunnel stale-interface command on the PLR. You can view that the
outgoing interface of the primary tunnel is in the Stale state.
<PLR> display mpls stale-interface
Stale-interface Status TE Attri LSP Count CRLSP Count Effective MTU
0x018000106 Up Dis 0 1 -
<PLR> display mpls te tunnel stale-interface 18000106 verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel0/0/1
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress LSP Type : -
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 5.5.5.5
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : 0x800086
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 473

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ER-Hop Table Index : 0 AR-Hop Table Index: 5

C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1024
Created Time : 2009-03-29, 16:43:34
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x63 Protected Flag : 0x1
Bypass In Use : In Use
Bypass Tunnel Id : 8396808
BypassTunnel : Tunnel Index[Tunnel0/0/2], InnerLabel[65536]
Bypass Lsp ID : 1 FrrNextHop : 40.1.1.2
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the display mpls te tunnel path command on the PLR. You can view the path information
of the primary tunnel.
<PLR> display mpls te tunnel path Tunnel0/0/1
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel0/0/1
Lsp ID : 1.1.1.1 :100 :1
Hop Information
Hop 0 20.1.1.1 Local-Protection in use
Hop 1 20.1.1.2 Label 65536
Hop 2 3.3.3.3 Label 65536
Hop 3 40.1.1.1
Hop 4 40.1.1.2 Label 131072
Hop 5 4.4.4.4 Label 131072
Hop 6 50.1.1.1
Hop 7 50.1.1.2 Label 3
Hop 8 5.5.5.5 Label 3

# Run the tracert lsp te tunnel command. You can view TE traffic is transmitted through the
bypass tunnel.
<PLR> tracert lsp te tunnel 0/0/1
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel0/0/1 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 20.1.1.2/[65536 15360 ]
1 20.1.1.2 50 ms Transit 40.1.1.2/[131073 ]
2 40.1.1.2 50 ms Transit 30.1.1.1/[3 ]
3 30.1.1.1 4 ms Transit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 474

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

4 30.1.1.2 15 ms Transit 50.1.1.2/[3 ]

5 11.1.1.1 6 ms Egress

# After the interface board where the outgoing interface of the primary tunnel resides is re-
plugged in, run the tracert lsp te tunnel command. You can view that traffic switches back to
the primary tunnel.
<PLR> tracert lsp te tunnel 0/0/1
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel6/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 10.1.1.2/[65537 ]
1 10.1.1.2 40 ms Transit 30.1.1.2/[131074 ]
2 30.1.1.2 50 ms Transit 50.1.1.2/[3 ]
3 5.5.5.5 60 ms Egress

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of the PLR
#
sysname PLR
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path master
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 30.1.1.2
next hop 50.1.1.2
next hop 5.5.5.5
#
explicit-path by-path
next hop 20.1.1.2
next hop 40.1.1.2
next hop 4.4.4.4
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel0/0/1
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 400

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 475

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te path explicit-path master

mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel0/0/2
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te record-route
mpls te path explicit-path by-path
mpls te bypass-tunnel
mpls te protected-interface Pos1/0/0
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR1
#
sysname LSR1
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 30.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR2
#
sysname LSR2
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 476

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 30.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of the MP
#
sysname MP
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 50.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 10000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 10000 bc1 3000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 30.1.1.0 0.0.0.3

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 477

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

network 40.1.1.0 0.0.0.3

network 50.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR3

#
sysname LSR3
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 50.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 50.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 5.5.5.5 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.19 Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby

This section provides an example for establishing a hot-standby CR-LSP, including configuring
a hot-standby CR-LSP and a best-effort CR-LSP.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-20 shows an MPLS VPN. A TE tunnel from PE1 functioning as the ingress to PE2
functioning as the egress, CR-LSP hot backup, and best-effort LSPs need to be configured. The
following LSPs need to be established:
l Primary CR-LSP along PE1 --> P1 --> PE2
l Backup CR-LSP along PE1 --> P2 --> PE2
l Best-effort LSP along PE1 --> P2 --> P1 --> PE2
If the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic switches to the backup CR-LSP. After the primary CR-LSP
recovers from the fault, traffic switches back to the primary CR-LSP in 15 seconds. If both the
primary CR-LSP and backup CR-LSP fail, traffic switches to the best-effort LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 478

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-20 Networking diagram of CR-LSP hot backup

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
P1 10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 P2
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0
GE2/0/0 10.2.1.1/30 10.3.1.2/30 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.1/30 10.5.1.2 /30
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
PE1 PE2
10.3.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

Loopback1 Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32 3.3.3.3/32
: Primary path
: Backup path
: Best-effort path

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP addresses and an IGP on all LSRs.

2. Configure basic MPLS functions and MPLS TE functions.
3. Specify explicit paths for the primary and backup CR-LSPs on PE1.
4. Create the tunnel interface with PE2 as the egress on PE1 and specify the explicit path.
Enable hot standby. Enable system to try to create a best-effort LSP to protect traffic if both
the primary and backup CR-LSPs fail. Set the switching delay time to 15 seconds.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IGP protocol and data required for configuring an IGP

l MPLS LSR ID
l Tunnel interface and bandwidth used by the tunnel
l Explicit paths of the primary and backup CR-LSPs

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 479

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
Configure an IP address for each interface, create loopback interfaces on LSRs, and then
configure the IP addresses of loopback interfaces as MPLS LSR IDs as shown in Figure 3-20.
For detailed configuration, see configuration files in this example.
Step 2 Configure an IGP.
Configure OSPF or IS-IS on each LSR to enable communication between LSRs. In this example,
IS-IS is configured. For detailed configuration, see configuration files in this example.
Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions.
On each LSR, configure an LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system view and in the interface
view. For detailed configuration, see configuration files in this example.
Step 4 Configure basic MPLS TE functions.
Enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the MPLS view and the interface view on each LSR.
Set the maximum reservable bandwidth of links to 100 Mbit/s and the bandwidth of BC0 to 100
Mbit/s. For detailed configurations, see configuration files in this example.
Step 5 Configure IS-IS TE and CSPF.
Configure IS-IS TE on each LSR and CSPF on PE1. For detailed configuration, see configuration
files in this example.
Step 6 Configure the explicit paths for the primary and backup CR-LSPs respectively.
# Configure the explicit path for the primary CR-LSP on PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] explicit-path main
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.4.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 10.2.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-main] next hop 3.3.3.3
[PE1-explicit-path-main] quit

# Configure the explicit path for the backup CR-LSP on PE1.

[PE1] explicit-path backup
[PE1-explicit-path-backup] next hop 10.3.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-backup] next hop 10.5.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-backup] next hop 3.3.3.3
[PE1-explicit-path-backup] quit

# Display information about the explicit path on PE1.

[PE1] display explicit-path main
Path Name : main Path Status : Enabled
1 10.4.1.2 Strict Include
2 10.2.1.2 Strict Include
3 3.3.3.3 Strict Include
[PE1] display explicit-path backup
Path Name : backup Path Status : Enabled
1 10.3.1.2 Strict Include
2 10.5.1.2 Strict Include
3 3.3.3.3 Strict Include

Step 7 Configure the tunnel interfaces.

# Configure a Tunnel interface on PE1; specify the explicit path; set the tunnel bandwidth to 10
Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 480

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0

[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path main
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000

# Configure hot standby on the tunnel interface, configure the switch delay time to 15 seconds,
specify the explicit path, and configure the best-effort LSP.
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te backup hot-standby wtr 15
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te backup ordinary best-effort
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1. You can see that the
primary and backup CR-LSPs have been established.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel 1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 1
Hot-Standby LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 32770

# Display information about hot backup.

[PE1] display mpls te hot-standby state interface Tunnel 1/0/0
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the Tunnel1/0/0 hot-standby state
----------------------------------------------------------------
session id : 100
main LSP token : 0x100201a
hot-standby LSP token : 0x100201b
HSB switch result : Primary LSP
WTR : 15s
using same path : no

# Run the ping lsp te command to check the connection of the backup CR-LSP.
[PE1] ping lsp te tunnel 1/0/0 hot-standby
LSP PING FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 : 100 data bytes, press
CTRL_C to break
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=1 time = 380 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=2 time = 130 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=3 time = 70 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=4 time = 120 ms
Reply from 3.3.3.3: bytes=100 Sequence=5 time = 120 ms

--- FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 ping statistics ---
5 packet(s) transmitted
5 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 70/164/380 ms

# Run the tracert lsp te command to trace the path of the backup CR-LSP.
[PE1] tracert lsp te tunnel 1/0/0 hot-standby
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 10.3.1.2/[13313 ]

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 481

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

1 10.3.1.2 90 ms Transit 10.5.1.2/[3 ]

2 3.3.3.3 130 ms Egress

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

Connect two interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2, on a tester to PE1 and PE2 respectively. On Port 1,
inject MPLS traffic and send traffic to Port 2. After the cable attached to GE 2/0/0 on PE1 or P1
is pulled out, fault recovery is performed at millisecond level. Run the display mpls te hot-
standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0 command on PE1. You can see that traffic has switched
to the backup CR-LSP.
[PE1] display mpls te hot-standby state interface tunnel 1/0/0
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the Tunnel1/0/0 hot-standby state
----------------------------------------------------------------
session id : 100
main LSP token : 0x0
hot-standby LSP token : 0x100201b
HSB switch result : Hot-standby LSP
WTR : 15s
using same path : no

After attaching the cable into GE 2/0/0, you can see that traffic switches back to the primary
CR-LSP in 15 seconds.
After you remove the cable from GE 2/0/0 on PE1 or P1 and the cable from GE 2/0/0 on PE2
or P2, the tunnel interface goes Down and then Up. This means that the best-effort has been set
up successfully, allowing traffic to switch to the best-effort LSP.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel 1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Best-Effort LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : DOWN
Main LSP State : SETTING UP
Hot-Standby LSP State : DOWN
Main LSP State : SETTING UP
Best-Effort LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 32773
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel path
Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel1/0/0
Lsp ID : 4.4.4.4 :100 :32776
Hop Information
Hop 0 10.3.1.1
Hop 1 10.3.1.2
Hop 2 2.2.2.2
Hop 3 10.1.1.2
Hop 4 10.1.1.1
Hop 5 1.1.1.1
Hop 6 10.2.1.1
Hop 7 10.2.1.2
Hop 8 3.3.3.3

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 482

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4

mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path backup
next hop 10.3.1.2
next hop 10.5.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.4.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
mpls te backup hot-standby wtr 15
mpls te backup ordinary best-effort
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 483

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 484

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.20 Example for Locking an Attribute Template for Hot-standby

CR-LSPs
This section describes how to lock an attribute template for hot-standby CR-LSPs. You can
configure an attribute template for hot-standby CR-LSPs, preventing an unwanted CR-LSP
switchover and reducing resource consumption.

Networking Requirements
On a network as shown in Figure 3-21, a primary CR-LSP needs to be set up from LSR A to
LSR D, and a hot-standby CR-LSP needs to be set up for the primary CR-LSP.
A maximum of three attribute templates can be created for a backup CR-LSP. In the event that
a CR-LSP established using any of the three templates is stable, you can lock a CR-LSP attribute
template, thus avoiding unnecessary traffic switchover and reducing consumption of system
resources.
When an attribute template for hot-standby CR-LSPs is locked, the following effects can be
achieved:
l If a hot-standby CR-LSP is established through a lower-priority attribute template, the
system will not use a higher-priority attribute template to create a new hot-standby CR-
LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 485

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l When the attribute template of hot-standby CR-LSPs is unlocked, the system uses a higher-
priority attribute template to create a new hot-standby CR-LSP according to the make-
before-break mechanism.

Figure 3-21 Networking diagram of locking an attribute template of hot-standby CR-LSPs

LSRC
/0 PO
S 1/0 24 10. S2/0
PO .1.2/ 1.4 /0
1 .1/2 PO
/0 . 41 S
1.1.1.1/32 S1/0 4 10 0.1 1/0/0 4.4.4.4/32
/2 .
PO .1.1 4.2
0 .1 POS2/0/0 LSRE POS2/0/0 /24
1
10.1.3.1/24 10.1.6.2/24
PO POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
/0
LSRA 10 S3/
.1. 0/0
10.1.3.2/24 10.1.6.1/24
S 3/0 /24 LSRD
2.1 PO .5.2
/24 PO 0 .1
10 S1/ 2 / 0/ 4 10
.1. 0/0 S /2
2.2
/24 PO .5.1
.1
10
LSRB

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure IP addresses and a routing protocol for interfaces to ensure the connectivity on
the network layer.
2. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and CSPF in the system view and the interface view.
3. Configure CR-LSP attribute templates on the ingress of a primary CR-LSP.
4. Use CR-LSP attribute templates to establish CR-LSPs on a tunnel interface, and lock a CR-
LSP attribute template of hot-standby CR-LSPs.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses and an IGP (OSPF, in this example) for interfaces to ensure connectivity
at the network layer.
The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure the MPLS LSR ID for each device, and enable MPLS and MPLS TE in the system
view and in each interface view of each device.
# Configure LSR A.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 486

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos3/0/0
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] quit

NOTE

The configurations of LSR B, LSR C, LSR D, and LSR E are similar to those of LSR A, and are not
mentioned here.

Step 3 Configure CR-LSP attribute templates and their explicit paths.

# On LSR A, configure the explicit path named up_path as LSR A → LSR C → LSR D.
[LSRA] explicit-path up_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] next hop 10.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] next hop 10.1.4.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-up_path] quit

# On LSR A, configure the explicit path named down_path as LSR A → LSR B → LSR D.
[LSRA] explicit-path down_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] next hop 10.1.2.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] next hop 10.1.5.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-down_path] quit

# On LSR A, configure the explicit path named middle_path as LSR A → LSR E → LSR D.
[LSRA] explicit-path middle_path
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] next hop 10.1.3.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] next hop 10.1.6.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-middle_path] quit

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_1.

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_2.

[LSRA] lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_2
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] explicit-path middle_path
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] priority 5 5
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] commit
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_2] quit

# On LSR A, configure the CR-LSP attribute template named lsp_attribute_3.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 487

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA] lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3

[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] explicit-path down_path
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] priority 5 5
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] commit
[LSRA-lsp-attribuLSP_attribute_3] quit

NOTE
The priorities of the CR-LSP attribute templates configured on the same tunnel interface must be the same.

Step 4 Use a CR-LSP attribute template to set up a CR-LSP with LSR A being the ingress and LSR D
being the egress.

# To trigger LSR A to use a lower-priority attribute template to set up a hot-standby CR-LSP,

run the shutdown command to shut down the explicit path named down_path.
[LSRA] interface POS3/0/0
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] shutdown
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] quit

# Set up a CR-LSP from LSR A to LSR D, and lock an attribute template for hot-standby CR-
LSPs.
[LSRA] interface tunnel1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 4.4.4.4
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te primary-lsp-constraint lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint 1 lsp-attribute
lsp_attribute_3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te hotstandby-lsp-constraint 2 lsp-attribute
lsp_attribute_2
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# On LSR A, run the undo shutdown command on POS 3/0/0 to reenable the explicit path
named down_path and make the attribute template named lsp_attribute_3 effective.
[LSRA] interface pos3/0/0
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] undo shutdown
[LSRA-Pos3/0/0] quit

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# After the configuration, run the shutdown command on the tunnel interface of the primary
CR-LSP. You can switch traffic to a hot-standby CR-LSP.
[LSRA] interface pos1/0/0
[LSRA-POS1/0/0] shutdown
[LSRA-POS1/0/0] quit

# After the traffic switchover, run the tracert lsp te tunnel command on LSR A. You can view
that the hot-standby CR-LSP is set up by using the explicit path configured in the attribute
template named lsp_attribute_2.
<LSRA> tracert lsp te tunnel
LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C to
break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 10.1.3.2/[1024 ]
1 10.1.3.2 120 ms Transit 10.1.6.2/[3 ]
2 4.4.4.4 100 ms Egress

# Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command on LSR A. You can view that the hot-
standby CR-LSP is set up by using the attribute template named lsp_attribute_2 that is not
upgraded.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 488

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

<LSRA> display mpls te tunnel verbose

No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 2049
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32770
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Hot-Standby
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos1/0/1
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 2
ER-Hop Table Index : 2 AR-Hop Table Index: 1
C-Hop Table Index : -
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1026
Created Time : 2010/02/21 12:00:50
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 5
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

# Run the undo mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock command on LSR A to unlock
the attribute template of hot-standby CR-LSPs.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] undo mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Run the tracert lsp te tunnel1/0/0 command on LSR A. You can view that the hot-standby
CR-LSP is set up by using the explicit path configured in the attribute template named
lsp_attribute_3.
<LSRA> tracert lsp te tunnel1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 489

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

LSP Trace Route FEC: TE TUNNEL IPV4 SESSION QUERY Tunnel1/0/0 , press CTRL_C t
o break.
TTL Replier Time Type Downstream
0 Ingress 10.1.2.2/[1024 ]
1 10.1.2.2 90 ms Transit 10.1.5.2/[3 ]
2 4.4.4.4 100 ms Egress

# Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command on LSR A. You can view that the hot-
standby CR-LSP is set up by using the attribute template named lsp_attribute_1 that is not
upgraded. This indicates that the system automatically upgrades the attribute template after the
attribute template of hot-standby CR-LSPs is unlocked.
<LSRA> display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32929
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Hot-Standby
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : Pos1/0/2
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : 1
ER-Hop Table Index : 1 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1182
Created Time : 2010/02/21 18:14:23
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 5 Hold-Priority : 5
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 490

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path middle_path
next hop 10.1.3.2
next hop 10.1.6.2
#
explicit-path up_path
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 10.1.4.2
#
explicit-path down_path
next hop 10.1.2.2
next hop 10.1.5.2
#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_1
explicit-path up_path
priority 5 5
hop-limit 12
commit
#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_2
explicit-path down_path
priority 5 5
commit
#
lsp-attribute lsp_attribute_3
explicit-path middle_path
priority 5 5
commit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 491

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te backup hotstandby-lsp-constraint lock

mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.5.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.4.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 492

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos3/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR E
#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 10.1.6.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 493

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255

mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.21 Example for Configuring the Dynamic Bandwidth Function

for a Hot-standby CR-LSP
This section describes how to configure the dynamic bandwidth function for a hot-standby CR-
LSP. This function can save system resources.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-22 is a networking diagram of CR-LSP hot standby. A TE tunnel is established from
PE1 to PE2. The tunnel is enabled with hot standby and configured with the best-effort path. In
this manner, traffic is switched to the backup CR-LSP when the primary CR-LSP fails. If the
backup CR-LSP also fails, this triggers the establishment of a best-effort path, and then the traffic
switches to the best-effort path.
It is required that the dynamic bandwidth function for a hot-standby CR-LSP be configured on
the tunnel interface. This can achieve the following effects:
l When the primary CR-LSP works properly, the hot-standby CR-LSP does not occupy
bandwidth, saving bandwidth resources.
l If the primary tunnel fails, traffic switches to the hot-standby CR-LSP and then forwarded
in a best-effort manner. The system then sets up a new CR-LSP with user-requested
bandwidth according to the make-before-break mechanism. After the new hot-standby CR-
LSP is set up, the system switches traffic to this CR-LSP and deletes the hot-standby CR-
LSP with bandwidth at 0 bit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 494

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-22 Networking diagram of the dynamic bandwidth function of a hot-standby CR-LSP
Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
P1 10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 P2
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0
GE2/0/0 10.2.1.1/30 10.3.1.2/30 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.1/30 10.5.1.2 /30
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
PE1 PE2
10.3.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

Loopback1 Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32 3.3.3.3/32
: Primary path
: Backup path
: Best-effort path

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure CR-LSP hot standby according to Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot
Standby.
2. Enable the dynamic bandwidth function for a hot-standby CR-LSP on PE1.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Data in "Data Preparation" of Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby

Procedure
Step 1 Configure CR-LSP hot standby.
Configure a primary CR-LSP, a backup CR-LSP, and a best-effort path according to Example
for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby.
Step 2 Configure the dynamic bandwidth function for a hot-standby CR-LSP.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 495

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te

[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te backup hot-standby dynamic-bandwidth
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

Step 3 Verify the configuration.

# After the configuration, run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command and the display
mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation command on PE1. You can view that the
hot-standby CR-LSP does not occupy bandwidth.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Egress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : 0 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: 1 NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1024
Created Time : 2010/02/22 11:29:14
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 10000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -

No : 2
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 496

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

TunnelIndex : 1 LSP Index : 2049

Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32769
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Hot-Standby
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Egress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/1
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : 1 AR-Hop Table Index: 1
C-Hop Table Index : 1
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: 0
PSB Handle : 1025
Created Time : 2010/02/22 11:29:15
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Unreserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation
Link ID: GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Bandwidth Constraint Model : Russian Dolls Model (RDM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbits/sec): 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbits/sec) : 0
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbits/sec) : 0
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbits/sec) : 0
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0
2 0 2 0 0 0
3 0 3 0 0 0
4 0 4 0 0 0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 497

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

5 0 5 0 0 0
6 0 6 0 0 0
7 0 7 0 0 0
8 1 0 0 0 0
9 1 1 0 0 0
10 1 2 0 0 0
11 1 3 0 0 0
12 1 4 0 0 0
13 1 5 0 0 0
14 1 6 0 0 0
15 1 7 0 0 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Link ID: GigabitEthernet2/0/0

Bandwidth Constraint Model : Russian Dolls Model (RDM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbits/sec): 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbits/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbits/sec) : 50000
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbits/sec) : 10000
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 100000 0
1 0 1 0 100000 0
2 0 2 0 100000 0
3 0 3 0 100000 0
4 0 4 0 100000 0
5 0 5 0 100000 0
6 0 6 0 100000 0
7 0 7 10000 90000 1
8 1 0 0 50000 0
9 1 1 0 50000 0
10 1 2 0 50000 0
11 1 3 0 50000 0
12 1 4 0 50000 0
13 1 5 0 50000 0
14 1 6 0 50000 0
15 1 7 0 50000 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

# Run the shutdown command on PE1 to shut down the primary CR-LSP.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] shutdown
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command on PE1. You can view that the hot-standby
CR-LSP goes Up and is being reestablished after the primary CR-LSP fails.
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] display mpls te tunnel-interface
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Hot-Standby LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : DOWN
Main LSP State : SETTING UP
Hot-Standby LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 32769
Modify LSP State : SETTING UP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 498

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# After the successful reestablishment, run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command and
the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation command on PE1. You can
view that the hot-standby CR-LSP occupies the bandwidth.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 32773
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Hot-Standby
Ingress LSR ID : 4.4.4.4
Egress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/1
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : 1 AR-Hop Table Index: 0
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1026
Created Time : 2010/02/22 14:22:36
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 10000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -
Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -
ReferAutoBypassHandle : -
FrrPrevTunnelTableIndex : - FrrNextTunnelTableIndex: -
Bypass Attribute(Not configured)
Setup Priority : - Hold Priority : -
HopLimit : - Bandwidth : -
IncludeAnyGroup : - ExcludeAnyGroup : -
IncludeAllGroup : -
Bypass Unbound Bandwidth Info(Kbit/sec)
CT0 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT1 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT2 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT3 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT4 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT5 Unbound Bandwidth: -
CT6 Unbound Bandwidth : - CT7 Unbound Bandwidth: -
--------------------------------
BFD Information
--------------------------------
NextSessionTunnelIndex : - PrevSessionTunnelIndex: -
NextLspId : - PrevLspId : -
[PE1] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-allocation
Link ID: GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Bandwidth Constraint Model : Russian Dolls Model (RDM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbits/sec): 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbits/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbits/sec) : 50000
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbits/sec) : 10000
IPUpdown Link Status : UP
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : UP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 499

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT

----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 100000 0
1 0 1 0 100000 0
2 0 2 0 100000 0
3 0 3 0 100000 0
4 0 4 0 100000 0
5 0 5 0 100000 0
6 0 6 0 100000 0
7 0 7 10000 90000 1
8 1 0 0 50000 0
9 1 1 0 50000 0
10 1 2 0 50000 0
11 1 3 0 50000 0
12 1 4 0 50000 0
13 1 5 0 50000 0
14 1 6 0 50000 0
15 1 7 0 50000 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Link ID: GigabitEthernet2/0/0

Bandwidth Constraint Model : Russian Dolls Model (RDM)
Maximum Link Reservable Bandwidth(Kbits/sec): 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC0(Kbits/sec) : 100000
Reservable Bandwidth BC1(Kbits/sec) : 50000
Downstream Bandwidth (Kbits/sec) : 0
IPUpdown Link Status : DOWN
PhysicalUpdown Link Status : DOWN
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TE-CLASS CT PRIORITY BW RESERVED BW AVAILABLE DOWNSTREAM
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) RSVPLSPNODE COUNT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0 100000 0
1 0 1 0 100000 0
2 0 2 0 100000 0
3 0 3 0 100000 0
4 0 4 0 100000 0
5 0 5 0 100000 0
6 0 6 0 100000 0
7 0 7 0 100000 0
8 1 0 0 50000 0
9 1 1 0 50000 0
10 1 2 0 50000 0
11 1 3 0 50000 0
12 1 4 0 50000 0
13 1 5 0 50000 0
14 1 6 0 50000 0
15 1 7 0 50000 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path backup
next hop 10.3.1.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 500

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

next hop 10.5.1.2

next hop 3.3.3.3
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.4.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
mpls te backup hot-standby wtr 15
mpls te backup ordinary best-effort
tunnel-protocol mpls te
mpls te backup hot-standby dynamic-bandwidth
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 501

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 bc1 50000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 502

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.22 Example for Configuring Synchronization of the Bypass

Tunnel and the Backup CR-LSP
This section provides an example for configuring synchronization of the bypass CR-LSP and
backup CR-LSP. When the primary CR-LSP fails (in the FRR-in-use state), the system uses a
TE FRR bypass tunnel and attempts to restore the primary CR-LSP and simultaneously establish
a backup CR-LSP.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-23, a primary tunnel is set up by using the explicit path LSR
A --> LSR B --> LSR C. A TE FRR bypass tunnel is set up on the transit LSR B along the path
LSR B --> LSR E --> LSR C; an ordinary CR-LSP is set up on the ingress LSR A along the path
LSR A --> LSR C.
After the link between LSR B and LSR C is faulty, the system starts the TE FRR bypass tunnel
(the primary CR-LSP is in FRR-in-use state) and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP. At the
same time, the system tries to set up the backup CR-LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 503

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Figure 3-23 Networking diagram of configuring synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the
backup CR-LSP

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1

1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32

GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE3/0/0

LSRA LSRC
2.1.1.2/24 3.1.1.1/24 3.1.1.2/24
GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 LSRB GE1/0/0
10.1.1.2/24 2.1.1.1/24 GE1/0/0 10.1.1.1/24
Loopback1
GE2/0/0
3.2.1.1/24 4.4.4.4/32 4.1.1.2/24

GE3/0/0 GE2/0/0
3.2.1.2/24 4.1.1.1/24
LSRE

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. On the ingress LSR A, set up a primary tunnel destined for LSR C.

2. On the transit LSR B, set up a TE FRR bypass tunnel along the path LSR B --> LSR E --
> LSR C to protect the link between LSR B and LSR C.
3. On the ingress LSR A, set up an ordinary CR-LSP along the path LSR A --> LSR C.
4. Configure synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP in the tunnel
interface view.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l An IGP and its parameters

l Maximum reservable bandwidth for the link and the BC bandwidth
l Explicit paths of the primary CR-LSP and the backup CR-LSP
l TE FRR protection mode and the protected links or nodes
l Name and IP address of the primary tunnel interface, destination address, tunnel ID, tunnel
signaling protocol (RSVP-TE), and tunnel bandwidth

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for each interface.

Configure the IP address and mask for each interface including each Loopback interface as
shown in Figure 3-23. Configuration details are not provided here.

Step 2 Enable an IGP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 504

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Enable OSPF or IS-IS on each LSR to ensure connectivity between devices. The example in this
document uses OSPF as IGP. For configuration details, see the configuration files in this
example.
Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions.
On each LSR, configure an LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system and interface views. For
configuration details, see the configuration files in this example.
Step 4 Configure basic MPLS TE functions.
On each LSR, enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the MPLS view and interface views
of the link. Set the maximum reservable bandwidth of the link to 100 Mbit/s and the bandwidth
of BC0 to 100 Mbit/s. For configuration details, see the configuration files in this example.
Step 5 Enable OSPF TE and configure the CSPF.
Enable OSPF TE on each LSR and configure the CSPF on LSR A and LSR B. For configuration
details, see Configuring the RSVP-TE Tunnel.
Step 6 Configure the explicit paths of the primary and backup CR-LSPs.
# Configure the explicit path of the primary CR-LSP on LSR A.
[LSRA] explicit-path master
[LSRA-explicit-path-master] next hop 2.1.1.2
[LSRA-explicit-path-master] next hop 3.1.1.2

# Configure the explicit path of the backup CR-LSP on LSR A.

[LSRA] explicit-path backup
[LSRA-explicit-path-backup] next hop 10.1.1.1

Step 7 Configure the tunnel interface.

# Create a tunnel interface on LSR A, specify an explicit path for the primary tunnel, and set the
tunnel bandwidth to 20 Mbit/s.
[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback1
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te record-route label
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path master
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 8 Enable TE Auto FRR and configure link protection.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te fast-reroute
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te auto-frr link
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

After the configurations, run the display mpls te tunnel path lsp-id 1.1.1.1 1 1 command on
LSR A, and you can see that the bypass tunnel is set up successfully.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 505

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel path lsp-id 1.1.1.1 1 1

Tunnel Interface Name : Tunnel2/0/0
Lsp ID : 1.1.1.1 :1 :1
Hop Information
Hop 0 2.1.1.1
Hop 1 2.1.1.2 Label 11264
Hop 2 2.2.2.2 Label 11264
Hop 3 3.1.1.1 Local-Protection available
Hop 4 3.1.1.2 Label 3
Hop 5 3.3.3.3 Label 3

Step 9 Configure an ordinary CR-LSP and specify its explicit path.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te backup ordinary
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Step 10 Configure synchronization of the bypass tunnel and the backup CR-LSP on the ingress LSR A
of the primary CR-LSP.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te backup frr-in-use
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel2/0/0 command on the ingress LSR A, and you
can view information about the primary CR-LSP.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel2/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel2/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 1
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 2

Step 11 Verify the configuration.

# Disable the outbound interface that is protected on LSR B.
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] shutdown

# Configure the affinity property of the tunnel on LSR A.

[LSRA] interface tunnel2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te affinity property f0 mask ff secondary
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command on LSR A, and you can see that the tunnel
status is Up. The primary tunnel is in FRR-in-use state; the ordinary CR-LSP is being set up;
the primary CR-LSP is being restored.
================================================================
Tunnel2/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 506

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Active LSP : Primary LSP

Session ID : 1
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 5
Modify LSP State : SETTING UP LSP ID : 6
Ordinary LSP State : DOWN
Main LSP State : SETTING UP

When the primary CR-LSP is faulty (the primary CR-LSP is in FRR-in-use state), the system
starts the TE FRR bypass tunnel and tries to restore the primary CR-LSP. At the same time, the
system tries to set up a backup CR-LSP.
----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path master
next hop 2.1.1.2
next hop 3.1.1.2
#
explicit-path backup
next hop 10.1.1.2

#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 1
mpls te record-route label
mpls te path explicit-path master
mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
mpls te affinity property f0 mask ff secondary
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te backup ordinary
mpls te backup frr-in-use

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 507

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 3.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te auto-frr link
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 2.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 508

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 4.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 3.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 3.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR E
#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 4.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 3.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 1000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 509

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te bandwidth bc0 1000

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack0
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 3.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 4.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.23 Example for Configuring RSVP GR

This section provides an example for configuring RSVP GR to ensure uninterrupted MPLS
forwarding during the AMB/SMB switchover.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-24, LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C are equipped with dual main
control boards. Three LSRs learn routes from each other through the IS-IS protocol, and then
use the RSVP protocol to set up a TE tunnel from LSR A to LSR C.
RSVP GR is required to ensure that MPLS forwarding is not interrupted when the master/slave
switchover of main control boards occurs on LSR A, LSR B, or LSR C.

Figure 3-24 Example for Configuring RSVP-TE GR

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 20.1.1.1/24 20.1.1.2/24

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure IP addresses for interfaces on each LSR and loopback addresses that function
as the LSR IDs.
2. Configure the IS-IS protocol and enable IS-IS TE.
3. Configure LSR IDs.
4. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and MPLS RSVP-TE globally.
5. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and MPLS RSVP-TE on each interface, and configure bandwidth
attributes of the MPLS TE link.
6. Enable MPLS CSPF on the ingress node. Create the tunnel interface at the ingress node.
Specify the tunnel IP address, tunnel protocol, destination address, tunnel ID, and signaling
protocol.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 510

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

7. Enable IS-IS GR on each node.

8. Enable RSVP GR on all RSVP enabled interfaces of each node.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l IP addresses of interfaces on each node

l IS-IS network entity and IS-IS level which each node belongs to
l MPLS LSR ID of each node
l Bandwidth attributes of links along the tunnel
l Tunnel interface number of the Ingress node, tunnel ID, and tunnel bandwidth

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses for interfaces on each LSR. Details for the configuration are not provided
here.

Step 2 Configure basic IS-IS functions.

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
[LSRB-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
[LSRC-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 511

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR, and you can
see that LSRs have learned routes from each other.
Step 3 Configure basic MPLS capability and enable MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and CSPF. Configure
maximum bandwidth and maximum reservable bandwidth of interfaces.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls te
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

Step 4 Configure IS-IS TE and enable IS-IS GR.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRA-isis-1] is-name LSRA
[LSRA-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRA-isis-1] graceful-restart
[LSRA-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 512

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB-isis-1] cost-style wide

[LSRB-isis-1] is-name LSRB
[LSRB-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] graceful-restart
[LSRB-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRC-isis-1] is-name LSRC
[LSRC-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] graceful-restart
[LSRC-isis-1] quit

Step 5 Configure an MPLS TE tunnel.

# Configure an MPLS TE tunnel on LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A, and you can see
that the interface status of the MPLS TE tunnel is Up.
[LSRA] display interface tunnel
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2007-10-29, 16:35:10
Description : Tunnel1/0/0 Interface
...

Step 6 Enable RSVP GR.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 513

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Step 7 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart command on LSR B,
and you can view the local GR status, restart time, and recovery time.
[LSRB] display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart
Display Mpls Rsvp te graceful restart information
LSR ID: 2.2.2.2
Graceful-Restart Capability: GR-Self GR-Support
Restart Time: 90060 Milli Second
Recovery Time: 0 Milli Second
GR Status: Gracefully Restart Not going on
Number of Restarting neighbors: 0
Number of LSPs recovered: 0
Received Gr Path message count: 0
Send Gr Path message count: 0
Received RecoveryPath message count: 0
Send RecoveryPath message count: 0

Run the display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart peer command on LSR B, and you can view
the GR status of the neighboring LSR.
[LSRB] display mpls rsvp-te graceful-restart peer
Neighbor on Interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Neighbor Addr: 10.1.1.1
SrcInstance: 47860 NbrSrcInstance: 49409
Neighbor Capability:
Can Do Self GR
Can Support GR
GR Status: Normal
Restart Time: 90060 Milli Second
Recovery Time: 0 Milli Second
Stored GR message number: 0

If the master/slave switchover is performed, you can see that during the graceful-restart Tunnel
1/0/0 keeps up.
Run the display this interface command on LSR A, and you can view that the value of Tunnel
up/down statistics is 0, indicating that the tunnel has never flapped.
[LSRA] display this interface
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last line protocol up time : 2010-07-13 16:10:09
Description: Tunnel1/0/0 Interface
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet protocol processing : disabled
Encapsulation is TUNNEL, loopback not set
Tunnel destination 3.3.3.3
Tunnel up/down statistics 0
Tunnel protocol/transport MPLS/MPLS, ILM is available,
...

# Run the slave switchover command on LSR B to forcibly perform the master/slave switchover
of main control boards.
[LSRB] slave switchover enable
[LSRB] slave switchover
Caution!!! Confirm switch slave to master[Y/N] ?
[LSRB] y

Run the display this interface command on LSR A again, and you can view that the value of
Tunnel up/down statistics is still 0, indicating that the tunnel did not flap after the master/slave
switchover of main control boards on LSR B. This means that RSVP GR has been configured
successfully.
[LSRA] display this interface

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 514

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP

Line protocol current state : UP
Last line protocol up time : 2010-07-13 16:13:53
Description: Tunnel1/0/0 Interface
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet protocol processing : disabled
Encapsulation is TUNNEL, loopback not set
Tunnel destination 3.3.3.3
Tunnel up/down statistics 0
Tunnel protocol/transport MPLS/MPLS, ILM is available,
...

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
#
isis 1
graceful-restart
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
is-name LSRA
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
mpls te commit
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
slave switchover enable
slave switchover
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 515

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
#
isis 1
graceful-restart
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
is-name LSRB
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
#
isis 1
graceful-restart
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
is-name LSRC
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 516

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

return

3.26.24 Example for Configuring Static BFD for CR-LSP

This section provides an example for configuring static BFD for CR-LSP to ensure that hot
standby is enabled and a best-effect path is established on a tunnel.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-25 is a networking diagram of CR-LSP hot standby. A TE tunnel with PE1 as ingress
and PE2 as egress is established on PE1. The tunnel is enabled with hot standby and configured
with the best-effort LSP. If the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic can be switched to the backup CR-
LSP. After the primary CR-LSP recovers, traffic can be switched back to the primary CR-LSP
in 15 seconds. If both the primary and the backup CR-LSPs fail, traffic can be switched to the
best-effort LSP.

Two static BFD sessions are required to detect the primary and backup CR-LSPs. After the
configuration, the following objects should be achieved:

l If the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic can be switched to the backup CR-LSP at milliseconds
level.
l If the backup CR-SLP fails within 15 seconds after the primary CR-LSP recovers, traffic
is switched back to the primary CR-LSP.

Figure 3-25 Networking diagram of CR-LSP hot backup

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
P1 10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 P2
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0
GE2/0/0 10.2.1.1/30 10.3.1.2/30 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.1/30 10.5.1.2 /30
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
PE1 PE2
10.3.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

Loopback1 Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32 3.3.3.3/32
: Primary path
: Backup path
: Best-effort path

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 517

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure CR-LSP hot standby based on Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot.
2. On PE1, create two BFD sessions and bind the two sessions to the primary and backup CR-
LSPs respectively; on PE2, create two BFD sessions and bind the two sessions to the IP
link (PE2 --> PE1).

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l BFD session name, local discriminator, and remote discriminator
l Maximum intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received
l Local BFD detection multiplier
l For other data, see Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby

Procedure
Step 1 Configure CR-LSP hot standby.
Configure the primary CR-LSP, backup CR-LSP, and best-effort LSP based on Example for
Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby.
Step 2 Configuring BFD for CR-LSP.
# Create BFD sessions on PE1 and PE2 to detect the primary and backup CR-LSPs respectively.
Bind the BFD session on PE1 to the primary CR-LSP and the backup CR-LSP respectively; bind
the BFD session on PE2 to the IP link. Set the minimum intervals at at which BFD packets are
sent and received to 100 milliseconds and the local BFD detection multiplier to 3.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] bfd
[PE1-bfd] quit
[PE1] bfd mainlsptope2 bind mpls-te interface tunnel1/0/0 te-lsp
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] discriminator local 413
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] discriminator remote 314
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] min-tx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] min-rx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] detect-multiplier 3
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] process-pst
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] commit
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] quit
[PE1] bfd backuplsptope2 bind mpls-te interface tunnel1/0/0 te-lsp backup
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] discriminator local 423
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] discriminator remote 324
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] min-tx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] min-rx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] detect-multiplier 3
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] process-pst
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] commit
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] bfd
[PE2-bfd] quit
[PE2] bfd mainlsptope2 bind peer-ip 4.4.4.4
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] discriminator local 314

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 518

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] discriminator remote 413

[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] min-tx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] min-rx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] detect-multiplier 3
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] commit
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-mainlsptope2] quit
[PE2] bfd backuplsptope2 bind peer-ip 4.4.4.4
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] discriminator local 324
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] discriminator remote 423
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] min-tx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] min-rx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] detect-multiplier 3
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] commit
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-backuplsptope2] quit

# Run the display bfd session discriminator local-discriminator-value command on PE1 and
PE2. The command output shows that the status of BFD sessions is Up.
Take the command output on PE1 as an example:
[PE1] display bfd session discriminator 413
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Remote PeerIpAddr InterfaceName State Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
413 314 3.3.3.3 Tunnel1/0/0 Up S_TE_LSP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[PE1] display bfd session discriminator 423
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Remote PeerIpAddr InterfaceName State Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
423 324 3.3.3.3 Tunnel1/0/0 Up S_TE_LSP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 3 Verify the configuration.

Connect port 1 and port 2 on a tester to PE1 and PE2 respectively. Inject MPLS traffic from port
1 to port 2. After the cable is removed from GE 2/0/0 on PE1 or P1, the fault recovers at the
millisecond level.
After the cable is inserted into GE 2/0/0 and the cable is removed from GE 1/0/0 on PE1 within
15 seconds, the recovers at the millisecond level.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
lsp-trigger all
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path backup
next hop 10.3.1.2
next hop 10.5.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.4.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 519

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

next hop 3.3.3.3

#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
mpls te backup hot-standby wtr 15
mpls te backup ordinary best-effort
mpls te commit
#
bfd backuplsptope2 bind mpls-te interface Tunnel1/0/0 te-lsp backup
discriminator local 423
discriminator remote 324
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
process-pst
commit
#
bfd mainlsptope2 bind mpls-te interface Tunnel1/0/0 te-lsp
discriminator local 413
discriminator remote 314
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
process-pst
commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 520

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 521

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
lsp-trigger all
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
bfd backuplsptope2 bind peer-ip 4.4.4.4
discriminator local 324
discriminator remote 423
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
commit
#
bfd mainlsptope2 bind peer-ip 4.4.4.4
discriminator local 314
discriminator remote 413
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
commit
#
return

3.26.25 Example for Configuring Static BFD for TE

This section provides an example for configuring BFD for TE to detect the primary tunnel. This
enables a VPN to quickly detect faults in a tunnel and then perform traffic switchover to reduce
the fault duration.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 522

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-26 shows an MPLS network where a switch (a Layer 2 device) exists between PE1
and PE2. PE1 is enabled with VPN FRR and configured with an MPLS TE tunnel. The primary
path of VPN FRR is PE1 → Switch → PE2; the backup path of VPN FRR is PE1 → PE3. In
normal situations, VPN traffic is transmitted over the primary path. If the primary path fails,
VPN traffic switches to the backup path. BFD for TE is required to detect the TE tunnel over
the primary path and enable VPN to rapidly detect tunnel faults. Thus, traffic can rapidly switch
between the primary path and backup path in the case of faults, and fault recovery is shortened.

Figure 3-26 Networking diagram of static BFD for TE

Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32
0/0
O S1/ 30
P /
.1.2
10.1
el PE3
0/0
S1/ /30 ry tunn
O a
P .1 ond
10 .1.1 Sec
CE1 PE1
CE2
Prim
GE2 ry tuna
/0 nel
10.2 /0 PE2
.1.1/2
Loopback1 4
G
1.1.1.1/32 Switch 10 E2/0/0
.2.1.
2/24
Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32

NOTE

For simplicity, IP addresses of interfaces connecting PEs to CEs are not shown in Figure 3-26.

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure basic MPLS functions, and establish bi-directional TE tunnels between PE1 and
PE2, and between PE1 and PE3.
2. Configure VPN FRR.
3. Enable global BFD on PE1, PE2, and PE3.
4. Configure a BFD session on PE1 to detect the TE tunnel over the primary path.
5. Configure a BFD session on each of PE2 and PE3 and specify the TE tunnel as the BFD
backward channel.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l Type of an IGP and data required for configuring an IGP

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 523

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l BGP AS number and interfaces for BGP sessions

l MPLS LSR ID
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth of the outbound interfaces of links
along the tunnel
l Tunnel interface number, bandwidth for the tunnel, and explicit paths
l VPN instance name, RD, and route target (RT)
l Tunnel policy name
l Data required for configuring VPN FRR, such as IP prefix name and routing policy name
l BFD name, local discriminator, and remote discriminator

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
Configure an IP address for each interface as shown in Figure 3-26, create loopback interfaces
on LSRs, and configure IP addresses of the loopback interfaces as MPLS LSR IDs, . For
configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.
Step 2 Configure the switch.
Configure the switch so that PE1 and PE2 can communicate with each other. Details for this
configuration procedure are not provided here.
Step 3 Configure an IGP.
Configure OSPF or IS-IS on each LSR so that PE1 and PE2, and PE1 and PE3 can communicate
with each other. Examples in this document use OSPF. For configuration details, see the
configuration file of this example.
Step 4 Configure basic MPLS functions.
Configure the LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system view on each LSR, and enable MPLS in
the interface view. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.
Step 5 Configure basic MPLS TE functions.
Enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the MPLS and interface views on each LSR. Set the
maximum reservable bandwidth for the MPLS TE on outbound interfaces of links along the
tunnel to 100 Mbit/s and the BC bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. For configuration details, see the
configuration file of this example.
Step 6 Configure OSPF TE and CSPF.
Configure OSPF TE on each LSR and CSPF on PE1. For configuration details, see the
configuration file of this example.
Step 7 Configure the tunnel interface.
# Specify explicit paths on PE1, PE2, and PE3. Two explicit paths are required on PE1.
# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] explicit-path tope2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.2.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 3.3.3.3
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] quit
[PE1] explicit-path tope3

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 524

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1-explicit-path-tope3] next hop 10.1.1.2

[PE1-explicit-path-tope3] next hop 2.2.2.2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope3] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] explicit-path tope1
[PE2-explicit-path-tope1] next hop 10.2.1.1
[PE2-explicit-path-tope1] next hop 1.1.1.1
[PE2-explicit-path-tope1] quit

# Configure PE3.
<PE3> system-view
[PE3] explicit-path tope1
[PE3-explicit-path-tope1] next hop 10.1.1.1
[PE3-explicit-path-tope1] next hop 1.1.1.1
[PE3-explicit-path-tope1] quit

# Create tunnel interfaces on PE1, PE2, and PE3, specify explicit paths, and configure the tunnel
bandwidth to 10 Mbit/s. Bind the tunnel to the specified VPN. Two tunnel interfaces must be
created on PE1.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope2
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te reserved-for-binding
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 2.2.2.2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope3
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te reserved-for-binding
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope1
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te reserved-for-binding
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE3.
[PE3] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope1
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 525

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te reserved-for-binding

[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE3-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number command on PEs, and
you can see that the status of Tunnel 1/0/0 and Tunnel 2/0/0 on PE1, Tunnel 2/0/0 on PE2, and
Tunnel 1/0/0 on PE3 is "Up."

Step 8 Configure VPN FRR.

# Create VPN instances on PE1, PE2, and PE3 separately. Configure all VPN instance names
to vpn1, RDs to 100:1, 100:2, and 100:3 separately, and all RTs to 100:1. Configure CEs to
access PEs. The configuration details are not provided here.

# Establish MP IBGP peer relationship between PE1 and PE2, and between PE1 and PE3. The
BGP AS number of PE1, PE2, and PE3 are 100. The loopback interface Loopback1 is used as
the interface to set up BGP sessions. The configuration details are not provided here.

# Configure tunnel policies for PE1, PE2, and PE3 and apply the policies to the VPN instances.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] tunnel-policy policy1
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policy1] tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.3 te tunnel 2/0/0
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policy1] tunnel binding destination 2.2.2.2 te tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-tunnel-policy-policy1] quit
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[PE1-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] ipv4-family
[PE1-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policy1
[PE1-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] quit
[PE1-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] tunnel-policy policy1
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policy1] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.1 te tunnel 2/0/0
[PE2-tunnel-policy-policy1] quit
[PE2] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[PE2-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] ipv4-family
[PE2-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policy1
[PE2-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] quit
[PE2-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] quit

# Configure PE3.
[PE3] tunnel-policy policy1
[PE3-tunnel-policy-policy1] tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.1 te tunnel 1/0/0
[PE3-tunnel-policy-policy1] quit
[PE3] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[PE3-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] ipv4-family
[PE3-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] tnl-policy policy1
[PE3-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] quit
[PE3-ip-vpn-instance-vpn1] quit

# Configure VPN FRR on PE1.

[PE1] ip ip-prefix vpn_frr_list permit 3.3.3.3 32
[PE1] route-policy vpn_frr_rp permit node 10
[PE1-route-policy] if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix vpn_frr_list
[PE1-route-policy] apply backup-nexthop 2.2.2.2
[PE1-route-policy] quit
[PE1] ip vpn-instance vpn1
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpn1] ipv4-family
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] vpn frr route-policy vpn_frr_rp
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpn1-af-ipv4] quit
[PE1-vpn-instance-vpn1] quit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 526

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

# After the configuration, CEs can communicate with each other, and traffic passes through PE1,
switch, and PE2. After the cable of any interface connecting PE1 and PE2 is plugged out, or the
switch or PE2 fails, VPN traffic switches to the backup path PE1 → PE3. Time taken in fault
recovery is close to the IGP convergence time.
Step 9 Configure BFD for TE.
# Configure a BFD session on PE1 to detect the TE tunnel of the primary path. Set the minimum
interval at which BFD packets are sent and received to 100 milliseconds and the local BFD
detection multiplier to 3.
[PE1] bfd
[PE1-bfd] quit
[PE1] bfd test bind mpls-te interface tunnel2/0/0
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] discriminator local 12
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] discriminator remote 21
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] min-tx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] min-rx-interval 100
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] detect-multiplier 3
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] process-pst
[PE1-bfd-lsp-session-test] commit

# Configure a BFD session on PE2 and specify the TE tunnel as the BFD backward channel. Set
the minimum interval at which BFD packets are sent and received to 100 milliseconds and the
local BFD detection multiplier to 3.
[PE2] bfd
[PE2-bfd] quit
[PE2] bfd test bind mpls-te interface tunnel2/0/0
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] discriminator local 21
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] discriminator remote 12
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] min-tx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] min-rx-interval 100
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] detect-multiplier 3
[PE2-bfd-lsp-session-test] commit

# Run the display bfd session { all | discriminator discr-value | mpls-te | [ slot slot-id ]
[ verbose ] command on PE1 and PE2, and you can see that the status of the BFD sessions is
Up.
Step 10 Verify the configuration.
Connect port 1 and port 2 on a tester to CE1 and CE2 respectively. Inject traffic from port 1 to
port 2, and you can see that a fault can be recovered at milliseconds level.

----End

Configuration Files
NOTE

Configuration files of CE1, CE2, and switch are not listed here. Configurations related to CE accessing PE
are also not listed.
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
ip vpn-instance vpn1
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 100:1
vpn frr route-policy vpn_frr_rp
tnl-policy policy1
vpn-target 100:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 100:1 import-extcommunity

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 527

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path tope2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
explicit-path tope3
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 2.2.2.2
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 2.2.2.2
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path tope3
mpls te reserved-for-binding
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path tope2
mpls te reserved-for-binding
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 2.2.2.2 as-number 100
peer 2.2.2.2 connect-interface LoopBack1
peer 3.3.3.3 as-number 100
peer 3.3.3.3 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 2.2.2.2 enable
peer 3.3.3.3 enable

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 528

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 2.2.2.2 enable
peer 3.3.3.3 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn1
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
route-policy vpn_frr_rp permit node 10
if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix vpn_frr_list
apply backup-nexthop 2.2.2.2
#
ip ip-prefix vpn_frr_list permit 3.3.3.3 32
#
tunnel-policy policy1
tunnel binding destination 3.3.3.3 te Tunnel2/0/0
tunnel binding destination 2.2.2.2 te Tunnel1/0/0
#
bfd test bind mpls-te interface Tunnel2/0/0
discriminator local 12
discriminator remote 21
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
process-pst
commit
#
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
ip vpn-instance vpn1
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 100:2
tnl-policy policy1
vpn-target 100:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 100:1 import-extcommunity
#
bfd
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path tope1
next hop 10.2.1.1
next hop 1.1.1.1
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 529

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path tope1
mpls te reserved-for-binding
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 1.1.1.1 as-number 100
peer 1.1.1.1 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 1.1.1.1 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 1.1.1.1 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn1
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
tunnel-policy policy1
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.1 te Tunnel2/0/0
#
bfd test bind mpls-te interface Tunnel2/0/0
discriminator local 21
discriminator remote 12
min-tx-interval 100
min-rx-interval 100
commit
#
return
l Configuration file of PE3
#
sysname PE3
#
ip vpn-instance vpn1
ipv4-family
route-distinguisher 100:3
tnl-policy policy1
vpn-target 100:1 export-extcommunity
vpn-target 100:1 import-extcommunity
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path tope1
next hop 10.1.1.1
next hop 1.1.1.1
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 530

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path tope1
mpls te reserved-for-binding
mpls te commit
#
bgp 100
peer 1.1.1.1 as-number 100
peer 1.1.1.1 connect-interface LoopBack1
#
ipv4-family unicast
undo synchronization
peer 1.1.1.1 enable
#
ipv4-family vpnv4
policy vpn-target
peer 1.1.1.1 enable
#
ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn1
import-route direct
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
tunnel-policy policy1
tunnel binding destination 1.1.1.1 te Tunnel1/0/0
#
return

3.26.26 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP

This section provides an example for configuring dynamic BFD for CR-LSP to ensure that hot
standby is enabled and a best-effect LSP is established in a tunnel.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-27 is a networking diagram of CR-LSP hot standby. A TE tunnel is established between
PE1 and PE2. The tunnel is enabled with hot standby and configured with a best-effort LSP. If
the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic can be switched to the backup CR-LSP. After the primary CR-
LSP recovers, traffic can be switched back to the primary CR-LSP in 15 seconds. If both the
primary and backup CR-LSPs fail, traffic can be switched to the best-effort LSP.
Dynamic BFD for CR-LSP is required to detect the primary and backup CR-LSPs. After the
configuration, the following objects should be achieved:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 531

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l If the primary CR-LSP fails, traffic can be switched to the backup CR-LSP at the
millisecond level.
l If the backup CR-LSP fails within 15 seconds after the primary CR-LSP recovers, traffic
is switched back to the primary CR-LSP.
NOTE

Compared with static BFD, dynamic BFD is simpler in terms of configurations. In addition, dynamic BFD
can reduce the number of BFD sessions, and thus occupies less network resources because only one BFD
session can be created on a tunnel interface.

Figure 3-27 Networking diagram of CR-LSP hot backup

Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
P1 10.1.1.1/30 10.1.1.2/30 P2
GE3/0/0 GE3/0/0
GE2/0/0 10.2.1.1/30 10.3.1.2/30 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.2/30 10.5.1.1/30

GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.4.1.1/30 10.5.1.2 /30
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
PE1 PE2
10.3.1.1/30 10.2.1.2/30

Loopback1 Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32 3.3.3.3/32
: Primary path
: Backup path
: Best-effort path

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure CR-LSP hot standby based on Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot.
2. Enable BFD on the ingress of the tunnel. Configure MPLS TE BFD. Set the minimum
interval at which BFD packets are sent and received, and the local BFD detection multiplier.
3. Enable the capability of passively creating BFD sessions on the egress.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 532

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Minimum intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received on the ingress (The default
values are specified in the License.)
l Local BFD detection multiplier (The default values are specified in the License.)
l For other data, see Example for Configuring CR-LSP Hot Standby

Procedure
Step 1 Configure CR-LSP hot standby.
Configure the primary CR-LSP, backup CR-LSP, and best-effort LSP based on Example for
Configuring CR-LSP Standby.
Step 2 Enable BFD on the ingress of the tunnel and configure MPLS TE BFD.
# Enable MPLS TE BFD on the tunnel interface of PE1. Set the minimum intervals at which
BFD packets are sent and received to 100 milliseconds and the local BFD detection multiplier
to 3.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] bfd
[PE1-bfd] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bfd enable
[PE1-Tunenl1/0/0] mpls te bfd min-tx-interval 100 min-rx-interval 100 detect-
multiplier 3
[PE1-Tunenl1/0/0] mpls te commit

Step 3 Enable the capability of passively creating BFD sessions on the egress of the tunnel.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] bfd
[PE2-bfd] mpls-passive
[PE2-bfd] quit

# Run the display bfd session discriminator local-discriminator-value command on PE1 and
PE2, and you can see that the status of BFD sessions is Up.
[PE1] display bfd session mpls-te interface Tunnel 1/0/0 te-lsp
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Remote PeerIpAddr InterfaceName State Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8208 8217 3.3.3.3 Tunnel1/0/0 Up D_TE_LSP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0

Step 4 Verify the configuration.

Connect port 1 and port 2 on a tester to PE1 and PE2 respectively. Inject traffic from port 1 to
port 2. After the cable is removed from GE 2/0/0 on PE1 or P1, the fault recovers at the
millisecond level.
After the cable is inserted into GE 2/0/0 and the cable is removed from GE 1/0/0 on PE1 in 15
seconds, the fault recovers at the millisecond level.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
bfd

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 533

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path backup
next hop 10.3.1.2
next hop 10.5.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
explicit-path main
next hop 10.4.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 3.3.3.3
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0004.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bfd enable
mpls te record-route
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path main
mpls te path explicit-path backup secondary
mpls te backup hot-standby wtr 15
mpls te backup ordinary best-effort
mpls te commit
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 534

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 535

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of PE2

#
sysname PE2
#
bfd
mpls-passive
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
cost-style wide
network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.27 Example for Configuring Dynamic BFD for RSVP

This section provides an example for configuring dynamic BFD for RSVP for nodes to detect
link failure and perform the TE FRR switchover in the scenario where Layer 2 devices exist
between two nodes.

Networking Requirements
Figure 3-28 shows an MPLS network where a switch (a Layer 2 device) exists between P1 and
P2. An MPLS TE tunnel is established between PE1 and PE2. TE FRR with P1 as PLR and PE2
as MP is configured. The primary CR-LSP is PE1 --> P1 --> Switch --> P2 --> PE2; the bypass
CR-LSP is P1 --> P3 --> PE2. In addition, each device is configured with RSVP GR.

GE 2/0/0 on P1 cannot receive RSVP Hello messages from its neighbors if either of the following
conditions are met:

l P2 is performing RSVP GR.

l The link or the switch between P1 and P2 fails.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 536

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

In this situation, P1 cannot identify whether the failure in receiving RSVP Hello messages is
because a fault on the link or switch or because its neighbor is performing RSVP GR; therefore,
P1 cannot determine whether to perform the TE FRR switchover or not.
By default, the interval at which RSVP Hello messages are sent is 3 seconds. The interval at
which a neighbor going Down is declared is three times longer than the interval at which Hello
messages are sent. That means that an LSR can sense a fault on an RSVP neighbor at seconds
level. BFD, however, can detect a fault at milliseconds level.
If BFD for RSVP is configured on the preceding network, P1 can rapidly detect the fault on the
link or switch between P1 and P2 and then perform the TE FRR switchover accordingly.

Figure 3-28 Networking diagram of configuring BFD for RSVP

Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32
PO
/0/0 10. S2/0
O S1 /30 5.1 /0
P 1.2 .1/3
3.
/0 10. P3
0 PO
Loopback1
S 3/0 /30 10. S2/0
1.1.1.1/32 PO 3.1.1 5.1 /0
.2/3
10. 0
POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/30 P1 PE2
GE2 Switch
/0
PE1 POS1/0/0 10.2 /0/0 P2 S 1/0 0
10.1.1.2/30 .1.1 PO 1.2/3
/24 GE2 0 .4.
Loopback1 10.2 /0/0 1/0/ 010 Loopback1
S 3
2.2.2.2/32 .1.2
/24 PO 4.1.1/ 5.5.5.5/32
10 .
Loopback1
3.3.3.3/32
: Primary CR-LSP
: Bypass CR-LSP

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure an IP address for each interface and enable IGP on each LSR so that LSRs can
communicate with each other. Enable IGP GR to support RSVP GR.
2. Configure the MPLS network and basic MPLS TE functions.
3. Configure explicit paths for the primary and bypass tunnels.
4. Create a TE primary tunnel interface and enable TE FRR on PE1. Configure the bypass
tunnel on P1.
5. Configure RSVP GR on all LSRs and establish a Hello session between P1 and PE2.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 537

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

NOTE

On a network configured with TE FRR, a Hello session is required between a PLR and an MP of the
bypass tunnel if you want to configure RSVP GR. If the Hello session is not configured, when traffic
switches to the bypass tunnel because the primary tunnel fails, the primary tunnel turns Down if the
PLR or MP performs RSVP GR.
6. Configure BFD for RSVP on P1 and P2.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

l Type of an IGP and data required for configuring an IGP

l MPLS LSR ID
l Bandwidth attributes of the outbound interfaces of links along the tunnel
l Primary tunnel interface number, bandwidth for the primary tunnel, and explicit path
l Bypass tunnel interface number, bandwidth for the bypass tunnel, and explicit path
l Physical interfaces to be protected by the bypass tunnel
l Minimum intervals at which BFD packets are sent and received (The default values are
specified in the License.)
l Local BFD detection multiplier (The default values are specified in the License.)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.

Configure an IP address for each interface as shown in Figure 3-28, create loopback interfaces
on LSRs, and then configure the IP addresses of the loopback interfaces as MPLS LSR IDs. For
configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.

Step 2 Configure the switch.

Configure the switch so that P1 and P2 can communicate with each other. Details for this
configuration procedure are not provided here.

Step 3 Configure an IGP and IGP GR.

Configure OSPF or IS-IS on each LSR so that LSRs can communicate with each other. Configure
IGP GR to support RSVP GR. Examples in this document use OSPF. For configuration details,
see the configuration file of this example.

Step 4 Configuring basic MPLS functions.

Configure the LSR ID and enable MPLS in the system view on each LSR, and enable MPLS in
the interface view. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example.

Step 5 Configure basic MPLS TE functions.

Enable MPLS-TE and MPLS RSVP-TE in the MPLS and interface views on each LSR. Set the
maximum reservable bandwidth for the outbound interfaces of links along the tunnel to 100
Mbit/s and the BC0 bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. For configuration details, see the configuration
file of this example.

Step 6 Configure OSPF TE and CSPF.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 538

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Enable OSPF TE on each node and configure CSPF on PE1 and PE2. For configuration details,
see Configuring the RSVP-TE Tunnel.
Step 7 Configure the primary tunnel.
# Specify an explicit path for the primary tunnel on PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] explicit-path tope2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.1.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.2.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.4.1.2
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 5.5.5.5
[PE1-explicit-path-tope2] quit

# Create a tunnel interface on PE1, specify an explicit path, set the tunnel bandwidth to 10 Mbit/
s, and enable TE FRR.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 5.5.5.5
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te fast-reroute
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel interface-number command on PE1, and
you can see that the status of tunnel 1/0/0 on PE1 is "Up."
Step 8 Configure the bypass tunnel.
# Specify the explicit path for the bypass tunnel on P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] explicit-path tope2
[P1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.3.1.2
[P1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 10.5.1.2
[P1-explicit-path-tope2] next hop 5.5.5.5
[P1-explicit-path-tope2] quit

# Configure a bypass tunnel interface and specify an explicit path for the bypass tunnel. Set the
tunnel bandwidth to 20 Mbit/s and the protected bandwidth to 10 Mbit/s. Specify the physical
interface to be protected by the bypass tunnel.
[P1] interface tunnel 3/0/0
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] destination 5.5.5.5
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 300
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path tope2
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te bypass-tunnel
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te protected-interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] mpls te commit
[P1-Tunnel3/0/0] quit

Step 9 Configuring RSVP GR.

# Configure RSVP GR on all LSRs and establish Hello sessions between P1 and PE2.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 539

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[PE1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr

[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] interface pos1/0/0
[PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello

# Configure P1.
[P1] mpls
[P1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[P1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello nodeid-session 5.5.5.5
[P1-mpls] quit
[P1] interface pos1/0/0
[P1-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P1-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[P1] interface pos 3/0/0
[P1-Pos3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P1-Pos3/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
[P2] mpls
[P2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[P2-mpls] quit
[P2] interface pos1/0/0
[P2-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P2-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure P3.
[P3] mpls
[P3-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P3-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[P3-mpls] quit
[P3] interface pos1/0/0
[P3-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P3-Pos1/0/0] quit
[P3] interface pos 2/0/0
[P3-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[P3-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello
[PE2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
[PE2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te hello nodeid-session 2.2.2.2
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] interface pos1/0/0
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[PE2-Pos1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface pos 2/0/0
[PE2-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te hello
[PE2-Pos2/0/0] quit

Step 10 Configure BFD for RSVP.

# Enable BFD for RSVP on GE 2/0/0 on P1 and P2. Set the minimum interval at which BFD
packets are sent and received and the local BFD detection multiplier.
# Configure P1.
[P1] bfd

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 540

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[P1-bfd] quit
[P1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te bfd enable
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te bfd min-tx-interval 100 min-rx-interval 100
detect-multiplier 3
[P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure P2.
[P2] bfd
[P2-bfd] quit
[P2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te bfd enable
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te bfd min-tx-interval 100 min-rx-interval 100
detect-multiplier 3
[P2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls rsvp-te bfd session { all | interface interface-name | peer ip-addr }
command on PE1 and PE2, and you can see that the status of the BFD sessions is Up.
Step 11 Verify the configuration.
Connect port 1 and port 2 on a tester to PE1 and PE2 respectively. Inject MPLS traffic from port
1 to port 2 (Note the setting of the label value). After the cable is removed from any interface
on P1 and P2, you can see that the fault recovers at milliseconds level.

----End

Configuration Files
NOTE

The configuration file of the switch is not listed here.

l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path tope2
next hop 10.1.1.2
next hop 10.2.1.2
next hop 10.4.1.2
next hop 5.5.5.5
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 541

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te path explicit-path tope2
mpls te fast-reroute
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
mpls rsvp-te hello nodeid-session 5.5.5.5
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path tope2
next hop 10.3.1.2
next hop 10.5.1.2
next hop 5.5.5.5
#
bfd
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te bfd enable
#
interface Pos3/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 542

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255

#
interface Tunnel3/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 300
mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
mpls te path explicit-path tope2
mpls te bypass-tunnel
mpls te protected-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
#
bfd
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te bfd enable
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 543

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

return
l Configuration file of P3
#
sysname P3
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.3.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.5.1.1 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.5.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
mpls rsvp-te hello full-gr
mpls rsvp-te hello nodeid-session 2.2.2.2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
undo shutdown
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface Pos2/0/0
undo shutdown

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 544

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.252
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls rsvp-te hello
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
opaque-capability enable
graceful-restart
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.5.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 5.5.5.5 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.28 Example for Configuring LDP over TE

This section provides an example for configuring LDP over TE.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-29, LDP is run between LSR A and LSR B, and between
LSR D and LSR E. LDP does not run between LSR B, LSR C and LSR D. RSVP tunnels from
LSR B to LSR D and from LSR D to LSR B are established. It is required that traffic between
LSR A and LSR E pass transmitted over tunnels.

LDP is not run between LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D.

Figure 3-29 Networking diagram of LDP over TE configuration

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32 4.4.4.4/32
POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0
LSRB 20.1.1.1/24 30.1.1.1/24 LSRD
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0
POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
20.1.1.2/24 LSRC 30.1.1.2/24
10.1.1.2/24 40.1.1.2/24
POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 40.1.1.1/24
Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 5.5.5.5/32
LSRA LSRE

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP addresses for interfaces on each LSR, configure loopback address as the LSR
IDs, and enable IGP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 545

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

2. Enable OSPF TE or IS-IS TE in the area supporting TE and create an MPLS TE tunnel.
3. Enable MPLS LDP in the area that does not support TE and configure LDP remote peer
on the border of TE.
4. Configure forwarding adjacency on the border of TE.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data.
l IS-IS area ID and IS-IS level of each LSR
l Policy for triggering the establishment of the LSP (in this example the policy is all)
l Names and IP addresses of remote peers on LSR B and LSR D
l Bandwidth attributes for outbound interfaces of links along the tunnel
l Tunnel interface names, IP addresses, destination addresses, tunnel IDs, tunnel signaling
protocols (default RSVP-TE), tunnel bandwidths, TE metric values, and link cost values
of LSR B and LSR D

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask for each interface as shown in Figure 3-29, including the
loopback interface.. Details for these configurations are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure IGP.
Configure IS-IS on all LSRs to advertise LSR ID.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] network-entity 86.1111.1111.1111.00
[LSRA-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRA-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRA-isis-1] quit
[LSRA] interface loopback 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 86.2222.2222.2222.00
[LSRB-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRB-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 546

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 86.3333.3333.3333.00
[LSRC-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRC-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] network-entity 86.4444.4444.4444.00
[LSRD-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRD-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRD-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRD-isis-1] quit
[LSRD] interface loopback 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] isis 1
[LSRE-isis-1] network-entity 86.5555.5555.5555.00
[LSRE-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRE-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRE-isis-1] quit
[LSRE] interface loopback 1
[LSRE-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRE-LoopBack1] quit
[LSRE] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRE-Pos1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRE-Pos1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, run the display ip routing-table command on each LSR, and you can
see that LSRs can learn routes from each other.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.
[LSRA] display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 13 Routes : 13
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.2/32 ISIS 15 10 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 ISIS 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 ISIS 15 30 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
5.5.5.5/32 ISIS 15 40 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
20.1.1.0/24 ISIS 15 20 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
30.1.1.0/24 ISIS 15 30 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
40.1.1.0/24 ISIS 15 40 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 547

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions on all LSRs, enable LDP on LSR A, LSR B, LSR D, and LSR
E, and enable RSVP on LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls ldp
[LSRA-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] mpls ldp
[LSRB-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRB-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls te
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] mpls te
[LSRD-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRD-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] mpls ldp
[LSRD-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 548

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRD-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
[LSRE] mpls
[LSRE-mpls] quit
[LSRE] mpls ldp
[LSRE-mpls-ldp] quit
[LSRE] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRE-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRE-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp
[LSRE-Pos1/0/0] quit

After the configuration, the LDP session is established successfully between LSR A and LSR
B, and between LSR D and LSR E.
Run the display mpls ldp session command on LSR A, LSR B, LSR D, and LSR E, and you
can view whether LDP sessions are established.
Run the display mpls ldp peer command, and you can view whether LDP peers have been set
up.
Run the display mpls lsp command, and you can view that RSVP LSP is not set up.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp session
LDP Session(s) in Public Network
Codes: LAM(Label Advertisement Mode), SsnAge Unit(DDDD:HH:MM)
A '*' before a session means the session is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID Status LAM SsnRole SsnAge KASent/Rcv
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2:0 Operational DU Passive 000:00:00 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 session(s) Found.
[LSRA] display mpls ldp peer
LDP Peer Information in Public network
A '*' before a peer means the peer is being deleted.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PeerID TransportAddress DiscoverySource
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2.2:0 2.2.2.2 Pos1/0/0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL: 1 Peer(s) Found.
[LSRA] display mpls lsp
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: LDP LSP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
2.2.2.2/32 NULL/3 -/Pos1/0/0
2.2.2.2/32 1024/3 -/Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/1026 -/Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1027/1026 -/Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 NULL/1028 -/Pos1/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 1029/1028 -/Pos1/0/0
5.5.5.5/32 NULL/1029 -/Pos1/0/0
5.5.5.5/32 1030/1029 -/Pos1/0/0

Step 4 Configure the LDP remote session between LSR B and LSR D.
# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] mpls ldp remote-peer LSRD

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 549

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB-mpls-ldp-remote-LSRD] remote-ip 4.4.4.4

[LSRB-mpls-ldp-remote-LSRD] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRB] mpls ldp remote-peer LSRB
[LSRB-mpls-ldp-remote-LSRB] remote-ip 2.2.2.2
[LSRB-mpls-ldp-remote-LSRB] quit

After the configuration, run the display mpls ldp remote-peer command on LSR B or LSR D,
and you can view the remote session is set up successfully between LSR B and LSR D.
Take the display on LSR B as an example.
[LSRB] display mpls ldp remote-peer LSRD

LDP Remote Entity Information

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Peer Name : lsrd
Remote Peer IP : 4.4.4.4 LDP ID : 2.2.2.2:0
Transport Address : 2.2.2.2 Entity Status : Active

Configured Keepalive Hold Timer : 45 Sec

Configured Keepalive Send Timer : ---
Configured Hello Hold Timer : 45 Sec
Negotiated Hello Hold Timer : 45 Sec
Configured Hello Send Timer : ---
Configured Delay Timer : 0 Sec
Hello Packet sent/received : 19/16
Remote Peer Deletion Status : No
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Configure the bandwidth attributes for the outbound interfaces of links along the TE tunnel.
# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
[LSRC-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
[LSRD-Pos1/0/0] quit

Step 6 Configure a tunnel from LSR B to LSR D.

# On LSR B, enable forwarding adjacency on the tunnel interface and adjust the metric value
of forwarding adjacency to direct traffic of LSR D or LSR E to pass through the tunnel.
[LSRB] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 4.4.4.4
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 550

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000

[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp advertise
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRB-Tunnel1/0/0] isis enable 1

Step 7 Configure a tunnel from LSR D to LSR B.

# On LSR D, enable forwarding adjacency on the tunnel interface and adjust the metric value
of forwarding adjacency to direct traffic of LSR A or LSR B to pass through the tunnel.
[LSRD] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 2.2.2.2
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp advertise
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRD-Tunnel1/0/0] isis enable 1

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display interface tunnel command, and you can see that the tunnel has been set up.
[LSRB] display interface tunnel
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2007-10-29, 16:35:10
Description : Tunnel1/0/0Interface
...

# Run the display mpls lsp command on LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D, and you can see that the
RSVP LSP has been set up between them.
Take the display on LSR B as an example.
[LSRB] display mpls lsp
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: RSVP LSP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/1024 -/Pos2/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LSP Information: LDP LSP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
FEC In/Out Label In/Out IF Vrf Name
3.3.3.3/32 1024/NULL -/-
1.1.1.1/32 NULL/3 -/Pos1/0/0
1.1.1.1/32 1028/3 -/Pos1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 NULL/3 -/Tun1/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 1025/3 -/Tun1/0/0
5.5.5.5/32 NULL/1029 -/Tun1/0/0
5.5.5.5/32 1026/1029 -/Tun1/0/0

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 551

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls ldp
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 86.1111.1111.1111.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
mpls ldp
#
mpls ldp remote-peer LSRd
remote-ip 4.4.4.4
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 86.2222.2222.2222.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 4.4.4.4
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te igp advertise
mpls te igp metric absolute 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 552

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te commit
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR C
#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 86.3333.3333.3333.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
mpls ldp
#
mpls ldp remote-peer LSRd
remote-ip 2.2.2.2
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 86.4444.4444.4444.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 553

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 20000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 20000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 2.2.2.2
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 10000
mpls te igp advertise
mpls te igp metric absolute 1
mpls te commit
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR E

#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
#
mpls ldp
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 86.5555.5555.5555.00
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 40.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls ldp
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

3.26.29 Example for Advertising MPLS LSR IDs to Multiple OSPF

Areas

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-30, OSPF runs on LSR A, LSR B, and LSR C. LSR A and
LSR B reside in Area 0; LSR B and LSR C reside in Area 1; LSR B is an ABR. It is required

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 554

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

that a tunnel be set up on LSR A and LSR C separately destined for LSR B and that IGP shortcut
be enabled on LSR A and LSR C so that routes on LSR A and LSR C to LSR B use the tunnel
interfaces as the outbound interfaces.

Figure 3-30 Networking for configuring inter-area tunnels

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0 GE2/0/0
10.0.0.1/24 10.0.0.2/24 20.0.0.1/24 20.0.0.2/24

LSRA LSRB LSRC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure an IP address for each interface on the LSRs and the loopback interface address
used as the LSR ID, and configure OSPF to advertise the network segments connected to
the interfaces on the LSRs and host routes of LSR IDs.
2. Configure the LSR ID of each LSR and enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and MPLS RSVP-TE
on each LSR and interface.
3. Set up a tunnel destined to LSR B on LSR A and LSR C separately and enable IGP shortcut
on LSR A and LSR C.
4. Run the advertise mpls-lsr-id command on LSR B so that the host route 2.2.2.2, an inter-
area route, is advertised to both Area 0 and Area 1.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l OSPF process ID and area ID of each LSR
l Interface number, IP address, destination address, and tunnel ID of each tunnel interface
on LSR A and LSR C

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface on the LSRs and configure OSPF.
Configure an IP address and a mask for each interface and configure OSPF so that all LSRs can
communicate with each other.
The configuration details are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure basic MPLS functions and enable MPLS TE and MPLS RSVP-TE.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 555

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ospf network-type p2p
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

The configuration performed on LSR B and LSR C is similar to that on LSR A, and thus are not
provided here.

Step 3 Configure an MPLS TE tunnel and IGP shortcut.

# Set up an MPLS TE tunnel from LSR A to LSR B and configure IGP shortcut. The OSPF cost
of the tunnel is smaller than that of the physical link.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 2.2.2.2
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp shortcut ospf
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Set up an MPLS TE tunnel from LSR C to LSR B and configure IGP shortcut. The OSPF cost
of the tunnel is smaller than that of the physical link.
[LSRC] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 2.2.2.2
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te igp shortcut ospf
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te igp metric absolute 1
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRC-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

After the configurations are complete, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A.
You can see that the tunnel interface is Up.

# Run the display mpls te tunnel command on LSR A and LSR C. You can view information
about each MPLS TE tunnel.
<LSRA> display mpls te tunnel

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress LsrId Destination LSPID In/Out Label R Tunnel-name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2 1 --/3 I Tunnel1/0/0
<LSRC> display mpls te tunnel

Step 4 Configure the ABR so that LSR B can advertise MPLS LSR IDs to multiple OSPF areas.
[LSRB] ospf 1
[LSRB-ospf-1] advertise mpls-lsr-id

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# Run the display ospf peer brief command on LSR B. You can see that each Area 0 and Area
1 has a neighbor in the Full state.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 556

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB] display ospf peer brief

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 2.2.2.2

Peer Statistic Informations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Area Id Interface Neighbor id State
0.0.0.0 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 1.1.1.1 Full
0.0.0.1 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 3.3.3.3 Full
------------------------------------------------------------------------

# Run the display ip routing-table 2.2.2.2 command on LSR A. You can see that in the routing
table, the outbound interface of the route to 2.2.2.2 is a tunnel interface.
<LSRA> display ip routing-table 2.2.2.2
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Table : Public
Summary Count : 1
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

2.2.2.2/32 OSPF 10 1 D 1.1.1.1 Tunnel1/0/0

<LSRC> display ip routing-table 2.2.2.2

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Table : Public
Summary Count : 1
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

2.2.2.2/32 OSPF 10 1 D 3.3.3.3 Tunnel2/0/0

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
undo shutdown
ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0
ospf cost 10
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 2.2.2.2
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te igp shortcut ospf
mpls te igp metric absolute 1
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1 router-id 1.1.1.1
opaque-capability enable
enable traffic-adjustment
area 0.0.0.0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 557

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 558

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

destination 2.2.2.2
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te igp shortcut ospf
mpls te igp metric absolute 1
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1 router-id 3.3.3.3
opaque-capability enable
enable traffic-adjustment
area 0.0.0.1
network 20.0.0.0 0.0.0.255
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
mpls-te enable
#
return

3.26.30 Example for Configuring an Inter-Area Tunnel

This section provides an example for configuring a TE tunnel between IS-IS areas.

Networking Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 3-31,

l IS-IS is run on LSR A, LSR B, LSR C, LSR D, and LSR E.

– LSR A and LSR E are Level-1 devices.
– LSR B and LSR D are Level-1-2 devices.
– LSR C is Level-2 devices.
l A TE tunnel is established from LSR A to LSR E using RSVP-TE. The tunnel traverses
the IS-IS area with the bandwidth of 20 Mbit/s.
l The maximum reservable bandwidth of the link that the tunnel traverses is 100 Mbit/s and
the BC0 bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s.

Figure 3-31 Networking diagram of configuring an inter-area tunnel

Area address: 00.0005 Area address: 00.0006 Area address: 00.0007

Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1
2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32 4.4.4.4/32
GE1/0/0
LSRB POS2/0/0 LSRD
30.1.1.1/24
L1/2 20.1.1.1/24 L1/2
POS2/0/0
GE1/0/0 LSRC GE1/0/0 GE2/0/0
20.1.1.2/24
10.1.1.2/24 L2 30.1.1.2/24 40.1.1.1/24
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
10.1.1.1/24 40.1.1.2/24
LSRA LSRE
L1 L1
Loopback1 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 5.5.5.5/32

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 559

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure IP addresses for interfaces on each LSR, configure loopback address as LSR
IDs.
2. Enable the IS-IS protocol globally and enable IS-IS TE.
3. Configure the loose explicit path including ABR (LSR B, LSR C, and LSR D).
4. Enable MPLS RSVP-TE.
5. Configure the bandwidth attributes for the outbound interfaces of links along the TE tunnel.
6. Establish the tunnel interface on the ingress, specify the IP address of the tunnel, the tunnel
protocol, the destination address, the tunnel ID, the RSVP-TE protocol, and the tunnel
bandwidth.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data.
l IS-IS area ID of each LSR, originating system ID, and IS-IS level
l Maximum reservable bandwidth and BC bandwidth for outbound interfaces of links along
the tunnel
l Name of the tunnel interface, IP address, destination address, tunnel ID, tunnel signaling
protocol (RSVP-TE), and tunnel bandwidth

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an IP address for each interface.
Configure the IP address and mask for each interface, including the loopback interface as shown
in Figure 3-31.
The configuration details are not provided here.
Step 2 Configure the IS-IS protocol to advertise routes.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1
[LSRA-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
[LSRA-isis-1] is-level level-1
[LSRA-isis-1] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface loopback 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRA-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
[LSRB-isis-1] is-level level-1-2
[LSRB-isis-1] import-route isis level-2 into level-1
[LSRB-isis-1] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 560

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1

[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface loopback 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRB-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] network-entity 00.0006.0000.0000.0003.00
[LSRC-isis-1] is-level level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface loopback 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRC-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] network-entity 00.0007.0000.0000.0004.00
[LSRD-isis-1] is-level level-1-2
[LSRD-isis-1] import-route isis level-2 into level-1
[LSRD-isis-1] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface loopback 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRD-LoopBack1] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] isis 1
[LSRE-isis-1] network-entity 00.0007.0000.0000.0005.00
[LSRE-isis-1] is-level level-1
[LSRE-isis-1] quit
[LSRE] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRE] interface loopback 1
[LSRE-LoopBack1] isis enable 1
[LSRE-LoopBack1] quit

Step 3 Configure basic MPLS functions, enable MPLS TE, RSVP-TE, and enable CSPF on the ingress
of the tunnel.
# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te cspf
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR B.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 561

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRB] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2

[LSRB] mpls
[LSRB-mpls] mpls te
[LSRB-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-mpls] quit
[LSRB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls te
[LSRC-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-mpls] quit
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRC] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRC-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
[LSRD] mpls
[LSRD-mpls] mpls te
[LSRD-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRD-mpls] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
[LSRE] mpls
[LSRE-mpls] mpls te
[LSRE-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRE-mpls] quit
[LSRE] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[LSRE-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

Step 4 Configure IS-IS TE.

# Configure LSR A.
[LSRA] isis 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 562

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRA-isis-1] cost-style wide

[LSRA-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1
[LSRA-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR B.
[LSRB] isis 1
[LSRB-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRB-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1-2
[LSRB-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR C.
[LSRC] isis 1
[LSRC-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRC-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2
[LSRC-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR D.
[LSRD] isis 1
[LSRD-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRD-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1-2
[LSRD-isis-1] quit

# Configure LSR E.
[LSRE] isis 1
[LSRE-isis-1] cost-style wide
[LSRE-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1
[LSRE-isis-1] quit

Step 5 Configure the loose explicit path.

[LSRA] explicit-path atoe
[LSRA-explicit-path-atoe] next hop 10.1.1.2 include loose
[LSRA-explicit-path-atoe] next hop 20.1.1.2 include loose
[LSRA-explicit-path-atoe] next hop 30.1.1.2 include loose
[LSRA-explicit-path-atoe] next hop 40.1.1.2 include loose

Step 6 Configure MPLS TE attributes for the link.

# Configure the maximum reservable bandwidth and the BC0 bandwidth for the link on LSR A.
[LSRA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure the maximum bandwidth and the maximum reservable bandwidth for the link on
LSR B.
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] quit

# Configure the maximum bandwidth and the maximum reservable bandwidth for the link on
LSR C.
[LSRC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
[LSRC-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure the maximum bandwidth and the maximum reservable bandwidth for the link on
LSR D.
[LSRD] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0
[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 563

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000

[LSRD-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit

Step 7 Configure an MPLS TE tunnel.

# Configure an MPLS TE tunnel on LSR A.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 5.5.5.5
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path atoe
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

Step 8 Verify the configuration.

After the configuration, run the display interface tunnel command on LSR A, and you can see
that the status of the tunnel interface is Up.
[LSRA] display interface Tunnel
Tunnel1/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last up time: 2009-01-16, 10:36:20
Description : Tunnel1/0/0 Interface, Route Port
...

# Run the display mpls te tunnel verbose command on LSR A to display information about
the tunnel.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel verbose
No : 1
Tunnel-Name : Tunnel1/0/0
TunnelIndex : 0 LSP Index : 2048
Session ID : 100 LSP ID : 1
Lsr Role : Ingress Lsp Type : Primary
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1
Egress LSR ID : 5.5.5.5
In-Interface : -
Out-Interface : GE1/0/0
Sign-Protocol : RSVP TE Resv Style : SE
IncludeAnyAff : 0x0 ExcludeAnyAff : 0x0
IncludeAllAff : 0x0
LspConstraint : -
ER-Hop Table Index : 0 AR-Hop Table Index: -
C-Hop Table Index : 0
PrevTunnelIndexInSession: - NextTunnelIndexInSession: -
PSB Handle : 1024
Created Time : 2010/09/09 16:40:44 UTC-08:00
--------------------------------
DS-TE Information
--------------------------------
Bandwidth Reserved Flag : Reserved
CT0 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 20000 CT1 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT2 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT3 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT4 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT5 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
CT6 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec) : 0 CT7 Bandwidth(Kbit/sec): 0
Setup-Priority : 7 Hold-Priority : 7
--------------------------------
FRR Information
--------------------------------
Primary LSP Info
TE Attribute Flag : 0x3 Protected Flag : 0x0
Bypass In Use : Not Exists
Bypass Tunnel Id : -
BypassTunnel : -

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 564

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

Bypass Lsp ID : - FrrNextHop : -

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
explicit-path atoe
next hop 10.1.1.2 include loose
next hop 20.1.1.2 include loose
next hop 30.1.1.2 include loose
next hop 40.1.1.2 include loose
#
isis 1
is-level level-1
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0001.00
traffic-eng level-1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
interface Tunnel1/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 100
mpls te bandwidth ct0 20000
mpls te path explicit-path atoe
mpls te commit
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 565

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

l Configuration file of LSR B

#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-1-2
cost-style wide
import-route isis level-2 into level-1
network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0002.00
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
clock master
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return

l Configuration file of LSR C

#
sysname LSRC
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0006.0000.0000.0003.00
traffic-eng level-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 566

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR D
#
sysname LSRD
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-1-2
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0007.0000.0000.0004.00
import-route isis level-2 into level-1
traffic-eng level-1-2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 30.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 40.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000
mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
isis enable 1
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR E
#
sysname LSRE
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
isis 1
is-level level-1
cost-style wide
network-entity 00.0007.0000.0000.0005.00
traffic-eng level-1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 40.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
isis enable 1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface LoopBack1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 567

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 3 MPLS TE Configuration

ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255

isis enable 1
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 568

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

4 MPLS Common Configuration

About This Chapter

MPLS common configurations include the MPLS TTL handling mode, Layer 3 MPLS load
balancing, PBR to the LSP on the public network, and MPLS optimization.

4.1 Introduction to MPLS Common Configuration

MPLS supports multiple labels and the MPLS forwarding plane is connection-oriented, which
enables MPLS to be of well expansibility. With these features, MPLS can provide various
services based on the fundamental MPLS and IP-integrated network architecture.
4.2 Configuring the Mode in Which MPLS Handles the TTL
You can configure an MPLS TTL handling mode only after enabling MPLS or configuring the
MPLS VPN.
4.3 Configuring the Load Balancing of MPLS Layer 3 Forwarding
You can configure the MPLS load balancing function in per-flow forwarding mode or in per-
packet load forwarding mode.
4.4 Optimizing MPLS
To optimize MPLS, you can adjust parameters of the PHP function, MPLS MTU on an interface,
and Layer 3 MPLS load balancing function.
4.5 Maintaining MPLS Common Configuration
The operations of the MPLS common configurations include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity and reachability of an LSP, and maintaining the PBR to an LSP.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 569

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

4.1 Introduction to MPLS Common Configuration

4.1.1 Overview of MPLS Common Features

MPLS speeds up the forwarding of networks and can provide various new services.

Originally, MPLS is set forth for improving the forwarding rate of the device, but this means
little now with the improvement of hardware technology. After all, MPLS is connection-oriented
with well expansibility and supports multiple-layer label. With these features, MPLS can provide
various services based on fundamental MPLS and IP-integrated network architecture. Thus,
MPLS gradually becomes a basic technology applicable to large-scale networks.

MPLS VPN is highly evaluated by the IP network carrier in providing value-added services.
With MPLS VPN technology, the current IP network is divided into logically-isolated networks.
This technology is applicable to interconnection among companies and various new services.
For example, despite lacking of IP network addresses, a VPN can be established especially for
IP telephone services to provide QoS and new services.

4.1.2 MPLS Common Features Supported by the NE80E/40E

The system supports the MPLS common features, including the MPLS TTL handling mode,
PBR to the LSP, and MPLS ping and traceroute.

Processing Modes of MPLS TTL

The MPLS label contains an 8-bit TTL field. The meaning of the TTL field is similar to that of
the TTL field in an IP header. The TTL can be used to prevent routing loops and to implement
the traceroute function.

In the NE80E/40E, you can set different TTL processing modes for VPN packets and public
network packets. This implements that the Traceroute operations have different results.

MPLS Ping/Traceroute
The MPLS Ping and Traceroute help to detect LSP faults and locate the faulty nodes.

Similar to IP Ping and Traceroute, MPLS Ping and Traceroute use the echo request and echo
reply messages to detect the availability of the LSP. Echo request and echo reply messages are
transferred in User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagram with the port number being 3503.

4.2 Configuring the Mode in Which MPLS Handles the TTL

You can configure an MPLS TTL handling mode only after enabling MPLS or configuring the
MPLS VPN.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 570

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

4.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring an MPLS TTL handling mode, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
MPLS TTL process is related to the following aspects:

l MPLS TTL process mode

– If the ingress is configured with the Uniform mode or enabled with the IP TTL
propagation function, the IP TTL decreases by one at each hop. Therefore, the output
of the traceroute test reflects the actual path traversed by the packet.
– If the ingress is configured with the Pipe mode or the IP TTL copy function is disabled
on the ingress, the IP TTL value does not decrease by one at each hop. The output of
the traceroute test does not reflect all the hops in the MPLS backbone network, as if the
ingress is directly connected to the egress.
When using MPLS IP TTL propagation, note that:
– Multi-level labels of MPLS packets mutually propagate their TTLs within an MPLS
domain.
– The MPLS IP TTL propagation function is not valid for packets originating from the
local LSR. The TTLs of all local packets are propagated. In this manner, the local
administrators can analyze the network through the tracert command.
In the MPLS VPN application, the MPLS backbone network structure can be hidden for
security purposes. In this case, the ingress cannot use the TTL propagation function for
private network packets.
l ICMP response packets
For the MPLS packets with only one layer of label, you can configure MPLS to send back
the ICMP response packet only based on IP routes instead of the LSP when the TTL expires.
Generally, in the MPLS domain, the P device maintains public network routes only, and
MPLS packets with one layer label carry public network payload.
NOTE

For details information about HoVPN and SPE, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - VPN.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the MPLS TTL process mode, complete the following task:
l Enabling MPLS or MPLS VPN

Data Preparation
To configure the MPLS TTL process mode, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 MPLS TTL process mode

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 571

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

No. Data

2 Path for the ICMP Echo Reply packet to pass through

4.2.2 Configuring MPLS Uniform Mode

MPLS handles TTLs in Uniform mode.

Context
The effect of configuring the MPLS uniform mode and that of configuring the IP TTL copy
function are the same. The TTL of a packet transmitted in an MPLS network decreases by one
at each hop.

Procedure
l Configuring MPLS Uniform mode
Do as follows on the ingress PE:
1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
ip vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

The VPN instance view is displayed.

3. Run:
ttl-mode uniform

MPLS Uniform mode is configured.

By default, the MPLS Pipe mode is adopted.
----End

4.2.3 Configuring MPLS Pipe Mode

MPLS handles TTLs in Pipe mode.

Context
The effect of configuring the MPLS Pipe mode and that of disabling the MPLS IP TTL
propagation function are the same. That is, when packets pass through an MPLS network, the
ingress and egress are perceived as directly connected. The IP TTL decreases by one only on
the ingress and the egress respectively.
Do as follows on the ingress PE:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 572

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
ip vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

The VPN instance view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
ttl-mode pipe

The MPLS Pipe mode is configured.

By default, the MPLS Pipe mode is adopted.

----End

4.2.4 Configuring the Path Taken by ICMP Response Packets

To set up the path for ICMP Response messages, you need to configure the ingress node and
egress node.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress PE and the egress PE:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
ttl expiration pop

The ICMP response packet is configured to take the IP route.

Or, run:
undo ttl expiration pop

The ICMP response packet is configured to take the LSP.

For the MPLS packet with one layer of a label, the ICMP response packet is sent back along the
local IP route by default.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 573

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

4.3 Configuring the Load Balancing of MPLS Layer 3

Forwarding
You can configure the MPLS load balancing function in per-flow forwarding mode or in per-
packet load forwarding mode.

4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before configuring the MPLS load balancing function, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
On an existing MPLS network, devices in the core area support TE and devices in other areas
use LDP. LDP over TE is applied and allows a TE tunnel to function as a hop of an entire LDP
LSP. On MPLS VPNs where LDP is widely used, LDP over TE is used to prevent VPN traffic
congestion on some nodes. If multiple tunnels on a transit node have the same downstream node,
load balancing can be configured on the transit node. This allows each link to carry traffic based
on the proportion of the specific weight to the total weight.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring load balancing of MPLS Layer 3 forwarding, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring LSR IDs
l Enabling MPLS

Data Preparation
None.

4.3.2 Configuring Layer 3 MPLS Forwarding in UCMP Mode

To configure the MPLS load balancing function in UMP Mode, you need to configure the transit
node.

Context
Do as follows on the transit:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
load-balance unequal-cost enable

Unequal-cost load balancing is enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 574

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

Unequal-cost load balancing is enabled.

If multiple equal-cost links of different bandwidths exist, traffic can be proportionally balanced
over these links. In this manner, all links can transmit traffic in proportion to their bandwidths,
realizing more reasonable load balancing.
Note the following issues when configuring UCMP weights:
l If only some links are configured with weights, the system carries out load balancing based
on bandwidth. This means that the set weights do not take effect.
l If all links are configured with weights, UCMP is carried out among links. This means that
each link carries traffic based on a specified percent calculated using the following formula:
Traffic percent on a specified link = 32/Sum of weights x Weight of a specified link
As the sum of weights may not divide 32 exactly, the traffic volume of each link may deviate
from the calculated result but the sum of weights remains 32.

----End

4.4 Optimizing MPLS

To optimize MPLS, you can adjust parameters of the PHP function, MPLS MTU on an interface,
and Layer 3 MPLS load balancing function.

4.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

Before optimizing MPLS, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
MPLS has many basic parameters that can be adjusted in different environments:

l PHP
The Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is configured on the egress. The label is distributed
according to the PHP features that the PHP node supports.
l MPLS MTU of the interface
Before sending the packet on the LSP, the MPLS interface checks the packet size and
determines whether to fragment the packet according to its MPLS MTU. Generally, the
MPLS MTU of the interface is the default MTU in the IP packet.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before adjusting the MPLS parameters, complete the following task:

l Configuring MPLS functions

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 575

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

Data Preparation
To adjust the MPLS parameters, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 MTU of the interface

2 Interval for collecting MPLS statistics

4.4.2 Configuring PHP

To configure the PHP function, you need to configure labels to be allocated to the penultimate
pop.

Context
Do as follows on the egress:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
label advertise { explicit-null | implicit-null | non-null }

The label of the penultimate hop on the egress node is configured.

l By default, implicit-null is set for supporting PHP. The egress allocates an empty label to
the PHP node. The value of the label is 3.
l If explicit-null is specified, the PHP is not supported. The egress allocates an empty label
to the PHP node. The value of the label is 0.
l If non-null is specified, the PHP is not supported. The egress allocates a label to PHP node
normally. That is, the value of the label is not less than 16.
NOTE

The modification of the PHP feature takes effect only on the LSP that is set up later than the modification.

----End

4.4.3 Configuring the MPLS MTU of the Interface

By configuring the LDP MTU signaling, you can determine the size of MPLS packets to be
forwarded.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 576

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

Context
The relationship between the MPLS MTU and the MTU of an interface is as follows:
l By default, if the MPLS MTU value is not set, the value of the MPLS MTU is that of the
interface MTU.
l If the MPLS MTU value is set, the smaller one between the MPLS MTU value and the
interface MTU value is adopted. If not, the interface MTU value is adopted.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number

The MPLS-enabled interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls mtu mtu

The MPLS MTU of the interface is configured.

The MPLS MTU configured for the interface takes effect without the interface being restarted.

----End

4.4.4 Configuring the Interval for Collecting MPLS Statistics

To configure an interval for collecting MPLS statistics, you need to configure each node.

Context
Do as follows on each LSR in an MPLS domain:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
statistics interval interval-time

The interval for collecting MPLS statistics is configured.

By default, the interval for collecting MPLS statistics is 0. That is, the statistics function is
disabled.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 577

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

4.4.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configurations of optimizing MPLS, you can view information about the interface
enabled with MPLS.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the optimizing MPLS function are complete.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mpls interface [ interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose ] command to
check information about the interface enabled with MPLS.

----End

Example
If the configurations are successful, you can view the following information:
<HUAWEI> display mpls interface
Interface Status TE Attr LSP Count CRLSP Count Effective MTU
GE1/0/0 Up Dis 0 0 1500

4.5 Maintaining MPLS Common Configuration

The operations of the MPLS common configurations include deleting MPLS statistics, detecting
connectivity and reachability of an LSP, and maintaining the PBR to an LSP.

4.5.1 Clearing MPLS Statistics

By running the reset command, you can delete MPLS statistics.

Context
Run the following reset commands in the user view to clear the running information.

Procedure
l Run reset mpls statistics interface { interface-type interface-number | all } command to
clear MPLS statistics.
l Run reset mpls statistics lsp { lsp-name | all } command to clear LSP statistics.

----End

4.5.2 Checking the LSP Connectivity and Reachability

By running the ping or tracert command, you can detect connectivity or reachability of an LSP.

Context
You can run the following commands in any view to perform MPLS ping and MPLS tracert.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 578

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 4 MPLS Common Configuration

MPLS ping is performed.

MPLS tracert is performed.

If draft6 is specified, the command is implemented according to draft-ietf-mpls-lsp-
ping-06. By default, the command is implemented according to RFC 4379.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 579

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

5 MPLS OAM Configuration

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the principles of Multiprotocol Label Switching Operation,

Administration and Maintenance (MPLS OAM), procedures of configuring protection switching
and remote advertisement of the link status, and provides configuration examples.

5.1 Introduction to MPLS OAM

MPLS OAM is applied to the MPLS layer for operation, maintenance, and management.
5.2 Configuring Basic MPLS OAM Functions of LSP
MPLS OAM is configured on the ingress and egress of an LSP to detect connectivity of the LSP.
MPLS OAM can also detect the connectivity of a TE LSP.
5.3 Configuring MPLS OAM Protection Switching of LSP
MPLS OAM protection switching enables a tunnel to protect one or more tunnels. The tunnel
under protection is a working tunnel, and the tunnel providing protection is a protection tunnel.
When a protection tunnel protects one working tunnel, it indicates that tunnel protection is in
1:1 mode.
5.4 Maintaining MPLS OAM
You can use display commands to monitor MPLS OAM and the tunnel protection group.
5.5 Configuration Examples
The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS OAM to detect LSPs
and configuring the association between MPLS OAM and a protection group for performing
protection switching.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 580

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

5.1 Introduction to MPLS OAM

MPLS OAM is applied to the MPLS layer for operation, maintenance, and management.

5.1.1 MPLS OAM Overview

MPLS OAM can effectively detect, identify, and locate faults on the MPLS user plane.

The Operation Administration & Maintenance (OAM) is a effective method of reducing the cost
of network maintenance. The MPLS OAM mechanism is used on the MPLS layer.

MPLS OAM mechanism is independent of the upper and lower layers and provides the following
functions:

l Detecting, identifying, and locatingfaults on the MPLS user plane.

l Performing protection switching in the case of link or node failure to shorten the defect
duration and improves the availability.

For details about requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks, refer to the ITU-T
Recommendation Y.1710. For details about OAM mechanism for MPLS networks, refer to the
ITU-T Recommendation Y.1711.

5.1.2 MPLS OAM Features Supported by the NE80E/40E

MPLS OAM provides functions such as connectivity detection, fault detection, and protection
switching.

Basic MPLS OAM Detection

The basic detection function of MPLS OAM refers to the detection on the connectivity of an
LSP.

Figure 5-1 Schematic diagram of MPLS OAM connectivity detection

CV
D /F
/FF F D
CV

Ingress Egress

BD I
I BD

As shown in Figure 5-1, procedures of MPLS OAM connectivity detection are as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 581

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

1. The ingress sends a CV or an FFD detection packet to the egress along the LSP to be
detected.
2. The egress judges whether the received packet is correct by comparing the packet type,
frequency, and TTSI in the received packet with expected values recorded on the egress.
It counts the number of the correct packets and the error packets received within a certain
period, and thus monitors the LSP connectivity.
3. When the egress detects a defect on the LSP, it analyzes the defect type and sends a
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) () packet carrying the defect information to the ingress
through the backward tunnel. This enables the ingress to know the defect status in real time.
If a protection group has been configured in the correct manner, the corresponding
switching is triggered.

Backward Tunnel
When configuring the basic OAM detection function, bind a backward tunnel to the detected
LSP.
A backward tunnel is an LSP with its ingress and egress being converse to the ingress and egress
of the detected LSP. It also can be a non-MPLS path connected to the ingress and egress of the
detected LSP.
There are three types of backward tunnels:
l Private backward LSP
l Shared backward LSP
l A non-MPLS backward path
NOTE

At current, only LSPs can function as backward tunnels on the NE80E/40El.

Auto-protocol Function of MPLS OAM

The ITU-T Y.1710 protocol has the following drawbacks:
l If the OAM function on the LSP ingress starts later than that on the LSP egress, or the
egress is enabled with the OAM function but the ingress is not, the egress generates a Loss
of Connectivity Verification defect (dLOCV) alarm.
l If the OAM function is disabled on the ingress whereas is enabled on the egress, the egress
generates a dLOCV alarm .
l To modify the type of the detection packet or the frequency at which detection packets are
sent, you must disable the OAM function on the egress and the ingress separately.
l OAM parameters need to be configured separately on the ingress and egress. This may
cause the detection packet type and the frequency at which detection packets are sent to be
different on the ingress and egress.
The NE80E/40E uses the OAM auto-protocol to solve problems existing in the ITU-T Y.1710.
The OAM auto-protocol is configured on the egress. It provides functions of initial packet
triggering and dynamic enabling or disabling.

Protection Switching
In protection switching, a protection tunnel (backup tunnel) is set up for the working tunnel
(primary tunnel). A working tunnel and a protection tunnel compose a protection group. When

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 582

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

the working tunnel fails, the data flow switches to the protection tunnel; thus improving the
network reliability.
The difference between protection switching and CR-LSP backup are as follows:
l Protection switching uses one tunnel to protect another tunnel. Attributes of every tunnel
in the tunnel protection group are independent. For example, the protection tunnel with the
bandwidth being 10 Mbit/s can protect the working tunnel that requires 100 Mbit/s
bandwidth protection.
l CR-LSP backup has the primary and backup CR-LSPs in the same tunnel group. The
backup CR-LSP protects the primary CR-LSP. Except for TE FRR, attributes of the primary
and backup CR-LSPs, such as the bandwidth, setup priority, and holding priority, are
identical.

Protection Mode
The NE80E/40E supports the following protection switching modes:
l 1:1 protection
One working tunnel and one protection tunnel exist between the ingress and the egress.
– Data is generally forwarded through the working tunnel.
– When the working tunnel fails, the ingress performs protection switching and switches
the data flow to the protection tunnel for transmission.
l N:1 protection
As shown in Figure 5-2, one tunnel provides protection for several working tunnels.
This mode is applicable to a mesh network for saving bandwidth.

Figure 5-2 N:1 protection mode

Working tunnel-1

RouterA Working tunnel-2 RouterB

Protection tunnel

Backward tunnel

: Traffic of working tunnel-1

: Traffic of working tunnel-2

As shown in Figure 5-3, when one of the working tunnels fails, its traffic switches to the
shared protection tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 583

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Figure 5-3 N:1 protection mode - working tunnel fails

Working tunnel-1

Working tunnel-2 Egress

Ingress
Protection tunnel

Backward tunnel

: Traffic of Working tunnel-1

: Traffic of Working tunnel-2

: Working tunnel-1 is failed

5.2 Configuring Basic MPLS OAM Functions of LSP

MPLS OAM is configured on the ingress and egress of an LSP to detect connectivity of the LSP.
MPLS OAM can also detect the connectivity of a TE LSP.

5.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

MPLS OAM can detect an ordinary LSP and a TE LSP. Before configuring MPLS OAM, you
need to create an LSP. The following sections describe the applicable environment, pre-
configuration tasks, data preparation, and configuration procedure of configuring MPLS OAM
detection.

Applicable Environment
The NE80E/40E provides MPLS OAM to detect the connectivity of an RSVP-TE LSP, a static
CR-LSP, and a static LSP.

To implement MPLS OAM functions, you need to create a backward LSP for bearing BDI
packets. The type of the backward LSP can be different from that of the tested LSP, but the
backward LSP must be bound to a TE tunnel.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring basic MPLS OAM functions, complete the following tasks:

l Configuring basic MPLS functions

l Creating a forward LSP, the LSP to be detected by OAM and is bound to the TE tunnel
l Creating a backward LSP
NOTE

If the forward LSP is static and the backward LSP is dynamic, and the backward LSP is in the shared mode,
you must specify lsrid ingress-lsr-id and tunnel-id tunnel-id when running the static-lsp egress command
or the static-cr-lsp egress command to create a forward LSP. For creating the LSP bound to a TE tunnel,
refer to the chapter "MPLS TE Configuration."

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 584

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure basic MPLS OAM functions, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Ingress: Number of tunnel interfaces bound to the detected LSP

2 (Optional) Ingress: backward tunnel

l If a static LSP or a static CR-LSP acts as the backward tunnel, the name of the
static LSP or the static CR-LSP is required.
l If a dynamic LSP (RSVP-TE LSP) acts as the backward tunnel, the LSP ID and
tunnel ID are required .

3 Egress: Number of the tunnel interface that is bound to the backward LSP and the
protection mode

4 Egress: detected LSP

l If a static LSP or a static CR-LSP is to be detected, the name of the LSP, LSR ID,
and tunnel ID are required.
l If a dynamic LSP (RSVP-TE LSP) is to be detected, the LSR ID and the tunnel
ID are required.

5 (Optional) MPLS OAM parameters

l Parameters for the ingress: detection type, frequency at which FFD packets are
sent, and priority of the detection packet.
l Parameters for the egress: detection type, frequency at which FFD packets are
sent, status of the auto-protocol (enabled or disabled), timeout period of the auto-
protocol, and frequency at which BDI packets are sent.

NOTE

l The backward LSP must be specified on the egress; otherwise, BDI packets cannot be correctly sent
to the source end.
l If a shared backward LSP is used, you do not need to specify the backward LSP on the ingress.

5.2.2 Configuring MPLS OAM on the Ingress

When configuring OAM on the ingress of an LSP, you can configure a backward tunnel as
required.

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 585

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls oam

MPLS OAM is enabled globally.

By default, MPLS OAM is disabled globally.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Configure MPLS OAM parameters for the ingress.

If the PHP function is not configured when a backward LSP is set up, you must specify the
backward LSP when configuring parameters for the MPLS OAM ingress.

l If no backward LSP is specified, run:

mpls oam ingress tunnel interface-number [ type { cv | ffd frequency ffd-fre } ]
[ backward-lsp share ]

NOTE

Parameters of the backward LSP depend on the configuration of the egress.

l If a backward LSP is specified, run:
mpls oam ingress tunnel interface-number [ type { cv | ffd frequency ffd-fre } ]
backward-lsp { lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id rev-ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id rev-
tunnel-id }

If the backward LSP is a static LSP or a static CR-LSP, you cannot configure it in private
mode.
If lsrid ingress-lsr-id and tunnel-id tunnel-id are specified when you run the static-lsp
egress lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number in-label in-label
[ lsrid ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-id ] command or the static-cr-lsp egress lsp-name
incoming-interface interface-type interface-number in-label in-label [ lsrid ingress-lsr-id
tunnel-id tunnel-id ] command to create a backward LSP, you can use these two
parametersspecify parameters in this step; otherwise, you can specifyonly the parameter lsp-
name lsp-name.
By default, the type of the detection packet is CV. The frequency at which CV packets are
sent is one second.

Step 6 Run:
mpls oam ingress enable { all | tunnel interface-number }

OAM is enabled on the ingress.

----End

5.2.3 Configuring MPLS OAM on the Egress

When configuring OAM on the egress of an LSP, you need to enable or disable the OAM auto
protocol. By default, the OAM auto protocol is enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 586

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the egress of the LSP:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
mpls

The MPLS view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls oam

MPLS OAM is enabled globally.

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.

Step 5 Configure OAM parameters for the egress.

l Run:
mpls oam egress { lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-
id } [ auto-protocol [ overtime over-time ] ] [ backward-lsp tunnel interface-
number [ private | share ] [ bdi-frequency { detect-freq | per-second } ] ]

The auto-protocol extension of OAM is enabled.

l Run:
mpls oam egress { lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-
id } type { cv | ffd frequency ffd-fre } [ backward-lsp tunnel interface-number
[ private | share ] [ bdi-frequency { detect-freq | per-second } ] ]

OAM parameters is configured for the egress when the auto-protocol extension of OAM is
disabled.

If lsrid ingress-lsr-id and tunnel-id tunnel-id are specified when you run the static-lsp egress
lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-number in-label in-label [ lsrid ingress-
lsr-id tunnel-id tunnel-id ] command or the static-cr-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-
interface interface-type interface-number in-label in-label [ lsrid ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id
tunnel-id ] command to create a forward tunnel, you can use these two parameters in this step;
otherwise, you can specify only the parameter lsp-name lsp-name.

By default, the auto-protocol function of OAM is enabled. The timeout period for the first packet
to wait for response is five minutes.

By default, the backward LSP is in the shared mode. When the backward LSP is a static LSP or
a CR-LSP, it is in the private mode.

By default, the frequency at which BDI packets are sent through the backward LSP is detect-
freq.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 587

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

NOTE

If a shared backward LSP is used to enable the OAM auto-protocol extension in Step 5, Step 6 is not
necessary. When the egress receives the first CV/FFD packet, it automatically records the packet type and
the frequency at which CV/FFD packets are sent, and starts to detect the connectivity.

Step 6 Run:
mpls oam egress enable { all | lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id
tunnel-id }

OAM is enabled on the egress.

----End

5.2.4 Checking the Configuration

After the configuration, you can use display commands on the ingress and egress of an LSP to
view information about the LSP, OAM detection, and OAM backward LSP.

Prerequisite
The configurations of basic MPLS OAM functions are complete.

Procedure
l Run display mpls oam ingress { all | tunnel interface-number } [ slot slot-id | verbose ]
command to view MPLS OAM information on the ingress.
l Run display mpls oam egress { all | lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-id
tunnel-id } [ slot slot-id | verbose ] command to view MPLS OAM information on the
egress.
----End

Example
If the configurations succeed, run the commands mentioned above and you can view the
following results:

l Basic information about the LSP, including the tunnel name, LSP type, LSP ingress LSR
ID, and LSP tunnel ID
l Basic information about OAM, including the tunnel name, TTSI, packet type, and
frequency
l OAM detection information, including the packet type, frequency at which detection
packets are sent, detection status, and defect status. If the link works properly, the detection
status is Start and the defect status is non-defect
l Information about backward LSP, including the sharing mode and configurations of the
backward LSP

5.3 Configuring MPLS OAM Protection Switching of LSP

MPLS OAM protection switching enables a tunnel to protect one or more tunnels. The tunnel
under protection is a working tunnel, and the tunnel providing protection is a protection tunnel.
When a protection tunnel protects one working tunnel, it indicates that tunnel protection is in
1:1 mode.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 588

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task

MPLS OAM protection switching is a high-reliability technology applicable to tunnel protection.
After one or more working tunnels and a protection tunnel are configured, the protection tunnel
can protect the working tunnel(s), which improves reliability of the working tunnel(s). The
following sections describe the applicable environment, pre-configuration tasks, data
preparation, and configuration procedure of configuring MPLS OAM protection switching.

Applicable Environment
If the tunnel requires high availability, you can configure the MPLS OAM protection switching
to protect the tunnel.

MPLS OAM protection switching enables one tunnel to protect one or multiple tunnels. The
tunnel under protection is a working tunnel, and the tunnel providing protection is a protection
tunnel. A working tunnel and a protection tunnel compose a protection group.

One protection tunnel can protect one or more working tunnels. The protection mechanism in
which one protection tunnel protects only one working tunnel is called 1:1 protection; one
protection tunnel protects two or more working tunnel is called N:1 protection. "N" indicates
the number of the working tunnels in the same protection group. Working tunnels in the same
protection group use the same ingress and egress.

The NE80E/40E supports 1:1 protection and N:1 protection.

l Working tunnel and protection tunnel

Attributes of every tunnel in the tunnel protection group are not related. For example, the
protection tunnel with the bandwidth being 50 Mbit/s can protect the working tunnel with
the bandwidth being 100 Mbit/s.
You can configure TE FRR on the working tunnel in the protection group to provide dual
protection for the working tunnel. The protection tunnel cannot serve as the TE FRR
primary tunnel to be protected by other tunnels. In addition, the protection tunnel cannot
be enabled with TE FRR.
l Protection switching trigger mechanism
The NE80E/40E complies the following switch request criteria to initiate (or prevent) a
protection switching.

Table 5-1 Switch Request Criteria

Switch Request Order of Priority Description

Clear Highest Clears all switching requests

initiated through commands,
including forced switching and
manual switching. Traffic switching
is not performed in the case of signal
failure.

Signal Fail ↑ Automatically triggers the protection

switching between the working
tunnel and the protection tunnel in
the case of a signal failure.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 589

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Switch Request Order of Priority Description

Manual Switch ↑ Switches traffic from the working

tunnel to the protection tunnel only
when the protection tunnel functions
properly or switches traffic from the
protection tunnel to the working
tunnel only when the working tunnel
functions properly.

Wait To Restore ↑ Switches traffic from the protection

tunnel to the working tunnel after the
working tunnel recovers for a certain
period specified by the wait-to-
restore (WTR) timer.

No Request Lowest Indicates that there is no switching

request.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring MPLS OAM protection switching, complete the following tasks:

l Creating the working tunnel and protection tunnel

l Configuring basic MPLS OAM functions

Data Preparation
To configure MPLS OAM protection switching, you need the following data.

No. Data

1 Number of the working tunnel in the protection group

NOTE
The maximum number of working tunnels in a protection group is equal to or smaller than 16
depending on the License.

2 Tunnel ID of the protection tunnel in the protection group

3 Parameters for the protection group, such as the hold off time, revertive mode, and
WTR time

5.3.2 Configuring a Tunnel Protection Group

You can configure a tunnel protection group for the primary tunnel on the ingress of a tunnel.
In addition, you can configure the switchback delay time and the switchback mode. The
switchback mode can be classified into the revertive mode and non-revertive mode. By default,
revertive mode is used. In revertive mode, you can set the switchback delay time .

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 590

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Context
Do as follows on the ingress of the tunnel:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Run:
mpls te protection tunnel tunnel-id [ holdoff holdoff-time ] [ mode { non-
revertive | revertive [ wtr wtr-time ] } ]

The working tunnel is added to the protection group.

Note the following parameters or concepts before perform this step:

l The tunnel-id indicates the tunnel ID of the protection tunnel.

l The hold-off time indicates the time between declaration of signal failure and the initialization
of the protection switching algorithm. The hold-off time ranges from 0 to 10. By default, the
hold-off time is 0. holdoff-time specifies the number of steps for the hold-off time. The value
of each step is 100, in milliseconds.
NOTE

Multiplying 100 milliseconds by holdoff-time, you can get the hold-off time.
l Non-revertive mode indicates that traffic does not switch back to the working tunnel even
though the working tunnel recovers.
l Revertive mode indicates that traffic switches back to the working tunnel when the working
tunnel recovers.
By default, the protection group is in revertive mode.
l Wait to Restore time (WTR time) indicates the time to be waited before traffic switching.
The WTR time ranges from 0 to 30 minutes. The default value is 12. The parameter wtr-
time indicates the number of steps. The value of each step is 30, in seconds.
NOTE
Multiplying 30 seconds by wtr-time, you can get the value of WTR time.
NOTE
If the number of the working tunnels in the same protection group is N, perform Step 2 and Step 3 for N
times by using different interface-number.

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the tunnel protection group is committed.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 591

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Follow-up Procedure
Configurations described in this section are also applicable in modifying the configuration of
the tunnel protection group.
Besides configuring a tunnel protection group to protect the working tunnel, you can configure
TE FRR on the working tunnel in the protection group to provide dual protection for the working
tunnel. The protection tunnel cannot serve as the working tunnel to be protected by other tunnels.
In addition, the protection tunnel cannot be enabled with TE FRR.

5.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Protection Switching Trigger

Mechanism
After configuring a tunnel protection group, you can configure a trigger mechanism of protection
switching to force traffic to switch to the primary LSP or the backup LSP. Alternatively, you
can perform switchover manually.

Context
Pay attention to the switch request criteria before configuring the protection switching trigger
mechanism.
Do as follows on the ingress of the tunnel protection group as required:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

Step 2 Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view is displayed.

Step 3 Select one of the following protection switching trigger methods as required:
l To switch traffic to the working tunnel, run:
mpls te protect-switch manual protect-lsp

l To switch traffic to the protection tunnel, run:

mpls te protect-switch manual work-lsp

l To cancel the configuration of the protection switching trigger mechanism, run:

mpls te protect-switch clear

Step 4 Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration is committed.

----End

5.3.4 (Optional) Enabling MPLS OAM to Detect Bidirectional LSPs

When the working and the protection tunnels have backward LSPs, you can enable MPLS OAM.
MPLS OAM to detect bidirectional LSPs.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 592

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Context
Before performing the following configurations, configure backward LSPs for the working and
protection tunnels. The working LSP and protection LSP, and their reverse LSPs compose
bidirectional LSPa.

NOTE

The backward LSP must be a static LSP or static CR-LSP. The working LSP and protection LSP can be a
static LSP, static CR-LSP, or RSVP LSP.
It is recommended that the LSP and the backward LSP of a bidirectional LSP be both static LSPs or both
static CR-LSPs; the protection LSP and the backward LSP are all static LSPs or all static CR-LSPs.
On the ingress, the inbound interface of the backward LSP and the outbound interface of the working LSP
or the protection LSP must be the same.

Procedure
l Enable MPLS OAM to detect the bidirectional LSP of the working tunnel.

Do as follows on the ingress of the working tunnel:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the working tunnel is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name lsp-name

The backward LSP of the working tunnel is specified.

4. Run:
mpls te commit

The current configuration of the working tunnel is committed.

l Enable MPLS OAM to detect the bidirectional LSP of the protection tunnel.

Do as follows on the ingress of the protection tunnel:

1. Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.

2. Run:
interface tunnel interface-number

The tunnel interface view of the protection tunnel is displayed.

3. Run:
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name lsp-name

The backward LSP of the protection tunnel is specified.

4. Run:
mpls te commit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 593

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

The current configuration of the protection tunnel is committed.

----End

5.3.5 Checking the Configuration

After the configurations, you can use the display commands to view information about the tunnel
protection group and tunnel bindings.

Prerequisite
The configurations of the MPLS OAM protection switching function are complete.

Procedure
l Run display mpls te protection tunnel { all | tunnel-id | interface tunnel interface-
number } [ verbose ] command to check information about a tunnel protection group.
l Run display mpls te protection binding protect-tunnel { tunnel-id | interface tunnel
interface-number } command to check the protection relationship of the tunnel.
----End

Example
After the configuration succeeds, run the preceding commands to view information about the
protection group.

5.4 Maintaining MPLS OAM

You can use display commands to monitor MPLS OAM and the tunnel protection group.

5.4.1 Monitoring the Running of MPLS OAM

You can use display commands to view the MPLS OAM operation status including the status
of OAM-enabled LSPs on the ingress and egress.

Context
In routine maintenance, you can run the following commands in any view to check the MPLS
OAM operation status.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls oam egress { all | lsp-name lsp-name | lsr-id ingress-lsr-id tunnel-
id tunnel-id } [ slot slot-id | verbose ] command to view information about the current
status and configuration of the OAM-enabled LSP on the egress.
l Run the display mpls oam ingress { all | tunnel interface-number } [ slot slot-id |
verbose ] command to view information about the MPLS OAM parameters and status of
the LSP on the ingress.
l Run the display mpls oam oam-index index-value [ slot slot-id ] command to view
information about parameters and status of MPLS OAM.
----End

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 594

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

5.4.2 Monitoring the Running of Protection Group

You can use display commands to view the operation of a tunnel protection group and
information about tunnels in the tunnel protection group.

Context
In routine maintenance, you can run the following commands in any view to check the operating
status of the protection group.

Procedure
l Run the display mpls te protection tunnel { all | tunnel-id | interface tunnel interface-
number } [ verbose ] command to view information about the tunnel protection group.
l Run the display mpls te protection binding protect-tunnel { tunnel-id | interface
tunnel interface-number } command to view information about tunnels in the tunnel
protection group.
----End

5.5 Configuration Examples

The following sections provide several examples for configuring MPLS OAM to detect LSPs
and configuring the association between MPLS OAM and a protection group for performing
protection switching.

Follow-up Procedure
NOTE

This document takes interface numbers and link types of the NE40E-X8 as an example. In applications,
the actual interface numbers and link types may be different from those used in this document.

5.5.1 Example for Configuring MPLS OAM to Detect a Static LSP

The section provides an example for creating a static LSP and configuring MPLS OAM to detect
connectivity of the static LSP.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-4, on an MPLS network, a static LSP along LSR A -> LSR B -> LSR C
is set up.
MPLS OAM is configured to detect the static LSP so that when a connectivity fault occurs, the
egress LSR C can notify the ingress LSR A of the fault.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 595

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Figure 5-4 Networking diagram of MPLS OAM detection

Loopback1
4.4.4.4/32
T
P Tu unn
/0 10 OS nn el
1/0 /24 el- 1/0
S .2 .1 2/0 id /0
.4
PO .1.1 LSRD .1 /0 10
0 /2 0
/0 1 4 PO
1/0 /24 10 S
S .1 .1 1/0
.4
Loopback1 PO .1.1 Loopback1 .2 /0 Loopback1
/2
1.1.1.1/32 10 2.2.2.2/32 4 3.3.3.3/32
POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0
10.1.2.2/24 10.1.3.1/24
POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0
LSRA 10.1.2.1/24 LSRB 10.1.3.2/24 LSRC
Tunnel 2/0/0
Tunnel-id 200

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Create a static LSP TE tunnel between LSR A and LSR C.
2. Set up a static CR-LSP along LSR C → LSR D → LSR A.
3. Configure OAM parameters on LSR A and enable OAM.
4. Configure OAM parameters on LSR C and use the OAM auto-protocol.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP addresses for interfaces on each LSR, the tunnel interface name, and the tunnel ID
l Types of the detection packets to be sent
l Mode of the backward tunnel (share or private)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses and the routing protocols for interfaces.
According to Figure 5-4, configure IP addresses and masks for interfaces including the loopback
interfaces.
Configure OSPF on all LSRs to advertise routes of their loopback interfaces. The detailed
procedures are not mentioned here.
After the configuration, LSRs can ping each other. Run the display ip routing-table command
on each LSR to display routes to each LSR-ID.
Take the display on LSR A as an example.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 596

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

<LSRA> display ip routing-table

Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables: Public
Destinations : 14 Routes : 15
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface
1.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.2/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.2.2 Pos2/0/0
3.3.3.3/32 OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
OSPF 10 3 D 10.1.2.2 Pos2/0/0
4.4.4.4/32 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.1 Pos1/0/0
10.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
10.1.2.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.1 Pos2/0/0
10.1.2.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
10.1.2.2/32 Direct 0 0 D 10.1.2.2 Pos2/0/0
10.1.3.0/24 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.2.2 Pos2/0/0
10.1.4.0/24 OSPF 10 2 D 10.1.1.2 Pos1/0/0
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Step 2 Set up a static LSP to be detected.

# Configure basic MPLS and MPLS TE functions on LSR A.

<LSRA> system-view
[LSRA] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls te
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 1/0/0
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos1/0/0] quit
[LSRA] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] mpls te
[LSRA-Pos2/0/0] quit

Other LSRs have the same configuration as LSR A.

# Create an MPLS TE tunnel that is based on the static LSP from LSR A to LSR C.
[LSRA] interface tunnel 2/0/0
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] destination 3.3.3.3
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 200
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol static
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRA-Tunnel2/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR A to be the ingress of the static LSP and enable the TE tunnel.
[LSRA] static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 2/0/0 destination 3.3.3.3 nexthop
10.1.2.2 out-label 20

# Configure LSR B to be the transit node of the static LSP.

<LSRB> system-view
[LSRB] static-lsp transit oamlsp incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 20 nexthop
10.1.3.2 out-label 30

# Configure LSR C to be the egress of the static LSP and specify lsr-id and tunnel-id.
<LSRC> system-view
[LSRC] static-lsp egress oamlsp incoming-interface pos 2/0/0 in-label 30 lsrid
1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 200

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 597

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

After the configuration, run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command on LSR A, and you
can view that the TE tunnel is Up.
[LSRA] display mpls te tunnel-interface
================================================================
Tunnel2/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 200
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1 Egress LSR ID: 3.3.3.3
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 1

Run the display mpls static-lsp command on LSR A, and you can view that the static LSP
corresponding to Tunnel 2/0/0 is Up.
[LSRA] display mpls static-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC LSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC LSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel2/0/0 3.3.3.3/32 NULL/20 -/Pos2/0/0 Up

Step 3 Set up a backward tunnel.

# Create an MPLS TE tunnel that is based on the static CR-LSP from LSR C to LSR A.
[LSRC] interface Tunnel 1/0/0
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] destination 1.1.1.1
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 100
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit
[LSRC-Tunnel1/0/0] quit

# Configure LSR C to be the ingress of the static CR-LSP.

[LSRC] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel1/0/0 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.4.1 out-label 70

# Configure LSR D to be the transit node of the CR-LSP.

<LSRD> system-view
[LSRD] static-cr-lsp transit tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface pos 2/0/0 in-label 70
nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 80

# Configure LSR A to be the egress of the static CR-LSP and specify lsr-id and tunnel-id.
[LSRA] static-cr-lsp egress Tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface pos 1/0/0 in-label 80
lsrid 3.3.3.3 tunnel-id 100

After the configuration, run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command on LSR C, and you
can view that the backward tunnel is Up.
[LSRC] display mpls te tunnel-interface
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/0
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 100
Ingress LSR ID : 3.3.3.3 Egress LSR ID: 1.1.1.1
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 598

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Run the display mpls static-cr-lsp command on LSR C, and you can view that the static CR-
LSR is Up.
[LSRC] display mpls static-cr-lsp
TOTAL : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
UP : 1 STATIC CRLSP(S)
DOWN : 0 STATIC CRLSP(S)
Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat
Tunnel1/0/0 1.1.1.1/32 NULL/70 -/Pos1/0/0 Up

Step 4 Configure MPLS OAM.

# Configure MPLS OAM for the ingress on LSR A. By default, sending CV packets is enabled.
Parameters for the backward tunnel depend on the configuration of the egress.
[LSRA] mpls
[LSRA-mpls] mpls oam
[LSRA-mpls] quit
[LSRA] mpls oam ingress Tunnel 2/0/0
[LSRA] mpls oam ingress enable all

# Configure MPLS OAM on LSR C.

[LSRC] mpls
[LSRC-mpls] mpls oam
[LSRC-mpls] quit

# Configure the OAM auto-protocol on LSR C to detect the LSP named oamlsp. The backward
tunnel is the LSP bound to tunnel 1/0/0. It is in the private mode.
[LSRC] mpls oam egress lsp-name oamlsp auto-protocol backward-lsp tunnel 1/0/0
private

After the OAM auto-protocol is configured on the egress, OAM is enabled automatically when
the egress receives the first correct detention packet.
After the configuration, check the MPLS OAM parameters and status of LSPs on LSR A and
LSR C. You can view that both ingress and egress are active in normal detection status.
[LSRA] display mpls oam ingress all verbose
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the 1th oam at the ingress
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lsp basic information: oam basic information:
----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Tunnel-name : Tunnel2/0/0 Oam-Index : 256
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 1
Lsp establish type : Static lsp Enable-state : Manual enable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp tnl-id/Lsp-id : 200/1 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 200
oam detect information: oam backward information:
----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Type : CV Share attribute : Private
Frequency : 1 s Lsp-name : Tunnel1/0/0
Detect-state : Start Lsp ingress lsr-id : 3.3.3.3
Defect-state : Non-defect Lsp tnl-id/lsp id : 100/1
Available-state : available Lsp-inLabel : 80
Unavailable time (s): 0 Lsp signal status : Up
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Oam Num: 1
Total Start Oam Num: 1
Total Defect Oam Num: 0
Total Unavaliable Oam Num: 0
[LSRC] display mpls oam egress all verbose
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the 1th oam at the egress
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lsp basic information: oam basic information:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 599

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Lsp name : oamlsp Oam-Index : 256
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 1
Lsp establish type : Static lsp Enable-state : --
Lsp incoming Label : 30 Auto-protocol : Enable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Auto-overtime (s) : 300
Lsp tnl-id/lsp-id : 200/1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp Incoming-int Pos 2/0/0 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 200
oam detect information: oam backward information:
----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Type : CV Tunnel name : Tunnel1/0/0
Frequency : 1 s Share attribute : Private
Detect-state : Start Lsp signal status : Up
Defect-state : Non-defect Bdi-frequency : Detect-freq
Available state : Available
Unavailable time (s): 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Oam Num: 1
Total Start Oam Num: 1
Total Defect Oam Num: 0
Total Unavaliable Oam Num: 0

Step 5 Verify the configuration.

# Run the shutdown command on POS 2/0/0 of LSR B to simulate a link fault.
[LSRB] interface pos 2/0/0
[LSRB-Pos2/0/0] shutdown

# Run the display mpls oam egress all verbose command on LSR C, and you can view that
LSR C has detected the link fault and changed its status to In-defect.
<LSRC> display mpls oam egress all verbose
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the 1th oam at the egress
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lsp basic information: oam basic information:
---------------------------------- ------------------------------------
Lsp name : oamlsp Oam-Index : 256
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 1
Lsp establish type : Static lsp Enable-state : --
Lsp incoming Label : 30 Auto-protocol : Enable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Auto-overtime (s) : 300
Lsp tnl-id/lsp-id : 200/1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp Incoming-int Pos 2/0/0 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 200
oam detect information: oam backward information:
---------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Type : CV Tunnel name : Tunnel1/0/0
Frequency : 1 s Share attribute : Private
Detect-state : Start Lsp signal status : Up
Defect-type : dLocv Bdi-frequency : Detect-freq
Available state : Unavailable
Unavailable time (s): 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Oam Num: 1
Total Start Oam Num: 1
Total Defect Oam Num: 1
Total Unavaliable Oam Num: 1

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSR A
#
sysname LSRA
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 600

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

mpls
mpls te
mpls oam
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel2/0/0
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 3.3.3.3
mpls te signal-protocol static
mpls te tunnel-id 200
mpls te commit
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
#
static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel2/0/0 destination 3.3.3.3 nexthop
10.1.2.2 out-label 20
static-cr-lsp egress tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface Pos1/0/0 in-label 80
lsrid 3.3.3.3 tunnel-id 1
#
mpls oam ingress Tunnel2/0/0
mpls oam ingress enable Tunnel2/0/0
#
return
l Configuration file of LSR B
#
sysname LSRB
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Pos1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface Pos2/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 601

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 602

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0

mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 1
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
#
static-cr-lsp transit tunnel1/0/0 incoming-interface Pos2/0/0 in-label 70
nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 80 bandwidth bc0 0
#
return

5.5.2 Example for Configuring MPLS OAM Protection Switching

This section provides an example for creating a working tunnel and a protection tunnel, and
configuring MPLS OAM protection switching.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-5, on an MPLS network, there are three bidirectional static CR-LSPs
between PE1 and PE2. These bidirectional static CR-LSPs are bound to tunnel 1/0/10, tunnel
1/0/11, and tunnel 1/0/12 respectively. Tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11 serve as working tunnels.
Tunnel 1/0/12 serves as a protection tunnel.
MPLS OAM protection switching is enabled on the MPLS network. Tunnel 1/0/12 protects
tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11 simultaneously. When either of the working tunnels (tunnel
1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11) fails, traffic on the failed working tunnel switches to the protection
tunnel (tunnel 1/0/12).

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 603

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Figure 5-5 Networking diagram of configuring an MPLS OAM protection group

Loopback1 Loopback1
2.2.2.2 GE2/0/0 GE1/0/0 5.5.5.5
10.1.5.2/30 10.1.5.1/30
P2 /0 PE2
E 2/0
1 G
GE1/0/0 ack GE4/0/0
10.1.1.2/30 o
b
op 3.3 0 3 / 0/0 /30 10.1.6.1/30
L .3. /
3 4/ 0 / 30 GE 1.8.1
GE 1.7.2 10
.
.
10 0 / 0
3 /0 30
/ 0 . 7 .1/ GE1 .8.2/
2/ 0 30 .1 .1
GE .2.2/ 10 10
.1
0 10 /0 P1
/
E
0
2/ /30 E 3/0 .2/30
G 2.1 G 1.3
GE1/0/0 .1. . GE2/0/0
1 0 0 /0 10
10.1.1.1/30 3 / /3 0 10.1.6.2/30
GE 1.3.1
.
10
PE1 GE4/0/0 GE1/0/0 P3
Loopback1 10.1.4.1/30 10.1.4.2/30 Loopback1
1.1.1.1/32 4.4.4.4/32
Working tunnel-1
Reverse working tunnel-1
Working tunnel-2
Reverse working tunnel-2
Protection tunnel
Reverse protection tunnel

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:

1. Configure IP addresses and OSPF on interfaces

2. Enable MPLS, MPLS TE, and MPLS OAM.
3. Create three TE tunnel interfaces (tunnel 1/0/10, tunnel 1/0/11 and tunnel 1/0/12) on PE1
and PE2. Two of them serve as working tunnels and the third one serves as a protection
tunnel.
4. Configure two static CR-LSPs from PE1 to PE2, and bind one of them with tunnel 1/0/10
and bind the other one with tunnel 1/0/12.
5. Configure an RSVP-TE tunnel from PE1 to PE2.
6. Configure three static CR-LSPs from PE2 to PE1, and bind them with tunnel 1/0/10, tunnel
1/0/11 and tunnel 1/0/12 respectively on PE2.
7. Set OAM parameters and enable MPLS OAM to detect bidirectional LSPs.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 604

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

l IP addresses of interfaces, tunnel interface names, and tunnel IDs

l Types of packets to be detected by MPLS OAM
l Parameters for a protection group, including the delay of the protection switching, revertive
mode, and WTR time

Procedure
Step 1 Configure IP addresses and routing protocols on interfaces.
As shown in Figure 5-5, configure IP addresses and masks for interfaces, including loopback
interfaces.
Configure the OSPF protocol on all LSRs to advertise host routes of their loopback interfaces.
The detailed configuration is not mentioned here.
After the configuration, LSRs can ping the LSR ID of each other.
Step 2 Enable MPLS and MPLS TE globally and on the physical interfaces.
The detailed configuration is not mentioned here.
Step 3 Configure TE tunnel interfaces.
# On PE1 and PE2, configure tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11 as working tunnels and tunnel
1/0/12 as a protection tunnel. Tunnel 1/0/12 protects tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11
simultaneously. The signaling protocol of tunnel 1/0/11 is RSVP-TE and the signaling protocol
of tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/12 is CR-Static.
# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/10
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] description Working tunnel-1 to PE2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] destination 5.5.5.5
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te tunnel-id 1010
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/11
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] description Working tunnel-2 to PE2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] destination 5.5.5.5
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te tunnel-id 1011
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/12
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] description Protection tunnel to PE2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] destination 5.5.5.5
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te tunnel-id 1012
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] quit

# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/10
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] description Working tunnel-1 to PE1

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 605

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1

[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te tunnel-id 1010
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] quit
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/11
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] description Working tunnel-2 to PE1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te tunnel-id 1011
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] quit
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/12
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] description Protection tunnel to PE1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] ip address unnumbered interface loopback 1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] tunnel-protocol mpls te
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] destination 1.1.1.1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te tunnel-id 1012
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] quit

Step 4 Configure three static CR-LSPs from PE1 to PE2, and bind them to the tunnel interfaces on PE1.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/10 destination 5.5.5.5
nexthop 10.1.2.2 out-label 10
[PE1] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/12 destination 5.5.5.5
nexthop 10.1.4.2 out-label 30

# Configure P1.
<P1> system-view
[P1] static-cr-lsp transit PE1toPE2-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 10 nexthop 10.1.7.1 out-label 11

# Configure P3.
<P3> system-view
[P3] static-cr-lsp transit PE1toPE2-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 30 nexthop 10.1.6.1 out-label 31

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] static-cr-lsp egress PE1toPE2-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 11 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1010
[PE2] static-cr-lsp egress PE1toPE2-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet4/0/0 in-
label 31 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1012

After the configuration, run the display mpls te tunnel command on PE1 and PE2, and you can
view the created TE tunnel.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel
LSP-Id Destination In/Out-If
1.1.1.1:1012:1 5.5.5.5 -/GE4/0/0
1.1.1.1:1010:1 5.5.5.5 -/GE2/0/0

Step 5 Configure an RSVP-TE tunnel.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 606

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

[PE1-mpls] mpls te cspf

[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet3/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit
[PE1] ospf 1
[PE1-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[PE1-ospf-1] area 0
[PE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[PE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[PE1-ospf-1] quit

# Configure P1.
[P1] mpls
[P1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[P1-mpls] mpls te cspf
[P1-mpls] quit
[P1] interface gigabitethernet3/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit
[P1] interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
[P1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[P1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[P1] ospf 1
[P1-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[P1-ospf-1] area 0
[P1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[P1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[P1-ospf-1] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls rsvp-te
[PE2-mpls] mpls te cspf
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet3/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls rsvp-te
[PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit
[PE2] ospf 1
[PE2-ospf-1] opaque-capability enable
[PE2-ospf-1] area 0
[PE2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] mpls-te enable
[PE2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit
[PE2-ospf-1] quit

Run the display mpls te tunnel-interface command to view information oabout tunnel 1/0/11.
[PE1] display mpls te tunnel-interface tunnel1/0/11
================================================================
Tunnel1/0/11
================================================================
Tunnel State Desc : UP
Active LSP : Primary LSP
Session ID : 1011
Ingress LSR ID : 1.1.1.1 Egress LSR ID: 5.5.5.5
Admin State : UP Oper State : UP
Primary LSP State : UP
Main LSP State : READY LSP ID : 1

Step 6 Configure three static CR-LSPs from PE2 to PE1, and bind them to the tunnel interfaces on PE2.

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/10 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.7.2 out-label 11
[PE2] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/11 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.8.2 out-label 21

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 607

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

[PE2] static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/12 destination 1.1.1.1

nexthop 10.1.5.2 out-label 31

# Configure P1.
[P1] static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet4/0/0 in-
label 11 nexthop 10.1.2.1 out-label 10
[P1] static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 21 nexthop 10.1.3.1 out-label 20

# Configure P2.
<P2> system-view
[P2] static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 31 nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 30

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 10 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1010
[PE1] static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet3/0/0 in-
label 20 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1011
[PE1] static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 30 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1012

Step 7 Bind the backward LSPs to the tunnel interfaces.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/10
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-1
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/11
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-2
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/12
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-3
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/12] quit

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/10
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE1toPE2-1
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/10] quit
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/11
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE1toPE2-2
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/11] quit
[PE2] interface tunnel1/0/12
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE1toPE2-3
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] mpls te commit
[PE2-Tunnel1/0/12] quit

Step 8 Enable MPLS OAM to detect the static CR-LSPs.

# Configure PE1.
[PE1] mpls
[PE1-mpls] mpls oam
[PE1-mpls] quit
[PE1] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/10
[PE1] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/11
[PE1] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/12
[PE1] mpls oam ingress enable all
[PE1] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-1
[PE1] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-2

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 608

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

[PE1] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-3

[PE1] mpls oam egress enable all

# Configure PE2.
[PE2] mpls
[PE2-mpls] mpls oam
[PE2-mpls] quit
[PE2] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/10
[PE2] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/11
[PE2] mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/12
[PE2] mpls oam ingress enable all
[PE2] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE1toPE2-1
[PE2] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE1toPE2-2
[PE2] mpls oam egress lsp-name PE1toPE2-3
[PE2] mpls oam egress enable all

After the configuration, run the display mpls oam ingress all verbose command to view the
MPLS OAM parameters and status of LSPs on PE1 and PE2. You can view that the LSP to be
detected is in the "Non-Defect" state.

Take the display on PE1 as an example.

[PE1] display mpls oam ingress all verbose
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Verbose information about NO.1 oam at the ingress

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

lsp basic information: oam basic information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Tunnel-name : Tunnel1/0/10 Oam-Index : 512
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 2
Lsp establish type : Static lsp Enable-state : Manual disable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp tnl-id/Lsp-id : 1010/1 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 1010

oam detect information: oam backward information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Type : CV Share attribute : Share
Frequency : 1 s Lsp-name : --
Detect-state : Start Lsp ingress lsr-id : --
Defect-state : Non-defect Lsp tnl-id/lsp id : --/--
Available-state : Available Lsp-inLabel : --
Unavailable time (s): 0 Lsp signal status : --

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Verbose information about NO.2 oam at the ingress

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

lsp basic information: oam basic information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Tunnel-name : Tunnel1/0/11 Oam-Index : 513
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 3
Lsp establish type : RSVP-TE Enable-state : Manual disable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp tnl-id/Lsp-id : 1011/1 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 1011

oam detect information: oam backward information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Type : CV Share attribute : Share
Frequency : 1 s Lsp-name : --
Detect-state : Start Lsp ingress lsr-id : --
Defect-type : Non-defect Lsp tnl-id/lsp id : --/--
Available-state : Available Lsp-inLabel : --
Unavailable time (s): 0 Lsp signal status : --

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 609

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Verbose information about NO.3 oam at the ingress

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

lsp basic information: oam basic information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Tunnel-name : Tunnel1/0/12 Oam-Index : 514
Lsp signal status : Up Oam select board : 4
Lsp establish type : Static lsp Enable-state : Manual disable
Lsp ingress lsr-id : 1.1.1.1 Ttsi/lsr-id : 1.1.1.1
Lsp tnl-id/Lsp-id : 1012/1 Ttsi/tunnel-id : 1012

oam detect information: oam backward information:

--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
Type : CV Share attribute : Share
Frequency : 1 s Lsp-name : --
Detect-state : Start Lsp ingress lsr-id : --
Defect-type : Non-defect Lsp tnl-id/lsp id : --/--
Available-state : Available Lsp-inLabel : --
Unavailable time (s): 0 Lsp signal status : --

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Oam Num: 3

Total Start Oam Num: 3
Total Defect Oam Num: 0
Total Unavailable Oam Num: 0

Step 9 Configure a tunnel protection group.

# On PE1, configure tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11 as working tunnels and tunnel 1/0/12 as a
protection tunnel. Use therevertive mode and set the WTR time to 2 minutes.
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/10
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/10] quit
[PE1] interface tunnel 1/0/11
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] mpls te commit
[PE1-Tunnel1/0/11] quit

# After the configuration, run the display mpls te protection tunnel all command on PEs, and
you can view that interfaces of all tunnels are in the Non-defect state and traffic is forwarded
through the working tunnel.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te protection tunnel all
------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. Work-tunnel status /id Protect-tunnel status /id Switch-Result
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 non-defect /1010 non-defect /1012 work-tunnel
2 non-defect /1011 non-defect /1012 work-tunnel

# Run the display mpls te protection binding protect-tunnel command on PEs, and you can
view that tunnel 1/0/12 protects tunnel 1/0/10 and tunnel 1/0/11 simultaneously.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te protection binding protect-tunnel 1012
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Binding information of( tunnel id: 1012 )
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Protect-tunnel id :1012

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 610

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

Protect-tunnel name :Tunnel1/0/12

Maximum number of bound work-tunnels :8
Currently bound work-tunnels :Total( 2 )
:Tunnel1/0/10
:Tunnel1/0/11

Step 10 Verify the configuration.

Run the display mpls te protection tunnel interface tunnel interface-number verbose
command on PEs, and you can view details about the specified tunnel protection group. Take
the display of the tunnel 1/0/10 of PE1 as an example.
[PE1] display mpls te protection tunnel interface tunnel 1010 verbose
----------------------------------------------------------------
Verbose information about the 1th proteciton-group
----------------------------------------------------------------
Work-tunnel id : 1010
Protect-tunnel id : 1012
Work-tunnel name : Tunnel1/0/10
Protect-tunnel name : Tunnel1/0/12
Work-tunnel reverse-lsp name : PE2toPE1-1
Protect-tunnel reverse-lsp name : PE2toPE1-3
switch result : work-tunnel
Tunnel using Best-Effort : none
Tunnel using Ordinary : none
work-tunnel defect state : non-defect
protect-tunnel defect state : non-defect
work-tunnel reverse-lsp defect state : non-defect
protect-tunnel reverse-lsp defect state : non-defect
HoldOff : 0ms
WTR : 120s
Mode : revertive
Using same path : --

# Run the mpls te protect-switch manual work-lsp command on tunnel 1/0/10 of PE1 to
perform traffic switching.
[PE1] interface tunnel1/0/10
[PE1] mpls te protect-switch manual work-lsp

# Run the display mpls te protection tunnel allcommand on PE1, and you can view that the
Switch-Result of tunnel 1/0/10 is protect-tunnel.
[PE1] display mpls te protection tunnel all
------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. Work-tunnel status /id Protect-tunnel status /id Switch-Result
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 non-defect /1010 non-defect /1012 protect-tunnel
2 non-defect /1011 non-defect /1012 work-tunnel

# Run the shutdown command on the GE 4/0/0 on PE1 to simulate the physical link failure on
the protection tunnel.
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet4/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] shutdown
[PE1-GigabitEthernet4/0/0] quit

# Run the display mpls te protection tunnel all command on PE1, and you can view that the
Protect-tunnel status of tunnel 1/0/10 is in-defect, and the Switch-Result is work-tunnel.
[PE1] display mpls te protection tunnel all
------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. Work-tunnel status /id Protect-tunnel status /id Switch-Result
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 non-defect /1010 in-defect /1012 work-tunnel
2 non-defect /1011 non-defect /1012 work-tunnel

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 611

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

NOTE
When all tunnels work properly, and the mpls te protect-switch manual work-lsp command is configured
on the tunnel interface view of the working tunnel, traffic switches to the protection tunnel. In this case, if
the link of the protection tunnel fails, traffic switches back to the working tunnel and the mpls te protect-
switch manual work-lsp command on the tunnel interface view of the working tunnel is deleted. That is
because the link failure belongs to signaling failure and the priority of signaling failure is higher than that
of manual switching.

----End

Configuration Files
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
mpls oam
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls te rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/10
description Working tunnel-1 to PE2
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 1010
mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-1
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel1/0/11
description Working tunnel-2 to PE2
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te tunnel-id 1011
mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-2
mpls te commit

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 612

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

#
interface Tunnel1/0/12
description Protection tunnel to PE2
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 5.5.5.5
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 1012
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE2toPE1-3
mpls te commit
#
ospf 100
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/10 destination 5.5.5.5
nexthop 10.1.2.2 out-label 10
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/12 destination 5.5.5.5
nexthop 10.1.4.2 out-label 30
static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 10 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1010
static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet3/0/0 in-
label 20 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1011
static-cr-lsp egress PE2toPE1-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 30 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1012
#
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/10
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/11
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/12
mpls oam ingress enable all
mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-1
mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-2
mpls oam egress lsp-name PE2toPE1-3
mpls oam egress enable all
#
return
l Configuration file of P2
#
sysname P2
#
mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
#

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 613

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-

label 31 nexthop 10.1.1.1 out-label 30
#
return
l Configuration file of P1
#
sysname P1
#
mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.8.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
ip address 10.1.7.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.7.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.8.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp transit PE1toPE2-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 10 nexthop 10.1.7.1 out-label 11
static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet4/0/0 in-
label 11 nexthop 10.1.2.1 out-label 10
static-cr-lsp transit PE2toPE1-1 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 21 nexthop 10.1.3.1 out-label 20
#
return
l Configuration file of P3
#
sysname P3
#
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.4.2 255.255.255.0
mpls

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 614

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.2 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255
#
ospf 100
area 0.0.0.0
network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.4.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255
#
static-cr-lsp transit PE1toPE2-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 in-
label 30 nexthop 10.1.6.1 out-label 31
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
mpls te cspf
mpls oam
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
ip address 10.1.7.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0
ip address 10.1.8.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
mpls rsvp-te
#
interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0
ip address 10.1.6.1 255.255.255.0
mpls
mpls te
#
interface LoopBack1
ip address 5.5.5.5 255.255.255.255
#
interface Tunnel1/0/10
description Working tunnel-1 to PE1
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 1010
mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel1/0/11
description Working tunnel-2 to PE1
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 615

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS 5 MPLS OAM Configuration

destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 1011
mpls te protection tunnel 1/0/12 mode revertive wtr 4
mpls te commit
#
interface Tunnel1/0/12
description Protection tunnel to PE1
ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1
tunnel-protocol mpls te
destination 1.1.1.1
mpls te signal-protocol cr-static
mpls te tunnel-id 1012
mpls te reverse-lsp lsp-name PE1toPE2-3
mpls te commit
#
ospf 100
opaque-capability enable
area 0.0.0.0
network 5.5.5.5 0.0.0.0
network 10.1.5.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.6.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.7.0 0.0.0.255
network 10.1.8.0 0.0.0.255
mpls-te enable
#
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/10 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.7.2 out-label 11
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/11 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.8.2 out-label 21
static-cr-lsp ingress tunnel-interface Tunnel1/0/12 destination 1.1.1.1
nexthop 10.1.5.2 out-label 31
static-cr-lsp egress PE1toPE2-2 incoming-interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 in-
label 11 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1010
static-cr-lsp egress PE1toPE2-3 incoming-interface gigabitethernet4/0/0 in-
label 31 lsrid 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1012
#
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/10
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/11
mpls oam ingress Tunnel1/0/12
mpls oam ingress enable all
mpls oam egress lsr-id 1.1.1.1 tunnel-id 1011
mpls oam egress lsp-name PE1toPE2-2
mpls oam egress lsp-name PE1toPE2-3
mpls oam egress enable all
#
return

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 616

A Glossary

This appendix collates frequently used glossaries in this document.

Glossary Description
A
Administrative group An administrative group is a 32-bit vector representing a set of
link attributes. In RFC 3209, administrative groups are called
link-attributes.

B
Bandwidth protection Bandwidth protection indicates that the bypass tunnel reserves
sufficient bandwidth to protect the traffic of the protected tunnel.
Best-effort path When both primary and backup CR-LSPs fail, a temporary CR-
LSP, also called a best-effort path, is set up to protect the traffic.
Bidirectional Forwarding Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is a fast fault detection
Detection mechanism at the millisecond level. It can be used in the case that
there is no hardware detection mechanism, to shorten the fault
period.
Bypass tunnel An Label Switched Path that protects the protected LSP.

C
Constraint-based Routed An Label Switched Path set up based on certain constraints is
Label Switched Path called Constraint-based Routed Label Switched Path (CR-LSP).

D
Dynamic Bidirectional Local and remote discriminators are allocated automatically by
Forwarding Detection the system. Bidirectional Forwarding Detection sessions are set
up dynamically.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 617

Glossary Description
Dynamic Label Switched An Label Switched Path set up by signaling protocol
Path automatically.

E
Explicit path A Constraint-based Routed Label Switched Path that can be
established according to the specified path. This specified path is
called an explicit path, which is classified into the strict explicit
path and the loose explicit path.
Egress The end node of an Label Switched Path.

F
Facility backup Protects one or more Label Switched Paths through one bypass
tunnel.
Flooding threshold The ratio of the changed bandwidth to the reservable bandwidth
of the link where no flooding occurs. A flooding threshold is set
to avoid consuming excessive resources due to flooding that is
caused by the change in the link bandwidth.
FTN FTN indicates the mapping between an FEC and a set of NHLFEs.

G
Graceful Restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol
Label Switching (IP/MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate System (IS-IS),
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP), and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended
to ensure that the forwarding is not interrupted when the system
is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocols at the
control plane when the system performs the active/standby
switchover. This series of standards is called Graceful Restart.
Graceful Restart restarter A node enabled Graceful Restart. Graceful Restart Restarter has
dual main boards, and is capable of notifying the neighbor to
maintain the adjacency during active/standby switchover.
Graceful Restart helper The neighbor of the Graceful Restart Restarter. The Graceful
Restart Helper should be able to identify the Graceful Restart
signalling, maintain the adjacency with the Graceful Restart
Restarter during the active/standby switchover, and help the
Graceful Restart Restarter to restore the network topology.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 618

Glossary Description
Hot standby When the primary CR-LSP is established, a backup CR-LSP is
set up.

I
Incoming Label Map The mapping between an incoming label and a set of NHLFEs.
Ingress The beginning of an Label Switched Path. The ingress pushes a
label to the packet and encapsulates the packet as an MPLS packet
to forward.

L
Label A label is a short identifier of fixed length with only local
significance. It is used to uniquely identify an FEC to which a
packet belongs.
Label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A
label out of an MPLS label resource pool is allocated to the FEC.
LSRs record the relationship of the label and the FEC. Then, LSRs
sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label
and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label
distribution.
Label Edge Router An Label Edge Router is the LSR that resides in the edge of an
MPLS domain. When an LSR connects to one node that runs
MPLS, the LSR acts as the Label Edge Router.
Label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
Label Switched Path The path that an FEC passes through in the MPLS network is
called the Label Switched Path.
Label Switching Router A Label Switching Router (LSR) refers to routers that can swap
and forward MPLS labels. It is also called the MPLS node.
LDP identifier The value that is used to identify a specified LSR label space.
LDP peer Two LSRs that use LDP to exchange labels or FEC mappings.
LDP sessions exist between them.
Link color An administrative group property of the link that is used to select
a link. A link can support up to 32 colors. When specifying a CR-
LSP, you can add constraints to the color field to require that the
passed path is of some color.
Link protection Link protection indicates that there is a direct link between the
PLR and the MP.
Loose explicit path An explicit path in which the LSRs on the LSP are specified.
Other routers can exist between an LSR and the last hop.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 619

Glossary Description
LSP tunnel Label switched path tunnel. A configured connection between
two nodes that uses MPLS to carry the packets. For an LSP, if a
label is allocated to the packet, the traffic forwarding is
determined by the label. The traffic is transparent to the transit.
In this sense, an LSP is considered as an LSP tunnel.

M
Make-before-break A mechanism that changes the MPLS TE to update the CR-LSP.
That is, a new CR-LSP is established before the original one is
removed. It can ensure that the service flow on the CR-LSP is not
broken during updating.
Merge point The egress of the bypass tunnel.

N
NHLFE Next hop label forwarding entry (NHLFE) is used to guide the
MPLS packet forwarding. An NHLFE contains information about
the tunnel ID, outgoing interface, next hop, outgoing label, and
label operation.
Node protection Node protection indicates that there is an LSR between the PLR
and the MP and the protected LSP passes through this LSR.
N:1 protection mode In N:1 protection mode, a tunnel serves as a protection tunnel for
several primary tunnels. When one of the primary tunnels fails,
its traffic is switched to the shared protection tunnel.

O
Ordinary backup Still the ingress LSR is informed that the primary LSP failed, a
backup LSP starts to be established.

P
Point of Local Repair The ingress node of the bypass tunnel.
Pre-emption A processing mode in which a new CR-LSP occupies the
bandwidth of an existing path. When establishing a CR-LSP, if
you cannot find the path meeting the bandwidth requirement, you
can remove the other established path and occupy the bandwidth
resource assigned to that path.
Protected Label Switched An Label Switched Path that is protected.
Path
Protection Switching Flow switching or copy between the primary tunnel and the
backup tunnel in MPLS OAM.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 620

Glossary Description

R
Re-optimization Re-optimization refers to the dynamic optimization of CR-LSPs,
namely, the periodic calculation of CR-LSP routes. If the
recalculated route is better than the current route, a new CR-LSP
is created. Traffic switches from the original CR-LSP to the new
CR-LSP, and then the original CR-LSP is deleted.
Route pinning An attribute of the link. When the network topology changes, the
established CR-LSP does not vary with the change of routes. This
attribute is used to ensure that the traffic is not broken and improve
the security.
RSVP The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for
Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node
along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however,
RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network
control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
RSVP-TE To set up CR-LSPs, RSVP is extended. The extended RSVP is
called RSVP Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE).

S
Soft State RSVP sends its messages as IP datagrams with no reliability
enhancement. RSVP nodes periodically send RSVP Refresh
messages to synchronize statuses of RSVP neighboring nodes
(including PSB and RSB) and restore the lost RSVP messages.
This is called RSVP soft state mechanism.
Static Bidirectional Local and remote discriminators are configured manually and
Forwarding Detection Bidirectional Forwarding Detection sessions are set up through
the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection negotiation mechanism.
Static Label Switched An Label Switched Path whose labels are allocated manually.
Path
Strict explicit path An explicit path in which the last hop and the next hop are directly
connected. It can precisely specify the LSRs on the LSP.
Summary Refresh The summary refresh enables the refreshing of RSVP state
without the transmission of standard Path or Resv messages. The
benefits of the summary refresh are that it reduces the amount of
information that must be transmitted.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 621

Glossary Description
TE FRR TE Fast Reroute (FRR) is a local protection mechanism to protect
Traffic Engineering LSPs from link or node failure. In TE FRR,
bypass tunnels that detour the failed link or node are pre-
established to protect the primary LSP. When the LSP or the node
fails, traffic is transmitted through the bypass tunnel and the
Ingress node can simultaneously initiate the setup of the primary
LSP without interrupting data transmission.
Tie-breaking During the CSPF path computation, if there are several paths with
the same metric, CSPF selects one of them. This process is called
tie-breaking.
Traffic trunk A collection of traffic that belongs to the same service type and
uses the same LSP.
Tunnel interface An point-to-point virtual interface for encapsulating data over
tunnel.

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 622

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

This appendix collates frequently used acronyms and abbreviations in this document.
Acronyms and Abbreviations Description
A
AF Assured Forwarding
AS Autonomous System
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B
BC Bandwidth Constraint
BDI Backward Defect Indication
BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BGP Border Gateway Protocol

C
CE Customer Edge
CLNP Connectionless Network Protocol
CMD Core Management Device
CR Constraint-based Routing
CSPF Constraint Shortest Path First
CT Class Type
CV Connectivity Verification

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 623

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations Description

D
DoD Downstream-on-Demand
DU Downstream Unsolicited
E
EF Expedited Forwarding
ER Explicit Route
ERO Explicit Route Object

F
FDI Forward Defect Indication
FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class
FF Fixed-Filter
FFD Fast Failure Detection
FIB Forward Information Base
FR Frame Relay
FRR Fast ReRoute
FS Forced Switch
FTN FEC to NHLFE

G
GR Graceful Restart
GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation

H
HA High Availability
HoVPN Hierarchy of VPN

I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IGP Interior Gateway Protocol
ILM Incoming Label Map

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 624

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations Description

IPTN IP Telecommunication Network
IPX Internet Packet Exchange
IS-IS Intermediate System-Intermediate System

L
L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol
LAM Label Advertisement Mode
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LER Label Edge Router
LFIB Label Forward Information Base
LOM Local Overbooking Multipliers
LoP Lockout of Protection
LSA Link State Advertisement
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switching Router

M
MA Management Area
MAM Maximum Allocation Model
MD5 Message Digest 5
MP Merge Point
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS Manual Switch
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N
NHLFE Next Hop Label Forwarding Entry

O
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OSPF Open Shortest Path First

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 625

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations Description

P
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PE Provider Edge
PHP Penultimate Hop Popping
PLR Point of Local Repair
PSB Path State Block
Q
QoS Quality of Service

R
RDM Russian Dolls Model
RLSN Remote Link Status Notification
RM Resource Management
RRO Record Route Object
RSB Reservation State Block
RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol
RSVP-TE RSVP-Traffic Engineering

S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SE Shared-Explicit
SF Signal Fail
SLA Service Level Agreement
SPF Shortest Path First
SPE Superstratum PE: Service provider-end PE

T
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TE Traffic Engineering
TEDB Traffic Engineering Database

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 626

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
Configuration Guide - MPLS B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and Abbreviations Description

TLV Type-Length-Value
ToS Type of Service
TTL Time To Live
TTSI Trail Termination Source Identifier

U
UDP User Datagram Protocol

V
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
VLL Virtual Leased Line
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WTR Wait To Restore

Issue 02 (2011-09-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 627

NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - WAN Access 01 PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - WAN Access 01 PDF
356 pages
08 MPLS Configuration Guide Book
No ratings yet
08 MPLS Configuration Guide Book
410 pages
Manual Ne40 Huawei
No ratings yet
Manual Ne40 Huawei
474 pages
FPGA Implementation of FEC Encoder With BCH & LDPC Codes For DVB S2 System
No ratings yet
FPGA Implementation of FEC Encoder With BCH & LDPC Codes For DVB S2 System
4 pages
Configuration Guide - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)
642 pages
NE40E&NE80E V600R003C00 Configuration Guide - Basic Configurations 03 PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E&NE80E V600R003C00 Configuration Guide - Basic Configurations 03 PDF
360 pages
Configuration Guide - IP Services (V300R007C00 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - IP Services (V300R007C00 02)
332 pages
H3C SR8800 Series 10G Core Routers Operation Manual (Release3238 V3.04)
No ratings yet
H3C SR8800 Series 10G Core Routers Operation Manual (Release3238 V3.04)
2,160 pages
How Will 5G Transform Industrial Iot?: Mehmet Yavuz
No ratings yet
How Will 5G Transform Industrial Iot?: Mehmet Yavuz
27 pages
Configuration Guide - QoS (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - QoS (V600R003C00 - 02)
491 pages
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access 01 PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access 01 PDF
1,115 pages
Conf Web Router Serie h3c MSR
No ratings yet
Conf Web Router Serie h3c MSR
820 pages
NE40 Configuration Guide - Basic Configurations (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
NE40 Configuration Guide - Basic Configurations (V600R003C00 - 02)
341 pages
NE40E X1 NE40E X2 Product Description
No ratings yet
NE40E X1 NE40E X2 Product Description
177 pages
Configuration Guide - MPLS (V800R002C01 - 01) PDF
100% (1)
Configuration Guide - MPLS (V800R002C01 - 01) PDF
288 pages
Configuration Guide - Reliability (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - Reliability (V600R003C00 - 02)
761 pages
Commissioning Guide (V600R001C00 03)
No ratings yet
Commissioning Guide (V600R001C00 03)
129 pages
Configuration Guide - Interface and Data Link (V800R002C01 - 01)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - Interface and Data Link (V800R002C01 - 01)
176 pages
Configuration Guide - Interface Management (V300R007C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - Interface Management (V300R007C00 - 02)
117 pages
Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access (V600R003C00 - 02)
971 pages
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - VPN 01 PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - VPN 01 PDF
3,093 pages
NE40E V800R010C00 Feature Description-Network Reliability PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E V800R010C00 Feature Description-Network Reliability PDF
291 pages
AR100, AR120, AR150, AR160, AR200, AR1200, AR2200, AR3200, and AR3600 Web-Based Typical Configuration Examples PDF
No ratings yet
AR100, AR120, AR150, AR160, AR200, AR1200, AR2200, AR3200, and AR3600 Web-Based Typical Configuration Examples PDF
251 pages
3GPP TS 36.331: Technical Specification
No ratings yet
3GPP TS 36.331: Technical Specification
769 pages
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - MPLS 01 PDF
No ratings yet
NE40E&80E V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - MPLS 01 PDF
965 pages
Commission Guide (V600R003C00 - 02) PDF
No ratings yet
Commission Guide (V600R003C00 - 02) PDF
131 pages
SmartPTT Tutorial MotoTRBO Capacity Plus
100% (1)
SmartPTT Tutorial MotoTRBO Capacity Plus
16 pages
Troubleshooting HUAWEI VPN
100% (1)
Troubleshooting HUAWEI VPN
146 pages
HUAWEI Configuration Guide - WAN Access (V600R001C00 - 03)
100% (1)
HUAWEI Configuration Guide - WAN Access (V600R001C00 - 03)
253 pages
Troubleshooting - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Troubleshooting - MPLS (V600R003C00 - 02)
77 pages
Configuration Guide - IP Multicast (V800R002C01 - 01) PDF
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - IP Multicast (V800R002C01 - 01) PDF
345 pages
Configuration Guide - User Access (V600R003C00 - 02) PDF
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide - User Access (V600R003C00 - 02) PDF
186 pages
1.12 Questions (GSM) : Answers For Chapter 1 Answer - 1
No ratings yet
1.12 Questions (GSM) : Answers For Chapter 1 Answer - 1
11 pages
Troubleshooting - IP Multicast 03 PDF
No ratings yet
Troubleshooting - IP Multicast 03 PDF
72 pages
NE40E X1&NE40E X2 Product Description
100% (1)
NE40E X1&NE40E X2 Product Description
177 pages
Vyatta-VPN 6.5R1 v01
No ratings yet
Vyatta-VPN 6.5R1 v01
502 pages
MPLS Configuration Guide sr8800
No ratings yet
MPLS Configuration Guide sr8800
410 pages
NE40E-M2 V800R010C10SPC500 Feature Description - Network Reliability 01
No ratings yet
NE40E-M2 V800R010C10SPC500 Feature Description - Network Reliability 01
243 pages
NE40E Standard Reference (V800R008C10)
No ratings yet
NE40E Standard Reference (V800R008C10)
34 pages
Emergency Hardware Maintenance (V600R001C00 03)
No ratings yet
Emergency Hardware Maintenance (V600R001C00 03)
87 pages
Troubleshooting - MPLS
No ratings yet
Troubleshooting - MPLS
81 pages
NE40E-M2 - V800R021C10 - Commissioning Guide
No ratings yet
NE40E-M2 - V800R021C10 - Commissioning Guide
40 pages
Troubleshooting - Physical Connection and Interfaces (V600R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
Troubleshooting - Physical Connection and Interfaces (V600R003C00 - 02)
44 pages
99-Book 1102699 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 1102699 1285 0
282 pages
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 11 Segment Routing
No ratings yet
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 11 Segment Routing
1,868 pages
NE9000 V800R022C00 Configuration Guide 01 Basic Configuration
No ratings yet
NE9000 V800R022C00 Configuration Guide 01 Basic Configuration
408 pages
Dragon Blood
No ratings yet
Dragon Blood
16 pages
99-Book 761956 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761956 1285 0
149 pages
99-Book 761972 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761972 1285 0
210 pages
Specification of AS32 TTL 100
No ratings yet
Specification of AS32 TTL 100
23 pages
User Guide: Faster, Whole-Home Wi-Fi
No ratings yet
User Guide: Faster, Whole-Home Wi-Fi
52 pages
99-Book 761862 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761862 1285 0
78 pages
NetEngine 8000 M14, M8 and M4 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 07 IP Services
No ratings yet
NetEngine 8000 M14, M8 and M4 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 07 IP Services
751 pages
99-Book 761843 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761843 1285 0
66 pages
2012 Smart LazaroiuRoscia Definitionmethodologyforthesmartcitiesmodel Energy
No ratings yet
2012 Smart LazaroiuRoscia Definitionmethodologyforthesmartcitiesmodel Energy
9 pages
Mobile Ad Hoc Networks - MANET: Characteristics
No ratings yet
Mobile Ad Hoc Networks - MANET: Characteristics
25 pages
Smart Cities in The New Service Economy: Building Platforms For Smart Services
No ratings yet
Smart Cities in The New Service Economy: Building Platforms For Smart Services
13 pages
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 07 IP Services
No ratings yet
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 07 IP Services
483 pages
LTE Guidelines in ICS Designer v1.3
100% (1)
LTE Guidelines in ICS Designer v1.3
80 pages
99-Book 761835 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761835 1285 0
146 pages
4-VLAN Mapping Configuration
No ratings yet
4-VLAN Mapping Configuration
37 pages
Subnet Old
No ratings yet
Subnet Old
27 pages
5-STP Principle and Configuration ISSUE1.00
No ratings yet
5-STP Principle and Configuration ISSUE1.00
32 pages
99-Book 761977 1285 0
No ratings yet
99-Book 761977 1285 0
33 pages
Open-Ended Lab File Communication System Lab: Amity School of Engineering & Technology
No ratings yet
Open-Ended Lab File Communication System Lab: Amity School of Engineering & Technology
8 pages
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 10 MPLS
No ratings yet
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 10 MPLS
820 pages
Networks-Lab 6632853 Powerpoint
No ratings yet
Networks-Lab 6632853 Powerpoint
22 pages
GSM Notice Board Synopsis
No ratings yet
GSM Notice Board Synopsis
8 pages
01-01 About This Document
No ratings yet
01-01 About This Document
4 pages
1-VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration ISSUE1.00
No ratings yet
1-VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration ISSUE1.00
19 pages
MTS2 - An4 05 014R2
No ratings yet
MTS2 - An4 05 014R2
4 pages
Balamuralidhar P - IoT 5G
No ratings yet
Balamuralidhar P - IoT 5G
15 pages
100UGRD CS6206 Principles of Operating Systems and Its Applications
100% (1)
100UGRD CS6206 Principles of Operating Systems and Its Applications
12 pages
11-Igmp Principle Issue1.01
100% (1)
11-Igmp Principle Issue1.01
32 pages
BL0977 - SIAE Plan - 28jun2018
No ratings yet
BL0977 - SIAE Plan - 28jun2018
21 pages
Lithium Battery Modbus Communications Protocol
100% (2)
Lithium Battery Modbus Communications Protocol
24 pages
Articulo Biorefinerias
No ratings yet
Articulo Biorefinerias
10 pages
(QPSK) : Grengin Besande
No ratings yet
(QPSK) : Grengin Besande
15 pages
Ece Lab
No ratings yet
Ece Lab
11 pages
00-2 About This Document PDF
No ratings yet
00-2 About This Document PDF
4 pages
Switch Getting Started Guide
No ratings yet
Switch Getting Started Guide
77 pages
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 12 Application Awareness
No ratings yet
NE9000 V800R023C00SPC500 Configuration Guide 12 Application Awareness
54 pages
Load Balancing
No ratings yet
Load Balancing
2 pages
01-01 About This Document
No ratings yet
01-01 About This Document
4 pages
PTN 3900 1900 912 - Product Description Optix
100% (1)
PTN 3900 1900 912 - Product Description Optix
32 pages
Ipb-Frame Adaptive Mapping Mechanism For Video Transmission Over Ieee 802.11E Wlans
No ratings yet
Ipb-Frame Adaptive Mapping Mechanism For Video Transmission Over Ieee 802.11E Wlans
7 pages
Enterasys Matrix n7 Chassis 7c107 Manual Do Utilizador
0% (1)
Enterasys Matrix n7 Chassis 7c107 Manual Do Utilizador
6 pages
Arikawa 2017
No ratings yet
Arikawa 2017
5 pages
Comptia Security+ Examination Objectives
No ratings yet
Comptia Security+ Examination Objectives
8 pages
3-Example For Configuring VLAN Aggregation
No ratings yet
3-Example For Configuring VLAN Aggregation
2 pages
Performance Evaluation of Wired and Wireless Local Area Networks
No ratings yet
Performance Evaluation of Wired and Wireless Local Area Networks
6 pages
MTNL Switching
No ratings yet
MTNL Switching
16 pages
Sec Data Acl 15 MT Book
No ratings yet
Sec Data Acl 15 MT Book
294 pages
NE40E V800R022C00 Configuration Guide 01 Basic Configuration
No ratings yet
NE40E V800R022C00 Configuration Guide 01 Basic Configuration
425 pages
PROBABLE Question &answer: Subject-Wc Semester-6 Branch-Etc
No ratings yet
PROBABLE Question &answer: Subject-Wc Semester-6 Branch-Etc
46 pages
Implementing Cisco SD-WAN Solutions
No ratings yet
Implementing Cisco SD-WAN Solutions
2 pages
NetEngine 8000 F2A Brochure
No ratings yet
NetEngine 8000 F2A Brochure
5 pages
Tutorial Automotive Ethernet 0717 v02
No ratings yet
Tutorial Automotive Ethernet 0717 v02
47 pages
00-2 About This Document
No ratings yet
00-2 About This Document
4 pages
DG-A Series DNP3 To IEC 60870-5-104 Walkthrough
No ratings yet
DG-A Series DNP3 To IEC 60870-5-104 Walkthrough
12 pages
2MP Starlight Motorized IR Dome Camera: TC-C32MS Spec: I5/A/E/Y/M/H/2.7-13.5mm
No ratings yet
2MP Starlight Motorized IR Dome Camera: TC-C32MS Spec: I5/A/E/Y/M/H/2.7-13.5mm
4 pages
Manual 1708214
No ratings yet
Manual 1708214
116 pages
Study Guide Cisco 300-515 SPVI Implementing Cisco Service Provider VPN Services Certification Exam
From Everand
Study Guide Cisco 300-515 SPVI Implementing Cisco Service Provider VPN Services Certification Exam
Anand Vemula
No ratings yet
200-301 CCNA (Cisco Certified Network Associate) Study Guide
From Everand
200-301 CCNA (Cisco Certified Network Associate) Study Guide
Anand Vemula
No ratings yet
Registered Communications Distribution Designer Exam Pathway 2025/2026 Version: Train For Success With 600 Proven Practice Questions
From Everand
Registered Communications Distribution Designer Exam Pathway 2025/2026 Version: Train For Success With 600 Proven Practice Questions
Brittany Deaton
No ratings yet

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.